2014 Mitsubishi Outlander 36838 PDF

BK0200500US.
book 1
Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

appear.
N09200102042
These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the
Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI OUTLANDER.
instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehi-
cle.
We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered
for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly
reading this Owners Manual, you will gain an understanding of the
many features that are included in the OUTLANDER. The Owners Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
Manual contains descriptions and illustrations that will assist in the instructions are not followed.
operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor
with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
your vehicle.
Please note that this manual applies to all OUTLANDER models and You will see another important symbol:
explains all features including options. Some features explained in this NOTE Gives helpful information.
manual may not be installed on your vehicle. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read
Please leave this Owners Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. on-pavement and off-road driving guidelines in the Driving
The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con- safety and Features and controls sections.
tained here.
This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment WARNING
available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
obligation to install these on previously manufactured products. certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
2013 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Japan

BK0200500US.book 1
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
BK0200500US.book 1
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

N00100202557
Combination headlights and dimmer

Multi information display Shift paddles (if so equipped) P.5-65
switch P.5-171
Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch (if so equipped)
Turn signal lever P.5-176
switch P.5-91 P.5-123
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-178 Supplemental restraint system
Headlight leveling switch
(SRS) - airbag (for drivers
(if so equipped) P.5-176 Drivers vents
seat) P.4-33, 4-40
P.7-2
Horn switch P.5-184
Instrument cluster
P.5-120
Drivers vents
P.7-2
Forward collision mitigation

system (FCM) ON/OFF
switch (if so equipped)
P.5-109 Engine switch (if so
equipped) P.5-16
Lane departure warning (LDW) switch
(if so equipped) P.5-112
Fuse box P.9-25 Windshield wiper and washer
Drivers side power liftgate switch (if so equipped) P.5-39 switch P.5-179
Rear window wiper and
Steering wheel audio remote control switches P.7-27
washer switch P.5-183
[For DISPLAY AUDIO and MMCS, refer to the separate
owners manuals.]
Bluetooth 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Cruise control switch P.5-92 Ignition switch (if so equipped)
P.5-185 P.5-56
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - front knee airbag
lever P.5-53
(for drivers seat) P.4-40
1-1 Overview
BK0200500US.book 2
Instruments and controls
1
Audio (if so equipped) P.7-15
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System (MMCS) (if so equipped)
[For DISPLAY AUDIO and MMCS, refer to the separate owners manuals.] Air conditioner P.7-5
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - air bag
(for front passengers seat)
P.4-33, 4-40
Hazard warning flasher switch
P.5-177
Passengers vents
P.7-2
Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-184
Glove compartment P.5-215

Card holder P.5-215
Hood release lever
P.9-3
Key slot (if so equipped)
P.5-25
Fuel tank filler door release lever Power liftgate main switch (if so equipped)
P.3-3 P.5-38
12 V power outlet P.5-211
Floor console box P.5-216
Arm rest P.4-9 Heated seat switch (if so
12 V power outlet P.5-211 Cup holder P.5-218
equipped) P.4-7
USB input terminal Drive mode selector (if so equipped)
(if so equipped) P.5-207 P.5-76 Parking brake lever P.5-52
Selector lever P.5-61, 5-68
Overview 1-2
BK0200500US.book 3
Interior
1 Interior
N00100302284
Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors switch P.5-55

Sun visors P.5-210
Vanity mirror P.5-210 Lock switch P.5-49
Card holder P.5-210
Power door lock
switch P.5-34
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-23 Power window switch

Seat belts P.4-17 P.5-48
Dome light (rear) P.5-213
Inside rear-view mirror

Cargo room light P.5-54
P.5-214, 9-32
Third row seat (7 persons) Front seat P.4-4

P.4-10
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag

(for front seats) P.4-44
Second row seat P.4-8
1-3 Overview
BK0200500US.book 4
Interior
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain

Bottle holder P.5-219
airbags P.4-45
Sunroof switch (if so equipped)

P.5-50
Assist grips P.5-221

Coat hook P.5-222
Cargo area cover (if so equipped)

P.5-219
Head restraints P.4-10
Arm rest P.4-9

Cup holder P.5-218
Overview 1-4
BK0200500US.book 5
Luggage area
1 Luggage area
N00100501452
Jack P. 8-5
Tools P.8-5
Tether anchorages for child restraint system P.4-29
Luggage hooks P.5-222
Luggage floor box P.5-216
1-5 Overview
BK0200500US.book 6
Outside (Front)
Outside (Front) 1
N00100602388
Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-50

Power window P.5-48
Fuel tank filler P.3-3
Windshield wipers P.5-179
Outside rear-view mirrors P.5-55

Engine hood P.9-3 Side turn-signal lights (if so equipped)
P.5-176, 9-30, 9-36
Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-178, 9-30, 9-36

Daytime running lights (if so equipped) P. 5-171, 9-30, 9-36
Except for high intensity discharge headlights type High intensity discharge headlights type
Front turn signal lights P.5-176, 9-30, 9-36 Front turn-signal lights P.5-176, 9-30, 9-36
Front side-marker lights P.5-171, Front side-marker lights
9-30, 9-34 P.5-171, 9-30, 9-34
Headlights, low beam/Daytime Headlights, low beam
running lights P.5-171, 5-174, P.5-174, 9-30, 9-33
9-30, 9-33
Parking lights Parking lights P.5-171, 9-30, 9-35
P.5-171, 9-30, 9-35
Headlights, high beam P.5-174, 9-30, 9-34 Headlights, high beam P.5-174, 9-30, 9-34
Overview 1-6
BK0200500US.book 7
Outside (Rear)
1 Outside (Rear)
N00100602405
Antenna P.7-47 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-7, 5-28

F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter) (if so equipped)
P.5-12
Locking and unlocking P.5-32
Tire P.9-14
High-mounted stop light Tire pressure monitoring sys-
P.9-30 tem P.5-115
Tire inflation pressures P.9-18
Liftgate (if so equipped) P.5-35 Changing tires P.8-6
Power liftgate (if so equipped) Tire rotation P.9-20
P.5-37 Tire chains P.9-21
Rear window wiper Size of tires and wheels P.11-7
P.5-183
Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
P.5-118
License plate lights

P.5-171, 9-30, 9-38 Tail and stop lights
P.5-171, 9-30, 9-37
Rear side-marker lights P.5-171, 9-30
Rear turn signal lights P.5-176, 9-30, 9-37

Power liftgate close switch (if so
equipped) P.5-39 Back-up lights P.9-30, 9-38
Spare tire P.8-7
1-7 Overview
BK0200500US.book 1
If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

2
N00200702159
NOTE
For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display (Color liquid crystal display type), refer to Multi-information display on
page 5-121.
These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON or the operation mode is put in ON.
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-168
tance.
Charging system warning light
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil
level.
If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked P. 5-168
Oil pressure warning light at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
(Vehicles equipped with mono-color as possible.
liquid crystal display)
If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
released.
If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
or the brake fluid level. P. 5-167
If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
Brake warning light braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Quick index 2-1

BK0200500US.book 2

2
Park your vehicle in a safe place.
Selector lever position indicator in the Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing. P. 5-62,
instrument cluster flashes rapidly If the indicator does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubi- 5-70
(once per second) shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
(Vehicles equipped with mono-color
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
or engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency
P. 5-167
roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-
Engine malfunction indicator 4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
(SERVICE ENGINE SOON or towing company for assistance.
Check engine light)
If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the
steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors P. 5-89
Electric power steering system (EPS) dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
warning light
2-2 Quick index

BK0200500US.book 3

When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
the ordinary braking system is functioning. 2
Test the system as described on page 5-87. P. 5-87
If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
Anti-lock braking system warning you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
light facility of your choice as soon as possible.
Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
P. 4-39
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
SRS warning light
Selector lever position indicator in the Have the automatic transaxle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or P. 5-62,
instrument cluster flashes slowly a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. 5-70
(once every 2 seconds)
Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
and by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-92
as possible.
ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning and
normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.
Quick index 2-3

BK0200500US.book 4

2 Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-86
as possible.
ASC indicator When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.
Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.
If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See Tire inflation pressures on page 9-18.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving.
P. 5-114
Tire pressure monitoring system warn- If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
ing light ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
2-4 Quick index

BK0200500US.book 5
If this problem occurs...

2
N00200901880
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Unable to turn the key. Will not turn from LOCK to ACC. (Vehicles with steering lock system)
P. 5-58
(except for vehicles equipped Turn the key while turning the steering wheel in either direction.
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
Will not turn from ACC to OFF or LOCK.

Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the P (PARK) position. P. 5-57
On vehicles with steering lock system, push the key in at the ACC position and keep it
depressed until it is turned to the LOCK position.
The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.
(for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
Make sure the selector lever is in the P (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch P. 5-23
while depressing the brake pedal.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

ate. Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the instrument panel, and then start the engine or P. 5-25,
(for vehicles equipped with the change the operation mode. Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the drivers door. 5-26
F.A.S.T.-key)
Quick index 2-5

BK0200500US.book 6

Cannot shift the selector lever Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
2 from the P (PARK) position. Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
P. 5-61
The windows are fogged up.
Push the defogger switch to change to the position. P. 7-9
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P. 8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-13
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
2-6 Quick index

BK0200500US.book 7

The information screen in the
multi information display will 2
be interrupted and the engine
coolant temperature warning
display will appear. Also
will blink. (Type 1: Color liquid
crystal display type)
The high coolant temperature
warning light will illuminate.
(Type 2: Mono-color liquid
The engine is overheated.

P. 8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Steam comes out of the engine

compartment.
Quick index 2-7

BK0200500US.book 8

1. Slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving again. For an all-
2 wheel drive vehicle, set the drive mode-selector to the 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
position and then slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving. P. 8-16
sand, mud or snow
2. If there is nothing to stop your tires from slipping, rock your vehicle out of the stuck posi-
tion.
WARNING
When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

The brakes are not functioning
P. 5-83,
properly after crossing a puddle Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal.
6-5
or stream.
The automatic transaxle makes
no gear change when accelerat-
ing. The initial movement of the There may be a problem in the automatic transaxle.
vehicle is slow when the vehicle Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of P. 5-66
starts moving. your choice.
(for vehicles with automatic
transaxle)
2-8 Quick index

BK0200500US.book 9

The continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) makes no shift There may be a problem in the CVT.
2
change when accelerating. The
initial movement of the vehicle If the or warning lights on the multi-information display (Color liquid crystal display P. 5-74
is slow when the vehicle starts type) will not turn off, or if they come on frequently, please have the vehicle checked at your
moving. nearest Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
(for vehicles with CVT)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P. 8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
Quick index 2-9

BK0200500US.book 10
BK0200500US.book 1
General information
3
Fuel selection ....................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank...........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle.....................................3-5
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts .....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements................................3-7
BK0200500US.book 2
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and the oxygenates may not be identified by those
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent names. Oxygenates are required in some
N00301001922
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and areas of the country. Oxygenated fuel can be
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- used in your vehicle.
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank erly.
filler pipe specifically designed to accept only
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens-
Ethanol (Gasohol)
ing nozzle.
Octane requirement
A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-
hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
WARNING 2.4 liter engine model in your vehicle, provided the octane number
Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
is at least as high as that recommended for
sive. You could be burned, seriously
Your vehicle is designed to operate on unleaded gasoline.
injured or killed when handling it. When-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
engine and keep flames, sparks, and number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON. Methanol
smoking materials away from the vehicle.
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out-
3.0 liter engine model Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
door areas.
taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
Unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane type of alcohol could adversely affect the
CAUTION number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON vehicles performance and damage critical
Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will may be used, though it is recommended your parts of the vehicles fuel system.
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and vehicle be operated on premium grade
unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- Reformulated gasoline
line is illegal, and will void your warranty number of 91 [(MON+RON)/2], or 95 RON.
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, To obtain maximum performance, premium
and oxygen sensors. gasoline is recommended. Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning fuel referred to as Reformu-
lated Gasoline.
Oxygenated gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
Gasoline detergent additives
and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
Gasoline sold at some service stations con- emissions and improve air quality.
In the United States, fuel suppliers are
tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although
required by law to add detergents to their gas-
3-2 General information
BK0200500US.book 3
Filling the fuel tank

Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup- cator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or
ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop- Check engine light) to come on. Illumina-
NOTE
Repeatedly driving short distances at low
erly blended reformulated gasoline has no tion of this indicator while using high-sulfur
speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel
adverse effect on vehicle performance or the gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehi-
system and engine, resulting in hard starting
durability of the engine and the fuel system. cles emission-control system is malfunction- and poor acceleration. If these problems 3
ing. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors occur, you are advised to add a detergent
dealer may suggest using a different, lower-
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl additive to the gasoline when you refuel the
sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to deter- vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-
manganese tricarbonyl) mine if the problem is fuel-related. its, thereby returning the engine to a normal
condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an
NOTE unsuitable additive could make an engine
additive that is blended into some gasolines Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems malfunction. For details, please contact the
to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi such as hard starting, stalling during idling, nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Motors Corporation recommends using gaso- abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-
lines without MMT. tion. If you experience any of these prob-
Use of gasolines blended with MMT may lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. Filling the fuel tank
adversely affect performance, and cause the If the engine malfunction indicator (SER- N00301101936
malfunction indicator on your instrument VICE ENGINE SOON or Check engine
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an light) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as WARNING
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a soon as possible by the nearest authorized Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility sive. You could be burned, seriously
of your choice. injured or killed when handling it. When
refueling your vehicle, always turn the
Sulfur in gasoline engine off and keep away from flames,
sparks, and smoking materials. Always
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
areas.
isfy Californias low-emission regulations
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline. Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
be sure to get rid of your bodys static
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other
electricity by touching a metal part of the
than California is allowed to have a higher car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could your body could create a spark that
adversely affect the vehicles catalytic con- ignites fuel vapor.
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
General information 3-3
BK0200500US.book 4
Filling the fuel tank

2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
WARNING driver side of your vehicle.
WARNING
Perform the whole refueling process Since the fuel system may be under pres-
The fuel tank filler door can be opened
(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov- sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank
ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself; do not slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
3 let any other person near the fuel tank filler door release lever located at the left uum that might have built up in the fuel
filler. If you allowed a person to help you side of the drivers seat. tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you
and that person was carrying static elec- hear a hissing sound, wait until the sound
tricity, fuel vapor could be ignited. stops before removing the cap. Otherwise,
Do not move away from the fuel tank filler fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.
until refueling is finished. If you moved
away and did something else (for example,
sitting on a seat) part-way through the NOTE
refueling process, you could pick up a While filling with fuel, hang the fuel cap on
fresh charge of static electricity. the hook (A) located on the inside surface of
Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel the fuel tank filler door.
contains toxic substances.
Keep the doors and windows closed while
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
fuel vapor could get into the cabin. 3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-
clockwise.
Fuel tank capacity
All-wheel drive vehicles: 15.8 gal (60 L)

Front-wheel drive vehicles: 16.6 gal (63 L)
Refueling
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
1- Remove
2- Close
BK0200500US.book 5
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

4. Fueling correctly depends mainly on cor- ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-
rect handling of the fuel filler nozzle. Do
CAUTION ble state and/or federal regulations.
If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap,
not tilt the nozzle. Insert the nozzle in the
use only the cap specified for your model DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-
fuel tank filler port as far as it goes.
vehicle. LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA- 3
CAUTION TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR
VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED UNDER
Your vehicle can only be operated using NOTE WARRANTY.
unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata- If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
lytic converter damage will result if leaded driving, the engine malfunction indicator
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and Examples of modifications to your vehicle
(SERVICE ENGINE SOON or Check
consequently, this must never be attempted. that can cause damage or performance prob-
engine light) may come on when the
onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs
lems include the following:
5. When the nozzle stops automatically, do a self check.
Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
not add more fuel. Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
you hear at least 3 clicks. parts
The indicator will go off after several driving Failure to use required fuel and fluids
CAUTION cycles. If the indicator does not go off, con- Failure to use proper size tires and wheels
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,
top-off the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as emission, suspension, engine, drive train
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicles paint-
soon as possible. or electrical wiring systems
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it
off with a soft cloth. Modification of any onboard com-
puter/control module, including repro-
6. To re-install, turn the fuel tank filler pipe
Modifications to and racing gramming, or replacing/adding chips to
any onboard computer/control module
cap slowly clockwise until you hear click- of your vehicle
ing sounds, then gently push the fuel tank N00301600152
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-
filler door closed. This vehicle should not be modified with ual for further details regarding warranty cov-
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Mit- erage.
WARNING subishi Motors designs and manufactures
Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
securely closed. If the fuel cap were loose, safety and durability. Modifications using
fuel could leak, resulting in a fire. non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-

BK0200500US.book 6
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

accessory which may involve modification of
Installation of accessories WARNING the electrical or fuel systems.
N00301701219 While driving, do not use a cellular phone
in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-
CAUTION thing, including cellular phone usage, that CAUTION
3 Before any electrical or electronic accesso- distracts you from the safe operation of Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
ries are installed, consult an authorized Mit- your vehicle increases your risk of an acci- Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
subishi Motors dealer. dent. sory fitment or modification.
Refer to and follow all state and local laws If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
in your area regarding cellular phone improper installation methods are used (pro-
The installation of accessories, optional usage while driving. tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
parts, etc., should only be performed devices may be adversely affected, resulting
within the limits prescribed by law, and in in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
accordance with the guidelines and warn-
Important point!
ings contained within the documents
accompanying this vehicle.
Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces- Due to the large number of accessory and Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
sories should be fitted to your vehicle. replacement parts provided by different man- parts
Improper installation of electrical parts ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos- N00301400219
could cause a fire. Refer to the Modifica- sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel dealer to check whether the attachment or
designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
systems section within this owners man- installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-
dards of performance, and are recommended
ual. ine parts affects the driving safety of your
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
Using a cellular phone or radio set inside Mitsubishi-vehicle.
able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
the vehicle without an external antenna a wide variety of accessories to personalize
may cause electrical system interference, Modification/alterations to the your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- electrical or fuel systems vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
tion. authorized accessories to choose from to tai-
N00301800141
Tires and wheels which do not meet spec- lor your new vehicle to your own personal
ifications must not be used. Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealers
Refer to the Specifications section for vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
Parts Manager has information on various
information regarding wheel and tire important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
audio systems, protection items, as well as
sizes. Motors dealer before installation of any
interior and exterior accessories available for
your specific model.
BK0200500US.book 7
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
N00300100017
Certain components of this vehicle, such as 3

airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
materials.
Special handling may apply. For additional
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
waste/perchlorate.

BK0200500US.book 8
BK0200500US.book 1
Seat and restraint systems
Seats..................................................................................................4-2 4
Seat arrangement ..............................................................................4-3
Seats and restraint systems ...............................................................4-4
Front seats.........................................................................................4-4
Second row seats...............................................................................4-8
Third row seat (Seating 7 passengers) ............................................4-10
Head restraints ................................................................................4-10
Making a cargo area........................................................................4-12
Making a flat seat............................................................................4-16
Seat belts.........................................................................................4-17
Seat belt use during pregnancy .......................................................4-24
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ...........................4-24
Child restraint systems....................................................................4-25
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts .......................................4-33
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag ..............................4-33
BK0200500US.book 2
Seats
Seats
N00408401519
To adjust the seatback Page 4-8

1 - Front seat Arm rest Page 4-9
To adjust the seat forward or back- Accessing the third row seat (Seating 7
wardPage 4-5 passengers) Page 4-9
To adjust the seat height (Drivers seat 3 - Third row seat (Seating 7
only) Page 4-6 passengers)
Heated seat (if so equipped) Page 4-7
2 - Second row seats
To adjust the seat forward or backward
(vehicles with second row seat slide func-
tion) Page 4-8
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

BK0200500US.book 3
Seat arrangement
Seat arrangement
N00401701122
You may arrange your seats in the following positions.
Seating 5 passengers Seating 7 passengers

4
Ordinary use
Flat seatPage 4-16
Folding the second row

seats
Page 4-12
Making a cargo
area
Folding the third row

seatsPage 4-15
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

BK0200500US.book 4
Seats and restraint systems
Seats and restraint systems Front seats WARNING

N00401601219 N00401801413 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
injury or death during deployment of the
Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety Position the drivers seat as far back as possi-
drivers airbag, always properly wear the
features that help protect you and your pas- ble while maintaining a position that still seat belt and adjust the drivers seat as far
sengers in an accident. enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily back as possible while maintaining a posi-
4 Seat belts are the most important safety control the steering wheel and safely operate tion that still enables you to fully apply the
device. When worn properly, seat belts can the vehicle. pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
reduce the chance of serious injury or death and safely operate the vehicle.
in various types of crashes. For added protec- To reduce the risk to the front passenger
Manual seat adjustment Power seat adjustment
tion during a severe frontal collision, your of serious injury or death during deploy-
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System ment of the passengers airbag, always
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen- properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
gers. The seats, head restraints, and door front passengers seat as far back as possi-
ble.
locks also are safety equipment, which must
Always place children 12 years old and
be used correctly.
under in the rear seat and use appropriate
child restraint systems.
Always check the following before you drive:
That everyone in your vehicle is properly

wearing their seat belt. CAUTION
That infants and small children are prop- WARNING Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
erly secured in an appropriate child Do not attempt to adjust the seat while adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
restraint system in the rear seat. driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
That all doors are fully closed and locked. trol and result in an accident. Do not place a cushion or the like between
After adjusting the seat, make sure that it your back and the seatback while driving.
That seatbacks are upright, with head
is securely locked into position. The effectiveness of the head restraints will
restraints properly adjusted. be reduced in the event of an accident.
When sliding the seats, be careful not to
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or catch your hand or leg.
death in all motor vehicle accidents. How- When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury or pay careful attention to the second row seat
death, by following the instructions in this passengers.
manual.

BK0200500US.book 5
Front seats
To adjust the seat forward or Power seat adjustment To adjust the seatbacks
backward N00402001379
N00401901326 Operate the switch forward or backward to

move the seat to the desired position. Release Manual seat adjustment
Manual seat adjustment the switch to lock the seat in place.
To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, 4
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then
seat forward or backward to the desired posi- lean backward to a comfortable position and
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the release the lever. The seatback will lock in
seat in place. place.
1- Forward (toward the front of the vehicle)

2- Backward (toward the rear of the vehi-
cle)
NOTE
To prevent the battery from completely dis-
WARNING charging, operate the power seat with the
CAUTION
To make sure that the seat is securely engine running. The reclining mechanism used in the seat-
locked, try to move it forward or back- back is spring loaded, and will cause the
ward without using the adjusting lever. seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
back or hold the seatback with your hand to
control its return motion.

BK0200500US.book 6
Front seats
Power seat adjustment WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or
Operate the switch in the direction of the death in the event of an accident or sud-
arrows to adjust the seatback. den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 Seat belt performance during an accident
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against 1- Raise
the body during an accident, there is 2- Lower
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
Power seat adjustment
1- Move forward
2- Move backward
To adjust the seat height Operate the switch in the direction of the
(Drivers seat only) arrows to raise or lower the seat.
N00402101253
NOTE NOTE
To prevent the battery from completely dis- Manual seat adjustment To prevent the battery from completely dis-
charging, operate the power seat with the charging, operate the power seat with the
engine running. engine running.
Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower
the seat.

BK0200500US.book 7
Front seats
operation mode is in ON. The indicator light
(A) will illuminate while the heater is on.
1- Raise or lower the front end of the seat 3- Raise or lower the entire seat
Heated seat (if so equipped) 1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating)
N00435601391
2 - Heater off
The heated seats can be operated by pushing 3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat warm)
the switch when the ignition switch or the
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel tempera-
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use,
fatigue or other physical conditions or
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns
2- Raise or lower the back end of the seat when using the heated seat even at low
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care
when using the heated seat.

BK0200500US.book 8
Second row seats

to an appropriate height where they lock in
CAUTION position. Refer to Head restraints on page
WARNING
Switch off the heated seats when not in use. To make sure that the seat is securely
4-10.
Operate the heaters at the HI position for locked, try to move it forward or back-
quick heating. After the seat has become ward without using the adjusting lever.
warm, set the heater switch to the LO posi- To adjust the seat forward or
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
4 seat temperature may be felt while using the
backward (vehicles with sec-
CAUTION
heated seats. This is caused by the operation ond row seat slide function) When sliding (vehicles with second row seat
of the heaters internal thermostat and does
slide function) or reclining the seat rearward,
not indicate a malfunction.
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the pay careful attention to the third row seat
Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
seat forward or backward to the desired posi- passengers.
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
into the seat.
seat in place.
Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using To adjust the seatbacks
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
ment to overheat. Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback by
When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, hand to the desired position, and release the
kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic lever. The seatback will lock in place.
solvents; doing so can cause damage not
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
heater.
If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-
tioning during use.
NOTE
You can adjust the seat forward or backward
Second row seats on either side separately.
N00402501231
When sitting in the middle seating position of

the second row seat, adjust the head restraints

BK0200500US.book 9
Second row seats

To return the seat, slide the entire seat back-
NOTE Arm rest ward to the desired position and then raise the
You can adjust the seatback forward or back- N00403001318
seatback until it locks securely.
ward on either side separately. To use the armrest, tilt the arm rest down for
After returning the seat, gently try to move it
use as shown.
forward and backward to check that it is
The arm rest includes a cup holder.
securely retained and adjust the seatback to
WARNING the normal seating position. 4
death in the event of an accident or sud-
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
Seat belt performance during an accident
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
NOTE
Never sit on an arm rest.
When a person is sitting in the middle
Doing so could damage the arm rest.
WARNING
seating position of the second row seats, To make sure that the seat is securely
the two sides of the second seats must have locked, try to move it forward or back-
the same forward/backward position ward without using the lever. To reduce
(vehicles with second row seat slide func- Accessing the third row seat the risk of serious injury or death in the
tion) and the same seatback angle.
(Walk-in function, Seating 7 event of an accident or sudden stop, all
seatbacks should be kept in the upright
passengers) position while the vehicle is in motion.
N00400101031
For third row seat passenger entry or exit, the

second row seats can be moved forward.
Pull up the lever (A) and tilt the seatback for-
ward. Then slide the entire seat forward.

BK0200500US.book 10
Third row seat (Seating 7 passengers)
Third row seat (Seating 7 Head restraints WARNING

passengers) N00404301594 Driving without the head restraints in
place can cause you and your passengers
N00419501073 Head restraints can reduce the risk of a whip-
serious injury or death in an accident. To
lash injury if your vehicle is hit from the rear. reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
WARNING The head restraints are equipped in the illus- always make sure the head restraints are
4 The third row seats are intended for use trated position. installed and properly positioned when
by no more than two belted occupants, To maximize the effectiveness of the head the seat is occupied.
each of which does not exceed 160 cm (63 restraints, adjust the seatback to the upright In order to minimize the risk of a neck
inches) in height. position, and the head restraint to the proper injury due to a rear impact, the seatback
Exceeding these limitations can result in
position. Sit back against the seatback with must be adjusted to the upright position
an increased risk of personal injury or and the head restraint must be adjusted to
your head close to the head restraint.
death in the event of an accident. the proper position before vehicle opera-
tion. The driver should never adjust the
seat while the vehicle is in motion.
To adjust the seatback Never place a cushion or similar device on
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
Pull up the strap and adjust the seatback by
the distance between your head and the
hand to the desired position, and release the restraint.
strap.
*: Seating 7 passengers

BK0200500US.book 11
Head restraints
WARNING Adjustment of the head To remove

When a person sits in the second center restraint height (front seats)
seating position, pull up the head restraint Press the lock knob (A) in the direction
to a height at which it locks in position. Be shown by the arrows. Then pull the head
sure to make this adjustment before start- To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, restraint up and out of the seatback.
ing to drive. Serious injuries could other- adjust the head restraint height so that the
wise be suffered in the result of an impact. center of the restraint is at your ear level 4
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their ear level when seated
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
position.
To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.

To lower the restraint, push down on it
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
direction shown by the arrow.
After adjusting the height, push down on
NOTE the restraint to make sure it is locked in
The head restraint height in the second row
position. WARNING
outboard seats and the third row seats cannot To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
be adjusted. the event of an accident, the head
restraints must be properly installed and
positioned to proper height before vehicle
operation.
To install
First check that the head restraint is facing in

the right direction as shown in the previous
illustration, and then insert it into the seat-
back. Push the head restraint down while

BK0200500US.book 12
Making a cargo area

pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
locks into place.
WARNING
When driving the vehicle, do not allow
anyone to sit on the third row seat if the
CAUTION second row seat is in the folded position.
Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
4 as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
head restraint up to make sure that it is CAUTION
locked in place and will not come out of the In the cargo area, do not load the luggage
seatback. higher than the top of the seats and make
sure that the luggage is firmly secured.
Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-
ing the passenger compartment during sud-
den braking could result in a serious accident
Making a cargo area and/or injury.
N00405501115 Seats should always be operated by an adult.
Seat adjustments by a child could lead to an
WARNING unexpected accident.
Never adjust the seats to make a cargo When adjusting the seats, be careful not to
area when the vehicle is in motion or on a catch your hand or leg. Personal injury could
slope. The seats could move more than result.
necessary or move suddenly and causing a
serious accident and/or injury.
CAUTION When returning a seat back to its seating NOTE
The shape and size of the head restraint dif- position after folding down, make sure When the seatback of a front seat is reclined,
fers according to the seat. Always use the that the seat is firmly secured and seat belt return it to the upright position before driv-
correct head restraint provided for the seat buckles are in proper position. If the seat ing.
and do not install the head restraint in the is not secured, it could move causing a
wrong direction. serious accident.
Do not allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area while the vehicle is in motion. People Folding the second row seats
who are not properly seated and N00405701120
restrained can be seriously injured or The second row seat can be folded to create
killed in an accident. an additional cargo area.

BK0200500US.book 13
Making a cargo area

4. Lift the front end of the seat cushion. 6. Fold forward the seat belt buckle.
NOTE
You can separately fold the right and left side
of the second row seat.
To fold the second row seat 4

1. Remove the head restraints from the sec-
ond row outside seating position.
Lower the head restraint for second row
middle seating position to its lowest posi-
tion.
Refer to Head restraints on page 4-10. 5. Flip the seat cushion forward. On vehicles
with the third row seats, move the lever
CAUTION
2. When the left side second row seat is
Do not allow any person to get on the plastic
folded, store the seat belt for the middle (A) to the luggage area mode position.
cover (B), and do not place luggage on it.
seating position of the second row seat. Doing so could damage the plastic cover.
Refer to Detachable center seat belt for
second row on page 4-20.
7. Pull up the lever (C), then fold the seat-
3. On vehicles with the second row seat slide
back forward.
function, move the second row seat fully
backward.
Refer to To adjust the seat forward or
backward on page 4-8.
NOTE
If you do not move the second row seat fully
backward, you may not be able to fold the
second row seat.

BK0200500US.book 14
Making a cargo area

4. While lifting the seat belt buckle (A), gen-
CAUTION To return
tly lower the seat cushion. Make sure that
Do not allow any person to sit on the flipped
1. Remove the head restraint from the hook. there is a hook (B) at the position shown
seat cushion, and do not place luggage on it.
2. Raise the seatback until it locks securely in the illustration.
The seats mounting fittings could bend
under the weight, making it impossible for into place.
the seat cushion to be secured when it returns 3. On vehicles with the third row seats,
4 to the original position. make sure that the lever is in the walk-in
mode position.
Otherwise, move the lever to the walk-in
NOTE mode position.
When folding the second row seatback for-
ward once, the seat will automatically switch
from the luggage area mode to the walk-in
mode.
8. Put the head restraint on the hook (D)

with their front faces facing upward until
it locks into place.
NOTE
A rubber strap (C) is attached to the seat belt
buckle for the left outboard seating position.
This helps raise the seat belt buckle while the
seat cushion returns to the original position.

BK0200500US.book 15
Making a cargo area

5. Push down the seat cushion until it locks Make sure that the seat belt is not 2. Pull up the strap (A), then fold the seat-
into place. twisted. back forward.
For details, refer to Datachable center
seat belt for second row on 4-20.
6. Make sure that all seat belt buckles are 3. Stow the removed head restraints in the
properly positioned on the seat cushion. luggage floor box with their front faces
Install the head restraints and make sure facing downward.
that they are securely locked.
Folding the third row seats
7. If the center seat belt is stored;
Pull out the detachable anchor plate (D) (Seating 7 passengers)
from the seatback. N00409800021
Pull the small latch plate (E) slowly and

insert it into the detachable anchor plate To fold
until a click is heard.
1. Remove the head restraints from the third
row seats. (Refer to Head restraints on
page 4-10.)

BK0200500US.book 16
Making a flat seat

1. Remove the head restraints from the front
To return WARNING seats and raise the arm rest on the second
Never drive with passengers or cargo on
1. Pull the strap (A), then raise the seatback row seats.
the flat seat. This is extremely dangerous
until it locks securely into place. For vehicles with a cargo area cover,
and can cause severe or fatal injury or
Push lightly on the seatback to confirm death in an accident or if heavy braking is remove the cover.
that it has actually been secured. required. (Refer to Head restraints on page 4-10,
4 Arm rest on page 4-9 and Cargo area
cover on page 5-219.)
CAUTION
Adjust the seats only when the vehicle is
stopped in a safe place.
Seat should be adjusted only by adults to
avoid accidents.
When sliding the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or leg.
Do not walk around on top of the seats after
they have been laid flat because the footing
is uneven. It is safest to move about on your
2. Install the head restraints. hands and knees.
To ensure the seats are locked securely,
Making a flat seat attempt to move them back and forth.
Do not jump on or drop heavy objects on the
N00404801166
seatbacks.
The entire interior of the vehicle may be used To raise the seatback of the front seat, firmly
for sleeping accommodations by removing place your hand on the seatback, pull the
the head restraints and fully reclining all the seatback lock knob up, and raise the seatback
seats when the vehicle is stopped. slowly. (Refer to To adjust the seatback on
page 4-5.) Do not let children adjust the seat-
back.

BK0200500US.book 17
Seat belts
2. Slide the second row seats back as far as 4. Recline the seatbacks of the second row
possible (vehicles with second row seat seats. Seat belts
slide function). (Refer to To adjust the seatback on page N00406000455
(Refer to To adjust the seat forward or 4-8.) Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help
backward on page 4-8.) reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-
senger in the event of an accident. Always
use the provided seat belts. 4
Carefully review the following information
for proper seat belt usage.
WARNING
To help reduce the risk of injury or death
in an accident, seat belts and child
restraint systems must always be used.
Refer to Child restraint systems on page
4-25 for additional information.
5. The flat seat configuration is now com-
Never use one seat belt for more than one
3. Slide the front seats fully forward, then plete.
person.
recline their seatbacks backward to To return the seats to the normal position,
Never carry more people in your vehicle
achieve a flat surface. reverse the above procedure. than there are seat belts.
(Refer to To adjust the seat forward or Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
backward on page 4-5 and To adjust the Always place the shoulder belt over your
seatback on page 4-5.) shoulder and across your chest. Never put
it behind you or under your arm.
Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
across your hips, not around your waist.
Never modify or alter the seat belts in
your vehicle.

BK0200500US.book 18
Seat belts
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
WARNING WARNING retractor in the event of a sudden change in
To reduce the risk to the driver of serious Children 12 years old and under should
the vehicles motion.
injury or death during deployment of the always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
drivers airbag, always properly wear the erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
seat belt and adjust the drivers seat as far serious injury or death in an accident, NOTE
back as possible while maintaining a posi- especially due to a deploying front passen-
4 tion that still enables you to fully apply the ger airbag. Refer to Child restraint sys-
For instructions on installing a child restraint
system using a seat belt, refer to Installing a
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, tems on page 4-25 for additional child restraint system using the seat belt on
and safely operate the vehicle. information. page 4-30.
To reduce the risk to a front seat passen- Any child who is too small to properly
ger of serious injury or death from a wear a seat belt must be properly
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger restrained in an appropriate child
always wears the seat belt properly, restraint system.
remains seated all the way back and Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
upright in their seat, and moves the seat as child safety seat and positioned in the rear
far back as possible. Refer to Supplemen- seat.
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag on In the event of an accident, all seat belt
page 4-33 for additional information. assemblies, including retractors and
Never hold an infant or child in your arms attachment hardware, should be inspected
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
even when you are wearing your seat belt. dealer to determine whether replacement
Never place any part of the seat belt you is necessary.
are wearing around an infant or child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions
creates a risk of serious injury or death to Seat belt instructions
your child in the event of an accident or N00406201467
sudden stop. All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
an emergency locking retractor.
This system is designed to provide both com-

fort and safety. It permits full extension and
automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device

BK0200500US.book 19
Seat belts
1. Occupants should always sit back in their 3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
seats with their backs against the upright
WARNING the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
seatback. To reduce the risk of serious the buckle until you hear a click. Pull
death in the event of an accident or sud-
injury or death during deployment of the up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
airbag, adjust the drivers seat as far back the upright position while the vehicle is in locked securely in the buckle.
as possible while maintaining a position motion.
that still enables you to fully apply the 4
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, Seat belt performance during an accident
and safely operate the vehicle. The front can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
passenger seat should also be moved as are reclined. The more a seatback is
far back as possible. Refer to Supple- reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
seat belt is not properly positioned against
on page 4-33. Also refer to To adjust the the body during an accident, there is
seat forward or backward on page 4-5. increased risk you will slide under the belt
2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the NOTE

webbing so that it easily pulls across your If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
body. out, pull it once with force and let it retract
all the way.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

BK0200500US.book 20
Seat belts
4. The lap part of the belt must always be
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
WARNING
Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to
is worn as low as possible across the hips,
take up any slack in the lap belt.
not around the waist. Failure to follow this
instruction will increase the risk of serious
injury or death in the event of an accident.
4 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
adversely affect seat belt performance.
5. To release the belt, press the button on the

buckle and allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it
Never detach the center seat belt except
out and check for kinks or twists in the
when the left side seat back in the second
webbing. Then make sure it remains row is folded. Using the center seat belt
NOTE untwisted as it retracts. with the detachable anchor unlatched
With the exception of the seat belt for the increases the risk of serious injury or
death in an accident. Make sure the small
driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi- Detachable center seat belt for latch plate (A) is properly latched to the
tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the
second row detachable anchor before the center seat
seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac- N00409900022 belt is used.
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint The center seat belt for the second row can be
installation function (see page 4-30). detached to fold the left side second row seat.
When the ALR function has been activated, This seat belt must be worn correctly as illus- To attach
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens, trated.
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat 1. Pull out the detachable anchor plate (C)
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4. from the storage pocket on seat back
cushion.

BK0200500US.book 21
Seat belts
2. Pull the small latch plate (A) slowly and 3. After the seat belt has retracted com-
To detach
insert it into the detachable anchor plate pletely, insert the latch plate (B) into the
until a click is heard. Make sure that the 1. While holding the seat belt, insert a metal upper slit (F), and then insert the small
seat belt is not twisted. plate, such the latch plate of the seat belt latch plate (A) into the lower slit (G).
or a key, into the slit (E) on the detachable
NOTE anchor (C) and release the center seat belt
If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled from the detachable anchor. 4
out, pull it once with force and let it retract
all the way.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
The seat belt can be buckled up by inserting
the latch plate (B) into the buckle (D) like
other seat belts.
If the seat belt switch to the ALR child
restraint installation function and cannot be
pulled out, detach the latch plate (B) and
move the second row seat fully backward. 4. Store the detachable anchor in the storage
Refer to Installing a child restraint system pocket on the seatback.
using the seat belt on page 4-30.
2. Retract the seat belt slowly by holding the
seat belt.
NOTE
If the seat belt is not held, the seat belt will
rapidly retract. This could cause damage to
the interior trim.

BK0200500US.book 22
Seat belts
warning light will come on and a tone will
Drivers seat belt sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind
Front passenger seat belt warn-
reminder/warning light and you to fasten your seat belt. ing light
display If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still N00418301247
N00418401394 unfastened, the warning light will blink and The front passenger seat belt warning light is
the tone will sound intermittently until the located in the instrument panel.
4 Type 1 seat belt is fastened. At the same time, FAS-
TEN SEAT BELT is displayed on the infor-
mation screen in the multi information
display (Type 1 only).
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident, always fas-
ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she
is also seated and fastening a seat belt.
Type 2
Children should additionally be restrained
in a secure child restraint system. When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position or the operation mode is put in
ON, this indicator normally comes on and
NOTE goes off a few seconds later.
If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas- The light comes on when a person sits on the
tened, the warning light and the tone will front passenger seat but does not fasten the
issue further warnings each time the vehicle seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
starts moving from a stop.
sequently fastened.
A tone and warning light are used to remind

the driver to fasten the seat belt.
If the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position or the operation mode is put in ON
without the drivers seat belt being fastened, a
BK0200500US.book 23
Seat belts
WARNING WARNING Storing the second row (out-

When a child booster seat is used on the Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so board seating positions) and
front passenger seat, the front passenger that the shoulder belt is positioned across
seat belt warning light will not come on, if the center of your shoulder without touch- third row seat belts
the seat belt is not fastened when the ing your neck. The shoulder belt should N00406501112
booster seat is used. Confirm that the not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail- When seat belts for the second row outboard
child is wearing the seat belt properly. ure to follow this instruction can adversely seating position and for the third row are not 4
Do not install any accessory or sticker that affect seat belt performance and increase used, the seat belts can be stored.
makes the light difficult to see. the risk of serious injury or death in the
event of an accident.
Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
the vehicle is not in motion.
Adjustable seat belt shoulder
Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
anchor (front seats) position after adjusting it.
N00406301354
The seat belt shoulder anchor height can be

adjusted. To move the anchor down, press the
lock knob (A) and slide the anchor down to
the desired position. To move the anchor up,
slide the anchor up to the desired position.
Put the seat belt webbing in the back slot (A)
on the clip and insert the metal plate of the
Anchor down Anchor up

BK0200500US.book 24
Seat belt use during pregnancy

latch plate into the front slot (B) as shown in
the illustration.
WARNING Seat belt pre-tensioner and
The extender should only be used if the
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
force limiter systems
N00417701680
who can use the standard seat belt should
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an The drivers and front passengers seats each
extender can adversely affect seat belt have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
4 performance in an accident. system.
When not required, the extender must be
removed and stowed.
Pre-tensioner system
Seat belt use during preg- The driver and front passenger seat belts are
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
nancy tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side
N00406800134
collision or when a rollover or overturning of
Seat belt extender Seat belts work for everyone, including preg- the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys-
N00406701202 nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant tem operates simultaneously with the deploy-
If your seat belt is not long enough, even women are more likely to be seriously injured ment of the front airbags, side airbags or
when fully extended, a seat belt extender or killed in an accident if they do not wear curtain airbags.
must be obtained. The extender may be used seat belts. The seat belt pre-tensioners are located in the
for either of the front seats. drivers and front passengers seat belt retrac-
WARNING tors (A) and in the front passenger seats final
To reduce the risk of serious injury or anchor (B). When activated, the pre-tension-
death to pregnant women and unborn ers quickly draw back seat belt webbing and
children in an accident, pregnant women increase seat belt performance.
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.

BK0200500US.book 25
Child restraint systems

The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever
WARNING
The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
designed to work only once. After the seat
under the following conditions. These include
belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
all of the items listed above and all related they will not work again. They must
wiring. promptly be replaced and the entire seat
[Except for vehicles equipped with the belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an 4
F.A.S.T.-key] authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] SRS warning
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes The operation mode is in ON. N00408701147
the following components: This warning light tells you if there is a prob-
The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate
under the same conditions as the airbag con- lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat
trol unit. belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to SRS
warning light/display on page 4-39.
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,
some smoke is released and a loud noise will
Force limiter system
be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care
N00408900126
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
as it may cause some temporary irritation to In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
people with respiratory problems. limiter system will help reduce the force
Even in the event of a severe impact, the pre- applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
tensioners will not operate if the seat belts are
1- SRS warning light not fastened. The seat belt pre-tensioners may Child restraint systems
2- Front impact sensors not activate in certain collisions, even though N00407101711
3- Seat belt pre-tensioner the vehicle may appear to be severely dam-
When transporting infants or small children
4- Airbag control unit aged. Such non-activation does not mean that
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
5- Side impact sensors something is wrong with the seat belt pre-ten-
system must always be used. This is required
6- Seat belt buckle switches sioner system, but rather that the collision
by law in the U.S. and Canada.
forces were not severe enough to activate the
system.

BK0200500US.book 26

Child restraint systems specifically designed Children older than 1 year of age and who
for infants and small children are offered by weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who
WARNING
Any child who is too large to use a child
several manufacturers. Choose only a child are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must
restraint system should ride in the rear
restraint system with a label certifying that it be in a forward-facing restraint used only
seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety in the rear seat. properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle Children who weigh more than 40 pounds tioned over the shoulder and across the
4 Restraint Systems and Booster Cushions (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches chest, not across their neck, and with the
Safety Regulations (RSSR). Look for the (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should lap belt positioned low on the childs hips,
manufacturers statement of compliance on use a suitable child seat or a booster seat not across their stomach. If necessary, a
the box and child restraint system itself. (including a booster cushion) in the rear booster seat (including a booster cushion)
seat until the vehicles lap-and-shoulder should be used to help achieve a proper
The child restraint system should be appropri- belt fits them properly. seat belt fit. Follow the booster seat
ate for your childs weight and height, and (including a booster cushion) manufac-
should properly fit your vehicles seat. turers instructions. Only use a booster
For detailed information, refer to the instruc- WARNING seat (including a booster cushion) that is
All children must be seated in the rear certified as complying with Federal Motor
tion manual accompanying the child restraint
seat, and properly restrained. Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle
system. Restraint Systems and Booster Cushions
Accident statistics show that children of
all sizes and ages are safer when properly Safety Regulations.
Guidelines for child restraint restrained in the rear seat, rather than in
the front seat.
system selection
Be sure to select a child restraint system
that is appropriate not only for the childs
All children should be properly restrained in size and age but also for your vehicle.
a restraint device that offers the maximum Some child restraint systems may not fit
protection for their size and age. your vehicle properly.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial
requirements for child size and age that may
vary from the recommendations listed below.
Children less than 1 year old and children

less than 20 pounds (9 kg) MUST ride in a
rear-facing child safety seat that MUST
ONLY be used in the second row seat.

BK0200500US.book 27
WARNING WARNING WARNING

Never hold an infant or child in your arms Your vehicle is also equipped with a front FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, passenger airbag. SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never put REAR-FACING CHILD whenever possible. If one must be used in
Never place any part of the seat belt you RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT the front passenger seat, move the seat to
are wearing around an infant or child. RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- the most rearward position and make sure
Failure to follow these simple instructions senger seat. This places the infant too the child stays in the child restraint sys- 4
creates a risk of serious injury or death to close to the passenger airbag. During tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
your child in the event of an accident or deployment of that airbag, the infant can these instructions could result in serious
sudden stop. be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing injury or death to the child.
child restraint systems or infant restraint
systems must only be used in the rear seat.
Airbag
WARNING
It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infants
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event
of an accident.

BK0200500US.book 28
WARNING NOTE Installing a child restraint sys-

When installing a child restraint system, Before purchasing a child restraint system, tem using the LATCH (Lower
follow the instructions provided by the try installing it in the rear seat to ensure
manufacturer and follow the directions in proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt Anchors and Tethers for chil-
this manual. Failure to do so can result in buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it dren) system
serious injury or death to your child in an may be difficult to securely install some
4 accident or sudden stop. manufacturers child restraint systems.
N00418801167
After installation, push and pull the child If the child restraint system can be pulled
forward or to either side easily on the seat
Lower anchor locations
restraint system back and forth, and side
to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
the child restraint system is not installed choose another manufacturers child restraint The outboard seating positions in the second
securely, it may cause injury to the child system. row seat of your vehicle are equipped with
or other occupants in the event of an acci- Depending on the seating position in the lower anchors for attaching child restraint
dent or sudden stop. vehicle and the child restraint system that systems compatible with the LATCH system.
When not in use, keep your child restraint you have, the child restraint system can be
system secured with the seat belt, or attached using one of the following 2 meth-
remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre- ods:
vent it from being thrown around inside Attach to the lower anchorage in the second
the vehicle during an accident. row seat ONLY if the child restraint system
is compatible with the LATCH system (See
page 4-28).
Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-30).
NOTE
The symbols on the seatback show the loca-
tion of the lower anchor points.

BK0200500US.book 29

3. For easier access, the seatback may be
Tether anchor locations Examples of child restraint sys-
recline rearward.
N00418901201 tems compatible with the LATCH Push the anchor connectors (D) on the
Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the system
backside of the second row seats. These are child restraint system into the lower
for securing a child restraint system tether
N00419000198 anchors (C) in accordance with the
instructions provided by the child restraint
strap to each of the 3 rear seating positions in
your vehicle. systems manufacturer. 4
After it is security fastened, adjust the
seatback to 4 steps forward from most
reclined position.
Remember, the lower anchors (C) pro-
vided with your vehicle are designed to
secure suitable child restraint systems
compatible with the LATCH system in the
outboard positions of the second row seats
A- Rear-facing child restraint system only. The anchor connectors are NOT
B- Front-facing child restraint system designed to secure a suitable child
C- Child restraint system lower anchor restraint system in the middle seating
connectors position of the second row seat.
D- Tether strap
(These are only examples.)
Using the LATCH system

N00419101242
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,

remove the head restraint from the loca-
tion where you wish to install the child
restraint system.
2. Open the gap a little between the seat A- Vehicle seat cushion
cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with B- Vehicle seatback
your hand to locate the lower anchors (C). C- Lower anchor

BK0200500US.book 30

D- Connector 4. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child
restraint system to the tether anchor bar
Installing a child restraint sys-
NOTE (F) and tighten the tether strap so it is tem using the seat belt (with
In order to secure a child restraint system securely fastened. emergency/automatic locking
compatible with the LATCH system, use the mechanism)
lower anchor points in the outboard positions
4 of the second row seat. It is not necessary to
N00407301465
use the vehicles seat belt. The vehicles seat With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
belt, however, MUST be used to secure a in all other seating positions can be converted
child restraint system in the middle seating from normal Emergency Locking Retractor
position of the second row seat. (ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the
WARNING retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
If there is any foreign material in or installation function. Always use the ALR
around the lower anchors, remove it child restraint installation function when you
before installing the child restraint sys- NOTE install a child restraint system using the seat
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away If it is difficult to latch the tether strap hook, belt.
from, not looped through or otherwise turn the hook sideways. Children 12 years old and under should
interfering with, the child restraint sys- always be restrained in the rear seat, when-
tem. If foreign matter is not removed
5. Push and pull the child restraint system in ever possible, although the front passenger
and/or the seat belt interferes with the
child restraint system, the child restraint all directions to ensure it is firmly seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
system will not be secured properly, could secured.
detach and move forward in the event of
sudden braking or an accident, and could WARNING
result in injury to the child or other vehi-
Child restraint system tether anchors are
cle occupants.
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
the seat where the child restraint system is no circumstances are they to be used for
installed. adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching
other items, or equipment to the vehicle.

BK0200500US.book 31

2. Route the seat belt through the child 3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-
WARNING restraint system according to the instruc- lation function, slowly pull the shoulder
When you install a child restraint system
tions provided by the child restraint sys- part of the belt all the way out of the
using the seat belt, always make sure the
tems manufacturer. Then insert the seat retractor until it stops. Then let the belt
retractor has been switched to the ALR
child restraint installation function. The belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure feed back into the retractor.
ALR function will keep the child restraint you hear a click when you insert the
system tightly secured to the seat. latch plate into the buckle. 4
Failure to convert the retractor to the
ALR function may allow the child
restraint system to move forward during
sudden braking or an accident, resulting
in serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants.
Installation
1. Place the child restraint system in the rear 4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it.
seating position. If the belt is in the ALR function, you will
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR
function has not been activated and you
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.

BK0200500US.book 32

5. After confirming that the belt is locked, 7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the 8. Before putting your child in the restraint,
grab the shoulder part of the belt near the child restraint system to the tether anchor push and pull the restraint in all directions
buckle and pull up to remove any slack bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
from the lap part of the belt allowing the securely fastened. before each use. If the child restraint sys-
slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1
if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child through 7.
4 restraint system will not be secure. It may 9. To remove a child restraint system from
help to put your weight on the child the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,
restraint system and/or push on its seat- remove the child from the restraint.
back while pulling up on the belt (See Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
illustration). from the restraint and let the belt fully
retract.
Children who have outgrown

child restraint systems
NOTE N00407601602
If it is difficult to latch the tether strap hook, Children who have outgrown a child restraint
turn the hook sideways. system should be seated in the rear seat and
wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses
WARNING their stomach, a commercially available
Child restraint system tether anchors are booster seat (including a booster cushion)
If your child restraint system requires the use designed only to withstand loads from cor-
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in must be used to raise the child so that the
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
accordance with the following procedures. shoulder belt crosses their shoulder and the
no circumstances are they to be used for
lap belt remains positioned low across their
adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching
other items, or equipment to the vehicle. hips. The booster seat (including a booster
6. Remove the head restraint from the loca- cushion) should fit the vehicle seat and have a
tion in which you wish to install a child label certifying compliance with Federal
restraint system. Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor
Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Cush-
ions Safety Regulations.

14RE(NAFTA)_.fm 1
The SRS curtain airbags provide the driver

and the passengers on the front seat and the
second row outboard seats with protection
against head injuries by deploying the curtain
airbag on the side impacted in moderate to
severe side impact collisions and by
deploying both curtain airbags when a
rollover is detected. The curtain airbags are
also designed to help reduce the risk of
complete and partial ejection from the
vehicle through side windows in both side
impact and rollover type accidents.
BK0200500US.book 33
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

retractors for automatic locking when in the front passenger seat belt systems by provid-
WARNING Automatic Locking Retractor function. ing those occupants with protection against
Any child who is too small to properly
head and chest injuries in certain moderate to
wear a seat belt must be properly The entire seat belt assembly should be severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air-
restrained in an appropriate child replaced if the webbing shows any obvious
restraint system, to reduce their risk of bags, together with sensors at the front of the
cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec- vehicle and sensors attached to the front
serious injury or death in an accident.
A child should never be left unattended in,
tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or seats, form an advanced airbag system. 4
or unsupervised around, your vehicle.
severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-
When you leave the vehicle, always take ditions indicate a weakening of the belt, The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags
the child out as well. which may adversely affect seat belt perfor- are also designed to supplement the seat belts.
Children can die from heat stroke if left or mance in an accident. The SRS side airbags provide the driver and
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on front passenger with protection against chest
hot days. WARNING injuries by deploying the bag on the side
Keep your vehicle locked when not in use. Do not attempt to repair or replace any
impacted in moderate to severe side impact
Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide
dren. the driver and passengers on the front seat
should be done by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have and second row outboard seat with protection
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer against head injuries by deploying a bag on
Maintenance and inspection perform the work could reduce the effec- the side impacted in moderate to severe side
tiveness of the belts and could result in a impact collisions and by deploying both bags
of seat belts serious injury or death in an accident. when a rollover is detected.
N00407000221
The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use
mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an Supplemental Restraint Sys- of the seat belts. For maximum protection in
organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the all types of accidents, seat belts must
shade. Do not allow them to retract until com- tem (SRS) - airbag ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or
pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re- N00407701717
rides in this vehicle (with infants and small
dye the belts. The color may rub off and the This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental children in an appropriate child restraint sys-
webbing strength may be affected. Restraint System (SRS), which includes air- tem in the rear seat, and older children buck-
bags for the driver and passengers. led in the rear seat). Refer to Child restraint
Regularly check your seat belt buckles and systems on page 4-25.
their release mechanisms for positive engage- The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the ment the primary protection of the driver and

BK0200500US.book 34
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS A driver or front passenger sitting too Airbags inflate very quickly and with
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY close to the steering wheel or instrument great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG. panel during airbag deployment can be seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
Seat belts help keep the driver and pas- seriously injured or killed. the instrument panel, or lean your head or
chest close to the steering wheel or the
4 sengers properly positioned. This
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,
Airbags inflate very quickly and with
great force. If the driver and front pas- instrument panel.
and reduces the risk of serious injuries or senger are not properly seated and Do not put your feet or legs on or against
death when the airbags inflate. restrained, the airbag may not provide the instrument panel.
During sudden braking just before a col- the proper protection, and can cause
lision, an unrestrained or improperly serious injuries or death when it inflates.
restrained driver or front passenger can To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
move forward into direct contact with, or injury or death due to a deploying
within close proximity to, the airbag drivers airbag, always properly wear
when it begins to inflate. your seat belt and adjust the drivers seat
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is as far back as possible, maintaining a
the most forceful and can cause serious position that still allows the driver to
injuries or death if the occupant comes in have good control of the steering wheel,
contact with the airbag at this time. brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in trols.
rear impact collisions, and in lower- To reduce the risk to the front passenger
speed frontal collisions because the air- of serious injury or death from a deploy-
bags are not designed to inflate in those ing passengers airbag, make sure the
situations. passenger always wears the seat belt
Seat belts reduce the risk of being properly, remains seated upright and all
thrown from your vehicle in a collision or the way back in the seat, and positions
rollover. the seat as far back as possible.
Seat all infants and children in the rear
seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
WARNING ate child restraint system.
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-
ERLY SEATED.

BK0200500US.book 35

Infants and small children should never NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in
held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to
can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passenger airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure
accident, especially when the airbags deployment of that airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys- 4
inflate. Seat all infants and children in the be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
rear seat, properly restrained in an appro- Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
priate child restraint system. Refer to infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
Child restraint systems on page 4-25. in the rear seat.
Airbag
WARNING
Older children should be seated in the
rear seat with their seat belt properly
worn, and with an appropriate booster
seat (including a booster cushion) if
needed.
Refer to Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems on page 4-32.

BK0200500US.book 36

When the impact sensors detect a sufficient
How the Supplemental front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),
Restraint System works the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.
N00407801532
The SRS includes the following components: When the airbag control unit detects rollover
of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be
4 deployed.
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released

accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
10- Side airbag modules the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
11- Curtain airbag modules tion to people with respiratory problems.
12- Side impact sensors
An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you
may not even notice that the airbag was
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness inflated.
1- Airbag module (Driver) of the electronic parts of the system whenever Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
2- SRS warning light the ignition switch or the operation mode is from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
3- Passengers airbag off indicator under the following conditions. These include and does not prevent people from leaving the
4- Front impact sensors all of the items listed above and all related vehicle.
5- Airbag module (Passenger) wiring.
6- Airbag module (Drivers knee) [Except for vehicles equipped with the
7- Drivers seat position sensor F.A.S.T.-key] CAUTION
The ignition switch is in the ON or Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
8- Passengers seat occupant classifica-
START position. force. In certain situations, contact with an
tion sensor system inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
9- Airbag control unit [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
sions, and bruises.
The operation mode is in ON.
The airbags will operate under the same con-

ditions as the airbag control unit. Event Data Recording
N00418601266
This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR).
BK0200500US.book 37

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to
certain crash or near crash-like situations,
NOTE SRS warning light/display on page 4-39.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
road obstacle, data that will assist in under- WARNING
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
standing how a vehicles systems performed. ing conditions and no personal data (e.g., If the SRS warning light or warning dis-
The EDR is designed to record data related to name, gender, age, and crash location) are
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a recorded. However, other parties, such as
play comes on, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
4
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or law enforcement, could combine the EDR dealer as soon as possible.
less. data with the type of personally identifying Please observe the following instructions
data routinely acquired during a crash inves- to ensure that the drivers seat position
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record tigation. sensor can operate correctly.
such data as: Adjust the seat to the correct position,
and sit well back against the seatback.
How various systems in your vehicle were To read data recorded by an EDR, special
Refer to Front seats on page 4-4.
operating; equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
Do not recline the seatback more than
Whether or not the driver and front pas- cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the necessary when driving.
senger safety belts were buckled/fastened; vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as Do not place metallic objects or luggage
How far (if at all) the driver was depress- law enforcement, that have the special equip- under the front seat.
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; ment, can read the information if they have If the vehicle is involved in a severe
and, access to the vehicle or the EDR. impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
How fast the vehicle was traveling. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
Drivers seat position sensor
These data can help provide a better under- N00417900177
standing of the circumstances in which
The drivers seat position sensor is attached
crashes and injuries occur. Passengers seat occupant clas-
to the seat rail and provides the airbag control
unit with information on the seats fore-aft sification sensor system
position. The airbag control unit controls N00418001374
deployment of the drivers front airbag in The passengers seat occupant classification
accordance with the information it receives sensor system is attached to the front passen-
from this sensor. ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-
If there is a problem involving the drivers trol unit with information regarding the
seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in occupant on the front passenger seat. The air-

BK0200500US.book 38

bag control unit controls deployment of the
passengers front airbag in accordance with
WARNING WARNING
The SRS warning light comes on while If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it
the information it receives from this system.
you are driving. and dry the seat immediately.
The passengers front airbag will not deploy
To ensure that the passengers seat occu- If the vehicle is involved in a severe
in an impact when the system senses no occu-
pant classification sensor system can sense impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
pant on the front passengers seat or a child in
4 a child restraint system. In this case, the pas-
correctly, observe the following instruc-
tions. Failure to follow these instructions
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
senger airbag off indicator will come on. can adversely affect the performance of
Refer to Passengers airbag off indicator on the passengers airbag system.
page 4-38. Adjust the seat to the correct position,
Passengers airbag off indicator
If there is a problem involving the passen- and sit well back against the seatback. N00418101333
gers seat occupant classification sensor sys- Refer to Front seats on page 4-4. The passenger airbag off indicator is located
tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument Do not recline the seatback more than in the instrument panel.
panel will come on. Refer to SRS warning necessary.
light/display on page 4-39. Never have more than one person (adult
or child) sitting on the seat.
Do not place anything between the seat
WARNING and the floor console.
If any of the following conditions occur, When attaching a child restraint system,
you should immediately have your vehicle secure it firmly.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Do not place luggage or other objects on
Motors dealer as soon as possible: the seat.
The SRS warning light does not initially Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
come on when the ignition switch or the
Do not modify or replace the seat and
operation mode is under the following
seat belt.
conditions.
Do not place luggage or other objects
[Except for vehicles equipped with the The indicator normally comes on when the
under the seat.
F.A.S.T.-key] ignition switch is turned to the ON position
The ignition switch is in the ON or Do not place and use an electronic device
such as a computer on the seat. or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes
START position.
Do not place heavy objects on the seat or out a few seconds later. In the following situ-
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in ON. stick pins, needles, or other objects into ations, the indicator will stay on to show that
The SRS warning light does not go out it. the passenger front airbag is not operational.
after several seconds. Do not remove the seat cushion skin.
The front passengers seat is not occupied.
BK0200500US.book 39

The system senses that a child is using a onds and then go out. This is normal and
child restraint system on the front passen-
WARNING means the system is working properly.
Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
gers seat. If there is a problem involving one or more of
cle that makes the passengers airbag off
the SRS components, the warning light will
indicator difficult or impossible to see.
When the passengers seat occupant classifi- come on and stay on. At the same time, the
You must be able to see the passengers
cation sensor system sense there is a person airbag off indicator and verify the status warning display will appear on the informa-
seated in the front passengers seat, the indi- of the passengers airbag system. tion screen in the multi information display 4
cator goes out to show that the passengers (Type 1 only).
front airbag is operational. The SRS warning light/display is shared by
SRS warning light/display the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
N00408301589
WARNING system.
There is a Supplemental Restraint System
If any of the following conditions occur,
(SRS) warning light on the instrument panel.
you should immediately have the airbag WARNING
system in your vehicle inspected by an If any of the following conditions occur,
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as Type 1 there may be a problem with the SRS air-
soon as possible: bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
The passengers airbag off indicator they may not function properly in a colli-
comes on when an adult is sitting on the sion or may suddenly activate without a
front passenger seat. collision:
The passengers airbag off indicator does Even when the ignition switch or the
not come on when the front passenger operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
seat is not occupied. ing light does not come on or it remains
The passengers airbag off indicator does Type 2 on.
not come on when the ignition switch is The SRS warning light and/or the warn-
turned to the ON position or the oper- ing display comes on while driving.
ation mode is put in ON. The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
The passengers airbag off indicator does sioners are designed to help reduce the
not come on when a child is in a child risk of serious injury or death in certain
restraint system on the front passengers collisions. If either of the above conditions
seat. occurs, immediately have your vehicle
The system checks itself every time the igni-
The passengers airbag off indicator checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
tion switch is turned to the ON position or
comes on and goes out repeatedly. Motors dealer.
the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS
warning light will come on for several sec-

BK0200500US.book 40

designed to deploy at the same time as the
Drivers and passengers front drivers front airbag.
airbag system
N00407901331
The drivers airbag is located under the pad-

ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
4 The front passengers airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The drivers airbag and the front
passengers airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-
gers airbag does not deploy when the front
passenger seat is not occupied or when the
system senses that a child is in the child
restraint system.
Driver
Front passenger
Drivers knee airbag system

N00404500010
The drivers knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The drivers knee airbag is
BK0200500US.book 41
Deployment of front airbags

N00408001616
The front airbags and drivers knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded 4
approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows
The front airbags and drivers knee airbag are The front airbags and drivers knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a will deploy if the impact to the vehicles main rail).
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical structure is above a specific threshold level. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
condition is shown in the illustration to the The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful, and can cause serious injury or
left. (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a death if you are too close to the deploying air-
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If bag. Accordingly, it is important that you
The front airbags and drivers knee airbag are the impact to the vehicles main structure is always wear the available seat belt.
designed to deploy only in certain moderate below this threshold level, the front airbags
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded and drivers knee airbag may not deploy. This
area between the arrows in the illustration to threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
the right. cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,

BK0200500US.book 42

they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and drivers Collision with a utility pole, tree or other
pants.
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY narrow object
Some typical situations are shown in the
when illustration.
In certain types of front collisions, the front Since the front airbags and drivers knee air-
4 airbags and drivers knee airbag may not bag do not protect the occupants in all types
deploy, even if the deformation of the body of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
Collision where the vehicle slides under the
seems to be large, because the vehicles body belts properly.
rear body of a truck
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants. Rear end collision to your vehicle
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and drivers knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Oblique frontal impact
Since the front airbags and drivers knee air- Side collision to your vehicle
bag do not protect the occupant in all types of
frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your
seat belts properly.
The front airbags and drivers Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when

The front airbags and drivers knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

BK0200500US.book 43
The front airbags and drivers Collision with an elevated median/island or WARNING
knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when curb Do not attach anything to the steering
wheels padded cover, such as trim mate-
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
The front airbags and drivers knee airbag
may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove
4
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole compartment. Such items could strike and
carriage impact). Some typical situations are injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
shown in the illustration.
Since the front airbags and drivers knee air-

bag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the
and these unexpected impacts can move you ground
out of position, it is important to always wear
your seat belts properly. When worn properly,
seat belts can help maintain your distance
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.
The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
most forceful and can cause serious injury or
death if you are close to the deploying airbag.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to, or put them
in front of, the windshield. They could
restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
injure an occupant, when the airbag
inflates.

BK0200500US.book 44
WARNING WARNING Side airbag system

Do not attach additional keys or accesso- Do not place objects, such as packages or N00408101431
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the pets, between the airbags and the driver The side airbags (A) are contained in the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent or the front passenger. Such objects can driver and front passenger seatbacks.
the drivers knee airbag from inflation adversely affect airbag performance, or The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
normally or could be propelled to cause cause serious injury or death when the
4 serious injury if the airbag inflates. airbag deploys.
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even
with no passenger in the front seat.
Do not attach accessories to the lower por- Immediately after airbag inflation, some
tion of the drivers side instrument panel. parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
Such objects could prevent the drivers not touch them. You could otherwise be
knee airbag from inflating normally or burned.
could be propelled to cause serious injury The airbag system is designed to work
if the airbag inflates. only once. After the airbags deploy, they
will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer.
A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-

cles equipped with side airbags.
WARNING
Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
semble or repair the SRS airbags.

BK0200500US.book 45
Curtain airbag system WARNING WARNING

N00419201227 The side airbags and curtain airbags can Do not place any objects around the area
The curtain airbags are contained in the front cause serious injury or death to anyone where the side airbags deploy. Such
pillar, the rear pillar and the side sections of too close to the airbag when it deploys. To objects can interfere with proper side air-
the roof. reduce the risk of injury from a deploying bag deployment, and cause injury during
side airbag or curtain airbag, driver and deployment of the side airbag.
The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only
front passenger must be properly Do not place stickers, labels or additional
4
on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,
restrained and seated well back, upright, trim on the back of either front seat. They
even with no passenger in the seat.
and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean can interfere with proper side airbag
Also, when the airbag control unit detects against the door. deployment.
rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags
Do not attach a microphone (A) or any
will deploy. other object around the part where the
curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the
windshield, side door glass or front and
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the
curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or
other object may be hurled with great
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate
correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of injury from
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any
second row seat passengers to hold onto
the back of either front seat. Special care
should be taken with children.

BK0200500US.book 46
WARNING WARNING Deployment of side airbag and

Do not put a hanger or any heavy or Do not allow a child to lean against or sit curtain airbag
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur- close to the passenger door, even if the N00408201546
tain airbag was activated, any such item child is seated in a child restraint system.
could be propelled away with great force The childs head should also not lean
and could prevent the curtain airbag from against or be close to the section of the The side airbag and curtain airbag
4 inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly seatback where the side airbag and cur- ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY
on the coat hook (without using a hanger). tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if when...
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.
objects in the pockets of clothes that you Failure to follow all of these instructions The side airbag and curtain airbag are
hang on the coat hook. could lead to serious injury or death to the designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats child.
moderate to severe side impact to the middle
that have side airbags. Covers can inter- Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
of the passenger compartment.
fere with proper side airbag deployment airbag or curtain airbag components
and adversely affect side airbag perfor- should be done only by an authorized Mit-
A typical situation is shown in the illustra-
mance. subishi Motors dealer. There is a risk of a tion.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint serious injury or death. Improper work
system in the front passenger seat. Rear- methods can cause accidental side airbag Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the
facing child restraint systems MUST or curtain airbag deployment, or render a vehicle bodys side structure
ONLY be used in the rear seat. side airbag or curtain airbag inoperable.
Front-facing child restraint systems Either of these situations could result in
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat. serious injury or death.
If a front-facing child restraint system Do not place luggage heavier than the
must be used in the front passenger seat, specified on the roof carrier.
move the seat as far back as possible, and Such luggage may cause the curtain air-
make sure that the child stays in the child bags to inflate accidentally, which could When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle
restraint system, properly restrained and result in serious injury or death. (Curtain airbag only)
away from the door.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-

mary means of protection in an accident. The

BK0200500US.book 47

SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are collisions, be sure to always wear the seat
Oblique side impact
designed to provide additional protection. belts properly.
Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all
occupants, be sure to always wear your seat Side impact in an area away from the passenger
belts properly. compartment
The side airbag and curtain airbag

4
MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag
In certain types of side collisions, the side air- only)
bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle
if the deformation of the body seems to be collision with the side of vehicle
large, because the vehicles body structure is
designed to absorb the impact and to deform
in order to help protect the occupants. There
are also cases where the side airbag and cur- The side airbag and curtain airbag
tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,
depending on the location of the impact.
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other
Some typical situations where the side air- narrow object DEPLOY when...
bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not
shown in the illustrations.
designed to deploy in situations where they
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do cannot provide protection to the occupants.
not protect the occupant in all types of side Some typical situations are shown in the
illustration.
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do

not protect the occupant in all types of colli-

BK0200500US.book 48

sions, be sure to always wear your seat belts
properly.
SRS servicing WARNING
N00408500669 Do not modify your front seats, center pil-
lar or center console. Such modifications
Head-on collision WARNING can adversely affect SRS performance and
Any maintenance performed on or near may lead to injury.
Also, if you discover any tear or open
4 the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi seam in the seat fabric near the side air-
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else bag, have the seat inspected by an autho-
to do any service, inspection, maintenance rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
or repair on any SRS components or wir- If you have found any scratch, crack or
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should damage to the portion of the front and
Rear end collision to your vehicle ever be handled, removed or disposed by rear pillars and roof side rail, you should
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi have the SRS inspected by an authorized
Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
Pitch end over end dental airbag deployment or could make NOTE
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa- When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
tions could result in serious injury or to another person, we urge you to alert the
death. new owner that it is equipped with the SRS
Do not modify your steering wheel or any and refer that owner to the applicable sec-
other SRS component or related vehicle tions in this owners manual.
part. For example, replacement of the If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,
steering wheel, or modifications to the we urge you to first take it to an authorized
front bumper or body structure can Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can
adversely affect SRS performance and be made safe for disposal.
may lead to injury.
If any of the following parts needs to be
If your vehicle has received any damage, modified for use by a handicapped person,
you should have the SRS inspected by an the advanced airbag system will be greatly
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to affected. Please consult an authorized Mit-
make sure it is in proper working order. subishi Motors dealer.
Drivers seat
Front passenger seat
Front seat belt

BK0200500US.book 49
NOTE [For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico] [For vehicles sold in American Samoa]
Steering wheel
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
Instrument panel
Caribbean, Inc. call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
call 1-787-251-8715 or write to: Pacific Marketing, Inc.
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, P.O. Box 698
To contact Mitsubishi Motors North Inc. PAGO PAGO, 4
America, Inc. Customer Service Department AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: P.O. Box 192216
Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
Customer Relations Department
P.O. Box 6400 [For vehicles sold in Guam]
Cypress, CA 90630-0064 To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
[For vehicles sold in Canada] Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of P.O. Box 6066
Canada, Inc. TAMUNING
call 1-888-576-4878 or write to: GUAM 96931
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.
Customer Relations Department [For vehicles sold in Saipan]
P.O. Box 41009 To contact Triple J Motors
4141 Dixie Road call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9 Triple J Motors
P.O. Box 500487
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

BK0200500US.book 50
Warning label
N00408600354
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS

are located in the vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
4
* - Located in the passengers side as well.

BK0200500US.book 1
Features and controls
Break-in recommendations...............................................................5-3 Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles ......................5-83

Keys ..................................................................................................5-3 Service brake ..................................................................................5-84
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system).........................5-4 Hill start assist (if so equipped) ......................................................5-85 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-7 Brake assist system.........................................................................5-86
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-87
equipped).....................................................................................5-12 Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................5-89
Door locks.......................................................................................5-32 Active stability control (ASC)........................................................5-90
Power door locks ............................................................................5-34 Cruise control .................................................................................5-92
Child safety locks for rear door ......................................................5-35 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)..............5-96
Liftgate (except for vehicles equipped with the power liftgate).....5-35 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) (if so equipped)....5-107
Power liftgate (if so equipped) .......................................................5-37 Lane Departure Warning System (LDW) (if so equipped)........... 5-111
Inside liftgate release .....................................................................5-43 Tire pressure monitoring system .................................................. 5-114
Theft-alarm system .........................................................................5-44 Rear-view camera (if so equipped)............................................... 5-118
Power window control....................................................................5-48 Instrument cluster .........................................................................5-120
Sunroof (if so equipped) .................................................................5-50 Multi Information display - Type 1 ..............................................5-121
Parking brake ..................................................................................5-52 Multi Information display - Type 2 ..............................................5-140
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment...................................5-53 Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Inside rearview mirror ....................................................................5-54 (multi information display - Type 1) .......................................5-148
Outside rearview mirrors ................................................................5-55 Indicator and warning light package (multi information display - Type
Ignition switch ................................................................................5-56 2) ...............................................................................................5-165
Steering wheel lock (if so equipped) ..............................................5-58 Indicators ......................................................................................5-166
Starting the engine ..........................................................................5-58 Warning lights...............................................................................5-167
Automatic transaxle (if so equipped)..............................................5-60 Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the multi informa-
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-68 tion display - Type 1) ...............................................................5-169
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped).................5-75 Combination headlights and dimmer switch ...............................5-171
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped) .....................5-78 Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)...................................5-176
4-wheel drive operation ..................................................................5-81 Turn signal lever ...........................................................................5-176
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation.........5-83 Hazard warning flasher switch .....................................................5-177
BK0200500US.book 2
Features and controls
ECO mode switch......................................................................... 5-178

Front fog light switch (if so equipped)......................................... 5-178
5 Wiper and washer switch ............................................................ 5-179
Electric rear window defogger switch.......................................... 5-184
Horn switch .................................................................................. 5-184
Link System (if so equipped) ....................................................... 5-185
Bluetooth 2.0 interface (if so equipped) .................................... 5-185
USB input terminal (if so equipped) ............................................ 5-207
Sun visors ..................................................................................... 5-210
12 V power outlets ....................................................................... 5-211
Interior lights ................................................................................ 5-212
Storage spaces .............................................................................. 5-215
Cup holders .................................................................................. 5-218
Bottle holders ............................................................................... 5-219
Cargo area cover (if so equipped) ................................................ 5-219
Assist grips ................................................................................... 5-221
Coat hooks.................................................................................... 5-222
Luggage hooks ............................................................................. 5-222
BK0200500US.book 3
Break-in recommendations
Refrain from towing a trailer or other Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency
Break-in recommendations vehicle (Refer to Trailer towing on page key in a safe place together as a set of spare
N00508701353
6-11). keys.
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-
niques permit you to operate your new vehi-
cle without requiring a long break-in period Keys
N00508801628
of low-speed driving.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
mance and economy of your vehicle by Type 1 5
observing the following precautions during
the first 300 miles (500 km). Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
the break-in period.
Avoid revving the engine.

Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts, 1- F.A.S.T.-key
sudden acceleration, prolonged high- (with electronic immobilizer and key-
speed driving and sudden braking. These less entry system function)
actions would have a detrimental effect on 2- Emergency key
the engine and lead to increased fuel and 3- Key number plate
oil consumption; this could ultimately
result in the malfunction of engine com-
ponents. Be particularly careful to avoid
NOTE
The key is a precision electronic device with
full acceleration while in low shift posi-
1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
tion (low gears).
keyless entry system the following in order to prevent damage.
Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within
2- Key number plate Do not leave where it may be exposed to
the seating capacity. (Refer to Cargo load heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
precautions on page 6-10.) top of the dashboard.
Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within Do not take the remote control transmitter
the seating capacity. (Refer to Cargo load Type 2 apart.
precautions on page 6-11.) Do not excessively bend the key or subject
Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys it to strong impacts.
are provided.
Features and controls 5-3
BK0200500US.book 4
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
NOTE NOTE achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
Keep the remote control transmitter dry. When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-
a key registered to the immobilizer system.
Keep away from magnetic objects such as tional status, the alarm operates if a door or
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
key rings. liftgate is opened after using the key, the
door lock knob or the power door lock cle have been programmed to the vehicles
Keep away from devices that produce mag-
switch to unlock the vehicle. electronics.
netism, such as audio systems, computers
and televisions. The system does not enter the preparation
5 Keep away from devices that emit strong status if the keyless entry system or the NOTE
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular F.A.S.T.-key operation was not used to lock In the following cases, the vehicle may not
phones, wireless devices and high fre- the vehicle. be able to recognize the registered ID code
quency equipment (including medical from the key. This means the engine will not
devices).
Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners.
Electronic immobilizer start even when the key is turned to the
START position.
Do not leave the key where it may be (Anti-theft starting system) When the key contacts a key ring or other
exposed to high temperature or high humid- N00509101790 metallic or magnetic object
ity.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
the vehicle immediately contact an autho-
key)]
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi For information on operations for vehicles
Motors dealer of the key number, they can equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
make a new key. The key number is stamped rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
on the key number plate. Keep the key num- Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
ber plate in a safe place separate from the (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
key itself. theft starting system) on page 5-16.
No keys other than those registered in
advance can be used to start the engine. [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
Refer to Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft hand Advanced Security Transmitter
starting system) on page 5-4. (F.A.S.T.-key)]
Refer to Free-hand Advanced Security The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) on
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
page 5-16.
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
5-4 Features and controls

BK0200500US.book 5

Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
NOTE NOTE your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
When the key grip contacts metal of Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
have your ID code changed.
another key with commercially available remote starting
systems. Use of commercially available
remote starting systems may result in vehicle Additional keys
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection.
To add a key, you must already have 2 regis-
A system failure is suspected when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the START posi- tered keys. You need to register the ID code 5
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a to the vehicle.
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Registering the ID code can be done by your-
Motors dealer. self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or
When the key contacts or is close to other by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
immobilizer keys (including keys of other For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
vehicles) CAUTION low the Customer key programming proce-
Do not make any alterations or additions to dure below.
the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi- If you choose to have your authorized Mit-
tions could cause failure of the immobilizer. subishi Motors dealer register the ID code,
take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Replacement keys
NOTE
Only keys that have been programmed to the You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
In cases like the above, move the offending
vehicles electronics can be used to start the register up to 8 keys.
object(s) away from the key and turn the key
vehicle.
back to the ACC or LOCK position.
Then try to start the engine again. If the
If you lose the key, you can order a key from
engine does not start, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
The key may not operate properly when it is
referring to the key number.
near an object or facility that emits strong To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
electromagnetic waves. vehicle keys must be changed.

BK0200500US.book 6

4. When the immobilizer display starts
Customer key programming blinking, turn the second valid key to the
NOTE
(Except for vehicles sold in OFF or LOCK position and remove Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
Canada) it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert
play screen may prevent you from seeing the
N00562201149 a blank immobilizer key into the ignition immobilizer display.
You can program new keys to the system if switch and turn it to the ON position. It is not possible to register a key if:
you have two valid (already registered) keys Perform this operation no more than 30 the immobilizer display goes off during the
seconds after the immobilizer display
5 and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for
starts blinking. When registration of the
procedure
your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors the immobilizer display does not come on
dealer) by doing the following: ID code is complete, the immobilizer dis- within 30 seconds after step 4.
play will come on for 30 seconds then go The procedure will be terminated automati-
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition off. If an error occurs, the blinking immo- cally if:
switch and turn the key to the ON posi- bilizer display will go off during the pro- a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
tion for 5 seconds. cedure. from the moment when the first key is
2. Turn the key to the OFF or LOCK turned to the OFF or LOCK position to
position and remove the first key. Type 1 the moment when the second key is turned
to the ON position
3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first
a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
key, insert the second valid key into the
from the moment when the second key is
ignition and turn it to the ON position. turned to the OFF or LOCK position to
About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer the moment when the blank immobilizer
display will start to blink. key is turned to the ON position
Type 2
To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with both the
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
tem.
Also refer to Keyless entry system: Cus-
tomer remote control transmitter program-
ming on page 5-9.
5. If you wish to register another key, per-
form the process again from step 1.

BK0200500US.book 7
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
General information Keyless entry system (if so NOTE

N00562301094 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the
equipped)
Your electronic immobilizer operates on a horn will sound once.
N00509001920
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Press the remote control transmitter buttons
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate. To unlock
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This It can also help you signal for attention by
device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules setting off the panic alarm. Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the 5
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS drivers door only.
standard(s). Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
Operation is subject to the following two con- button one more time to unlock all the doors
ditions. and liftgate.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
This device may not cause harmful inter- The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
ference. The front side-marker and parking lights will
This device must accept any interference also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to
received, including interference that may Welcome light on page 5-175.
cause undesired operation.
NOTE
CAUTION 1- LOCK ( ) button On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
Changes or modifications not expressly Multi-Communication System, the functions
2- UNLOCK ( ) button
approved by the manufacturer for compli- can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
ance could void the users authority to oper- 3- PANIC button refer to the separate operation manual.
ate the equipment. 4- Indicator light The door and liftgate unlock function can be
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when
the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.
To lock Refer to Setting of door and liftgate unlock
function on page 5-8.
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will also blink once.

BK0200500US.book 8

3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
Answerback function onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) LOCK buttons within 5 seconds of press-
during this time. ing the LOCK button in step 3.
The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
entry system answerback function can be LOCK buttons within 5 seconds of press- Number of
To lock To unlock
changed as required. This is done with the ing the UNLOCK button in step 3. chimes
key removed from the ignition switch. One chime One flash Two flashes
NOTE
5 NOTE On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
Two chimes One flash No flash
Multi-Communication System, the functions Three chimes No flash Two flashes
The answerback function will not operate if
any of the doors are open. can be adjusted on the screen. For details, Four chimes Two flashes One flash
refer to the separate operation manual.
Five chimes No flash One flash
Six chimes Two flashes No flash
Horn deactivation/reactivation
Turn signal lights deactiva- Seven
No flash No flash
The answerback function can be set in the tion/reactivation chimes
following three ways.
Each time the answerback function is set, a The answerback function can be turned ON
or OFF separately.
NOTE
chime will sound to tell you the condition of
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
the answerback function.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Multi-Communication System, the functions
2. Open the drivers door and turn the com- can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
One chime: The horn will not sound. refer to the separate operation manual.
Two chimes: The horn will sound. bination headlights and dimmer switch to
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the the OFF position.
LOCK button is pressed twice 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10
within 1 second. seconds and press the LOCK button (1) Setting of door and liftgate
during this time. unlock function
N00543601115
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. The door and liftgate unlock function can be
2. Open the drivers door and turn the com- set to the following two conditions.
bination headlights and dimmer switch to Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
the OFF position. tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the

BK0200500US.book 9

condition of the door and liftgate unlock
function.
Using the panic alarm Additional remote control
N00543701060
transmitters
Number of If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- N00543900049
Condition ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten-
chimes To add a remote control transmitter, you must
tion as follows: already have 1 registered remote control
All doors and the liftgate
One chime transmitter.
unlock 1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
Registering the ID code can be done by your-
Two chimes Drivers door unlock only 1 second.
self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
5
2. The headlights will blink on and off and
dealer. For you to register the ID code your-
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. the horn will sound intermittently for
self, follow the Customer remote control
2. Open the drivers door and turn the com- about 3 minutes.
transmitter programming procedure below.
bination headlights and dimmer switch to 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
If you choose to have your authorized
the OFF position. the remote control transmitter.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- code, take your vehicle and any remaining
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) Replacement remote control keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
during this time. transmitters dealer.
4. Release in sequence the LOCK and N00543801087
UNLOCK buttons within 5 seconds of
pressing the LOCK button in step 3. Only remote control transmitters pro- NOTE
grammed with the vehicles electronics can You are provided with 2 remote control
lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate. transmitters, but you may register up to 8
NOTE remote control transmitters.
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi If you lose the remote control transmitter, you
Multi-Communication System, the functions can order a remote control transmitter from
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by Customer remote control trans-
refer to the separate operation manual. referring to the key number. mitter programming
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the N00544001103
remote control transmitter must be changed.
Take your vehicle and all remote control You can program new remote control trans-
transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi mitters to the system if you have one valid
Motors dealer to have your ID code changed. (already registered) remote control transmit-
ter by doing the following:

BK0200500US.book 10

1. Have available all (current and new) 6. If no ID code of a remote control trans-
remote control transmitters you wish to mitter is registered within 60 seconds
NOTE
The panic alarm cannot be operated.
register. after step 4, the registration mode is can-
The indicator light (4) is dim or does not
2. With a valid (already registered) remote celed and the normal mode returns.
come on.
control transmitter, press the UNLOCK
If you lose your remote control transmitter,
button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds. Then press
and hold the LOCK button (1).
NOTE please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
For verification purposes, try to lock and Motors dealer for a replacement.
3. Within 5 seconds of pressing the LOCK
5 button, release the LOCK and UNLOCK
unlock the doors after the registration is If you wish to obtain an additional remote
completed. control transmitter, please contact an autho-
buttons in sequence. The indicator light (4) comes on each time a rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum
At this time, ID codes for all remote con- button is pressed. of 8 remote control transmitters can be pro-
trol transmitters except for the transmitter The keyless entry system does not work if grammed for your vehicle.
used in steps 2 and 3 are erased and the the key is in the ignition switch. To use the new remote control transmitters, it
answerback function (door is locked and The remote control transmitter can be used is necessary to register the key with both the
unlocked) informs you that the registra- from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However, electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
tion mode has been activated. this distance may change if your vehicle is tem.
near a TV transmitting tower, a power sta- Also refer to Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
4. Within 60 seconds after step 3, complete
tion, or a radio station. theft starting system): Customer key pro-
the following ID code registration opera-
If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when gramming on page 5-6.
tion using the next remote control trans-
mitter you wish to register within 4 all doors and the liftgate are locked and no
seconds. doors or the liftgate are opened within about General information
30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will
i) Press both the LOCK and UNLOCK N00546101124
automatically re-lock.
buttons for 2 seconds. On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
ii) Release both the LOCK and UNLOCK Multi-Communication System, the functions frequency subject to Federal Communica-
buttons for 1 second. can be adjusted on the screen. For details, tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
iii) Press the UNLOCK button. The refer to the separate operation manual. sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
answerback function informs you that the If the following conditions are observed after (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
ID code registration of the transmitter is pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but- complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and
completed. ton on the remote control transmitter, the Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
5. To register the ID codes of additional battery in the remote control transmitter may dard(s).
remote control transmitters, repeat step 4 need to be replaced.
Operation is subject to the following two con-
within 60 seconds after step 4. The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
ditions.
or unlocked.

BK0200500US.book 11

This device may not cause harmful inter- 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, 3. Remove the remote control transmitter
ference. insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade from the remote control transmitter case.
This device must accept any interference screwdriver into the notch in the remote Then, open the remote control transmitter
received, including interference that may control transmitter case and use it to open using the method described in step 1.
cause undesired operation. the case.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly 5
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the users authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Procedure for replacing the

remote control transmitter bat- 4. Remove the old battery.
tery 5. Install a new battery with the +side (A)
N00544100064
NOTE down.
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static Be sure to perform the procedure with the
electricity from your body by touching a Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-
metal grounded object. shi mark is not facing you when you open the + side
remote control transmitter case, the buttons
may come out.
- side
Coin type bat-

tery CR1620
6. Close the remote control transmitter

firmly.

BK0200500US.book 12
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

7. Place the remote control transmitter in the The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
remote control transmitter case, then remote control transmitter of the keyless
securely close the remote control trans- entry system.
mitter case. Refer to Free-hand Advanced Security
8. Check the keyless entry system to see that Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry
it works. system on page 5-28.
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the

5 NOTE
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for
You may purchase a replacement battery at
vehicle operations such as locking and
an electric appliance store.
unlocking the doors and the liftgate,
An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
replace the battery for you if you prefer. starting the engine and changing the
operation mode. When leaving the vehi-
cle, make sure you are carrying the
CAUTION F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle. A- External transmitter
When the remote control transmitter case is B- Internal transmitter
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
WARNING
nents. Individuals who use implantable pace- WARNING
makers or implantable cardiovascular- Individuals using other electro-medical
defibrillators should keep away from the apparatus besides implantable pacemak-
external and internal transmitters. The ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi-
Free-hand Advanced Secu- electromagnetic waves used in the brillators should check with the
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm
implantable pacemakers and implantable the effect of the electromagnetic waves
key) (if so equipped) cardiovascular-defibrillators. used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag-
N00503101121
netic waves may affect the operations of
the electro-medical apparatus.
The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the
liftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engine
to be started and the operation mode to be
changed simply by carrying it.

BK0200500US.book 13

The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
key can be modified as stated below.
NOTE
Use the emergency key in such circum-
(Keyless entry operations are possible.)
stances.
For details, contact an authorized Mitsubi-
Refer to To operate without using the
shi Motors dealer. F.A.S.T.-key on page 5-26.
Enabling only the locking and unlocking The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
of the doors and the liftgate reception operations in its communication
Enabling only the starting of the engine
Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
5
often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 3 years, depending on the
NOTE usage conditions.
The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform- NOTE
waves. ing reception operations, the reception of When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
In cases such as the following, operation strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate down or there are strong electromagnetic
may be improper or unstable. the running down of the battery. Do not place waves or noise in the area, the operating
The vehicle is near a facility that emits near to electrical appliances such as televi- range could decrease or operations could
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV sions or computers. become unstable.
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
station or an airport
The key is carried together with other com- Operating range of the
Operating range for locking and
munication devices such as cellular phones F.A.S.T.-key
or radios, or electrical appliances such as N00503201164
unlocking the doors and the lift-
computers
When a person enters the operating range of
gate
The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
metal object the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-
key and presses the drivers or front passen- The operating range is within about 2.3 feet
A keyless entry system is being used
gers door lock/unlock switch, the liftgate (70 cm) of the handles of the drivers door,
nearby
LOCK switch or the liftgate OPEN switch, front passenger door and liftgate.
The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down
The vehicle is in a location with strong verification of the ID code is performed.
electromagnetic waves or noise The doors and the liftgate can only be locked
and unlocked and the engine can only be
started when the ID codes of the vehicle and
F.A.S.T.-key match.

BK0200500US.book 14
Operating range for starting the NOTE

engine and changing the opera- Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,
tion mode it may not be possible to start the engine and
N00503301077
change the operation mode if the key is too
close to a door or door window.
The operating range is the interior of the
vehicle.
To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
5 key
N00503401225
*: Front of the vehicle

To lock
: Operating range
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the

NOTE drivers or front passengers door lock/unlock
Only the doors and the liftgate that detect the switch (A), or the liftgate LOCK switch (B)
F.A.S.T.-key can be locked and unlocked. within the operating range to lock all the
The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.- doors and the liftgate.
key is too close to the windshield, door win- *: Front of the vehicle The turn signal lights will blink once and the
dows or liftgate. : Operating range buzzer will sound once.
Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3
feet (70 cm) of the handle of the drivers Also refer to Doors locks, Power door
door, front passengers door or liftgate, the NOTE locks, Liftgate and Power liftgate on
system may not operate if the key is close to
Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat- pages 5-32, 5-34, 5-35 and 5-37 respectively.
the ground or in a high position. ing range, it may not be possible to start the
If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating engine and change the operation mode if the
range, even a person not carrying the key is in a storage space such as the glove
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors compartment, on top of the instrument panel,
or the liftgate by pressing the drivers or or in the door pocket or luggage compart-
front passengers door lock/unlock switch, ment.
the liftgate LOCK switch or the liftgate
OPEN switch.

BK0200500US.book 15

Within about 2 seconds, press the drivers
Drivers and front passengers door lock/unlock NOTE door lock/unlock switch one more time to
switches The liftgate OPEN switch (C) can be used to
unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
confirm that the vehicle is locked properly.
Press the liftgate OPEN switch within about
3 seconds of locking. Drivers door lock/unlock switch
If the liftgate OPEN switch is pressed 3 sec-
onds or more after the vehicle is locked, the
doors and the liftgate are unlocked.
The time within which locking confirmation
5
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
Liftgate switches Multi-Communication System, the function
can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
To unlock NOTE
Settings can be changed so that all doors and
the liftgate are unlocked automatically by
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the pressing the drivers door lock/unlock switch
operating range, you can unlock the doors once.
and the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key Refer to Setting of door and liftgate unlock
operation. function on page 5-30.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
NOTE The turn signal lights will blink twice and the Press the front passengers door lock/unlock
In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- buzzer will sound twice. switch (B) or the liftgate OPEN switch (C) to
key does not operate.
unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger Also refer to Door locks, Power door
compartment locks, Liftgate and Power liftgate on
A door or the liftgate is open or ajar pages 5-32, 5-34, 5-35 and 5-37 respectively.
The operation mode is not in OFF.
Press the drivers door lock/unlock switch
(A) to unlock only the drivers door.

BK0200500US.book 16
Front passengers door lock/unlock switch NOTE NOTE

The amount of time after unlocking until the Deactivating the operation confirmation
vehicle re-locks automatically can be function (blinking of the turn signal lights)
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi and buzzer.
Motors dealer for details. Modifying the number of blinks in the
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi operation confirmation function (blinking
Multi-Communication System, the functions of the turn signal lights).
5 can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
Making the buzzer sound when the
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- compartment when all the doors and the
key does not operate. liftgate are closed.
A door or the liftgate is open or ajar
Liftgate OPEN switch The operation mode is not in OFF.
The doors and the liftgate cannot be
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
unlocked by using the liftgate OPEN switch theft starting system)
for about 3 seconds after locking. N00529600114
The time within which locking confirmation The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho- nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
Multi-Communication System, the function
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
refer to the separate operation manual. achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
Functions settings can be modified as stated a F.A.S.T.-Key registered to the immobi-
NOTE below. lizer system.
If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
using the drivers or front passengers door for details. cle have been programmed to the vehicles
lock/unlock switch when all doors and the On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi electronics.
liftgate are locked and no doors or the lift- Multi-Communication System, the functions
gate are opened within about 30 seconds, the can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
doors and the liftgate will automatically re- refer to the separate operation manual. Engine switch
lock. Activating the operation confirmation func- N00513501085
tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys
during locking, or only during unlocking. other than those registered in advance can be
BK0200500US.book 17

used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi- The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
lizer function)
NOTE minates green.
When operating the engine switch, press the
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine The indicator light turns off when the engine
switch all the way in. If the switch is not
switch can be used to start the engine. is running.
fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
operation mode may not change. If the
engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no NOTE
need to hold the engine switch down. Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code 5
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends mst match the
Operation mode of the engine one registered to the immobilizer computer.
(Refer to Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
switch and its function
starting system) on page 5-16)
OFF
Changing the operation mode
N00568001035
The indicator light on the engine switch turns
CAUTION off. If you press the engine switch without press-
The indicator light (A) will flash orange The operation mode cannot be put in OFF ing the brake pedal while the vehicle is sta-
when there is a problem or malfunction in when the selector lever is in any position tionary, you can change the operation mode
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter. other than the P (PARK) position. in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.
Never drive if the indicator light on the
engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi-
ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi
ACC
Motors dealer.
If the engine switch operation is not smooth Allows operation of electrical accessories.
and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
switch. minates orange.
Immediately contact an authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer.
ON
All electrical accessories can be used.

BK0200500US.book 18
CAUTION ACC power auto-cutout function NOTE

When the engine is not running, put the oper- N00568101023 For details, we recommend you to consult an
ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when with the operation mode in ACC, the function On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi
the engine is not running may cause the bat- automatically cuts out the power for the audio Motors Multi-Communication System,
tery to be discharged, making it impossible screen operations can be used to make the
system and other electric devices that can be
to start the engine. adjustment.
operated with that mode.
5 When the battery is disconnected, the current
operation mode is memorized. After recon-
When the engine switch is pressed while the
Refer to the separate Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
munications System manual for details.
necting the battery, the memorized mode is operation mode is in ACC, the power is sup-
selected automatically. Before disconnect- plied again to those devices.
ing the battery for repair or replacement,
make sure to put the operation mode in OFF. NOTE
Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery
The time until the power cuts out can be
is run down.
changed to approximately 60 minutes.
The operation mode cannot be changed from
The ACC power auto-cutout function can
OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not
detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to Oper- be deactivated.
ating range for starting the engine and
changing the operation mode on page 5-14.
Warning activation
N00503501213
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given through buzzers and displays on the information screen in the multi information display in order to pre-
vent mistaken operations or vehicle theft.
When a warning operates, be sure to check the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is also displayed if there is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-key.

BK0200500US.book 19

Type 1: Color liquid crystal display type Type 2: Mono-color liquid crystal display type
Type 1 Type 2
Item Solution Note
Display Buzzer Indicator Buzzer
Detection of Inner buzzer No sounds There is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-
failure sounds once key.
Illuminates 5
Fall of battery Inner buzzer No sounds The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is The warning is not activated if the
voltage sounds once run down. battery is completely dead.
Blinks
F.A.S.T.-key Inner buzzer Inner buzzer When the vehicle is parked with The F.A.S.T.-key take-out moni-
take-out mon- sounds once sounds once the operation mode in any mode toring system does not function if
itoring system other than OFF, if you close the the F.A.S.T.-key is removed
Outer Outer door after opening any of the through a window without open-
Blinks
buzzer buzzer doors and taking the F.A.S.T.-key ing a door.
sounds sounds out of the vehicle, a warning is This setting can be changed.
intermit- intermit- issued until the F.A.S.T.-key is Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
tently tently detected in the vehicle. Motors dealer for details.
The warning may display even if

the F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating
range for starting the engine and
changing the operation mode. The
surrounding environment or elec-
tromagnetic waves may make it
impossible to verify the ID codes
of the F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle.

BK0200500US.book 20

Type 1 Type 2
Item Solution Note
Key lock-in Inner buzzer Outer When the operation mode is in Make sure you have the F.A.S.T.-
prevention sounds once buzzer OFF, the F.A.S.T.-key is left in the key with you before locking the
system sounds passenger compartment, all the doors. Even if you leave the
Outer about 3 sec- doors and the liftgate are closed, F.A.S.T.-key inside the vehicle, it
Blinks
buzzer onds inter- and someone tries to lock the vehi- is possible that the doors will lock
5 sounds mittently cle by pressing the drivers or depending on the surrounding
about 3 sec- front passengers door lock/unlock environment and wireless signal
onds inter- switch, or the liftgate LOCK conditions.
mittently switch, a warning is issued and
you cannot lock the doors and lift-
gate.
Door ajar pre- Inner buzzer Outer When the operation mode is in
vention sys- sounds once buzzer OFF, and someone tries to lock the
tem sounds vehicle by pressing the drivers or
Outer about 3 sec- front passengers door lock/unlock
Blinks
buzzer onds inter- switch, or the liftgate LOCK
sounds mittently switch while one of the doors or
about 3 sec- the liftgate is not fully closed, a
onds inter- warning is issued and you cannot
mittently lock the doors and liftgate.

BK0200500US.book 21

Type 1 Type 2
Item Solution Note
Operation Inner buzzer Outer When the operation mode is in any
mode OFF sounds once buzzer mode other than OFF, all the doors
reminder sys- sounds and the liftgate are closed, and
tem Outer about 3 sec- someone tries to lock the vehicle
Blinks
buzzer onds inter- by pressing the drivers or front
sounds mittently passengers door lock/unlock 5
about 3 sec- switch, or the liftgate LOCK
onds inter- switch, a warning is issued and
mittently you cannot lock the doors and lift-
gate.

BK0200500US.book 22
Steering wheel lock (if so equipped) To unlock NOTE

N00514301080 When the steering wheel does not unlock,
The following methods can be used to unlock the warning display will appear. Press the
the steering wheel. engine switch again while moving the steer-
To lock ing wheel slightly right and left.
Put the operation mode in ACC.
Warning display
After pressing the engine switch and opera- Start the engine.
5 tion mode in OFF, when drivers door is
opened, the steering wheel is locked.
WARNING
If the engine is stopped while driving, do
NOTE not open a door or press the LOCK switch
When the following operation is performed on the remote control switch until the When the steering wheel lock is abnormal,
with the operation mode in OFF, the steering vehicle stops in a safe place. This could the warning display will appear and the inner
wheel is locked. cause the steering wheel to lock, making it buzzer will sounds. Put the operation mode
Open or close one of the doors. (except the impossible to operate the vehicle. in OFF and then press the lock switch of the
liftgate) F.A.S.T.-key. If the warning will appear
Lock all door and the liftgate by using the again, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
F.A.S.T.-key operation or the remote con- CAUTION Motors dealer.
trol transmitter of the F.A.S.T.-key. Carry the F.A.S.T.-key with you when leav-
warning display
When the drivers door is opened while the ing the vehicle.
steering wheel does not unlock, warning dis- If your vehicle needs to be towed, put the
play will appear and the buzzer sounds to operation mode in ACC to unlock the steer-
alert the steering wheel is unlocked. ing wheel.
Warning display

BK0200500US.book 23

The starter motor will be turning for up to
NOTE approximately 15 seconds if the engine
WARNING
If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock, Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
switch is released at once. Pressing the
the warning display will appear. Immediately ventilated area any longer than is needed
engine switch again while the starter
stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. motor is still turning will stop the starter bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
motor. extremely poisonous, could build up and
Warning display The starter motor will be turning for up to cause serious injury or death.
approximately 30 seconds while the
engine switch is pressed.
5
If the engine does not start, wait for a CAUTION
while and then attempt to start the engine Do not push-start the vehicle.
again. Trying repeatedly with the engine Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
or starter motor still turning will damage at high speeds until the engine has had a
Starting and stopping the the starter mechanism. chance to warm up.
If the engine will not start because the bat-
engine tery is weak or discharged, refer to
N00514601285
Jump-starting the engine on page 8-2 Starting the engine
for instructions.
Tips for starting A longer warm up period will only con- Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
sume extra fuel. cally controlled fuel injection system. This
The operation mode can be in any mode
The engine is warmed up enough for driv- system automatically controls fuel injection.
to start the engine.
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant There is no need to depress the accelerator
temperature display starts to move or the pedal when starting the engine.
low coolant temperature indicator goes To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
out. Refer to Engine coolant temperature between attempts to restart the engine.
display on page 5-128 or Low coolant
temperature indicator on page 5-166. 1. Make sure all occupants are properly
seated with seat belts fastened.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down with
your right foot.

BK0200500US.book 24

4. Make sure the selector lever is in the P 2. While depressing the brake pedal, press not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
(PARK) position. the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it the selector lever in the P (PARK) position
there, then crank the engine. Release the and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
NOTE accelerator pedal, immediately after the The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
The engine can only be started when the engine starts. able to start normally.
selector lever is in the P (PARK) or N 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
(NEUTRAL) position. could be flooded with too much gasoline. operation.
For safety reasons, the engine should be While depressing the brake pedal, push
5 started when the selector lever is in the P the accelerator pedal all the way down Using the MIVEC engine
(PARK) position in which the driving wheels
and hold it there, then press the engine
lock. The MIVEC engine automatically switches
switch to crank the engine. If the engine
its intake-valve control between a low-speed
does not start after 5 to 6 seconds, push
5. Press the engine switch. mode and a high-speed mode in accordance
the engine switch to stop cranking the
6. Confirm that all warning lights and warn- with driving conditions for maximum engine
engine, and release the accelerator pedal.
ing displays are functioning properly. performance.
Put the operation mode in OFF. Wait a
few seconds, and then press the engine
NOTE switch to crank the engine again while NOTE
depressing the brake pedal, but do not To protect the engine, the high-speed mode
Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
push the accelerator pedal. If the engine may not be selected while the engine coolant
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
fails to start, repeat these procedures. If temperature is low. In such a case, the engine
up.
revolutions do not rise to over 5,000 rpm
the engine still will not start, contact your
even if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
When the engine is hard to start facility of your choice for assistance.
After several attempts, you may experience Startability of the engine with an ambient
that the engine still does not start. temperature of -22 F (-30 C) or lower
When the ambient temperature is -22 F (-30
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
from a standstill even with the selector lever
window defogger, are turned off.
in the D (DRIVE) position.
This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does

BK0200500US.book 25

3. Move the selector lever to the P
Stopping the engine NOTE
(PARK) position, and then press the
N00568201024 Remove the object or additional key from the
engine switch to stop the engine.
F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the
WARNING key slot. The vehicle may not be able to
Do not operate the engine switch while If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat- receive the registered ID code from the regis-
driving except in an emergency. If the tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start
engine is stopped while driving, the brake
ing properly and the operation mode may not change.
N00568301038
servomechanism will cease to function and
braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot in the
5
the power steering system will not func-
F.A.S.T.-key reminder
instrument panel. Starting the engine and
tion and it will require greater manual changing the operation mode should be now
effort to operate the steering. This could possible. Warning display (color liquid crystal display
result in a serious accident. type)
Remove the F..A.S.T.-key from the key slot
after starting the engine or changing the oper-
ation mode.
NOTE
If you have to bring the engine to an emer-
gency stop while driving, press and hold the
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press Warning light (mono-color liquid crystal dis-
it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will play type)
stop and the operation mode will go to ACC.
Do not stop the engine with the selector lever
in any position other than the P (PARK)
position. If the engine is stopped with the
selector lever in any position other than the
If the operation mode is in OFF and the
P (PARK) position, the operation mode
drivers door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key
will go to ACC rather than OFF.
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing in the key slot, a warning is issued with the
the selector lever in the P (PARK) posi- warning display and the buzzer buzzing for
tion. NOTE approximately 3 seconds to remind you to
Do not insert into the key slot anything other remove the key.
1. Stop the vehicle. than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam-
age or a malfunction.
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal.
BK0200500US.book 26
To operate without using the NOTE Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

F.A.S.T.-key Only use the emergency key in an emer- theft starting system)
N00514800017
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key N00529600055
has run down, replace the battery as soon as
possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again. The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
Emergency key After using the emergency key, be sure to nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
N00515201158
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key. theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
5 The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
key. Locking and unlocking the drivers door
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the Turn the emergency key toward the front of a F.A.S.T.-Key registered to the immobi-
vehicle has run down, the emergency key can the vehicle to lock the door. After checking lizer system.
be used to lock and unlock the drivers door. that the door is locked, turn the emergency All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
key back to the center and remove it. cle have been programmed to the vehicles
To use the emergency key (A), unlock the electronics.
lock knob (B) and remove it from the
F.A.S.T.-key (C).
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys
N00561000042
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro-

grammed to the vehicles electronics can be
used to start the vehicle.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a

F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer by referring to the key number.
1- Insert or remove the emergency key To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle
2- Lock and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho-
3- Unlock rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID
codes reprogrammed.

BK0200500US.book 27

3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
slot.
N00561100014 ming (Except for vehicles sold in
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have Canada)
2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis- N00561201171
ter the ID code to the vehicle. You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
Registering the ID code can be done by your system if you have two valid (already regis-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and a blank (not regis-
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles tered) F.A.S.T.-key.
5
sold in Canada).
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
low the Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- procedures below.
ming procedure below.
If you choose to have your authorized 1. Open the drivers door.
4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
NOTE UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and
code, take your vehicle and all remaining
press the LOCK button during this time.
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Keep the drivers door open until F.A.S.T.-
key programming is finished. Do not open or
5. Release in sequence the LOCK and
Motors dealer.
close other doors. UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
pressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Per-
NOTE form the following procedure within 30
You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.-
seconds.)
you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys. key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per-
6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press
You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially form the following procedure within 30
the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds
cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi seconds.)
and press the LOCK button during this
Motors dealer.
time.

BK0200500US.book 28

7. Release in sequence the LOCK and 5- Operation indicator light
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
NOTE
Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
pressing the LOCK button in step 6. The To lock
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
immobilizer display on the information
play screen may prevent you from seeing the
screen in the multi-information display immobilizer display. Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
will blink. It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if doors and the liftgate.
the immobilizer display goes off during the
5 procedure. The turn signal lights will also blink once.
Keyless entry system NOTE

When registration of ID code is complete, N00515501210 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the
the buzzer will sound 3 times and the Press the remote control transmitter buttons horn will sound once.
immobilizer display will come on for 30 to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.
seconds. It can also help you signal for attention by
If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program- setting off the panic alarm. To unlock
ming will be terminated and the buzzer
will sound for 3 seconds. Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
drivers door only.
NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi- Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
nated if the operation mode is put in OFF button one more time to unlock all the doors
before the immobilizer display starts blink- and liftgate.
ing. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.- The front side-marker and parking lights will
key, repeat the process from step 1 after also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to
the operation mode is put in OFF. Welcome light on page 5-175.
1- LOCK ( ) button
2- UNLOCK ( ) button
NOTE 3- Power liftgate button (if so equipped)
The immobilizer display will go off immedi- 4- PANIC button
ately if the operation mode is put in OFF.

BK0200500US.book 29

2. Open the drivers door and turn the com- 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
NOTE bination headlights and dimmer switch to LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
the OFF position. pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
Multi-Communication System, the functions
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, Number of
refer to the separate operation manual. onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) To lock To unlock
during this time. chimes
The door and liftgate unlock function can be
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and One chime One flash Two flashes
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.
Refer to Setting of door and liftgate unlock pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.
Two chimes One flash No flash 5
function on page 5-30. Three chimes No flash Two flashes
NOTE Four chimes Two flashes One flash
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Five chimes No flash One flash
Answerback function Multi-Communication System, the functions
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, Six chimes Two flashes No flash
refer to the separate operation manual. Seven chimes No flash No flash
The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless
entry system answerback function can be
changed as required. This is done with the Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-
key removed from the ignition switch.
NOTE
tion
Horn deactivation/reactivation The answerback function from the turn signal
lights can be turned ON or OFF separately.
The answerback function can be set in the
following three ways. 1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Open the drivers door and turn the com- Buzzer deactivation/reactivation
One chime: The horn will not sound. bination headlights and dimmer switch to
Two chimes: The horn will sound. the OFF position. The buzzer answerback function can be
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 turned ON or OFF as required.
LOCK button is pressed twice seconds and press the LOCK button (1)
within 1 second. during this time.
1. Put the operation mode in OFF.

BK0200500US.book 30

4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
NOTE UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
NOTE
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi The indicator light (5) comes on each time a
pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
Multi-Communication System, the functions button is pressed.
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
refer to a separate operation manual. NOTE feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi may change if your vehicle is near a TV
Multi-Communication System, the functions transmitting tower, a power station, or a
5 Setting of door and liftgate unlock can be adjusted on the screen. For details, radio station.
If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when
function refer to the separate operation manual.
all doors and the liftgate are locked and no
N00544601095
doors or the liftgate are opened within about
The door and liftgate unlock function can be 30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will
Operating the power liftgate
set to the following two conditions. automatically re-lock.
N00579500020
Each time the door and liftgate unlock func- On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the After unlocking the doors and the liftgate, the Multi-Communication System, the functions
condition of the door and liftgate unlock power liftgate can be operated by pressing the can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
power liftgate button (3). refer to the separate operation manual.
function.
Refer to Power liftgate on page 5-37. If the following conditions are observed after
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
Number ton on the remote control transmitter, the
Condition
of chimes Using the panic alarm battery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be
All doors and the liftgate N00544701067 replaced.
One chime
unlock If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten- or unlocked.
Two
Drivers door unlock only tion as follows: The panic alarm cannot be operated.
chimes
The indicator light (5) is dim or does not
1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than come on.
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. 1 second. If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact
2. Open the drivers door and turn the com- 2. The headlights will blink on and off and an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a
bination headlights and dimmer switch to the horn will sound intermittently for replacement.
the OFF position. about 3 minutes. If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
the remote control transmitter.
during this time. key can be programmed for your vehicle.

BK0200500US.book 31
NOTE CAUTION NOTE

To use the new remote control transmitters, it Changes or modifications not expressly Be sure to perform the procedure with the
is necessary to register the key with both the approved by the manufacturer for compli- Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys- ance could void the users authority to oper- shi mark is not facing you when you open the
tem. ate the equipment. case, the transmitter may come out.
Also refer to Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-
3. Remove the old battery.
key programming on page 5-27.
Procedure for replacing the 4. Install a new battery with the +side (A) 5
remote control transmitter bat- up.
General information
N00562001062
tery + side
N00562101076
Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre- 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
quency subject to Federal Communications electricity from your body by touching a
Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold metal grounded object. - side
in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
vehicles sold in Canada). This device com- insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade
plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Coin type bat-
screwdriver into the notch in the case and
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). tery CR2032
use it to open the case.
ditions.
This device may not cause harmful 5. Close the case firmly.
interference. 6. Check the keyless entry system to see that
This device must accept any interference it works.
received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
replace the battery for you if you prefer.

BK0200500US.book 32
Door locks
CAUTION WARNING NOTE

When the remote control transmitter case is When closing a door, make sure that the When locking or unlocking with the key,
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. door is fully closed and the door-ajar only the drivers door will be locked or
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo- warning display goes out on the informa- unlocked.
nents. tion screen on the multi-information dis- To lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, use
play. If the door is ajar it could open while the power door lock switch, the keyless entry
driving and cause an accident. system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
5 Door locks Refer to Power door locks on page 5-34,
Keyless entry system on pages 5-7 and
N00509201544 To lock and unlock with the key 5-28, and To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
(drivers door) key on page 5-14.
WARNING In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
Make sure all doors are tightly closed and Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to the drivers door can be locked and unlocked
locked while driving. lock the door. After checking that the door is using the emergency key.
Locked doors, in combination with the locked, turn the key back to the center and Refer to Emergency key on page 5-26.
use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk remove it.
of ejection in an accident.
Locked doors can help keep passengers,
especially small children, from opening
doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
from gaining access to your vehicle when
you slow or come to a stop.
Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
overcome by heat and suffer serious
injury or death due to heat stroke.
1- Insert or remove the key
Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In
addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil- 2- Lock
dren can activate switches and controls, 3- Unlock
resulting in an injury or fatal accident.

BK0200500US.book 33
Door locks
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi- display. (Color liquid crystal display type
To lock or unlock the door from cle. Close the door. only)
the inside
Move the lock knob to the lock position to Lock out protection
lock the door. N00517301052
All doors should be kept locked while driv- If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-
ing. ation mode is in any mode other than OFF,
when you push the lock knob forward with 5
the drivers door or passengers door open,
the lock knob will automatically return to the
unlocked position.
Operation mode ON reminder

Key reminder system (except system (vehicles equipped with
for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key)
F.A.S.T.-key) N00503801157
N00549601250
1- Lock
2- Unlock
The drivers door can be unlocked without

using the lock knob by pulling on the inside If the drivers door is opened while the engine
door handle. is stopped and the operation mode is in any
If the ignition switch is turned off and the
mode other than OFF, the operation mode ON
drivers door is opened with the key in the
To lock the door without using buzzer will sound intermittently to remind
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will
you put the operation mode in OFF.
the key sound intermittently to remind you to remove
The warning display will be displayed on the
the key.
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked information screen in the multi-information
The warning display will be displayed on the
position. display. (Color liquid crystal display type
information screen in the multi-information
only)

BK0200500US.book 34
Power door locks
Power door locks To lock and unlock the doors To unlock the doors and liftgate
N00509301617 and liftgate N00563401119
You can select the functions to unlock the

NOTE
doors and liftgate either using the ignition
When locking or unlocking with the key on
Using the power door lock switch switch position or the engine switch, or
the drivers door, only the drivers door will
lock or unlock. using the selector lever position.
These functions are not activated when the
5 Repeated continuous operation between lock
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
and unlock could activate the power door
locking systems built-in protection circuit, vate or deactivate these functions, please
and prevent the system from operating. If contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper- dealer.
ating the power door lock switch.
Using the ignition switch or the

engine switch
1- Lock All doors and the liftgate will unlock when

2- Unlock the ignition switch is turned to the OFF or
LOCK position or the operation mode is
put in OFF.
All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked
or unlocked by pressing the power door lock
switch on the drivers or the front passenger Using the selector lever position
door.
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
the selector lever is moved to the P (PARK)
position with the ignition switch or the opera-
tion mode in ON.

BK0200500US.book 35
Child safety locks for rear door

door can be opened using the inside door han-
Child safety locks for rear dle.
door
N00509401298
WARNING
Always keep the doors tightly closed and
locked when driving. An unlocked door
may be accidentally opened by a passen-
ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
5
is a greater risk of someone being thrown
from the vehicle in an accident.
NOTE
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Liftgate (except for vehicles
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, 1- To lock equipped with the power
refer to a separate operation manual. 2- To release liftgate)
N00510101240
Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-

gers, especially children, from opening the WARNING
rear door using the inside door handle. It is dangerous to drive with the liftgate
A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro- open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
enter the passenger compartment.
vided on each rear door.
CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the cause unconsciousness and even death.
rear door cannot be opened using the inside When opening and closing the liftgate,
door handle. make sure that there are no people nearby
To open the rear door when the child safety and be careful not to hit your head or
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out- pinch your hands, neck, etc.
side door handle.
When the lever is in the release position (2),
the child safety lock is released and the rear

BK0200500US.book 36
Liftgate (except for vehicles equipped with the power liftgate)
CAUTION CAUTION To close

Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when Make sure there is no one standing nearby
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from when opening the liftgate. 1. Pull the liftgate grip (B) downward as
the exhaust could lead to burns. illustrated and release it before the liftgate
closes completely. Gently close the lift-
NOTE gate from the outside so that it is com-
NOTE The liftgate cannot be raised if it is not raised pletely closed.
5 Locking and unlocking the doors by using immediately after pressing the liftgate OPEN
power door locks (driver and front passenger switch.
side), keyless entry system, or F.A.S.T.-key If this happens, raise the liftgate again after
operation (vehicles equipped with the pressing the liftgate OPEN switch.
F.A.S.T.-key) also locks and unlocks the lift- It is not possible to open the liftgate while
gate. the battery is disconnected. If necessary, use
the inside liftgate release.
When the battery is reconnected, all doors
To open and the liftgate will be locked. Unlock them
before trying to open the liftgate.
1. After unlocking, push the liftgate open
switch (A) and raise the liftgate.
CAUTION
To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not
attempt to close the liftgate without releasing
the liftgate grip (B).
Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-
firm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgate
opens while driving the vehicle, objects
stored in the luggage compartment could fall
out into the road.

BK0200500US.book 37
Power liftgate (if so equipped)

Refer to Keyless entry system, Free-hand
NOTE Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
CAUTION
Gas struts (C) are installed in the locations Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
key) and Power door locks on pages 5-7,
illustrated in order to support the liftgate. loading and unloading luggage.
5-12 and 5-34 respectively.
Please observe the following in order to pre- The heat from the exhaust could cause burns.
vent damage or faulty operation: Before driving, make sure the power liftgate
Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts Operating the power liftgate is securely closed. If the liftgate opens while
when closing the liftgate. N00576000024 driving, objects stored in the luggage com-
Do not attach any plastic material, tape, partment could fall out into the road.
5
etc., to the gas struts. WARNING Do not install any accessory other than Mit-
Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts. The luggage area was not designed for subishi Motors Genuine parts on the power
Do not hang objects on the gas struts. people to ride in. Do not let your children liftgate. The weight of the accessory may
ride in or play in the luggage area. Riding cause faulty operation of the liftgate.
or playing in the luggage area could result Before closing the liftgate, make sure there is
in a serious accident and/or injury. no foreign object around the striker (A).
Before driving, make sure the power lift- If a foreign object matter gets into the striker,
gate is securely closed. it could prevent the power liftgate from clos-
If you drive with the power liftgate open, ing securely.
exhaust gas may enter the vehicle and
cause carbon monoxide poisoning.
To avoid injury, the power liftgate should
not be operated by children.
When opening and closing the power lift-
gate, make sure that there are no people
nearby and be careful not to hit your head
or pinch your hands, neck, etc.
Make sure the power liftgate is completely
Power liftgate (if so equipped) open before loading and unloading lug-
N00575900026
gage.
Before operating the power liftgate, unlock

the power liftgate by pushing the power door
lock switch or the unlock button on the key-
less entry system or F.A.S.T.-key.

BK0200500US.book 38
NOTE NOTE
When opening and closing the power lift- Do not start the engine while the power lift-
gate, do not place your hands near the arm gate is operating. The sudden operation pre-
(B) and gas struts (C). vention mechanism could operate, making
To prevent damage to the gas struts: the power liftgate stop intermittently while it
Do not push or pull on the gas struts. moves.
Do not wrap, attach or hang anything on the The power liftgate cannot be opened when
5 gas struts. the battery is discharged or disconnected.
The liftgate must be then opened using the
inside liftgate release.
Refer to Inside liftgate release on page
5-43.
WARNING If the keyless entry system or close switch is
To avoid accidental or unintended opera- operated when the power liftgate main
tion of the power liftgate, turn off the switch is off, the warning buzzer sounds 4
power liftgate main switch when not oper- times to notify the driver that the power lift-
ating the power liftgate. gate cannot be operated.
Do not turn off the power liftgate main The power liftgate does not operate normally
switch while the power liftgate is opening under the following conditions:
or closing. When parked on an incline
In strong winds
When the power liftgate is covered with
CAUTION snow
Automatic operation Do not apply excessive force to the power Repeated continuous opening and closing
N00576500029 liftgate when opening or closing it. Doing so operation of the power liftgate will activate a
could damage to the power liftgate. built-in protection circuit and switch the
When the power liftgate main switch (A) is
power liftgate to manual operation.
on, the power liftgate can be operated using
If one of the power liftgate switches is oper-
either the power liftgate switch on the ated while the power liftgate is operating, the
F.A.S.T.-key, the drivers side power liftgate power liftgate will reverse and return to the
switch or the open/close switches on the full open or close position.
power liftgate.
Refer to Operating conditions on page
5-39.

BK0200500US.book 39

<Using the open switch on the power lift- The operation mode is in ON with the
NOTE gate> selector lever in the P (PARK) position,
If the selector lever is moved from P
or the operation mode is in ACC or OFF.
(PARK) position to another position while The power liftgate is unlocked. The power liftgate is completely open.
the power liftgate is operating or completely The F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating
open, a warning buzzer will sound for Nothing is touching the auto reverse sen-
range (2.3 feet (70 cm) from the power sors on the power liftgate.
approximately 10 seconds to notify the
driver that the power liftgate is open.
liftgate open switch) and the power lift-
gate is locked.
If the battery or fuse is replaced while the
power liftgate is open, it cannot be closed
Operating the power liftgate using 5
automatically. The power liftgate can be closed automati- the F.A.S.T.-key or the drivers
In this case close the power liftgate manu- cally when all of the following conditions are side power liftgate switch
ally. met.
<Using the F.A.S.T.-key> After unlocking the doors and the power lift-
Operating conditions gate, the power liftgate can be operated by
The operation mode is in OFF.
pressing the switch (A) of the F.A.S.T.-key or
N00576100025 The power liftgate is completely open.
the drivers side power liftgate switch (B).
The power liftgate can be opened automati- Nothing is touching the auto reverse sen-
cally when all of the following conditions are sors (A) on the power liftgate.
met.
<Using the F.A.S.T.-key>
The operation mode is in OFF.

The power liftgate is completely closed.
The power liftgate is unlocked.
<Using the drivers side power liftgate

switch>
The operation mode is in ON with the

selector lever in the P (PARK) position.
The power liftgate is completely closed.
<Using the drivers side power liftgate switch
The power liftgate is unlocked.
or the close switch on the power liftgate>

BK0200500US.book 40

While open: The warning buzzer sounds 3 If the drivers side power liftgate switch is
times and the power liftgate pressed once while the power liftgate is oper-
completely closes. ating, the warning buzzer will sound once and
If the power liftgate switch is pressed once the power liftgate will move in the direction
while the power liftgate is operating, the opposite to the one in which it was operating.
warning buzzer sounds once and the liftgate
will reverse and return to the full open or WARNING
closed position.
5 When operating the power liftgate, make
sure that there are no people near the
NOTE power liftgate and that there is sufficient
If the power liftgate switch is pressed 3 or space behind and above the vehicle.
more times in a row, the power liftgate may
not operate normally.
If this occurs, wait a short time before again Opening the power liftgate using
pressing the power liftgate switch twice. the open switch
<Using the drivers side power liftgate The power liftgate can be opened by pressing
switch> the open switch (C).
If the drivers side power liftgate switch is
pressed for more than 1 second, the power
liftgate will operate after the buzzer sounds
and the hazard warning flasher blinks 2 times.
<Using the F.A.S.T.-key> The power liftgate operates as follows.
If the power liftgate switch is pressed twice in
a row, the power liftgate operates after the While closed: The warning buzzer sounds 4
warning buzzer sounds and the hazard warn- times and the power liftgate
ing flasher blinks 2 times. completely opens.
The power liftgate operates as follows: While open: The warning buzzer sounds 3
times and the power liftgate
While closed: The warning buzzer sounds 4 completely closes.
times and the power liftgate
completely opens. If the open switch is pressed while the power
liftgate and all doors are unlocked, the power

BK0200500US.book 41

liftgate will open after the warning buzzer If the close switch is pressed once while the
sounds 4 times and the hazard warning power liftgate is closing, the warning buzzer
WARNING
The auto reverse mechanism will not oper-
flasher blinks 2 times. sounds once and the power liftgate opens.
ate just before the power liftgate becomes
fully closed. Therefore, be careful not to
NOTE NOTE trap a hand, part of your body or an
When you are carrying the F.A.S.T.-key with If the close switch is again pressed once object at this time.
the power liftgate is locked, the power lift- while the power liftgate is operating in the When the power liftgate is closed manu-
gate can be opened by pressing the open
switch even if the power liftgate is locked.
opening direction, the warning buzzer will
sound once and the power liftgate will close.
ally, the auto reverse mechanism will not
operate.
5
If the auto reverse mechanism has been
repeatedly activated, the power liftgate
Closing the power liftgate using may stop and then, depending on its posi-
Auto reverse tion, may abruptly open or close. Once the
the close switch N00576200026
power liftgate is completely closed or
If the auto reverse sensors (A) on either side open, automatic operation will be
The power liftgate can be closed by pressing of the power liftgate detect that something is resumed.
the close switch (D) on the power liftgate. being trapped by the closing power liftgate,
the warning buzzer will sound once and the
liftgate will automatically reverse direction CAUTION
and return to the full open position. Do not damage the auto reverse sensor, when
loading or unloading luggage. If the sensor is
damaged, the power liftgate will not close
automatically.
Drop prevention mechanism
After the power liftgate has opened automati-

cally, if it is detected that the power liftgate is
If the close switch on the power liftgate is dropping due to factors such as accumulated
pressed, the power liftgate will close after the snow, the power liftgate will close automati-
warning buzzer sounds 3 times and the hazard cally.
warning flasher blinks 2 times.

BK0200500US.book 42

A warning buzzer will sound continuously
while the drop prevention mechanism is oper-
CAUTION WARNING
The auto reverse will not operate while the When the power liftgate is closed manu-
ating.
sudden operation prevention mechanism is ally, the auto reverse mechanism will not
activated. operate even if something is trapped
NOTE under the liftgate.
If snow has accumulated on the power lift-
gate, remove it before operating the power Manual operation
5 liftgate.
N00576300027
CAUTION
Do not install any accessory other than Mit- Make sure there is no one around the power
subishi Motors Genuine parts on the power When the power liftgate main switch is off,
liftgate when opening it.
liftgate. The drop prevention mechanism the power liftgate can be manually opened
may be activated due to the weight of the and closed.
accessory.
After unlocking the power liftgate, push the NOTE
The drop prevention mechanism could be
power liftgate open switch (A) and pull up The liftgate cannot be opened if it is not
activated if you attempt to close the liftgate
raised immediately after pressing the power
manually immediately after the power lift- the power liftgate.
liftgate open switch.
gate has been completely opened automati-
If this happens, raise the liftgate again after
cally.
pressing the liftgate open switch.
When the battery is discharged or discon-
nected, the power liftgate cannot be opened
Sudden operation prevention even manually. At that time, the liftgate can
mechanism be opened only by using the inside liftgate
release. Refer to Inside liftgate release on
page 5-43.
If the engine is started while the power lift-
gate is operating, the power liftgate may
intermittently move or stop moving to pre- To close the power liftgate, pull the power
vent the power liftgate from moving abruptly. liftgate grip (B) downward and release it
Approximately 10 seconds after the power before the power liftgate is completely
liftgate has fully closed or opened, power lift- closed, and then gently close the power lift-
gate operation will again resume. gate from the outside.

BK0200500US.book 43
Inside liftgate release
WARNING NOTE
Keep your hands and fingers away from Repeated continuous operation of the handle
the power liftgate while the power liftgate could activate the protection circuit and tem-
easy closer is activated. To return the porarily prevent the power liftgate easy
power liftgate to the slightly ajar position closer from operating.
while the power liftgate easy closer is acti- If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before
vated, press the power liftgate open operating the power liftgate easy closer
switch. again.
5
CAUTION Inside liftgate release
N00523101084
Do not touch the latch (A) on the inside of
CAUTION the power liftgate. The power liftgate easy The inside liftgate release is designed to pro-
The auto reverse mechanism will not operate closer could operate and catch your fingers. vide a way to open the liftgate if the battery is
when the power liftgate is closed manually. dead or disconnected.
Therefore be especially careful not to trap a The liftgate release lever (see illustration) is
hand or finger. mounted on the liftgate.
Do not fully close the power liftgate with
your hand still on the power liftgate grip.
Doing so could trap and injure your hand or
arm.
Power liftgate easy closer

N00576400028
The power liftgate easy closer is designed to

help the power liftgate close securely.
If the power liftgate is closed to a position NOTE
where it is detected as being ajar, it closes The power liftgate easy closer operates even
automatically. when the power liftgate main switch is OFF. You and your family should familiarize your-
selves with the location and operation of the
liftgate release lever.

BK0200500US.book 44
Theft-alarm system
1. Except for vehicles equipped with the
To open CAUTION F.A.S.T.-key, remove the key from the
Always keep the release lever lid on the lift-
1. Open the lid (A) inside of the liftgate. ignition switch.
gate closed when driving so that your lug-
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
gage cannot accidentally bump the lever and
open the liftgate. key, put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Make sure that the engine hood is closed.
5 Theft-alarm system
N00510201267
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide

protection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the armed stage, the sec-
ond is the alarm stage, and third is the dis-
2. Move the lever (B) to open the liftgate. armed stage. If triggered, the system
Liftgate Power liftgate provides both audible and visual alarm sig-
nals.
CAUTION
Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm
system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm
to malfunction.
Armed stage
N00510301200
3. Push out on the liftgate to open it.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the
system as described below.

BK0200500US.book 45
Theft-alarm system
3. Lock all doors and the liftgate by using 4. The system has entered the armed stage
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.- after about 20 seconds, when the theft-
NOTE
The theft-alarm system can be activated
key operation. alarm indicator (A) flashing becomes
when people are riding inside the vehicle or
slower.
Arm the system and leave when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to dental activation of the alarm, do not set the
flash while the system is in the armed system to the system armed mode while peo-
stage. ple are riding in the vehicle.
NOTE
For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm
sensor, if the turn signal lights do not flash
5
If the engine hood is open, the theft-alarm after the locking and unlocking operation
indicator (A) illuminates and the system can- using the keyless entry system or the
not enter the armed stage. F.A.S.T.-key operation, the theft-alarm sys-
The system enters the armed stage about 20 tem may be malfunctioning.
seconds after the engine hood is closed. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
The system will be disarmed if, while the Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A) If the answerback function (flashing of the
theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all
on the instrument panel flashes for confir- doors and the liftgate are unlocked by using turn signal lights by locking and unlocking
mation. the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key the doors and the liftgate) is deactivated, the
operation. turn signal lights do not flash after the lock-
The system will be disarmed if, while the ing and unlocking operation.
theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the fol- For information on the answerback function,
lowing operation is performed. refer to Keyless entry system on pages 5-7
and 5-28 and To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
Except for vehicles equipped with the
key on page 5-14.
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm
sensor, the theft-alarm system could be acti-
key, if the operation mode is put in ON. vated in the following situations.
Using a car washer.
The system will not be armed if a door, the
liftgate or the engine hood is not completely Taking the vehicle on a ferry.
closed. If this happens, rearm the system as Parking in an automated car park.
described above. Leaving someone or a pet in the vehicle.
Leaving a window or the sunroof open.
Leaving an unstable object such as a stuffed
toy or accessory in the vehicle.

BK0200500US.book 46
Theft-alarm system
Attempt an unauthorized moving of the
NOTE vehicle. (the vehicle inclination detection
NOTE
During a continuous impact or vibration by The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min-
function)
hail, thunder, etc. utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will
Detect a motion in the vehicle. (the inte-
According to the situations, deactivate the automatically shut off to save battery power.
vehicle inclination detection function and rior intrusion detection function) The system will then be rearmed until the
the interior intrusion detection function. Disconnect the battery terminal. proper disarming step is taken.
Refer to Theft-alarm system: To deactivate The alarm will resume if unauthorized
5 the vehicle inclination detection function
and the interior intrusion detection func-
Type of alarm actions are taken again, even if the alarm has
stopped.
N00582500024
tion on page 5-46.
For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm When the alarm is activated:
sensor, the sensitivity of the interior intru- Alarm deactivation
sion detection function can be adjusted. For 1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-
further details, please contact an authorized utes. N00582600025
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. After 3 minutes the headlights automati- The alarm can be deactivated in the following
cally shut off. ways.
2. The horn (the siren for vehicles equipped
Alarm stage with the interior alarm sensor) will sound By using the keyless entry system or the
N00510401214
intermittently for 3 minutes. F.A.S.T.-key operation to lock or unlock
The alarm will be activated if any of the fol- the doors and liftgate.
lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
the system is armed. Horn or siren sounds! tion or put the operation mode in ON.
Headlights blink on and off!
One of the doors and the liftgate is opened
To deactivate the vehicle inclina-
without using the keyless entry system or
the F.A.S.T.-key operation. tion detection function and the
The engine hood is opened. interior intrusion detection func-
tion (vehicles equipped with the
Also, for vehicles equipped with the interior interior alarm sensor)
alarm sensor, the alarm will be activated if N00582700026
any of the following occur.
The vehicle inclination detection function and
the interior intrusion detection function can

BK0200500US.book 47
Theft-alarm system
be deactivated when parking in automated car All doors and the liftgate are unlocked by
parks or leaving pets in the vehicle.
NOTE using the keyless entry system or the
The function will be activated again if the
F.A.S.T.-key operation.
1. Except for vehicles equipped with the following operation is performed.
F.A.S.T.-key, remove the key from the If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked Disarm...by using the keyless entry system or
ignition switch. using the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation
F.A.S.T.-key operation.
If the ignition switch is turned to the ON
key, put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Raise and hold the wiper and washer
or ACC position or the operation mode is
put in ON or ACC.
5
switch to the MIST position for about 3
seconds. The buzzer will sound once and
the function will be deactivated.
Disarmed stage
N00510501172
To activate the function again, raise and hold
the wiper and washer switch to the MIST The system will be disarmed if the following
position for about 3 seconds. operation is performed. NOTE
The buzzer will sound twice and the function If the UNLOCK button on the remote control
will be activated. Except for vehicles equipped with the transmitter, or the drivers or front passen-
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is gers door lock/unlock switch is pressed
turned to the ON position. when all doors and the liftgate are closed and
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- no door is opened within approximately 30
key, if the operation mode is put in ON. seconds, re-arming will automatically occur.
The amount of time after unlocking until the
vehicle relocks automatically can be
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
refer to a separate operation manual.
Once the system has been disarmed, it can-
not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
ing procedure.

BK0200500US.book 48
Power window control
Testing the theft-alarm system Power window control WARNING

N00510601144 N00510800383 Never leave the vehicle without carrying
Use the following procedure to test the sys- the key.
tem: Never leave children or unreliable adults
unattended inside the vehicle.
1. Lower the drivers window.
2. Arm the system as explained in Armed Main switch
5 stage. N00548701137
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
comes on and flashes for approximately The main switch located on the drivers door
20 seconds. can be used to operate all the windows.
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the A window can be opened or closed by operat-
drivers side door by using the inside door ing the corresponding switch.
lock knob. Open the door. 1- Open (down) Press the switch down to open the window,
5. Make sure that the horn (the siren for 2- Close (up) and pull up the switch to close it.
vehicles equipped with the interior alarm If the drivers door window switch is fully
sensor) sounds intermittently and the pressed down/pulled up, the drivers door
headlights blink when a door is opened.
NOTE
6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors Never try to operate the main switch and
sub-switch in different directions at the same
and the liftgate by using the keyless entry
time. This will freeze the window in posi-
system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation. tion.
Operating the power windows repeatedly
with the engine stopped will run down the
battery. Use the window switches only while
the engine is running.
WARNING
Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

BK0200500US.book 49
Power window control

window automatically opens/closes com- stopped. However, once the drivers door or
pletely.
Sub switch the front passengers door is opened, the
N00548800102
If you want to stop the window movement, power windows cannot be operated.
operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
tion.
Lock switch
N00549001166
When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-

senger door switches cannot be used to open 5
or close the door windows, and the main
switch will open or close only the drivers
door window. To unlock the switch, press it
again.
1- Close
2- Open
1- Drivers door window switch Each sub-switch can be used for its own pas-
2- Front passenger door window switch senger door window, unless the drivers win-
3- Left rear door window switch dow lock switch is activated.
4- Right rear door window switch
5- Lock switch
NOTE
The rear door windows open only half-way.
1- Lock
Power window timer function 2- Unlock
N00548901155
The power windows can be run up or down

when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON.
The door windows can be opened or closed
for a 30-second period after the engine is

BK0200500US.book 50
Sunroof (if so equipped)
WARNING CAUTION What to do if you hear wind

Before driving with a child in the vehicle, The safety mechanism is deactivated while buffeting when driving
be sure to lock the window switch to make the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe- N00551400014
it inoperative. Children tampering with cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
the switch could easily trap their hands or the door window opening. Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
heads in the window. Do not deliberately trap your hands or head ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
in order to activate the safety mechanism. or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
wind buffeting when driving with one or both
5 Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
sonal injury could result. rear door windows down or partially opened.
Safety mechanism (Drivers
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
door window only) mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
N00528801129
NOTE door windows open, open the front door win-
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the The safety mechanism can be activated if the dows as well as the rear door windows to
door window is automatically lowered a little. driving conditions or other circumstances minimize the condition.
After the obstruction is removed, pull up the cause the door window to be subjected to a
switch again to close the door window. physical shock similar to that caused by
trapped hand or head. Sunroof (if so equipped)
If the battery terminals are disconnected or
WARNING the fuse for power window is replaced, the
N00511001682
If the battery terminals are disconnected safety mechanism will be cancelled and the The sunroof can be opened and closed with
or the fuse for electric window is replaced, door window will not automatically the ignition switch or the operation mode in
the safety mechanism will be cancelled. open/close completely. ON.
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
injury could result. drivers door window switch until the win-
dow has been fully closed.
Following this, release the switch, raise the
CAUTION switch once again and hold it in this condi-
The safety mechanism is deactivated just tion for at least 1 second, then release it. You
before the door window closes. This allows should now be able to operate the drivers
the door window to close completely. There- door window in the normal function.
fore be especially careful that fingers are not
trapped in the door window opening.

BK0200500US.book 51
Sunroof (if so equipped)

After that, the sunroof can be set the initial-
To open NOTE ized state in the following procedure.
Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos-
Press the switch (1), the sunroof automati- ing the sunshade. 1. Move the sunroof in slide open position.
cally opens. 2. Press the tilt up switch (2) continually in
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. 10 seconds.
Sunroof timer function 3. The sunroof will be moved to tilt up posi-
NOTE tion automatically bit by bit.
The sunroof can be operated when the igni- 4. The initialize is completed when the sun- 5
The sunroof stops just before reaching the
fully open position. If the vehicle is driven tion switch or the operation mode is in ON. roof is stopped at tilt up position.
with the sunroof in this position, wind buf- The sunroof can be opened or closed for a 30- If the sunroof does not return to normal,
feting is lower than with the sunroof fully second period after the engine is stopped. consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
open. However, when the drivers door or the front dealer.
passenger door is opened, the sunroof cannot
be operated. Turn on the ignition switch again NOTE
To close to operate. The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
Press the switch (3), the sunroof automati- Safety mechanism cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi-
cally closes. cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. hand or head.
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing
sunroof opening, the safety mechanism will
To tilt up cause the sunroof to re-open automatically. CAUTION
The opened sunroof will become operational The safety mechanism is deactivated while
When the switch (2) is pressed, the rear of the again after a few seconds. the switch (2) is pressed. Therefore be espe-
sunroof raises for ventilation. cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or the sunroof opening.
more times consecutively, normal closing of Do not deliberately trap your hands or head
To tilt down the sunroof will be aborted. in order to activate the safety mechanism.
As an emergency measure, the sunroof can be Personal injury and malfunction of the sun-
Press the switch (3). closed bit by bit until the sunroof is com- roof could result.
pletely closed by repeatedly pressing the
switch (2).
BK0200500US.book 52
Parking brake
Sunshade NOTE NOTE

When leaving the vehicle unattended, be Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the
The sunshade can be opened or closed manu- sure to close the sunroof and carry the key. engine turned off will run down the battery.
ally while the sunroof is closed. Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro- Operate the sunroof only while the engine is
zen closed (after snowfall or during extreme running.
cold).
Do not sit on or place heavy luggage on the
Parking brake
5 sunroof or roof opening edge.
N00511401400
Do not apply any force that may cause dam-
age to the sunroof. To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
Release the switch when the sunroof has plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
reached a completely open or completely and then move the selector lever to the P
closed position. (PARK) position.
If the sunroof does not operate when the sun-
roof switch is operated, release the switch
and check whether something is trapped by
the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, have the
CAUTION sunroof checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Do not attempt to close the sunshade when
the sunroof is opened. Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if a ski
carrier or a roof carrier is installed. Depend-
Be careful that hands are not trapped when
ing on the model of ski carrier or roof carrier,
closing the sunshade.
the sunroof may contact the carrier when the
sunroof is tilted up.
Be sure to close the sunroof completely
WARNING when washing the vehicle or when leaving
Do not stick your head, hands or anything the vehicle.
else in the sunroof opening. Do not put any wax on the weatherstrip
Before operating the sunroof, make sure (black rubber) around the sunroof opening. If
that nothing can be trapped (head, hands, it is waxed, the weatherstrip cannot maintain
fingers, etc.). a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
Never leave a child unreliable adults unat- After washing the vehicle or after rain be
tended inside the vehicle. sure to wipe off any water that is on the sun-
roof before operating it.

BK0200500US.book 53
To apply To deactivate CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
released, the warning display will appear on
the information screen in the multi-informa-
tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
5
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
Warning light
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the 1- Pull the lever up slightly.
button at the end of hand grip. 2- Press and hold the button at the end of
When the parking brake is set and the the hand grip.
ignition switch is in the ON position, 3- Push the lever downward.
Warning display
the brake warning light in the instru-
ment cluster will come on. When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
Before driving, be sure to release the and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
parking brake. downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
Steering wheel height and

reach adjustment
N00511501241
To adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position, move the lever upward or down-
ward while moving the steering wheel to the
desired position.

BK0200500US.book 54
Inside rearview mirror
WARNING To adjust the mirror position

Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
1 view mirror while driving. This can be It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
dangerous.
left/right to adjust its position.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ing.
2
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the
5 view through the rear window.
1- Wheel lock To adjust the vertical mirror

2- Release position
It is possible to move the mirror up and down

WARNING to adjust its position.
After adjusting, make sure the lock lever
is secured in the locked (1) position.
Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This can be danger- To reduce the glare
ous.
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the
mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
Inside rearview mirror reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
N00511601327 cles behind you during night driving.
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after
making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

BK0200500US.book 55
Outside rearview mirrors

ACC position or the operation mode is put
WARNING in ON or ACC.
Your passengers side mirror is convex.
Move the lever (A) to the same side as the
The objects you see in the mirror will look
mirror you wish to adjust.
smaller and farther away than they
appear in a regular flat mirror.
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-
tance of vehicles following you when
changing lanes.
5
To adjust the mirror position
1- Daytime position N00549101154
2- Night position The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted

when the ignition switch is in the ON or
Outside rearview mirrors L- Left outside mirror adjustment

N00512201232
R- Right outside mirror adjustment
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after
making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle. Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-
tion.
WARNING 1- Up
Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear- 2- Down
view mirrors while driving. This can be 3- Right
dangerous. 4- Left
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ing.
NOTE
After adjusting, return the lever to the
(OFF) position (C).

BK0200500US.book 56
Ignition switch
To fold the mirror Type 1 Type 2

N00549201100
The outside mirror can be folded in towards

the side window to prevent damage when
parking in tight locations.
Ignition switch LOCK (Type 2)

N00512401696
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand The engine is off and the steering wheel is
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- locked. The key can be inserted and removed
key).] only when the switch is in this position.
For information on operations for vehicles
Door mirror heater (if so equipped)
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- OFF (Type 1)
N00549301228
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
When the rear window defogger switch is Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key): The engine is off. The key can be inserted and
pressed with the engine running, the outside
Engine switch on page 5-16. removed only when the switch is in this posi-
rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted.
tion.
Current will flow through the heater element
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or [Except for vehicles equipped with the
condensation. Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- ACC
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while ter (F.A.S.T.-key).]
the defogger is on. Allows operation of electrical accessories
The heater will be turned off automatically in with the engine off.
about 15 to 20 minutes depending on the out-
side temperature.

BK0200500US.book 57
Ignition switch
ON NOTE
All accessories can be used. The time until the power cuts out can be
changed to about 60 minutes.
The ACC power auto-cutout function can
START be deactivated.
Engages the starter. Release the key when the For details, we recommend you to consult an 5
engine starts.It will automatically return to authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
the ON position.
Communication System, screen operations
can be used to make the adjustment.
NOTE Refer to the separate Mitsubishi Multi-Com- NOTE
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic munications System manual for details. The key cannot be removed unless the selec-
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code tor lever is set to the P (PARK) position,
which the transponder inside the key sends which allows the ignition switch to turn to
the OFF position.
must match the one registered to the immobi- To remove the key
lizer computer. (Refer to Electronic immo-
N00550901211
bilizer on page 5-4.)
Type 2
Type 1
ACC power auto-cutout func- When removing the key, first set the selector
When removing the key, first set the selector
tion lever to the P (PARK) position, and then
lever to the P (PARK) position, and push
N00539601071 the key in at the ACC position and keep it
turn the key to the OFF position and
After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the depressed until it is turned to the LOCK
remove it.
ignition switch in the ACC position, the position, and remove it.
function automatically cuts out the power for
the audio system and other electric devices
that can be operated with that position.
When the ignition switch is turned from the
ACC position, the power is supplied again
to those devices.

BK0200500US.book 58
Steering wheel lock (if so equipped)
Steering wheel lock (if so To lock

equipped)
N00512501222
Remove the key at the LOCK position.
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
key).]
To unlock
5 For information on operations for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- Turn the key to the ACC position while
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to moving the steering wheel slightly.
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
NOTE (F.A.S.T.-key): Steering wheel lock on CAUTION
page5-22 Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
The key cannot be removed unless the selec-
tor lever is set to the P (PARK) position, [Except for vehicles equipped with the
which allows the ignition switch to turn to
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- NOTE
the LOCK position.
ter (F.A.S.T.-key).] (Vehicles with steering
If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
lock system) lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn
CAUTION the key from LOCK to ACC. Firmly
If the engine is stopped while driving, the turn the steering wheel to the left or to the
power brake booster will stop functioning right as you turn the key.
and greater effort for braking will be
required. Also, the power steering system
will not function and it will require greater Starting the engine
effort to manually steer the vehicle. N00512601799
Do not leave the key in the ON position for
a long time when the engine is not running. [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
This will cause the battery to run down. Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
Do not turn the key to the START position key).]
when the engine is running. It will damage For information on operation for vehicles
the starter motor. equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to

BK0200500US.book 59
Starting the engine

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter 2. Insert the ignition key.
(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting on page5-12.
WARNING 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down with
Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
your right foot.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the ventilated area any longer than is needed
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the P
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and (PARK) position.
ter (F.A.S.T.-key).] 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
extremely poisonous, could build up and
cause serious injury or death. tion and make certain that all warning
Tips for starting lights are functioning properly before
5
starting the engine.
Do not operate the starter motor continu- CAUTION 6. Turn the ignition switch to the START
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this Do not push-start the vehicle. position without pressing the accelerator
could run the battery down or damage the Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive pedal. Release the ignition switch when
starter motor. If the engine does not start, at high speeds until the engine has had a the engine starts.
turn the ignition switch back to the OFF chance to warm up.
or LOCK position, wait a few seconds, Release the ignition switch as soon as the NOTE
and then try again. Trying repeatedly with engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
will be damaged
the engine or starter motor still turning up. These will disappear as the engine warms
will damage the starter mechanism. up.
If the engine will not start because the bat-
tery is weak or discharged, refer to Starting the engine
Jump-starting the engine (on page 8-2) When the engine is hard to start
for instructions. This model is equipped with an electronically
A longer warm up period will only con- controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys- After several attempts, you may experience
sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up tem that automatically controls fuel injection. that the engine still does not start.
enough for driving when the bar graph of There is usually no need to depress the accel-
engine coolant temperature display starts erator pedal when starting the engine. 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
to move or the low coolant temperature The starter should not be run for more than 15 as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
indicator goes out. Refer to Engine cool- seconds at a time. window defogger, are turned off.
ant temperature display on page 5-128 or To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
Low coolant temperature indicator on between attempts to restart the engine.
page 5-166.
1. Make sure all occupants are properly
seated with seat belts fastened.
BK0200500US.book 60
Automatic transaxle (if so equipped)

2. While depressing the brake pedal, press from a standstill even with the selector lever
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it in the D (DRIVE) position. Automatic transaxle (if so
there, then crank the engine. Release the This occurs because the transaxle has not equipped)
accelerator pedal, immediately after the warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a N00513200216
engine starts. problem. If this occurs, place the selector
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine lever in the P (PARK) position and let the Automatic transaxle will automatically
could be flooded with too much gasoline. engine idle for at least 10 minutes. change its gear depending on road and driv-
While depressing the brake pedal, push The transaxle will warm up, and you will be ing conditions. This helps achieve smooth
5 the accelerator pedal all the way down able to start normally. driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
and hold it there, then crank the engine for Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up Also you can manually shift up and shift
5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch operation. down the transaxle. Refer to Sports mode
to the OFF or LOCK position and on page 5-65.
release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few
Using the MIVEC engine
seconds, and then crank the engine again DRIVING UPHILL
for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the
brake pedal, but do not push the accelera- The MIVEC engine automatically switches
its intake-valve control between a low-speed The transaxle prevents unnecessary upshifts
tor pedal. Release the ignition key if the
mode and a high-speed mode in accordance even when the accelerator pedal is released
engine starts. If the engine fails to start,
with driving conditions for maximum engine and ensures smooth driving.
repeat these procedures. If the engine still
will not start, contact your local Mitsubi- performance.
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of DRIVING DOWNHILL
your choice for assistance. NOTE
To protect the engine, the high-speed mode According to the conditions, the transaxle
Startability of automatic transaxle may not be selected while the engine coolant will automatically shift to a lower gear to
temperature is low. In such a case, the engine achieve stronger engine braking. This may
vehicle and CVT vehicle with revolutions do not rise to over 5,000 rpm
help reduce your need to use the service
ambient temperature of -22 F (-30 even if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
brake.
C) or lower
When the ambient temperature is -22 F (-30

C) or lower, it may not be possible to start

BK0200500US.book 61

The individual gears are selected automati- Set the selector lever in the gate to
NOTE cally, depending on the position of the gear
During the break-in period or immediately
operate.
selector lever, the speed of the vehicle and the
after reconnecting the battery, your vehicle
position of the accelerator pedal.
may not shift smoothly. This does not indi- WARNING
cate a problem in the transaxle. Shifting will
Always press the brake pedal when shift-
become smoother once the transaxle has
ing the selector lever into a gear from the
been shifted several times by the electronic
N (NEUTRAL) position.
control system.
When beginning to drive, do not shift the 5
selector lever from the N (NEUTRAL)
position while pressing the accelerator
Selector lever operation pedal. This will cause the vehicle to
N00513801408 jump forward or backward.
As an additional safety precaution, models
equipped with an automatic transaxle have a
shift-lock device that holds the selector lever NOTE
in the P (PARK) position. To move the To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,
selector lever from the P (PARK) position make sure you stop briefly at each position.
After operating, check the position in the
to another position, follow the steps below.
multi-information display.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down. If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
2. Move the selector lever to the desired the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
selector lever from being moved from the
position.
P (PARK) position.
For a shift indicated by in the illustra-

NOTE
The selector lever cannot be moved from P tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
(PARK) to another position if the operation the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the brake selector lever before depressing the brake
pedal is not pressed and held down. Set the selector lever in the gate to pedal, the selector lever may become
operate while the brake pedal is immovable.
The transaxle has 6 forward gears and 1 depressed.

reverse gear.

BK0200500US.book 62

3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
When the selector lever cannot be Selector lever position display
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
shifted from the P (PARK) posi- gently as shown to remove the cover.
N00513901441
tion When the operation mode is put in ON, the

N00563101044 selector lever position is shown on the multi-
When the selector lever cannot be shifted information display.
from the P (PARK) position to another
position while the brake pedal is pressed and
5 held down with the operation mode in ON,
Type 1 Type 2
the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mech-

anism may be malfunctioning.
Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
selector lever as follows. foot.
5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
applied. the N (NEUTRAL) position while
2. Stop the engine if it is running. pressing the screwdriver down. Warning display
N00514001263
[For vehicles equipped mono-color liquid

crystal display meter]
When the selector lever position

indicator blinks
When the selector lever position indicator

blinks while you are driving, there could be a
malfunction in the automatic transmission

BK0200500US.book 63

system or A/T fluid temperature becomes in the multi-information display while you
abnormally high.
CAUTION are driving, there could be a malfunction in
If a malfunction occurs in the A/T while
the automatic transaxle.
driving, the indicator will brink.
In this case, immediately park your vehicle
in a safe place and follow these procedures:
[If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec-
ond), the A/T fluid is overheating.]
Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
turn off the engine. Move the selector lever
5
to the P (PARK) position and open the
bonnet. Keep the engine, idling.
After a while, move the selector lever into
any position other than P (PARK) position
and confirm that the indicator stops blinking.
It is safe to continue driving if the indicator
NOTE no longer blinks.
A indicator does brink only the condition If the indicator continues blinking or blinks
that the A/T positional switch is broken. intermittently, have your vehicle inspected
It does not indicate in normal driving condi- by an authorised Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
tion. [If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2
seconds), the A/T safety device may be oper-
ating due to a malfunction.]
Have the vehicle inspected by an authorised
Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
[For vehicles equipped with color liquid

or
When the warning display or the warn-

ing display appears on the information screen
BK0200500US.book 64
CAUTION Selector lever positions WARNING

If a malfunction occurs in the automatic N00514201395 Never move the selector lever to the N
transaxle while driving, the warning dis- (NEUTRAL) position while driving since
P PARK you could accidentally slip it into the P
play or the warning display will appear (PARK) or R (REVERSE) position,
on the information screen in the multi-infor- damaging the transaxle.
mation display. This position locks the transaxle to prevent To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
the vehicle from moving. The engine can be
5 In this case, immediately park your vehicle
in a safe place and follow these procedures: started from the P (PARK) position.
stopped on a slope, the engine should be
started in the P (PARK) position, not in
When warning display is showing R REVERSE To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
The automatic transaxle fluid is overheating. on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the N (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
selector lever in the P position, and open Move the lever to this position only after the ing into or out of N (NEUTRAL) posi-
the engine hood with the engine running to vehicle has come to a complete stop. tion.
allow the engine to cool down. After a while,
confirm that the warning display is no CAUTION
longer showing. It is safe to continue driving Never shift into the P (PARK) or R D DRIVE
if the display is no longer showing. If the (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
warning display remains or flashes fre- motion. If the lever is shifted into the P This position is used for most city and high-
quently, have your vehicle inspected by an (PARK) or R (REVERSE) position while way driving. The transaxle will automatically
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a the vehicle is in motion, the transaxle may be change its gear depending on road and driv-
repair facility of your choice. damaged.
ing conditions.
When warning display is showing
It may be that there is something unusual N NEUTRAL CAUTION
happening in the automatic transaxle, caus- To prevent transaxle damage, never shift into
ing a safety device to activate. Have your the D (DRIVE) position from the R
vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubi- At this position, the transaxle is disengaged. (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your It is the same as the neutral position on a motion.
choice as soon as possible. manual transaxle and should be used when
the vehicle is not moving for an extended
length of time during driving, such as in a
traffic jam.
BK0200500US.book 65
L LOW NOTE
For vehicles equipped with the sportronic SHIFT SHIFT
This position is for driving up very steep hills steering wheel paddle shifter, sports mode DOWN UP
and for engine braking at low speeds when can be selected by shifting gears even when
driving down steep hills. the selector lever is in the D (DRIVE) or
L (LOW) position.
Also, you can return to the D operation in
WARNING
this position can be used for maximum
any of following ways.
When returning to D operation, the selec-
5
engine braking. tor lever position display will change to D
Be very careful not to shift into L (DRIVE) position.
(LOW) suddenly. Pull the +(SHIFT UP) side sportronic steer-
Sudden engine braking may cause the ing wheel paddle shifter forward (toward
tires to skid. the driver) for over 2 seconds.
Select this position according to the road Stop the vehicle
conditions and vehicle speed. + (SHIFT UP)
When the paddle shifter is operated with the
selector lever in the L (LOW) position,
The transaxle shifts up by one gear with
gear is not shifted because the selectable each operation.
Sports mode shift range is limited.
When the selector lever is in the L (LOW) - (SHIFT DOWN)
N00514401430
position and sports mode is selected, the The transaxle shifts down by one gear with
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven vehicle will stay in sports mode and not each operation.
with the selector lever in the D (DRIVE) or return to L (LOW) driving even if the
L (LOW) position manual shifting can be vehicle is stopped.
selected by pulling one of the shift paddles CAUTION
towards you. In sports mode, the driver must execute
upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
road conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
Repeated continuous operation of the selec-
tor lever or the sportronic steering wheel
paddle shifter will continuously switch shift
position.

BK0200500US.book 66
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

On vehicles with a sportronic steering wheel When pulling away from a standstill on a While driving in sports mode, the sports
paddle shifter, gears may not change when slippery road, push the selector lever forward mode display may change to show D and
the lateral paddle shifters are operated at the to the +(SHIFT UP) position to select 2nd shifting in sports mode may no longer be
same time. gear. Push the selector lever to the - (SHIFT possible.
DOWN) side to shift back to 1st gear. This indicates that controls to drive in the
D position are operating normally in order
5 NOTE Sports mode display to lower the temperature of the automatic
Gears can only be selected in a forward transaxle fluid; it does not indicate a mal-
N00538801180
direction from 1st gear to 6th gear. To function. Once the temperature of the auto-
reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector In sports mode, the currently selected gear is matic transaxle fluid drops, shifting in the
lever to the R or P position. displayed on the information screen in the sports mode will be possible again.
To maintain good running performance, the multi-information display.
transaxle may refuse to perform an upshift
when the selector lever is moved to the
Type 1 Type 2
Operation of the automatic
+(SHIFT UP) position at certain vehicle
speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the
transaxle
N00514501369
engine, the transaxle may refuse to perform a
downshift when the lever is moved to the -
(SHIFT DOWN) position at certain vehicle
CAUTION
speeds. When this happens, a buzzer sounds Before selecting a gear with the engine run-
to indicate that a downshift is not going to ning and the vehicle stationary, firmly
take place. depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
Downward shifts are made automatically cle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
when the vehicle slows down. When the
gear is engaged, especially when the engine
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically
speed or idle speed is high, or with the air
selected.
conditioning operating.
The upward shift may be made automatically
Do not release the brake pedal until you are
in sports mode when the engine revolutions
ready to drive away.
rises and approaches the tachometers red
Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
zone (the red-coloured part of the tachometer
all times.
dial).
Using the left foot could cause driver move-
ment delay in case of an emergency.

BK0200500US.book 67

the accelerator to the floor. The automatic
CAUTION transaxle will automatically downshift.
CAUTION
To prevent sudden acceleration, never run Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
the engine at high rpms when shifting from the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
the P (PARK) or N (NEUTRAL). NOTE ation may occur if the selector lever is in a
Operating the accelerator pedal while the In sports mode, downshifts do not take place position other than P (PARK) or N
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will when the accelerator is depressed all the way (NEUTRAL).
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre- to the floor.
mature wear of brake pads.
Use the selector lever in the correct shift
Parking 5
position in accordance with driving condi- Waiting
tions. To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
Never coast downhill backward in the driv- plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
ing shift position {D (DRIVE), L For short waiting periods, such as at traffic and then move the selector lever to the P
(LOW) position or sports mode} or coast lights, the vehicle can be left in gear and held (PARK) position.
forward in the R (REVERSE) position. stationary with the service brake.
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal For longer waiting periods with the engine
and steering effort could lead to an accident. running, place the selector lever in the N When the automatic transaxle
Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking makes no gear change
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
This can damage the transaxle. with the service brake. If the transaxle does not change gears while
Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal Prior to moving off after having stopped the driving, or your vehicle does not pick up
while holding down the brake pedal with the
vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in enough speed when starting on an uphill
selector lever in the D (DRIVE) position,
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
D (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi- slope, it may be that there is something
as when performing the same operation with tion. unusual happening in the transaxle, causing a
the selector lever in the N (NEUTRAL) safety device to activate. Have your vehicle
position. CAUTION checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
To avoid transaxle overheating, never try to dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
Passing acceleration keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by soon as possible.
using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake.
To gain extra acceleration in D (DRIVE)
position (when passing another vehicle) push

BK0200500US.book 68
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
NOTE DRIVING DOWNHILL cally when the selector lever is in the D
When the warning display and SLOW (DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
According to the conditions, the transmission the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
DOWN or the warning display and
will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio pedal.
SERVICE REQUIRED appear on the
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may
display, there could be a malfunction in the help reduce your need to use the service
brake.
5 automatic transaxle. Refer to Automatic
transaxle: Warning display on page 5-62.
Selector lever operation
N00560301061
Continuously variable As an additional safety precaution, models
transmission (CVT) (if so equipped with a continuously variable trans-
equipped) mission have a shift-lock device that holds
the selector lever in the P (PARK) position.
N00560200034
To move the selector lever from the P
The CVT will automatically and continuously (PARK) position to another position, follow
change its gear ratio depending on road and the steps below.
driving conditions. This helps achieve
smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency. 1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
Also you can manually shift up and shift 2. Move the selector lever to the desired
down the transmission. Refer to Sports position.
mode on page 5-72.
NOTE
The selector lever cannot be moved from P
DRIVING UPHILL (PARK) to another position if the ignition
switch is set to the OFF or LOCK or
The transmission prevents unnecessary ACC position, or if the key has been
removed, or the operation mode is put in
upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is
OFF or ACC, or if the brake pedal is not
released and ensures smooth driving.
pressed and held down.

BK0200500US.book 69
For vehicles equipped without shift paddles WARNING When the selector lever cannot be
Always press the brake pedal when shift- shifted from the P (PARK) posi-
ing the selector lever into a selector position
tion from the N (NEUTRAL) position. N00563301059
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the N (NEUTRAL) When the selector lever cannot be shifted
position while pressing the accelerator from the P (PARK) position to another
position while the brake pedal is pressed and
pedal. This will cause the vehicle to
jump forward or backward. held down with the ignition switch at the
5
For vehicles equipped with shift paddles ON position or the operation mode in ON,
the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mech-
NOTE anism may be malfunctioning.
To prevent mistakes in operating the lever, Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
make sure you stop briefly at each position. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
After operating, check the position in the repair facility of your choice.
multi-information display. If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, selector lever as follows.
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
selector lever from being moved from the 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully
Set the selector lever in the gate to P (PARK) position. applied.
operate while the brake pedal is 2. Stop the engine if it is running.
For a shift indicated by in the illustra-
depressed.
tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
Set the selector lever in the gate to the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
operate. selector lever before depressing the brake
pedal, the selector lever may be immovable.

BK0200500US.book 70

3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its system or CVT fluid temperature becomes
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
Selector lever position display abnormally high.
N00560401088
gently as shown to remove the cover.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON, the selector lever position is shown on
the multi-information display.
5
Type 1 Type 2
4. Depress the brake pedal with the right NOTE

foot. A indicator blinks only if the CVT posi-
tional switch is broken.
5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
It does not indicate in normal driving condi-
release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to tion.
the N (NEUTRAL) position while
pressing the screwdriver down. Warning display
N00560501047
[For vehicles equipped mono-color liquid

When the selector lever position

indicator blinks
When the selector lever position indicator

blinks while you are driving, there could be a
malfunction in the automatic transmission

BK0200500US.book 71

in the multi-information display while you
CAUTION are driving, there could be a malfunction in
CAUTION
If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while
the CVT. After a while, confirm that the warning
driving, the indicator will brink.
display is no longer showing. It is safe to
In this case, immediately park your vehicle
continue driving if the display is no longer
in a safe place and follow these procedures: CAUTION showing. If the warning display remains or
[If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec- If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while flashes frequently, have your vehicle
ond), the CVT fluid is overheating.]
driving, the warning display or the inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
turn off the engine. Move the selector lever warning display will appear on the informa- Motors dealer or a repair facility of your 5
tion screen in the multi-information display. choice.
to the P (PARK) position and open the
bonnet. Keep the engine, idling. In this case, follow these procedures: [When warning display is showing]
After a while, move the selector lever into [When warning display is showing] It may be that there is something unusual
any position other than P (PARK) position The continuously variable transmission happening in the CVT, causing a safety
and confirm that the indicator stops blinking. (CVT) fluid is overheating. The engine con- device to activate. Have your vehicle
It is safe to continue driving if the indicator trol may activate to lower the CVT fluid tem- inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
no longer blinks. perature, causing the engine revolutions and Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
If the indicator continues blinking or blinks vehicle speed to decrease, In this case, take choice as soon as possible.
intermittently, have your vehicle inspected one of the following procedures.
by an authorised Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Slow down your vehicle.
[If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2 Selector lever positions
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the
seconds), the CVT safety device may be selector lever in the P (PARK) position,
N00560601077
operating due to a malfunction.] and open the engine hood with the engine
Have the vehicle inspected by an authorised running to allow the engine to cool down. P PARK
Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
This position locks the transmission to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
[For vehicles equipped with color liquid be started from the P (PARK) position.
or
R REVERSE
Move the lever to this position only after the

When the warning display or the warn- vehicle has come to a complete stop.
ing display appears on the information screen
BK0200500US.book 72
CAUTION WARNING L LOW

Never shift into the P (PARK) or R To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in This position is for driving up very steep hills
motion. If the lever is shifted into the P N (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift- and for engine braking at low speeds when
(PARK) or R (REVERSE) position while ing into or out of N (NEUTRAL) posi- driving down steep hills.
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission tion.
may be damaged.
WARNING
5 D DRIVE
This position can be used for maximum
N NEUTRAL engine braking.
This position is used for most city and high- Be very careful not to shift into L
way driving. The transmission will automati- (LOW) suddenly.
At this position, the transmission is disen- cally and continuously change its gear ratio Sudden engine braking may cause the
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on depending on road and driving conditions. tires to skid.
a manual transaxle and should be used when Select this position according to the road
the vehicle is not moving for an extended conditions and vehicle speed.
length of time during driving, such as in a CAUTION
traffic jam. To prevent transmission damage, never shift
into the D (DRIVE) position from the R
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
Sports mode (For vehicles
WARNING motion. equipped with paddle shift)
Never move the selector lever to the N N00560701065
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven
you could accidentally slip it into the P Ds DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY with the selector lever in the D (DRIVE) or
(PARK) or R (REVERSE) position,
damaging the transmission. DRIVING L (LOW) position manual shifting can be
To prevent the vehicle from rolling when selected by pulling one of the shift paddles
stopped on a slope, the engine should be Use when engine braking is needed, or for towards you.
started in the P (PARK) position, not in high-power sport drive.

BK0200500US.book 73

+ (SHIFT UP)
NOTE Transmission shifts up once by each opera-
NOTE
For vehicles equipped with the sportronic To maintain good running performance, the
tion.
steering wheel paddle shifter, sports mode transmission may refuse to perform an
can be operated even when the selector lever - (SHIFT DOWN) upshift when the selector lever or sportronic
is in the D (DRIVE) or L (LOW) posi- steering wheel paddle shifter is moved to the
Transmission shifts down once by each oper-
tion. Also, you can return to the D opera- +(SHIFT UP) position at certain vehicle
tion in any of following ways. When
ation. speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the
returning to D operation, the selector lever
position display will change to D (DRIVE) CAUTION
engine, the transmission may refuse to per-
form a downshift when the shift lever or
5
position. Upward shifts do not take place automati- sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter is
Pull the +(SHIFT UP) side sportronic steer- cally in sports mode. The driver must make moved to the - (SHIFT DOWN) position at
ing wheel paddle shifter forward (toward upward shifts in accordance with prevailing certain vehicle speeds. When this happens, a
the driver) for over 2 seconds. road conditions, making sure the engine rpm buzzer sounds to indicate that a downshift is
Stop the vehicle remains below the red zone on the tachome- not going to take place.
When the paddle shifter is operated with the ter.
selector lever in the L (LOW) position, Repeated continuous operation of the selec- Sports mode display
gear is not shifted because the selectable tor lever or the sportronic steering wheel N00560901067
shift range is limited. paddle shifter will continuously switch shift
position. In sports mode, the currently selected shift
On vehicles with a sportronic steering wheel range is displayed on the information screen
paddle shifter, shift ranges may not change in the multi-information display.
SHIFT SHIFT when the lateral paddle shifters are operated
DOWN UP at the same time. Type 1 Type 2
NOTE
Shift ranges can only be selected in a for-
ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
the R or P position.

BK0200500US.book 74
Operation of the CVT CAUTION NOTE

N00560801053 Use the selector lever in the correct shift In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
position in accordance with driving condi- when the accelerator is depressed all the way
CAUTION tions. to the floor.
Before selecting a position with the engine Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
running and the vehicle stationary, firmly ing shift position {D (DRIVE), DS
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi- (DOWN SHIFT & SPORTY DRVING), L Waiting
5 cle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
(LOW) position or sports mode} or coast
forward in the R (REVERSE) position.
CVT is engaged, especially when the engine Engine stopping and increased brake pedal For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
speed or idle speed is high, or with the air and steering effort could lead to an accident. lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever
conditioning operating. Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal position and held stationary with the service
Do not release the brake pedal until you are pressed when the vehicle is stationary. brake.
ready to drive away. This can damage the CVT. For longer waiting periods with the engine
Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal running, place the selector lever in the N
all times. while holding down the brake pedal with the (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
Using the left foot could cause driver move- selector lever in the D (DRIVE) position,
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
ment delay in case of an emergency. the engine revolutions may not rise as high
with the service brake.
To prevent sudden acceleration, never run as when performing the same operation with
the selector lever in the N (NEUTRAL) Prior to moving off after having stopped the
the engine at high rpms when shifting from
position. vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in
the P (PARK) or N (NEUTRAL).
D (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi-
Operating the accelerator pedal while the
tion.
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will Passing acceleration
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
mature wear of brake pads.
To gain extra acceleration in D (DRIVE)
CAUTION
To avoid transmission overheating, never try
position (when passing another vehicle) push
to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
automatically downshift. the parking brake and/or service brake.
Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
ation may occur if the selector lever is in a
position other than P (PARK) or N
(NEUTRAL).

BK0200500US.book 75
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)
Parking NOTE NOTE

[For vehicles equipped with mono-color liq- If the parking brake lever is pulled up while
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- uid crystal display meter] the vehicle is moving, the front-rear distribu-
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake, When the selector lever position indicator tion of driving torque control will turn OFF
and then move the selector lever to the P blinks while you are driving, there could be a which will allow the rear wheels to lock eas-
malfunction in the automatic transmission ier.
(PARK) position.
system or CVT fluid temperature becomes
When the CVT makes no speed

abnormally high.
[For vehicles equipped with color liquid
5
Drive mode
change
When the warning display and SLOW
Select the drive mode from the following 3
If the CVT does not shift while driving, or DOWN or the warning display and types to suit the driving conditions.
your vehicle does not pick up enough speed SERVICE REQUIRED appear on the
when starting on an uphill slope, it may be information screen in the multi-information Drive mode Function
that there is something unusual happening in display, there could be a malfunction in the
the transmission, causing a safety device to CVT. Refer to Continuously variable trans- this is most fuel efficient
activate. Have your vehicle checked at an mission (CVT): Warning display on page mode
5-70. 4WD ECO Normal operation is 2WD,
repair facility of your choice as soon as possi- but 4WD will engage in the
ble. event of wheel slip.
Electronically controlled All driving is in 4WD and
4WD system (if so equipped) the distribution of traction
torque to each wheel is
N00548301029 4WD AUTO
automatically controlled
The electronically controlled 4WD system depending on the driving
helps improve acceleration and vehicle stabil- conditions.
ity by controlling the front-rear distribution of
driving torque using the electronic control
coupling in the rear differential assembly.

BK0200500US.book 76

Drive mode Function Drive mode indicator
This mode is for driving in N00549401027
slippery conditions, such as Normally the indicator illuminates when the

snow covered roads or on operation mode put in ON, and then the drive
sand. mode is displayed a few seconds after the
4WD LOCK
Large traction torque is dis- engine is started.
tributed to the rear wheels to The status of each drive mode display is as
5 assist in getting out of slip- follows.
pery areas.
Drive mode indicator
4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-
ing skills. If you press the switch, you can change the mono-color
Drive Mode color liquid
Carefully read the 4-wheel drive operation drive mode in the order of 4WD ECO, 4WD liquid crys-
crystal dis-
section on page 5-81 and take care to drive AUTO, 4WD LOCK, 4WD ECO. tal display
play meter
safely. meter
CAUTION 4WD ECO 4WD ECO 4WD-E
Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
Drive mode-selector the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or
4WD AUTO 4WD AUTO
N00548401020
in similar conditions. The vehicle could 4WD LOCK 4WD LOCK LOCK
The drive mode can be switched by pressing lunge in an unexpected direction.
the drive mode switch while the ignition is in Driving on dry, paved roads in 4WD On vehicles with color liquid crystal display
the ON position or the operation mode in LOCK mode causes increased fuel con- meter, the drive mode is displayed as an inter-
ON. sumption and noise. rupt display on the information screen in the
multi information display when the drive
mode is switched.
NOTE After a few seconds, the information screen
The drive mode can be switched while driv- returns from the drive mode display to the
ing or stopped. previous screen.

BK0200500US.book 77

Drive mode Display CAUTION
Make sure that all four tires are the same
specified size, type, and brand, and have no
4WD ECO significant difference in the amount of wear.
Otherwise, the electronically controlled
4WD system may not work properly, and the
CAUTION 4WD system warning (overheating or ser-
If the selected drive mode indicator (4WD) is
blinking, a problem has occurred with the
vice required) may displayed.
5
4WD AUTO electronically controlled 4WD. A warning
will also be displayed in the information When the ECO mode switch is
screen in the multi information display. Have
your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit- ON
subishi Motors dealer. N00576600020
4WD LOCK For vehicles equipped with mono-color liq- While the drive mode is in the 4WD AUTO
uid crystal display meter, drive mode indica- position, if the ECO mode switch is switched
tor (4WD-E, LOCK) is blinking at the
ON, the drive mode will be changed to 4WD
same time.
ECO mode.
If the ECO mode switch is switched OFF, the
CAUTION Warning display (color liquid crystal display) drive mode will be returned to 4WD AUTO
If the selected drive mode indicator begins mode.
blinking, the drive mode will automatically Refer to the ECO mode switch on page
switch to protect the drive-system compo- 5-178.
nents. A warning will also be displayed in
the information screen in the multi informa-
tion display. NOTE
Reduce speed and, if the indicator stops If the drive mode is switched in any mode
blinking, you may resume normal driving. after the drive mode is switched in 4WD
For vehicles equipped with mono-color liq- ECO, the drive mode will not be changed
uid crystal display meter, drive mode indica- even if the ECO mode switch is switched
tor (4WD-E, LOCK) is blinking OFF.
alternately
Warning display (color liquid crystal display)

BK0200500US.book 78
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped)

operating the electronic control coupling
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Left-right differential limiting
arranged in the rear differential assembly.
Control) (if so equipped) function
N00541301059 NOTE The left-right differential limiting function is
If the parking brake lever is pulled up while
S-AWC is an integrated vehicle dynamics a function that enhances driving performance
the vehicle is moving, the front-rear distribu-
control system that helps enhance driving and vehicle stability by preventing idle spin-
tion of driving torque control will turn OFF
performance, cornering performance, and ning of a wheel when driving on slippery
5 vehicle stability over a wide range of driving
which will allow the rear wheels to lock eas-
ier. road or when the road surfaces of left and
conditions through integrated management of right wheels are different.
the electronically controlled 4WD, the AYC
(Active Yaw Control), the ABS and the ASC.
Active Yaw Control (AYC) Yaw control function
CAUTION The AYC is a system, with a left-right differ- The yaw control function is a function that
Do not over-rely on the S-AWC. Even the S- ential limiting function and yaw control func- enhances vehicle cornering performance and
AWC cannot prevent the natural laws of
tion, that controls the left-right vehicle stability with management of vehicle
physics from acting on the vehicle. This sys-
driving/braking force by managing the AFD* turning power (yaw moment) by controlling
tem, like any other system, has limits and
cannot help you to maintain traction and con- (Active Front Differential), the brake, the the drive power difference of the left and
trol of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reck- EPS. right wheels and the braking force when the
less driving can lead to accidents. It is the *: AFD (Active Front Differential) vehicle does not turn in response to steering
drivers responsibility to drive carefully. The Differential assembly that limits the front input, such as when the steering wheel is
This means taking into account the traffic, left-right differential speed by operating elec- turned quickly or when driving on slippery
road and environmental conditions. tronic control clutch arranged in the transfer road.
assembly.
S-AWC control mode
Electronically Controlled 4WD CAUTION N00542401060
Control of the braking force does not Select the control mode from the following
The electronically controlled 4WD is a sys- enhance the stopping performance of the
four types to suit the driving conditions.
tem that improves acceleration performance vehicle, therefore, pay careful attention to
and stability performance by controlling the safety of your surroundings when driv-
front-rear distribution of driving torque with ing.

BK0200500US.book 79

S-AWC S-AWC drive mode-selector NOTE
control Function The control mode can be switched while
mode driving or stopped.
The control mode can be switched by press
This is the most fuel efficient the switch while the operation mode in ON.
mode. Normal operation is in
AWC ECO 2WD, but 4WD performance S-AWC control mode display
will be provided under slippery
conditions. 5
This mode can be used on both
dry and wet roads. The distri-
bution of driving/braking
NORMAL
torque to each wheel is auto-
matically controlled according
to the driving condition.
This mode is for driving on
SNOW slippery road surfaces, such as If you press the switch, you can change the
snow-covered roads. control mode in the order of AWC ECO, Example: AWC ECO mode is selected.
This mode is for driving where NORMAL, SNOW, LOCK, AWC ECO.
maximum traction is required.
LOCK This mode is suitable for driv- The currently selected control mode is dis-
CAUTION played on the multi-information display.
ing on rough roads or driving
Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
in mud, sand or fresh snow. In addition, when the control mode is
the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or
in similar conditions. The vehicle could
changed, the selected mode appears on the
4-wheel drive operation requires special driv- lunge in an unexpected direction. interrupt display screen of the information
ing skills. Driving on dry, paved roads in LOCK screen in the multi-information display.
Carefully read the 4-wheel drive operation mode causes increased fuel consumption and The control mode display will appear on the
section on page 5-81 and take care to drive noise. information screen for a few seconds, and
safety. then the original screen will return.

BK0200500US.book 80
CAUTION CAUTION
If the selected drive mode indicator begins Make sure that all four tires are the same
blinking, the drive mode will automatically specified size, type, and brand, and have no
switch to protect the drive-system compo- significant difference in the amount of wear
nents. A warning will also be displayed in for all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the S-AWC sys-
the information screen in the multi informa- tem may not work properly, and a 4WD sys-
tion display. tem warning (overheating or service
5 Reduce speed and, if the indicator stops
blinking, you may resume normal driving.
required) may be displayed.
Warning display S-AWC operation display Yaw control function display

N00542501058
The amount of the yaw moment is displayed
The S-AWC operation status can be displayed as a bar graph.
on the information screen in the multi-infor- A, D- Clockwise yaw moment about the
mation display. vehicles center of gravity
To display the status, press the multi-informa- B, C- Counterclockwise yaw moment
tion meter switch to change the information about the vehicles center of gravity
CAUTION screen.
If the selected drive mode indicator (4WD) is Refer to Information screen (when the oper- Differential limiting function display
blinking, a problem has occurred with the ation mode in ON) on page 5-126. The strength of the differential limiting
electronically controlled 4WD. A warning operation (between front-rear wheels and
will also be displayed in the information
Display example between left-right wheels) is displayed in
screen in the multi information display. Have
section E of the meter as a bar graph.
your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer. The S-AWC operation status is displayed.
WARNING
Warning display Always concentrate on your driving first.
Keep your eyes and mind on the road. Dis-
tractions while driving can lead to an acci-
dent.

BK0200500US.book 81
4-wheel drive operation

tion when driving on slippery, wet or snow-
When the ECO mode switch is covered roads and when moving out of mud.
NOTE
ON But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or Driving on rough roads can be hard on a
vehicle. Before you leave the pavement, be
N00576700021 towing in rough conditions.
sure all scheduled maintenance and service
While the drive mode is in the NORMAL It is particularly important to note that 4- has been done, and that you have inspected
position, if the ECO mode switch is switched wheel drive may not give sufficient hill your vehicle. Pay special attention to the
ON, the drive mode will be changed to climbing ability and engine braking on steep condition of the tires, and check the tire pres-
AWC ECO mode. slopes. You should try to avoid driving on
If the ECO mode switch is switched OFF, the steep slopes.
sures.
Mitsubishi Motors is not responsible to the
5
drive mode will be returned to NORMAL Also, you must exercise caution when driving operator for any damage or injury caused or
mode. on sand and mud and when driving through liability incurred by improper and negligent
Refer to the ECO mode switch on page water because sufficient traction may not be operation of a vehicle. All techniques of
available in certain circumstances. vehicle operation depend on the skill and
5-178.
experience of the operator and other partici-
Please avoid driving the vehicle through areas
pating parties. Any deviation from the rec-
where the tires may get stuck in deep sand or
NOTE ommended operating instructions above is at
mud. their own risk.
If the drive mode is switched in any mode
after the drive mode is switched in AWC Note that the stopping distance required of
ECO, the drive mode will not be changed WARNING the 4-wheel drive vehicle differs very little
even if the ECO mode switch is switched Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive vehi- from that of the front-wheel drive vehicle.
OFF. cles. Even 4-wheel drive vehicles have lim- When driving on a snow-covered road or a
its to the system and ability to maintain slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you
control and traction. Reckless driving may keep a sufficient distance between your vehi-
cle and the one ahead of you.
4-wheel drive operation lead to accidents. Always drive carefully,
taking account of the road conditions. The driving posture should be more upright;
N00530601179
Improperly operating this vehicle on or adjust the seat to a good position for easy
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for off-pavement can cause an accident or steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear
use on pavement. rollover in which you and your passengers the seat belt.
But its unique 4 -wheel drive system allows could be seriously injured or killed. After driving on rough roads, check each
you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads, Follow all instructions and guidelines in part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar the owners manual. with water. Refer to the Inspection and
Keep your speed low and do not drive maintenance following rough road opera-
locations.
faster than conditions. tion section and Vehicle care and Mainte-
Not only does this ensure better handling on nance sections.
dry, paved roads but also permits better trac-
BK0200500US.book 82
4-wheel drive operation
CAUTION NOTE CAUTION

Setting the drive mode-selector to 4WD Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, If the engine coolant temperature display
LOCK or LOCK position to drive on dry avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak- flashes on the information screen in the
paved road will increase fuel consumption, ing (downshifting).
multi-information display or the engine
with possible noise generation.
power drops suddenly.
Refer to Engine overheating on page 8-4.
CAUTION
5 Turning sharp corners Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
If the warning display and SLOW
and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con- DOWN or the warning display and
trol of the vehicle could be lost. SERVICE REQUIRED appear on the
When turning a sharp corner in 4WD
LOCK or LOCK position at low speed, a display.
slight difference in steering may be experi-
enced similar to feeling as if the brakes were Driving on sandy or muddy Refer to Warning display on page 5-62,
5-70.
applied. This is called tight corner braking roads
and results from each of the four tires being at
a different distance from the corner. The phe- Set the drive mode-selector to 4WD LOCK WARNING
nomenon is typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles. or LOCK and then gradually depress the When attempting to rock your vehicle out
If this occurs, either straighten out the steer- accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the of a stuck position, be sure that the area
ing wheel or change to another mode. pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant around the vehicle is clear of people and
as possible, and drive at low speed. physical objects. The rocking motion may
cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-
On snowy or icy roads ward/backward, causing injury or dam-
CAUTION age to nearby people or objects.
Set the drive mode-selector to 4WD Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly
AUTO, 4WD LOCK or SNOW in on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor-
accordance with the road conditions, and then mal road surfaces, the engine and other NOTE
drive-system components are put under
gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
excessive strain when driving on such a sur-
smooth start. and sharp turning; such operations could
face. This could lead to accidents.
result in the vehicle becoming stuck.
If any of the following conditions occur
NOTE while the vehicle is being driven, immedi-
The use of snow tires is recommended. ately park your vehicle in a safe place and
follow these procedures:

BK0200500US.book 83
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation

slowly to avoid creating excessive water Carefully wash the vehicle with water.
NOTE splashing. Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly
If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or
depressing the brake pedal in order to dry
muddy roads, it can often be moved with a
CAUTION out the brakes. If the brakes still do not
rocking motion. Move the selector lever
alternately between the D (DRIVE) and Never drive through water that is deep
function properly, contact an authorized
R (REVERSE) positions while pressing enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or exhaust Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
lightly on the accelerator pedal. pipe. Do not change the selector lever posi- ity of your choice as soon as possible to
have the brakes checked.
Driving on rough road can cause rust on the
vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon
tion while driving through water.
Frequent driving through water can Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog-
5
as possible after such use. adversely affect the life span of the vehicle; ging the radiator core.
consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors After driving through water, check the
dealer or a repair facility of your choice and engine, transaxle and differential oil. If
Climbing/descending sharp take the necessary measures to prepare, the oil or grease is milky or cloudy
grades inspect, and repair the vehicle.
because of water contamination, it must
After driving through water, apply the brakes
be replaced with new oil.
to be sure they are functioning properly. If
Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill Check the inside of the vehicle. If water
the brakes are wet and not functioning prop-
climbing ability and engine braking on steep erly, dry them out by driving slowly while entry is found, dry the carpet etc.
slope. Avoid driving on steep slopes even lightly depressing the brake pedal. Inspect Inspect the headlights. If water is in the
though the vehicle is an 4-wheel drive vehi- each part of the vehicle carefully. headlight housing, have it drained at an
cle. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Driving through water Inspection and maintenance
N00537800085
following rough road opera- Cautions on the handling of
If the electrical circuits become wet, further
tion 4-wheel drive vehicles
operation of the vehicle will be impossible; N00530801201
N00530700085
therefore, avoid driving through water unless
absolutely necessary. If driving through water After operating the vehicle in rough road con-
is unavoidable, use the following procedure: ditions, be sure to perform the following Tires and wheels
inspection and maintenance procedures:
Check the depth of the water and the terrain Since the driving torque can be applied to the
before attempting to drive through it. Drive Check that the vehicle has not been dam- four wheels, the driving performance of the
aged by rocks, gravel, etc.

BK0200500US.book 84
Service brake
vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is
greatly affected by the condition of the tires.
Towing Jacking up a 4-wheel drive
vehicle
Pay close attention to the tires.
Install only the specified tires on all WARNING

wheels. Refer to Tires and wheels on Do not crank the engine while jacking up
page 11-7. the vehicle.
5 Be sure all four tires and wheels are the The tire on the ground may turn and the
same size and type. vehicle may roll off the jack.
When it is necessary to replace any of the
tires or wheels, replace all four.
All tires should be rotated before the wear Service brake
difference between the front and rear tires N00517500275
is recognizable.
Good vehicle performance cannot be

Brake pedal
expected if there is a difference in wear
between tires. Refer to Tire rotation on Overuse of the brake can cause weakening,
CAUTION resulting in poor brake response and prema-
page 9-20. Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the
ture wear of the brake pads.
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly. or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in When driving down a long or steep hill, use
damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. engine braking by downshifting.
CAUTION If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
Always use tires of the same size, type, and
C or Type D equipment. WARNING
brand that have no wear differences. Using Even in 4WD ECO drive mode, the vehi- Do not leave any objects near the brake
tires of different size, type, brands or degree cle cannot be towed with the front or the rear pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;
of wear, will increase the differential oil tem- wheels on the ground. doing so could prevent the full pedal
perature and result in possible damage to the stroke that would be necessary in an
driving system. Further, the drive train will emergency. Make sure that the pedal can
be subject to excessive loading, possibly be operated freely at all times. Make sure
leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or the floor mat is securely held in place.
other serious failures.

BK0200500US.book 85
Hill start assist (if so equipped)
CAUTION WARNING Hill start assist (if so equipped)

It is important not to drive the vehicle with Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. N00562601097
your foot resting on the brake pedal when Keep the engine running whenever your
braking is not required. This practice can vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
result in very high brake temperatures, pre- engine while driving, the power brake on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
mature lining wear, and possible damage to booster will stop working and your brakes vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the
the brakes. will not work as well. braking force for about 2 second when you
If the power assist is lost or if either brake
hydraulic system stops working properly,
move your foot from the brake pedal to the 5
accelerator pedal.
Power brakes take your vehicle to an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
N00517600364
of your choice immediately. CAUTION
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
for more braking force with less brake pedal prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
effort. Brake pad wear alarm Under certain circumstances, even when hill
Your brakes are designed to operate at full N00550700124
start assist is activated, the vehicle may
capacity, even if the power assist is not being move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf-
used. The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily
If the power assist is not being used, the effort metallic squeal when the brake pads have loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
needed to press the brake pedal is greater. worn down enough to need service. pery.
If you should lose the power assist for some If you hear this sound, have the brake pads The hill start assist is not designed to keep
replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
reason, the brakes will still work. for more than 2 seconds.
If the power brake unit or either of the two dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
When facing uphill, do not rely on using the
brake hydraulic systems stops working prop- hill start assist to maintain a stopped position
erly, the rest of the brake system will still WARNING as an alternative to depressing the brake
work, but the vehicle will not slow down as Driving with worn brake pads will make it pedal.
quickly. harder to stop, and can cause an accident. Doing so could cause an accident.
You will know this has happened if you find Do not turn the ignition switch to the OFF,
you need to press the brake down farther, or LOCK or ACC position while the hill
harder when slowing down or stopping, or if start assist is operating. The hill start assist
the brake warning light and the warning dis- could stop operating, which could result in
play in the multi-information display come an accident.
on.

BK0200500US.book 86
Brake assist system
To operate Warning display Brake assist system

N00562700075 N00562801103 N00567301099
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- The brake assist system is a device assisting
brake pedal. tem, the following display/indicator will turn drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal
2. Release the brake pedal and the hill start on. firmly such as in emergency stop situations
assist will maintain the braking force and provides greater braking force.
applied while stopping for approximately
5 2 seconds. - ASC indicator If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
3. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill brakes will be applied with more force than
start assist gradually will decrease the Warning display usual.
braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
CAUTION
NOTE The brake assist system is not a device
The hill start assist is activated when all of designed to exercise braking force greater
the following conditions are met. than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
The engine is running. sufficient distance between vehicles in front
(The hill start assist will not be activated CAUTION of you without relying too much on the brake
while the engine is starting or immediately assist system.
If the warning is displayed, the hill start
after the engine is started.) assist will not operate. Start off carefully.
The selector lever is in any position other Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
than P (PARK) or N (NEUTRAL). engine. NOTE
The vehicle is completely stationary, with Restart the engine and check whether the Once the brake assist system is operational,
the brake pedal depressed. indicator/display goes out, in which case the it maintains great braking force even if the
The parking brake is released. hill start assist is again working normally. brake pedal is lightly released.
The hill start assist will not operate if the If they remain displayed or reappear fre- To stop its operation, completely remove
accelerator pedal is depressed before the quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle your foot from the brake pedal.
brake pedal is released. immediately, but the vehicle should be The brake assist system may become opera-
The hill start assist also operates when inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi tional when the brake pedal is fully
reversing on an uphill slope. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your depressed even if it has not been depressed
choice as soon as possible. suddenly.

BK0200500US.book 87
Anti-lock braking system
NOTE Driving hints CAUTION

When the brake assist system is in use while The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
driving, you may feel as if the depressed When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden accidents. It is your responsibility to take
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small braking), steering is slightly different safety precautions and to drive carefully.
motions in conjunction with the operation from normal driving conditions. Use the To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
noise, or the vehicle body and the steering steering wheel carefully. system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake Always keep a safe distance from the same size and the same type.
assist system is operating normally and does
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- 5
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
depress the brake pedal. NOTE
system, leave a greater braking distance
You may hear an operation noise when the
when: A whining sound is emitted from the engine
brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed
Driving on gravel or snow-covered compartment when driving immediately
while stationary. This does not indicate a
roads. after starting the engine. These are the nor-
malfunction and the brake assist system is
Driving on uneven road surfaces. mal sounds the anti-lock braking system
operating normally.
makes when performing a self-check. It does
When the anti-lock brake system warning Operation of anti-lock braking system is
not indicate a malfunction.
light or only active stability control warning not restricted situations where brakes are
The anti-lock braking system can be used
light illuminate, the brake assist system in applied suddenly. This system may also after the vehicle has reached a speed over
not functioning. prevent the wheels from locking when approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
you drive over manholes, steel roadwork working when the vehicle slows below 3
plates, road markings, or any uneven road
Anti-lock braking system surface.
mph (5 km/h).
N00517900240
When the anti-lock braking system is in
The anti-lock braking system helps prevent use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-
the wheels from locking up when braking.
Anti-lock braking system warn-
ing and hear a unique sound. It may also
This helps maintain vehicle drivability and feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.
ing light / display
steering wheel handling. In this situation, simply hold the brake
N00531601684
pedal down firmly. Do not pump the Warning light

brake, which will result in reduced
braking performance.
Warning display

BK0200500US.book 88
Anti-lock braking system
If the warning light / display If the anti-lock braking system

illuminate while driving warning light / display and brake
N00531701614 warning light / display illuminate
at the same time
If only the anti-lock braking sys-
If there is a malfunction in the system, the Warning light
anti-lock braking system warning light will
tem warning light/display illumi-
5 come on and the warning display will appear nate
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-
mation display.
ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Under normal conditions, the anti-lock brak- Warning display
Test the system by restarting the engine
ing system warning light only comes on when
and driving at a speed of about 12 mph
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
(20 km/h) or higher.
position or the operation mode is put in ON
If the warning light / display then remains
and goes off a few seconds later.
off during driving, there is no abnormal
condition.
CAUTION However, if the warning light / display do
Any of the following indicates that the anti- not disappear, or if they come on again
lock braking system is not functioning and when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi-
only the standard brake system is working. cle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
(The standard brake system is functioning
Motors dealer or repair facility of your
normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle
choice as soon as possible. The anti-lock braking system and brake force
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
distribution function may not work, so hard
a repair facility of your choice.
braking could make the vehicle unstable.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position or the operation mode is put in ON, Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
the warning light does not come on or it Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an
remains on and does not go off authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair
The warning light comes on while driving facility of your choice.
The warning display appears while driving

BK0200500US.book 89
Electric power steering system (EPS)
NOTE Electric power steering sys- NOTE

The anti-lock braking system warning light
and brake warning light illuminate at the
tem (EPS) During repeated full-lock turning of the
steering wheel (for example, while you are
N00568401084
same time and the warning displays appear manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
alternately on the information screen in the The power steering system operates while the space), a protection function may be acti-
multi-information display. engine is running. It helps reduce the effort vated to prevent overheating of the power
needed to turn the steering wheel. steering system. This function will make the
The power steering system has mechanical steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
this event, limit your turning of the steering
5
After driving on icy roads steering capability in case the power assist is
wheel for a while. When the system has
N00529201090 lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
cooled down, the steering effort will return
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove son, you will still be able to steer your vehi- to normal.
any snow and ice which may have be left cle, but you will notice it takes much more If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehicle is stationary with the headlights on, the
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi headlights may become dim. This behavior
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the Motors dealer or a repair facility of your is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
cables located at each wheel. choice. their original brightness after a short while.
Front Rear
WARNING
Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is Electric power steering system
moving. Stopping the engine would make warning display
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident.
Warning lamp
Warning display

BK0200500US.book 90
Active stability control (ASC)

If there is a malfunction in the system, the Traction control function P.5-90
warning light will come on and the warning Skid control function P.5-90
NOTE
When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
display will appear on the information screen
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
in the multi information display. CAUTION ing sound from the engine compartment.
Under normal conditions, the warning light Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC This indicates that the system is operating
come on when the ignition switch is turned to cannot prevent the natural laws of physics normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
the ON position or the operation mode is from acting on the vehicle. This system, like When the anti-lock braking system warning
put in ON, and goes off after the engine has
5 started.
any other system, has limits and cannot help
you to maintain traction and control of the
light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-

ing can lead to accidents. It is the drivers Traction control function
CAUTION responsibillty to drive carefully, This means N00559200021
If the warning display appears while the taking into account the traffic, road and envi- On slippery surfaces, the traction control
engine is running, have the vehicle inspected ronmental conditions.
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or function prevents the drive wheels from spin-
Be sure to use the same specified type and ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to
a repair facility of your choice as soon as
size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
possible. It may become harder to turn the start moving from a stopped condition. It also
ASC may not work properly.
steering wheel. provides sufficient driving force and steering
Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
performance as the vehicle turns while press-
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
may stop functioning properly. ing the acceleration pedal.
Active stability control
(ASC) CAUTION
N00559100147
NOTE When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
An operation noise may be emitted from the road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
The Active stability control (ASC) takes engine compartment in the following situa- the vehicle at moderate speeds.
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys- tions. The sound is associated with checking
tem, traction control function and skid control the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
function to help maintain the vehicles control may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you Skid control function
and traction. Please read this section in con- depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
N00559300019
junction with the page on the anti-lock brak- tion.
ing system, traction control function and skid When the ignition switch is set to the ON The skid control function is designed to help
control function. position. the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
When the vehicle is driven for a while after slippery roads or during rapid steering
Anti-lock braking system P.5-87 the engine is turned on.

BK0200500US.book 91
Active stability control (ASC)

maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine ASC OFF indicator
output and the brake on each wheel.
CAUTION -
This indicator will turn on when the
For safety reasons, the ASC OFF switch
ASC is turned off with the ASC
should be operated when your vehicle is
NOTE stopped. OFF switch.
The skid control function operates at speeds Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher. normal circumstances. CAUTION
When display/indicator blinks, ASC is
operating, which means that the road is slip- 5
ASC OFF switch NOTE pery or that your vehicles wheels are begin-
N00559401264 Using the ASC OFF switch turns off both ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower.
the stability control function and the traction If the temperature in the braking system con-
The ASC is automatically activated when the
control function. tinues to increase due to continuous brake
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
When moving out of mud, sand or fresh control on a slippery road surface, the
tion. You can deactivate the system by press- snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
ing down the ASC OFF switch for 3 indicator will blink. To prevent the brake
allow the engine speed to increase. In such system from overheating, the brake control
seconds or longer. situations, temporarily turning off ASC with of the traction control function will be tem-
When the ASC is deactivated, the indica- the ASC OFF switch will make it easier to porarily suspended. The engine control of
tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC, move out your vehicle. the traction control function and normal
momentarily press the ASC OFF switch; If you continue to press the ASC OFF brake operation will not be affected.
switch after the ASC is turned off, the mis- Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the
the indicator is turned off. taken operation protection function will temperature in the braking system has come
activate and the ASC will turn back on.
down, the indicator will be turned off and
the traction control function will start operat-
ing again.
ASC operation display or ASC
OFF indicator
N00559501223
ASC operation display/ASC indicator

-
The display/indicator will blink when
the ASC is operating.

BK0200500US.book 92
Cruise control
NOTE CAUTION Cruise control

The indicator may come on when you The system may be malfunctioning. N00518301596
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
start the engine. This means that the battery Cruise control is an automatic speed control
engine. Restart the engine and check whether
voltage momentarily dropped when the
the display/indicator goes out. If they go out,
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
engine was started. It does not indicate a vated at speeds from about 25 mph
there is no abnormal condition. If they do not
malfunction, provided that the display goes (40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at
go out or if they turn on frequently, it is not
out immediately. speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
5 When a spare tire has been put on your vehi-
necessary to stop the vehicle immediately,
but you should have your vehicle inspected
cle, the gripping ability of the tire will be
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
lower, making it more likely that the dis- a repair facility of your choice as soon as
CAUTION
possible. When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,
play/indicator will blink.
turn off the cruise control for safety.
Do not use cruise control when driving con-
ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
ASC warning display Towing speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
N00546601129 N00546301070 that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
tem, the following display/indicator will turn
CAUTION
If the 2WD vehicle is towed with the ignition
on.
switch in the ON position or the operation NOTE
mode in ON and only the front wheels or Cruise control may not be able to keep your
- ASC indicator only the rear wheels raised off the ground,
speed on uphills or downhills.
the ASC may operate, resulting in an acci-
Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
- ASC OFF indicator dent. When towing the 2WD vehicle with the
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch
want to stay at your set speed.
in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position or
Your speed may increase to more than the set
Warning display the operation mode in ACC or OFF. When
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use
towing the vehicle with the rear wheels
raised, keep the ignition switch in the ACC the brake to control your speed. As a result,
the set speed driving is deactivated.
position or the operation mode in ACC.
Refer to Towing on page 8-14.

BK0200500US.book 93
Cruise control
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired
Cruise control switches To activate speed, then push down and release the
N00518401395
SET - switch (B) when the indicator/indi-
1. With the operation mode in ON, press the
cator display is illuminated. The vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A)
will then maintain the desired speed.
to turn on the cruise control. The indica-
The SET indicator appears on the infor-
tor/indicator display in the meter cluster
mation display in the meter cluster. (For
will come on.
vehicles equipped with color liquid crys-
tal display meter)
5
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch

Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
B- SET - switch
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
desired speed.
C- RES + switch Indicator
Used to increase the set speed and to return to
the original set speed. NOTE
D- CANCEL switch When you release the SET - switch (B), the
Used to deactivate the set speed driving. Indicator display vehicle speed will be set.
NOTE
When operating the cruise control switches, To increase the set speed
press the cruise control switches correctly. N00518501354
The set speed driving may be deactivated
There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
automatically if two or more switches of the
cruise control are pressed at the same time.

BK0200500US.book 94
Cruise control
then push down the SET - switch (B) and
RES + switch
release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.
Push up and hold the RES + switch (C) while
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
5 set.
To slow down your speed in small amounts,

push down the SET - switch (B) for less than
about 1 second and release it.
Each time you push down the SET - switch
(B), your vehicle will slow down by about 1
To decrease the set speed mph (1.6 km/h).
N00518601283
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed. Brake pedal
To increase your speed in small amounts, SET - switch While driving at the set speed, use the brake
push up the RES + switch (C) for less than pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
about 1 second and release it. then push down the SET - switch (B) and
Each time you press the RES + switch (C), Push down and hold the SET - switch (B)
release the switch momentarily to set a new
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) while driving at the set speed, and your speed
desired cruising speed.
faster. will slow down gradually.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
Accelerator pedal set.
While driving at the set speed, use the accel-

erator pedal to reach your desired speed and

BK0200500US.book 95
Cruise control
NOTE
To temporarily increase or In some driving conditions, the set speed To deactivate
decrease the speed driving may be deactivated. If this happens, N00518801575
N00541701066
refer to To activate on page 5-93 and The set speed driving can be deactivated as
repeat the speed setting procedure.
follows:
To temporarily increase the speed
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
To temporarily decrease the speed switch (A) (Cruise control will be turned
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would off.)
normally. When you release the pedal, you Press the CANCEL switch (D).
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the
will return to your set speed. Depress the brake pedal.
speed. To return to the previously set speed,
push up the RES + switch (C).
Refer to To resume the set speed on page
5-96.

BK0200500US.book 96
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

The set speed driving is deactivated automati-
cally in any of the following ways.
CAUTION
When the set speed driving is deactivated
When your speed slows to about 10 mph automatically in any situation other than
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed those listed above, there may be a system
malfunction.
because of a hill, etc.
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
When your speed slows to about 25 mph switch to turn off the cruise control and have
(40 km/h) or less.
5 When the active stability control (ASC)
your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
starts operating. (if so equipped) your choice.
Refer to Active stability control (ASC)
on page 5-90.
Under either of the following conditions,
To resume the set speed however, using the switch does not allow you
WARNING N00518901316 to resume the previously set speed. In these
Although the set speed driving will be If the set speed driving is deactivated by the situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
deactivated when shifting to the N condition described in To deactivate on
(NEUTRAL) position, never move the page 5-95, you can resume the previously set The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
selector lever to the N (NEUTRAL) speed by pressing the ACC RES switch (C) switch is pressed.
position while driving.
while driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 The operation mode is put in OFF.
You would have no engine braking and Indicator go off.
km/h) or higher.
could cause a serious accident.
The SET indicator appears on the informa-
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

tion display in the meter cluster. (For vehicles Adaptive Cruise Control
equipped with the color liquid crystal display
vated as follow: meter)
System (ACC) (if so equipped)
N00576800022
When the engine speed rises and
approaches the tachometers red zone (the ACC maintains a set speed with no need for
red-coloured part of the tachometer dial). you to use the accelerator pedal. Using a sen-
sor (A), the system also measures the relative
speed and distance between your vehicle and
a vehicle in front, and maintains a set follow-
ing distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front by automatically decelerating

BK0200500US.book 97

your vehicle if it becomes too close to the 3- RES + switch
vehicle in front.
WARNING Used to resume the control function
Before using the ACC, read this entire sec-
The cruising set speed can be set from 25 after cancelling the ACC or the conven-
tion to understand the limitations of this
mph (40 km/h) to 110 mph (180 km/h). The tional cruise control.
system. Failure to follow instructions
distance can be selected from three levels. could result in an accident. Also used to increase the set speed.
If the vehicle in front decelerates, the ACC Never rely solely on the ACC. The ACC is 4- CANCEL switch
will automatically apply limited braking to not a collision avoidance system or an Used to cancel the control function of
maintain the distance, and if the front vehicle the ACC or the cruise control.
then accelerates, the ACC will automatically
automatic driving system. It is designed to
use only limited braking and is never a 5- ACC distance switch
5
accelerate your vehicle up to the set speed. If substitute for your safe and careful driv- Used to set or change the following dis-
your vehicle is approaching too close to the ing. Always be ready to apply the brakes tance between your vehicle and a vehi-
front vehicle, a buzzer will sound and a warn- manually. cle in front.
ing is shown in the multi information display.
When the ACC detects no vehicle ahead, the NOTE
set speed will be maintained. Cruise control switch Operate the individual switches correctly and
Conventional cruise control mode without the N00577000021
one after another.
distance control can also be selected. The ACC may be turned off or its control
function may be cancelled if two or more
switches are pressed concurrently
ACC Indicators
N00577100035
While the ACC is turned on, indicators for

the ACC are shown in the multi information
display.
1- ACC ON/OFF switch
Used to turn on and off the ACC sys-
tem.
2- SET - switch
Used to set a desired speed or to reduce
the set speed.

BK0200500US.book 98

State How to use ACC
Display
Stand by Active N00577200023
Vehicle in
To turn on ACC
front detected
When the operation mode is in the ON
position, press the ACC ON/OFF switch.
5
5-Following distance indicator:
Indicating the following distance.
1- ACC indicator: Two states: Stand by and Active
Indicating that the ACC is turned on. When a front vehicle is detected while
2- Control state indicator: the ACC is activated, the Active fol-
Indicating that ACC is activated. lowing distance indicator shown in the
3- Set speed indicator: illustration below will illuminate.
Indicating the set speed. When a front vehicle is detected while
If the set speed is not set, --- is the ACC is not activated or the ACC is
shown. canceled, the Stand by following dis-
4- Front vehicle indicator: tance indicator will illuminate.
Indicating when the ACC detects a
vehicle ahead. The ACC indicators will appear in the multi
When a front vehicle is detected while Following State information display.
the ACC is activated, the Active front distance set-
vehicle indicator shown in the illustra- ting symbol Stand by Active
tion below will illuminate.
When a front vehicle is detected while Long
the ACC is not activated or the ACC is
canceled, the Stand by front vehicle Middle
indicator will illuminate.
Short

BK0200500US.book 99
NOTE To activate ACC control

Every time the operation mode is turned to
the OFF position, the ACC is turned off. With the ACC turned on, push down the
SET - switch while driving, and when your
vehicle reaches your desired speed, release
To turn off ACC the SET - switch. The ACC will activate
and initiate the speed control to maintain the
Press the ACC ON/OFF switch to turn off set speed. 5
the ACC. You can set the speed anywhere from approx-
imately 25 mph (40 km/h) to 110 mph (180
km/h).
While a vehicle in front is being detected and
your vehicle speed is between approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), you
can activate the ACC. In this case, the set
speed will be set at 25 mph (40 km/h).
The ACC cannot otherwise be activated while
your vehicle is traveling less than 25 mph (40
km/h) or greater than 110 mph (180 km/h).
The set indicator comes on, the set speed is

indicated and the following distance indicator NOTE
NOTE changes to the active display. Also a buzzer When any of the following conditions are
The ACC can be turned off even while the present, the ACC will not activate.
will sound.
ACC is active. When your vehicle speed is lower than
Every time the operation mode is turned off, approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or greater
the ACC is turned off and the set speed is than 110 mph (180 km/h).
erased. When your vehicle is driven at speeds
between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
and 25 mph (40 km/h) and the ACC is not
detecting a vehicle in front.
When ASC is in the OFF position.

BK0200500US.book 100
NOTE When ACC detects a vehicle in

While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated. front within the set distance
When the selector lever is in positions other N00581400026
than D (DRIVE) and Ds (DOWN-
SHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING). The ACC will maintain the distance to the
While the brake pedal is depressed. front vehicle and will apply the brakes auto-
While the parking brake is engaged. matically when the system judges braking is
necessary. The distance can be selected from
5 When the ACC system has judged that the
three levels.
performance for detecting a front vehicle is
degraded.
NOTE
When an abnormality in the ACC system
If the brake pedal is not depressed within 2
has been detected.
seconds after your vehicle has been stopped
by the ACC, a warning buzzer will sound,
When ACC detects no vehicle the above warning will be shown in the multi
information display to alert the driver, and
in front within the set distance the ACC control will be canceled.
N00581300025
When depressing the brake pedal while the
The speed of your vehicle will be maintained automatic brake is applied, the brake pedal
at the speed you have set. The speed can be will feel firm. This is normal. Depress the
set between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) When the front vehicle stops, the ACC will brake pedal harder to apply greater braking
and 110 mph (180 km/h). automatically apply the brakes to stop your force.
vehicle. During the automatic braking, operation
A few seconds after your vehicle has stopped, sounds may be heard. This is normal.
NOTE the ACC will release the brakes and your
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed on vehicle will start to move or creep slowly.
a down slope, the system will automatically When the ACC no longer detects a vehicle in
You must apply the brakes to keep your vehi-
apply the brake to maintain the vehicle set front, the buzzer will sound, the vehicle sym-
cle stationary.
speed. bol in the display will disappear and your
vehicle will slowly accelerate to the set
speed.

SC00000500-3.fm 101
WARNING
When a vehicle cuts into your path at a
close distance.
When a vehicle in front is not completely
in your path.
When a vehicle in front is towing a
trailer.
When a motorcycle or a bicycle is in 5
front.
When a vehicle in front is a truck loaded
WARNING
WARNING When the ACC is not being used, turn off
with freight that protrudes rearward
When your vehicle no longer follows the from the cargo bed.
the system to avoid unexpected ACC acti-
front vehicle, e.g. at a freeway exit or When the height of a vehicle in front is
vation.
when your vehicle or the front vehicle extremely low or the road clearance of
The ACC will not decelerate your vehicle
changes its lane, your vehicle may acceler- the vehicle is extremely high.
and/or give the approach alarm in the fol-
ate up to the set speed. Apply the brake, if When driving on a road with alternating
lowing cases.
necessary, to slow down. up and down surfaces.
When an object other than a vehicle,
When driving on a curve.
such as a pedestrian, is in front.
When driving on a bumpy or rough road.
When a malfunction is detected in the
Approach alarm system. When driving in a tunnel.
N00576900023 The ACC will not decelerate your vehicle When driving in construction zones.
in the following cases, but will give the When the rear of your vehicle is weighed
While the ACC is activated, if your vehicle is down with the weight of passengers and
approaching too closely to the vehicle in approach alarm.
When the front vehicle is stationary or luggage
front, the ACC gives a warning by sounding a For up to two minutes after starting driv-
moving at an extremely slow speed.
buzzer and displaying a message. Apply the ing.
When your brake system has a problem,
brakes to maintain the appropriate distance to When the surface of the sensor is covered
such as overheating.
the vehicle in front. with dirt, snow, ice, etc.
The ACC may not be able to maintain the
set speed or the distance to a vehicle in When a front vehicle or an oncoming
front and may not alert the driver, if the vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt.
system cannot detect the front vehicle Never use the ACC in the following situa-
properly. Typical situations include: tions:
In heavy traffic.

WARNING CAUTION NOTE

On winding roads. Do not modify the radar sensor or its sur- There is some time lag until the vehicle
On slippery roads, such as icy or snow- rounding area. begins accelerating to the new set speed after
covered roads. Always use tires of the same size, same the set speed has been changed.
In adverse weather conditions, such as type, and same brand, and which have no The set speed can be changed even while
rain, snow or fog. significant wear differences. your vehicle is following a vehicle in front
On steep downslopes. Do not modify the vehicles suspension. using the ACC. In this case, however,
5 When the inclination of a road fre- although the set speed itself is increased,
your vehicle will not accelerate.
quently changes.
To increase the set speed When the switch is held, a buzzer will sound
When the approach alarm frequently
sounds.
N00581500027 every time the set speed changes
When your vehicle is towed or is towing There are two ways to increase the set speed.
another vehicle.
When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna- By using the RES + switch: By using the accelerator pedal:
mometer or free rollers.
When tire inflation pressures are not When the accelerator pedal is depressed
adequate. The set speed will increase by 1 mph (1
km/h) every time you push up the RES + while driving with the ACC control working,
When the temporary spare tire is being you can accelerate the vehicle beyond the
used. switch while the ACC is activated. If you
hold the switch pushed up, the set speed presently set speed.
When the radar sensor and/or its sur-
increases in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments. When the vehicle speed reaches your desired
rounding area are damaged or deformed.
speed, push down and release the SET -
switch and release the accelerator pedal; the
new speed is then set in the system.
CAUTION
To maintain proper performance of the ACC:
Always clean the surface of the radar sen-
sor.
Avoid impacting the radar sensor or its sur-
rounding area.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor or
its surrounding area.
Do not paint the radar sensor.
Do not install a grill guard.

To decrease the set speed NOTE

N00581600028 The set speed can be changed even while
There are two ways to decrease the set speed. your vehicle is following a vehicle in front
using the ACC. In this case, however,
although the set speed itself is decreased,
By using the SET - switch: your vehicle will not decelerate.
When the switch is held, a buzzer will sound
The set speed will decrease by 1 mph (1 every time the set speed changes
5
km/h) every time you push down the SET -
switch while the ACC is activated. If you By using the brake pedal:
hold the switch pushed down, the set speed
WARNING decreases in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments. By depressing the brake pedal while the ACC
The ACC braking control and approach is activated, the ACC control is canceled and
alarm functions will not work while the your vehicle speed will decrease.
accelerator pedal is depressed. At the point where the vehicle speed reaches
your desired speed, push down and release
the SET - switch; the new speed is then set
NOTE in the system.
The set speed indicator in the multi informa-
tion display will show --- while the accel-
erator pedal is depressed.
If the SET - button is not pushed down
while depressing the accelerator pedal, your
vehicle speed will return to the set speed,
after the accelerator pedal is released. When
the accelerator pedal is released, the ACC NOTE
braking control and approach alarm func- There is some time lag until the vehicle
tions may not immediately work. begins decelerating after the set speed has
been changed.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

The ACC control will not resume after The set speed indication on the display turns You can also cancel the ACC control by
releasing the brake pedal. to --- when the accelerator pedal is pressing the ACC ON/OFF switch. If this
depressed. This indication remains as long as switch is pressed while the ACC is ON,
the pedal is in a depressed position. the ACC will be turned off.
To temporarily accelerate the In certain conditions, the braking control and
alarming functions of ACC may not work for When the ACC is canceled, the SET indi-
vehicle
5 N00582800027
a short while after releasing the accelerator
pedal.
cator goes off and the following distance indi-
cator turns to the standby display. The front
Simply depress the accelerator pedal to tem- vehicle indicator also turns to the standby
porarily accelerate the vehicle. Releasing the display when a front vehicle is detected.
pedal automatically slows down the vehicle To cancel ACC control
to the set speed and ACC restarts its control. N00581700029
There are two ways to cancel the ACC con-

trol.
By pressing the CANCEL switch.

By depressing the brake pedal.
In any of the situations listed below, the ACC

control is automatically canceled, a buzzer
sounds and a message is shown in the multi-
information display.
WARNING
The ACC braking control and approach
alarm functions will not work while the
accelerator pedal is depressed.


If the display keeps showing the message,
there is a possibility that the ACC has a
To resume the control
N00581800020
malfunction. Contact your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. After the ACC control has been canceled with
the ACC turned on, the ACC control can be
resumed by pushing down and releasing the
RES - switch.
NOTE
5
When your vehicle stops. When any of the following conditions are
When the ASC is turned off. present, the ACC control cannot be resumed.
While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated. When your vehicle speed is lower than
When the selector lever is in a position approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher
other than D or Ds position. When the ACC system detects an abnor- than 110 mph (180 km/h).
When the parking brake is engaged. mality in the system, the ACC system will When your vehicle is driven at speeds
When the ACC system determines that its be turned off, a buzzer will sound and a between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
performance has been degraded, a buzzer and 25 mph (40 km/h) and the ACC is not
message will be displayed in the multi
detecting a vehicle in front.
will sound and a message will be dis- information display. If the message
When ASC is in the OFF position.
played in the multi information display. remains after the operation mode has been
While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated.
This can occur when turned to the OFF position and then
When the selector lever is in positions other
Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or turned back to the ON position, contact than D (DRIVE) and Ds (DOWN-
ice, adhere to the surface of the radar your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. SHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING).
sensor.
While the brake pedal is depressed.
A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle
While the parking brake is engaged.
is splashing water, snow or dirt.
When the ACC system has judged that the
Driving on a nonbusy road with a few performance for detecting a front vehicle is
vehicles and obstacles in front. degraded.
The brake pads are overheating. When an abnormality in the ACC system
has been detected.


The following distance indicator shows the
To change the following dis- level of the following distance:
NOTE
tance Long The conventional cruise control does not
N00581900021
sound or display the approach alarm, will not
adjust your vehicle speed, and does not con-
With the ACC turned on, the distance trol the distance between your vehicle and a
between your vehicle and a vehicle ahead can vehicle in front.
be selected from three levels by pushing the
Middle
ACC distance switch. Each time the ACC
5 distance switch is pushed, the following dis- General information
tance will change from Long to Middle, N00582100020
to Short, and return to Long again.Every
time the ACC is turned to ON, the following Short FCC ID:OAYARS3-B (for vehicles sold in
distance is reset to Long. the U.S.A)
IC: 4135A-ARS3B (for vehicles sold in the
Canada)
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC

To activate conventional cruise Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
control RSS standard(s).
N00582000029 Operation is subject to the following two con-
Press and hold the ACC ON/OFF switch ditions.
while the operation mode is in the ON posi- this device may not cause harmful inter-
tion. A buzzer will sound and the multi infor- ference.
mation display will show the following this device must accept any interference
indicator. received, including interference that may
NOTE cause undesired operation.
Actual distance will vary depending on your
vehicle speed and the front vehicle speed. CAUTION
The conventional cruise control is turned off Changes or modifications not expressly
The distance will become longer when the
when the operation mode is tuned off. approved by the manufacturer for compli-
vehicle speeds are higher.
For operation of the cruise control, refer to ance could void the users authority to oper-
Cruise control on page 5-92. ate the equipment.

Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) (if so equipped)

judges that there is the risk of a collision, the
system will give audible and visual warnings.
WARNING
The FCM is designed to help avoid certain
When the FCM judges that a collision with
frontal collisions or reduce the crash
the vehicle straight-ahead is imminent, the
speed in such collisions. It is not a substi-
system will automatically apply moderate tute for your safe and careful driving.
braking to warn you to apply the brakes Under certain circumstances, the system
immediately. may not operate or may not detect cor-
When the FCM judges that a collision with
the vehicle straight-ahead is highly unavoid-
rectly a vehicle in front. When your vehi-
cle is approaching a vehicle too closely,
5
able, the system will apply emergency brak- take all necessary actions to avoid a colli-
ing to reduce the severity of the collision and, sion, such as braking and steering, regard-
if possible, to avoid the collision. less of whether the FCM is activated or
not. Never rely on the FCM to prevent a
collision.
Forward collision warning

Forward Collision Mitiga-
function
tion System (FCM) (if so N00577400025
equipped) If the system judges that there is a risk of

N00577300024 your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front,
this function warns you of the potential haz-
The Forward Collision Mitigation System
ard with visual and audible alarms.
(FCM) is designed to help reduce the risk of a
When this function is triggered, a buzzer
collision with a vehicle straight ahead of your
sounds and, at the same time, a BRAKE
vehicle. The FCM uses a radar sensor (A) to
WARNING message appears on the information screen of
determine the distance to a vehicle in front
Before using the FCM, read this entire the multi-information display.
and relative speed to that vehicle. The FCM is
section to fully understand the limitations The FCM will also prepare to provide quick
not designed as an automatic driving system of this system. Failure to follow instruc- brake response and greater brake force when
or as a collision avoidance system. tions could result in an accident. you apply the brakes.
When your vehicle is approaching a vehicle
straight ahead in your path and the FCM


played in the information screen of the multi-
WARNING
The FCM will not activate and will not
provide either warning or braking in cer-
tain situations. Some of these include:
When the selector lever is in a position
other than the D (DRIVE) or Ds
(DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING).
5 When your vehicle speed is extremely
low, less than approximately 2 mph
(2km/h).
NOTE When an object other than a vehicle,
If the FCM detects that the driver is making such as a pedestrian, is in front.
steering and/or acceleration inputs to try and WARNING When the FCM has detected a problem
avoid a collision, the forward collision warn- If the ASC is turned off, the FCM braking in the system.
ings may stop. function will not operate. Refer to Active When a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of
stability control on page 5-90. your vehicle.
If the brake pedal is not depressed within When the vehicle in front is moving at a
FCM braking function 2 seconds after your vehicle has been speed much lower than your vehicles
N00577700028
stopped by the FCM, a warning buzzer speed.
will sound and the brakes activated by the Braking function will not work in the fol-
When the FCM judges that a collision with FCM will automatically be released. lowing situations.
the vehicle straight-ahead is imminent, the Apply the brakes as necessary to keep Your vehicle is driving at approximately
FCM will automatically apply moderate brak- your vehicle stationary. 19 mph (30 km/h) or faster while the
ing to warn the driver to apply the brakes vehicle in front is stationary or moving
immediately. extremely slow.
If the FCM judges that the collision is highly NOTE ASC is OFF.
unavoidable, it will automatically apply When depressing the brake pedal while auto- The forward collision warning function
emergency braking to reduce the severity of matic braking is applied, the brake pedal will and/or the FCM braking function may not
the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col- feel firm. This is normal. Depress the brake activate in certain situations. Some of
lision. pedal harder to apply greater braking force. these include:
When the FCM applies emergency braking, a During the automatic braking, operating When a vehicle cuts into your path at a
buzzer sounds and a warning message is dis- sounds may be heard. This is normal. close distance.

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

When a vehicle ahead is moving at low When the system recognizes drivers Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor or
speed. steering or accelerating actions as evasive its surrounding area.
When a vehicle ahead is not completely actions to avoid collision, FCM control Do not paint the radar sensor.
in your path. and alarm functions may be canceled. Do not install a grill guard.
When a vehicle ahead is towing a trailer. In certain situations, though there is little Do not modify the radar sensor or its sur-
When a motorcycle or a bicycle is in or no risk of a collision, the FCM may rounding area.
front. activate. Examples include:
When overtaking a vehicle.
Always use tires of the same size, same 5
When a vehicle ahead is a truck loaded type and same brand, and which have no
with freight that protrudes rearward When driving on a curve. significant wear differences.
from the cargo bed. When approaching a gate, a railroad Do not modify the vehicles suspensions.
When the height of a vehicle ahead is crossing, an underpass, a narrow bridge,
extremely low or its road clearance is manhole lid or a speed bump.
extremely high. The FCM should be tuned off if any of fol- FCM ON/OFF switch
When driving on a road with alternating lowing situations occur: N00577800029
up and down steep slopes. When the tires are not properly inflated. This switch is used to turn on or off the FCM
When driving on a curve. When the emergency spare tire is used. and also to select the distance which will trig-
When driving on a bumpy or rough road. When your vehicle is towed or your vehi- ger the forward collision warning function.
When driving in a tunnel. cle tows another vehicle.
When the system recognizes drivers When your vehicle is carried on a truck.
steering, accelerating, braking or gear When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
shifting actions as evasive actions to mometer or free rollers.
avoid collision. When the area where the radar sensor is
When the rear of your vehicle is weighed installed has been damaged or deformed.
down with the weight of passengers and
luggage
For up to two minutes after starting driv- CAUTION
ing. To maintain proper performance of the FCM;
When the surface of the sensor is covered Always clean the surface of the radar sen-
with dirt, snow and ice, etc. sor.
When a vehicle ahead or an oncoming Avoid impacting the radar sensor or its sur-
vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt. rounding area.

To turn on/off the FCM system To change forward collision warn- NOTE
ing distance The distance which will trigger the FCM
Every time the operation mode is turned to braking function cannot be adjusted.
ON, the FCM will automatically be turned The distance to the vehicle ahead which trig-
on. gers the forward collision warnings can be When a problem is detected
To turn off the FCM, press and hold the FCM selected from two levels, NEAR or FAR.
switch. A buzzer will sound and the FCM To change the distance mode, push the FCM When the FCM system determines that its
5 OFF message and indicator will appear ON/OFF switch. Every time the switch is performance has been degraded, the forward
in the multi-information display. pushed, the distance mode will be switched. collision warning function and the FCM brak-
The selected distance mode is shown on the ing function will become inoperative.
information screen of the multi-information This can occur when
display.
When NEAR is selected Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,
adhere to the surface of the radar sensor.
A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
splashing water, snow or dirt.
Driving on a nonbusy road with a few
To turn on the FCM again, press and hold the vehicles and obstacles in front.
When FAR is selected The brake pads are overheating.
FCM switch. A buzzer will sound, the FCM
OFF message and the indicator will go FCM TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE
off, and a current distance mode for the for- message will appear and the FCM OFF
ward collision warning will be shown in the indicator will be lit on the information screen
multi-information display. of the multi-information display.
When the radar sensor performance returns,
NOTE the FCM functions will resume operation.
Actual distance which triggers the forward
collision warnings will vary depending on
your vehicle speed and the front vehicle
speed. The distance will become longer
when the vehicle speeds are higher.

Lane Departure Warning System (LDW) (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ate the equipment.
5
NOTE General information
The FCM TEMPORARILY NOT AVAIL- N00580900024
ABLE message may temporarily appear on
FCC ID:OAYARS3-B (for vehicles sold in
the information screen when the radar cannot
detect a vehicle or object within range. This
the U.S.A)
is not a malfunction. When a vehicle or an IC: 4135A-ARS3B (for vehicles sold in the
object comes within range, the FCM func- Canada)
tion will resume and the message will go off.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
If the FCM detects a malfunction in the sys- RSS standard(s).
tem, the FCM! and the FCM SERVICE Operation is subject to the following two con-
REQUIRED message will appear, the FCM ditions.
OFF indicator will be lit on the information
screen of the multi-information display and this device may not cause harmful inter-
Lane Departure Warning
the FCM will automatically be turned off. ference received. System (LDW) (if so equipped)
If the message remains even after the opera- this device must accept any interference N00577900020
tion mode is tuned to OFF and then back to received including interference that may
ON, please contact your authorized Mit- The Lane Departure Warning system (LDW)
cause undesired operation.
subishi Motors dealer. is a driving aid system to help prevent unin-
tentional lane departure. The LDW is
designed to read lane markers by using a
camera (A) under certain conditions. The
LDW will give you both visual and audible


warnings when your vehicle is leaving or has
left the lane.
WARNING
Before using the LDW, read this entire
section to understand the limitations of
this system. Failure to follow instructions
could result in an accident.
Turning on the LDW

5 N00578000028
Every time the operation mode is turned to

ON, the LDW will automatically be turned
on and the LDW indicator will appear on
the information screen of the multi-informa-
tion display, Operation of the LDW
N00581100023
The LDW, when turned ON, is capable of

recognizing the lane in which your vehicle is
travelling and issuing an audible warning
when your vehicle begins to leave that travel
lane. When operating, the LDW indicator
on the multi-information display will be
changed to indicator (green). The LDW
will not operate, however, and the LDW
indicator will be appeared if any of following
Turning off the LDW conditions have occurred:
N00581000022
WARNING To turn off the LDW, press the LDW switch. The vehicle speed is less than 38 mph (60
Never rely solely on the LDW. The LDW is The LDW indicator on the information km/h).
not a collision avoidance system and is not The turn signal lever is being operated or
screen of the multi-information display will
a substitute for your safe and careful driv- has been operated in the past 7 seconds.
then go out.
ing. The hazard warning light is being oper-
To return the LDW to ON, press the LDW
switch again. ated or has been operated in the past 7
seconds.

The brake pedal is being depressed.
WARNING WARNING
The LDW may not be able to detect the When the front windshield wipers do not
Lane departure warning lane correctly in the following situations clean the windshield properly.
N00581200024 and the LDW may not give warnings or
may give false warnings:
While the LDW indicator in the informa-
tion display is lit in green, if your vehicle is When lane markers are not clearly visi- CAUTION
ble. To maintain proper function of the LDW:
leaving or has left the lane, a buzzer will
sound intermittently, LANE DEPARTURE
When the road surface is shiny. Always keep the windshield and the head- 5
When old lane markers remain on the lamps clean.
will appear in the information display and
road surface. Do not put anything, such as a sticker, on
the indicator will be flashing in amber. When the lane markers are double lines the front windshield in front of the LDW
or the shape of the lane markers are camera
complicated. Avoid applying a shock or load to the LDW
When driving in an extremely narrow camera.
lane. Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the
When the distance between your vehicle LDW camera.
and a vehicle in front is short. Use only Mitsubishi Motors genuine Parts
When driving into the sun light. when replacing the windshield wipers.
When driving on curves.
When driving on bumpy roads.
When driving in construction zones. NOTE
NOTE When passing through a place where the When driving conditions are not suitable to
brightness suddenly changes, such as at use the LDW, turn off the LDW.
The warnings will not continue for more than
the entrance to or exit of a tunnel.
10 seconds, even if your vehicle continues
When the headlights of an oncoming
leaving the lane.
vehicle are very bright.
When the rear of your vehicle is weighed
System problem warning
N00578100029
down with the weight of passengers and
WARNING luggage. If a problem occurs with the system, a visual
The LDW will not function when no lane When the headlights of your vehicle are warning specific to the type of the problem is
marker exists, such as at an intersection not clean or are not properly aimed. given together with an audible alarm.
or near a toll booth.
When the front windshield is not clean.

Tire pressure monitoring system
LDW camera is too hot WARNING

The compact spare wheel does not have a
The alarm shown below is displayed if the tire inflation pressure sensor.
system becomes temporarily unavailable due When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-
to the high temperature of the LDW camera. sure monitoring system will not work
properly.
After the camera has cooled down, the system
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
will automatically return to operation.
5 dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.
Tire pressure monitoring

system NOTE
N00530201481
The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
substitute for regularly checking tire infla-
The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire tion pressures.
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The as described in Tires on page 9-14.
system only indicates when a tire is signifi- The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is
NOTE cantly under-inflated. installed in the illustrated location.
The warning message can be cleared tempo- On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has
rarily by setting the LDW switch to OFF. the rubber air valve (B), replace grommet
and washer (C) with a new one when the
tire is replaced.
LDW deactivation due to fault On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has
the rubber sir valve (D), replace rubber
valve (D) with new one when the tire is
If the LDW is deactivated due to a malfunc-
replaced.
tion in the system, the alarm shown below is
displayed. Contact your authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer for inspection of the sys-
tem.


warning light normally illuminates and goes
NOTE off a few seconds later.
CAUTION
For details, please contact your authorized If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for ing light does not illuminate when the igni-
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, tion switch is turned to the ON position or
Type 1 the operation mode is put in ON, it means
the warning light will remain illuminated
that the tire pressure monitoring system is
while the ignition switch is in the ON posi- not working properly. Have the system
tion or the operation mode is put in ON.
Refer to If the warning light / display illumi-
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
5
nates while driving on page 5-116 and take In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
the necessary measures. system may be preventing the monitoring of
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
NOTE If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
Type 2 In addition, the warning display is displayed
sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
monitoring system warning light will blink
mation display. for approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. The warning light
will issue further warnings each time the
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction
exists.
Check to see whether the warning light goes
off after few minutes driving.
If it then goes off during driving, there is no
The tire pressure monitoring problem.
system warning light / display However, if the warning light does not go
N00532701321 off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of
When the ignition switch is turned to the the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
ON position or the operation mode is put in the warning light appears while driving,
ON, the tire pressure monitoring system avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
high-speed driving.


Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
NOTE and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- erly.
In addition, the warning display is displayed
cles handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
mation display. If the warning light / display
proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- illuminates while driving
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached N00532801511
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system
5 low tire pressure telltale. warning light illuminates, avoiding hard
braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a high speeds. You should stop and adjust
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
should be checked monthly when cold and the system is not operating properly. The soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator is combined the same time. Refer to Tires on page
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the with the low tire pressure telltale. 9-14.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. When the system detects a malfunction, the
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size telltale will flash for approximately one min- NOTE
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard ute and then remain continuously illuminated. In addition, the warning display is displayed
or tire inflation pressure label, you should This sequence will continue upon subsequent on the information screen in the multi-infor-
determine the proper tire inflation pressure vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction mation display.
for those tires.) exists. When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has When the malfunction indicator is illumi- sure, do not apply excessive force to the
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring nated, the system may not be able to detect or valve stem to avoid breakage.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire signal low tire pressure as intended. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
pressure telltale when one or more of your sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
tires is significantly under-inflated. valve stem.
of reasons, including the installation of Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the get into the valve, resulting in damage to the
tale illuminates, you should stop and check vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- tire inflation pressure sensor.
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal- Do not use metal valve caps, which may
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig- function telltale after replacing one or more cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
overheat and can lead to tire failure. the replacement or alternate tires and wheels sors.


A window tint that affects the radio wave
NOTE NOTE signals is installed.
Once adjustments have been made, the warn- To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
driving. tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi NOTE
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
2. If the tire pressure monitoring system an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
warning light remains illuminated after not covered by your warranty. large variations in ambient temperature, the
you have been driving for about 20 min-
utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray
on any tire.
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
(causing the warning light / display come on)
5
sure, one or more of the tires may have a Such a spray could damage the tire inflation when the ambient temperature is relatively
puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a pressure sensors. low. If the warning light / display comes on,
puncture, have it repaired by an autho- Have any puncture repaired by an authorized adjust the tire inflation pressure.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
possible.
The tire pressure monitoring system may not Whenever the tires and wheels
WARNING work normally in the following circum- are replaced with new ones
If the warning light / display illuminates stances: N00532900081
while you are driving, avoid hard braking, If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure
sharp steering maneuvers and high A wireless facility or device using the
same frequency is near the vehicle. sensors are installed, their ID codes must be
speeds.
Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders programmed into the tire pressure monitoring
Driving with an under-inflated tire
and/or on the wheels. system. Have tire and wheel replacement per-
adversely affects vehicle performance and
can result in an accident. The tire inflation pressure sensors battery formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
is dead. dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire
Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel
CAUTION wheels are being used. replacement is not done by an authorized
If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla- Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by
the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire tion pressure sensors are being used. your warranty.
could lead to an accident. Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
The warning light / display may not illumi- rized by the vehicle are used.
nate immediately in the event of a tire blow- Compact spare tire is fitted as a road
out or rapid leak. wheel.

CAUTION Rear-view camera (if so Location of rear-view camera

The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
equipped)
the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at
N00546201170
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
the left side of the liftgate handle.
the sensors.
When the selector lever is in the R
(REVERSE) position with the ignition switch
in the ON position, or the operation mode
5 General information is put in ON, the rear-view image will be dis-
N00533001233
played on the screen of the Mitsubishi Multi-
Your tire pressure monitoring system oper- Communication System or the DISPLAY
ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal AUDIO-AM/FM radio/CD player with touch
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules panel.
(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry When the selector lever is shifted out of the
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). R (REVERSE) position, the rear-view
This device complies with part 15 of FCC image will go off.
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s). WARNING
CAUTION
Never rely solely on the rear-view camera If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
ditions. to clear the area behind your vehicle. cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
Always check visually behind and all lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
This device may not cause harmful inter- around your vehicle for persons, animals, clean, soft cloth.
ference. obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to To avoid damaging the camera;
This device must accept any interference do so can result in vehicle damage, serious
Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
received, including interference that may injury or death.
it by using an abrasive compound.
cause undesired operation. The rear-view camera is an aid system for
Do not disassemble the camera.
backing up, but it is not a substitute for
Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.
your visual confirmation.
CAUTION The view on the screen is limited, and
Do not spray the camera and its surround-
Changes or modifications not expressly ings with high-pressure water.
objects outside the view, such as under the
approved by the manufacturer for compli- bumper or around either corner of the Make sure that the liftgate is securely
ance could void the users authority to oper- bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen. closed when backing up.
ate the equipment.

Reference lines on the screen CAUTION Case 2

The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
Reference lines and upper surface of the rear lens. As a result, images and distances shown
on the screen are not exact.
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
Actual distance may be different from dis-
Red line (B) indicates approximately 20 tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper. depending on the loading condition of the
Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle A- Actual objects 5
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the width are based on a level, flat road surface. B- Objects shown on the screen
vehicle body. In the following cases, objects shown on the
Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis- screen will appear to be farther off than they
tance from the rear bumper. actually are. CAUTION
When the rear of the vehicle is weighed The reference lines for distance and vehicle
down with the weight of passengers and width are intended to indicate the distance to
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
When there is an upward slope at the back. They may not indicate correct distance
(Case2) depending on the shape of an obstacle.
For example, when there is an object behind
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting
Case 1 in the direction of the vehicle, the reference
lines on the screen will indicate that point A
is the farthest point and point B is the closest
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B
are actually the same distance from the vehi-
1: Approximately at the rear edge of the cle, and point C is farther off than point A
and B.
rear bumper
2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
A- Actual objects
3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) B- Objects shown on the screen

Instrument cluster
2- Multi Information display (Type
Instrument cluster 1:Color liquid crystal display type)
N00519001402
P.5-121
Type 1 Information screen display list (Type 1)
P.5-149
Multi Information display (Type
2:Mono-color liquid crystal display
type) P.5-140
5 3- Speedometer P.5-120
4- Rheostat illumination button (Type 1)
P.5-121
5- Multi information display switch (Type
NOTE 2) P.5-141
Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
Monitor brightness is adjusted automatically Type 2
by sensors. Speedometer
N00519101272
It is possible to change the display language
of the screen. The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in
For details, please refer to the separated miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
owners manual for Mitsubishi Multi-Com- (km/h).
munication System.
Under certain circumstances, it may become
difficult to see an image on the screen, even Type A
when the system is functioning correctly.
In a dark area, such as at night.
When water drops or condensation are on 1- Tachometer P.5-121
the lens.
When sun light or headlights shine directly
into the lens.

Multi Information display - Type 1
Type B CAUTION NOTE

The red zone indicates an engine speed You can adjust to 8 different levels for when
beyond the range of safe operation. the front side-marker and parking lights are
illuminated and when they are not.
Select the correct selector position to control If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
the engine speed so that the tachometer indi- light control, the light switch is in a position
cator does not enter the red zone. other than the OFF position and it is suffi-
ciently dark outside the vehicle, the meter
illumination switches automatically to the
5
Meter illumination control adjusted brightness.
The brightness level of the instruments is
(Vehicle equipped with the stored when the ignition switch is turned to
multi information display - the OFF or LOCK position or the opera-
Tachometer Type 1) tion mode is put in OFF.
N00519201303
N00554901206
If you press and hold the button for longer
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per than about 2 second when the front side-
Each time you press this button, there is a marker and parking lights are illuminated,
minute. This allows the driver to determine sound and the brightness of the instruments the brightness level changes to the maximum
the most efficient selector position and engine changes. level. Pressing and holding the button for
speed combinations. longer than about 2 second again returns the
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine brightness level to the previous level.
performance.
Multi Information display -

Type 1
N00555001288
The multi information display displays warn-

ings, the odometer, trip odometer, service
reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel
remaining, outside temperature, selector lever
1- Brightness level
position, average and momentary fuel con-
2- Rheostat illumination button
sumption, driving range, average speed, etc.


It is also possible to change elements such as
the language and units used on the multi
[With ignition switch or operation mode in

OFF]
1- Warning display screen P.5-128

2- Information screen P.5-124
Interrupt display screen P.5-127
3- Door ajar warning display screen
P.5-128
4- Odometer P.5-129


[With ignition switch or operation mode in ON]
1- Drive mode indicator display screen (if 9- Engine coolant temperature display
P.5-128
NOTE
so equipped) P.5-76 The fuel units, outside temperature units,
2- S-AWC control mode display screen (if 10- Odometer P.5-129
display language, and other settings can be
so equipped) P.5-78 11- Cruise control display screen (if so changed.
3- equipped) P.5-92 Refer to Changing the function settings on
Warning display screen P.5-128
12- Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) page 5-134.
4- Forward Collision Mitigation System
display screen (if so equipped)
(FCM) OFF display screen (if so
P.5-96
equipped) P.5-107
13- ECO indicator (if so equipped) Multi information display
5- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) dis-
P.5-133
play screen (if so equipped) P.5-111
14- Fuel remaining display screen switch
6- ECO mode indicator display screen
P.5-129 N00555101188
P.5-178 Each time the multi information display
15- Outside temperature display screen
7- Information screen P.5-124 switch is operated, the buzzer sounds and the
P.5-129
8- Selector lever position display multi information display changes between
P.5-70 information such as warnings, trip odometer,

average and momentary fuel consumption,
distance range, etc.
It is also possible to change elements such as
the language and units used on the multi
information display by operating the multi
information display switch.
Information screen (With the ignition switch in OFF or LOCK position or the operation mode in
OFF)
N00555301177
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch, the display screen switches in the following order.
*: When there is a warning display


1- Trip odometer P.5-129
3- ECO score display P.5-133
4- Service reminder P.5-130
5- Redisplay of a warning display screen P.5-128
Information screen (With the ignition switch is turned from the OFF or LOCK position to the
ON position or the operation mode is changed from OFF to ON) 5
N00555801202
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or the operation mode is put in ON, the display screen switches in the following order.
*: When the inspection time has arrived

1- Screen when the ignition switch or the operation mode is OFF
2- System check screen P.5-131
3- Screen when the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON

Information screen (With the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON)
N00556201232
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch, the display screen switches in the following order.
*: When there is a warning display

3- Driving range display P.5-132
ECO drive assist display P.5-133
4- Average fuel consumption display
P.5-132
ECO drive assist display P.5-133
5- Average speed display P.5-132
Momentary fuel consumption display P.5-133
6- ECO score display P.5-133
7- S-AWC operation display (if so equipped) P.5-80


9- Function setting screen P.5-134
10- Redisplay of a warning display screen P.5-128
NOTE
While driving, the service reminder are not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch. Always stop the vehicle in a safe place
before operating.
While driving, the function setting screen is not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch.
Always park the vehicle in a safe place, firmly apply the parking brake and put the selector lever into the P (PARK) position before operating the func-
tion setting screen.
5
Refer to Changing the function settings on page 5-134.
When there is information to be announced, such as a system fault, the tone sounds and the screen display is switched.
Refer to Interrupt display screen on page 5-127.
Interrupt display screen Returning to the display screen

N00556301217 from before the warning display
Warning display Even if the cause of the warning display is

not eliminated, you can return to the screen
that was displayed before the warning dis-
When there is information to be announced,
play.
such as a system fault, the tone sounds and
the information screen is switched to the If you press the multi information display
warning display screen. switch, the display screen switches to the
Refer to the warning list and take the neces- screen display from before the warning and
sary measures.
the warning (A) is displayed.
Refer to Warning display list on page
5-150.
When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning display goes out
automatically.

NOTE warning display screen Door ajar warning display

Warning display screens with a or
N00555201222
screen
This is displayed when you press the multi N00529700014
mark displayed in the upper right of the
information display switch and return from
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
the display, press the multi information dis-
the warning display screen to the previous
play switch as follows. screen.
This mark is also displayed if there is another
5 : Press lightly.
warning other than the one displayed.
: Press for about 2 seconds or more. When the cause of the warning display is If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com-
eliminated, the warning goes out automat- pletely closed, this displays the open door or
ically. liftgate.
Redisplay of a warning display If the speed increases to about 5 mph (8
screen NOTE
km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a tone will
N00579600021 sound 4 times to inform you that a door is
When the warning is displayed, the warn- ajar.
When the warning is displayed, if you ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
lightly press the multi information display information screen.
switch a few times, the warning display Refer to Information screen (with the igni-
CAUTION
screen you switched from is redisplayed. tion switch in OFF or LOCK position or Always make sure that the warning display
the operation mode in OFF) on page 5-124. goes out before beginning to drive.
Refer to Information screen (with the igni-
Other interrupt displays tion switch or the operation mode in ON) on
N00579700022
page 5-126. Engine coolant temperature
The operation status of each system is dis-
display
played on the information screen.
N00578200020
For further details, refer to the appropriate
page in the warning display list. Shows the engine coolant temperature.
Refer to Other interrupt displays on page If the coolant becomes hot, will blink.
5-161. Pay careful attention to the engine coolant
temperature display while you are driving.

CAUTION NOTE NOTE

If the engine is overheating, will blink. It may take several seconds to stabilize the On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
display after refilling the tank. rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
and take the required measures. Refer to the operation mode in ON, the remaining
Engine overheating on page 8-4. fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel Outside temperature display
level.
screen
The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
filler door is located on the left side of the N00556501118
5
Fuel remaining display screen vehicle. (Refer to Filling the fuel tank on Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
N00556601180 page 3-3.)
Shows the amount of fuel remaining.
NOTE
The display setting can be changed to the
Fuel remaining warning display
preferred units (F or C).
N00578300021
Refer to Changing the function settings on
When the fuel level runs low, the information page 5-134.
screen switches to the interrupt display of the Depending on factors such as the driving
fuel remaining warning display and the mark conditions, the displayed temperature may
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes. If vary from the actual outside temperature.
the warning display appears, refuel as soon as
possible.
Odometer
N00574901026
F- Full Shows the total distance traveled.

E- Empty
Trip odometer
CAUTION N00575001024
Running out of gas could damage the cata- Shows the distance traveled between two
lytic converter. If the warning display points.
appears, refuel as soon as possible.


Usage examples for trip odometer , trip 1. Shows the time until the next periodic
Service reminder inspection.
odometer N00556701237
It is possible to measure two currently
traveled distances, from home using
Displays the approximate time until the next NOTE
recommended periodic inspection. --- is Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
trip odometer and from a particular displayed when the inspection time has km) and the time in units of 1 month.
point on the way using trip odometer arrived.
.
5 NOTE
2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
tion is due. Contact an authorized Mit-
The service reminder time can be modified subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
To reset the trip odometer by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, of your choice to have the system
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to checked.
Severe maintenance schedule in your vehi-
To return the display to 0, hold down the
cles Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For
multi information display switch for about 2 At that time, when the ignition switch is
further information, please contact your
seconds or more. Only the currently dis- switched from the OFF or LOCK
played value will be reset. position to the ON position or the oper-
ation mode is changed from OFF to ON,
Example the warning display is displayed for a few
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip seconds on the information screen.
odometer will be reset.
Both trip odometers and can

count up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
kilometers.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
When disconnecting the battery terminal,
displays the time until the next periodic
the memories of trip odometer displays
inspection.
and are cleared, and their displays
return to 0.0 miles/kilometers.


2. Press and hold the multi information dis-
To reset NOTE
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
The --- display cannot be reset while the
The --- display can be reset while the igni- to display and make it flash. (If there ignition switch or the operation mode is in
tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF. is no operation for about 10 seconds with ON.
When the display is reset, the time until the this indicator flashing, the display returns When --- is displayed, after a certain dis-
next periodic inspection is displayed and the to the previous screen.) tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
play is reset and the time until the next
warning display is no longer displayed when
the ignition switch is switched from the
3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly
press the multi information display
periodic inspection is displayed.
If you accidentally reset the display, consult
5
OFF or LOCK position to the ON
switch, the screen switches from --- to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
position or the operation mode is changed assistance.
CLEAR. After that, the time until the
from OFF to ON.
next periodic inspection is shown.
1. When you lightly press the multi informa-
tion display switch, the information System check screen
screen switches to the service reminder N00578400022
display screen. When the ignition switch is turned to the

ON, the system check screen is displayed for
about 4 seconds. If there is no fault, the infor-
mation screen is displayed.
If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn-
ing display.
Refer to Warning display list on page
5-150.
CAUTION
The customer is responsible for making sure
that regular inspections and maintenance and
periodic inspections and maintenance are
performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
tions.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

The system check screen display varies The display setting can be changed to the Average fuel consumption may vary depend-
depending on your equipment. preferred units (miles or km). ing on the driving conditions (road condi-
Refer to Changing the function settings on tions, how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel
page 5-134. consumption may differ from the fuel con-
sumption displayed, so treat the fuel con-
Driving range display sumption displayed as just a rough guideline.
N00575201026 Average fuel consumption dis-
5 Shows the approximate driving range (how play
Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
many more miles or kilometers you can N00575301027 reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
drive). When this driving range falls below This displays the average fuel consumption
sumption display.
30 miles (50 km), --- is displayed. from the last reset to the present.
Refuel as soon as possible. preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),
There are 2 types of mode settings of manual L/100km or km/L}.
reset and automatic reset. Refer to Changing the function settings on
NOTE Refer to Changing the reset mode for aver- page 5-134.
The driving range is determined based on the age fuel consumption and average speed on
fuel consumption data. This may vary page 5-135.
depending on the driving conditions and hab- For information on how to change the aver- Average speed display
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a age fuel consumption display setting, refer to N00578500023
rough guideline. Changing the function settings on page This displays the average speed from the last
When you refuel, the driving range display is 5-134. reset to the present.
updated. There are 2 types of mode setting of manual
However, if you only add a small amount of
reset and automatic reset.
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. NOTE
Fill to a full tank whenever possible.
Refer to Changing the reset mode for aver-
The average fuel consumption display can be
When your vehicle is stopped on an reset separately in both auto reset mode and
age fuel consumption and average speed on
extremely steep hill, the driving range value manual reset mode. page 5-135.
may, change. This is due to the movement of --- is displayed when the average fuel con- For the method for changing the average
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any sumption cannot be measured. speed display setting, refer to Changing the
breakdown. The initial (default) setting is Auto reset function settings on page 5-134.
mode.


sumption, it can help you drive with the better
NOTE fuel consumption.
The average speed display can be reset sepa- ECO drive level
rately in both auto reset mode and manual
reset mode. NOTE
--- is displayed when the average speed When the momentary fuel consumption can-
cannot be measured. not be measured, a bar graph is not shown.
The initial (default) setting is Auto reset The display setting can be changed to the
Low High
mode. preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),
L/100km or km/L}.
5
preferred units (mph or km/h). Refer to Changing the function settings on
page 5-134. It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.
Disconnecting the battery cable will erase Refer to Changing the function settings on
from memory the manual reset mode or auto page 5-134. ECO Score
reset mode setting for the average speed dis- N00578800026
play. ECO score indicates the points you have

ECO indicator scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num-
N00568701032 ber of leaves as follows:
Momentary fuel consumption This indicator will be displayed when fuel-
[When the ignition switch or the operation
display efficient driving is achieved.
mode is ON]
N00578600024
The display shows the score you achieved in
While driving, the momentary fuel consump- ECO Drive Assist the last several minutes.
tion is shown with a bar graph. N00578700025
The mark in the momentary fuel gauge [When the ignition switch is turned to the
This function displays how fuel-efficiently
shows the average fuel consumption. OFF or LOCK position or the operation
you are driving under different driving condi-
When the momentary fuel consumption sur- mode is put in OFF]
tions.
passes the average fuel consumption, the The display shows the overall ECO score the
The ECO drive assist display will change as
momentary fuel consumption is displayed function has counted from the time when the
follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using
with a green bar graph. ignition switch is turned to the ON position
the accelerator in a way well matched with
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary to the time when it is turned to the OFF or
the vehicle speed.
fuel consumption above the average fuel con- LOCK or ACC position, or from the time


when the operation mode is set to ON to 2. When you lightly press the multi informa-
the time when it is set to OFF. tion meter switch, the information screen
NOTE
To return the menu screen to the function set-
switches to the function setting screen.
ting screen, press and hold the multi infor-
Refer to Information screen on page
mation display switch (for about 2 seconds
ECO drive level 5-126. or more).
If no operations are made within about 30
seconds of the menu screen being displayed,
5 the display returns to the function setting
screen.
Low High
CAUTION 4. Select the item to change on the menu
For safety, stop the vehicle before operating. screen and change to the desired setting.
While driving, even if you operate the multi For further details on the operation meth-
information display switch, the function set- ods, refer to the following sections.
ting screen is not displayed.
Changing the function settings Refer to Changing the reset mode for
N00556801195
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- average fuel consumption and average
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place. speed on page 5-135.
Fully apply the parking brake and move Refer to Changing the fuel consumption
to switch from the setting mode screen to
the selector lever into the P (PARK) display unit on page 5-136.
the menu screen.
position. Refer to Changing the temperature unit
on page 5-137.
Refer to Changing the display language
on page 5-137.
Refer to Changing the language on Mit-
subishi Multi-Communication System or
Bluetooth 2.0 interface to match the
multi information display (if so
equipped) on page 5-138.
Refer to Operation sound setting on
page 5-138.


Refer to Changing the time until REST 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- When the following operation is per-
REMINDER is displayed on page play switch to select AVG (average fuel formed, the mode setting changes auto-
5-139. consumption and average speed setting). matically from manual to auto.
Refer to Changing the turn signal sound
on page 5-139. [Except for vehicles equipped with the
Refer to Changing the momentary fuel F.A.S.T.-key]
consumption display on page 5-139. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
Refer to Returning to the factory set- tion from the ACC, LOCK or OFF
tings on page 5-140. position. 5
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
NOTE key]
If the battery is disconnected, these function Change the operation mode to ON from
settings are reset from memory and is auto- ACC or OFF.
matically to the factory settings.
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) Auto reset mode
Changing the reset mode for aver- to switch in sequence from A or 1 (Auto
When the average fuel consumption and
age fuel consumption and average reset) M, 2 or P (Manual reset) A or
average speed are being displayed, if you
speed 1 (Auto reset).
hold down the multi information display
The setting is changed to the selected
N00557001240 switch, these calculations will be reset to
reset condition.
You can change the mode condition for the zero.
average fuel consumption and average speed
display to Auto reset or Manual reset. Manual reset mode
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- If you press and hold the multi informa-
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) tion meter switch when the average fuel
to switch from the setting mode screen to consumption and average speed are dis-
the menu screen. played, these calculations will be reset to
Refer to Changing the function settings zero.
on page 5-134.


When the engine switch or the operation 4. Lightly press the multi information dis-
Changing the fuel consumption
mode is in the following conditions, the play switch to switch to select the units.
average fuel consumption display and the display unit 5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
N00557101166
average speed display will automatically play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
reset. The fuel consumption display unit can be to change the setting to the selected unit.
changed. The distance, speed, and amount
[Except for vehicles equipped with the units are also changed to match the selected
F.A.S.T.-key] fuel consumption unit. NOTE
5 The ignition switch has been set to the The display units for the driving range, the
ACC, LOCK or OFF position for 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- average fuel consumption, the average speed
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) and the momentary fuel consumption are
about 4 hours or more.
changed, but the units for the indicating nee-
to change from the setting mode screen to
dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- the menu screen.
odometer will remain unchanged.
key] Refer to Changing the function settings
If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
The operation mode has been in ACC or on page 5-134. the unit setting is erased and is automatically
OFF for about 4 hours or more. 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}.
play switch to select AVG UNIT (fuel
NOTE consumption display unit setting).
The distance and speed units are also changed
The average fuel consumption display and in the following combinations to match the
average speed display can be reset separately
selected fuel consumption unit.
in both auto reset mode and manual reset
mode.
Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
Distance Speed
Fuel
from memory the manual reset mode or auto (driving (average
economy
reset mode setting for the average speed dis- range) speed)
play and average fuel consumption display. mpg (US) mile (s) mph
The initial (default) setting is Auto reset
mode.
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
km /L km km /h
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- L /100 km km km /h
to display AVG UNIT (fuel consump-
tion display unit setting).

2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
Changing the temperature unit NOTE play switch to select LANGUAGE (lan-
N00557201154 On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
guage setting).
The temperature display unit can be switched. Communication System, the temperature
value of the air conditioner screen of Mit-
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- subishi Multi-Communication System is
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) switched in conjunction with outside temper-
to switch from the setting mode screen to ature display unit of the multi information
the menu screen. display.
However, F or C are not shown to the
5
Refer to Changing the function settings
air conditioner screen.
on page 5-134.
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- the unit setting is erased and is automatically
play switch to select (temperature set to F (C).
unit setting).
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- Changing the display language 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) N00557301184 play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
to switch in from C to F, or from F to to display LANGUAGE (language set-
The language of the multi information display
C. ting).
can be changed.
The setting is changed to the selected tem- 4. Lightly press the multi information dis-
perature unit. 1. Press and hold the multi information display switch to select the desired language.
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) 5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
NOTE to change from the setting mode screen to play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
The temperature value on air conditioner the menu screen. to change the setting to the selected lan-
panel is switched in conjunction with outside Refer to Changing the function settings guage.
temperature display unit of the multi infor- on page 5-134.
mation display.
However, F or C are not shown to tem- NOTE
perature display of an air conditioner. If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the language setting is erased and is automat-
ically set to ENGLISH.
If --- is selected in the language setting, a
warning message is not displayed when there
is a warning display or interrupt display.


2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
Changing the language on Mit- NOTE
subishi Multi-Communication play switch to select (language When A or 1 (language cooperation:
cooperative control).
System or Bluetooth 2.0 interface enabled) has been selected, the language for
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System
to match the multi information
(if so equipped) or Bluetooth 2.0 interface
display (if so equipped) (if so equipped) is automatically changed to
N00529801298 the language selected for the multi informa-
5 The language used in Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
tion display.
When M, 2 or P (language cooperation:
munication System (if so equipped) or Blue- disabled) has been selected, the language
tooth 2.0 interface (if so equipped) can be for Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys-
changed automatically to the same language tem (if so equipped) or Bluetooth 2.0
as that shown in the multi information dis- interface (if so equipped) is not automati-
play. cally changed to match the language
selected for the multi information display.
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis- On vehicles equipped with the audio system,
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) play switch to switch from A/1 (Auto the language on the display of the audio sys-
to switch from the setting mode screen to reset mode) to M/2/P (Manual reset tem is not switched even if you select A or 1
the menu screen. Refer to Changing the mode), or from M/2/P to A/1. The setting of the language cooperation control.
function settings on page 5-134. is changed to the selected condition.
Operation sound setting
NOTE N00557401156
If the battery is disconnected, the language You can turn off the operation sounds of the
cooperative control is automatically set to multi information display switch and rheostat
A or 1 (language cooperation: enabled). illumination button.
The language cooperation setting can be
switched in the following manner. 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
to switch from the setting mode screen to
the menu screen.
on page 5-134.


2. Lightly press the multi information dis- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch to select (operation play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
sound setting). to switch from the setting mode screen to to switch from the setting mode screen to
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- the menu screen. the menu screen.
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) Refer to Changing the function settings Refer to Changing the function settings
to switch from ON (operation sound on) on page 5-134. on page 5-134.
to OFF (operation sound off), or from 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
play switch to select ALARM (rest time
OFF to ON.
setting).
play switch to select . (changing the 5
The setting is changed to the selected con- turn signal sound)
dition. 3. Press and hold the multi information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
NOTE to display ALARM (rest time setting). to switch from 1 (turn-signal sound 1) to 2
4. Lightly press the multi information dis- (turn-signal sound 2), or from 2 to 1.
the operation sound setting is erased and is play switch to select the time until the dis- The setting changes to the selected turn
automatically set to ON (operation sound play appears. signal sound.
on). 5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
The operation sound setting only deactivates play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
the operation sound of the multi information to change the setting to the selected time. Changing the momentary fuel con-
display switch and rheostat illumination but- sumption display
ton. The warning display and other sounds NOTE N00563601049
cannot be deactivated. If the battery is disconnected, the memory of It is possible to change the bar graph setting
the unit setting is erased and is automatically of the momentary fuel consumption display.
set to the OFF.
Changing the time until REST The drive time is reset when the ignition 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
REMINDER is displayed switch is in the LOCK or OFF position play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
N00557501160
or the operation mode is in OFF. to switch from the setting mode screen to
The time until the display appears can be the menu screen.
changed. Refer to Changing the function settings
Changing the turn signal sound on page 5-134.
N00563501080 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
It is possible to change the turn signal sound. play switch to select . (changing
the momentary fuel consumption display)


NOTE
Average fuel consumption and average
to switch from ON (with the green bar
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
graph) to OFF (without the green bar
Fuel consumption display unit: mpg (US)
graph), or from OFF to ON.
or (L/100 km)
The setting changes to the selected bar
Temperature unit: F (Fahrenheit) or {C
graph setting. (Celsius)}
5 Display language: ENGLISH
Returning to the factory settings Cooperative language setting: A
N00557601190 Operation sounds: ON (Operation sound
All of the function settings can be returned to on) 1- Frozen road warning P.5-143
their factory settings. REST REMINDER display: OFF 2- Information display P.5-141
Turn signal sound: Turn signal sound 1 3- Selector lever position display
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- Momentary fuel consumption with the P.5-62, 5-70
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) green bar graph: ON
to switch from the setting mode screen to 5- Fuel remaining display P.5-144
the menu screen. Multi Information display -
on page 5-134. Type 2 NOTE
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- N00555001291
When the ignition switch is in the OFF
play switch to select RESET (return to The multi information display displays the position, the selector lever position display,
the factory settings). odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, fuel remaining display and frozen road warn-
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- fuel remaining, outside temperature, selector ing are not displayed.
play switch (for about 5 seconds or more), lever position, average fuel consumption,
the buzzer sounds and all of the function driving range, etc.
settings are returned to the factory set-
tings. It is also possible to change elements such as
the units used on the multi information dis-
play.
NOTE
The factory settings are as follows.

Information display
N00574801025
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.
1- Odometer 6- Average fuel consumption display P.5-143

2- Trip odometer 7- Outside temperature display P.5-143
3- Trip odometer 8- Service reminder (distance) P.5-144
4- Meter illumination control P.5-142 9- Service reminder (month) P.5-144
5- Driving range display P.5-142
NOTE
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display and outside temperature display are not dis-
played.
While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch.

Odometer Both trip odometers and can

NOTE
count up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
N00574901039 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9 tively for when the parking lights or head-
The odometer indicates the total distance the miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/ lights are illuminated and when they are not.
vehicle has traveled. kilometers. Each time you reduce two brightness levels,
When disconnecting the battery terminal, the segment display of the brightness level
Trip odometer the memories of trip odometer displays decreases one by one.
5 N00575001037 and are cleared, and their displays If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
light control, when the lamp switch is in a
The trip odometer indicates the distance trav- return to 0.0 miles/kilometers.
position other than the OFF position, the
eled between two points. meter illumination switches automatically to
Meter illumination control the adjusted brightness, depending on the
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip N00578900027 brightness outside the vehicle.
odometer Each time you press and hold the multi infor- The brightness level of the instruments is
It is possible to measure two currently mation display switch for about 2 seconds or stored when the ignition switch is turned to
traveled distances, from home using the OFF position.
more, there is a sound and the brightness of
trip odometer and from a particular the instruments changes.
point on the way using trip odometer
. Driving range display
N00575201039
This displays the approximate driving range

(how many more miles or kilometers you can
To reset the trip odometer
drive). When the driving range falls below
approximately 30 miles (50 km), --- is dis-
To return the display to 0, hold down the played.
multi information display switch for about 2
seconds or more. Only the currently dis-
played value will be reset. NOTE
The driving range is determined based on the
Example 1- Brightness level fuel consumption data. This may vary
2- Multi information display switch depending on the driving conditions and hab-
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
odometer will be reset. rough guideline.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

When you refuel, the driving range display is The average fuel consumption display can be The display setting can be changed to the
updated. reset separately for the auto reset mode and preferred units (F or C).
However, if you only add a small amount of for the manual reset mode. Refer to Changing the function settings on
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. --- is displayed when the average fuel con- page 5-146.
Fill to a full tank whenever possible. sumption cannot be measured. Depending on factors such as the driving
When your vehicle is stopped on an The initial (default) setting is Auto reset conditions, the displayed temperature may
extremely steep hill, the driving range value
may, change. This is due to the movement of
mode. vary from the actual outside temperature.
5
Average fuel consumption may vary depend
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any on the driving conditions (road conditions,
breakdown. how you drive, etc.). The actual fuel con- Frozen road warning
The display setting can be changed to the sumption may differ from the fuel consump-
N00579000025
preferred units (miles or km). tion displayed, so treat the fuel consumption
Refer to Changing the function settings on displayed as just a rough guideline. If the outside air temperature drops below
page 5-146. Disconnecting the battery cable will erase approx. 37 F (3 C), the alarm sounds and
from memory the manual reset mode or auto the outside air temperature warning symbol
reset mode setting for the average fuel con- (A) flashes for about 10 seconds.
Average fuel consumption dis- sumption display.
play The display setting can be changed to the
N00575301030 preferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}.
This displays the average fuel consumption Refer to Changing the function settings on
from the last reset to the present. page 5-146.
The reset mode conditions for the average
fuel consumption display can be switched
between Auto reset and Manual reset. Outside temperature display
For information on how to change the aver- N00556501121
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
Changing the function settings on page
5-146.


There is a danger the road might be icy, even If fuel is added with the ignition switch in Running out of gas could damage the cata-
when this symbol is not flashing, so please the ON position, the remaining fuel dis- lytic converter.
take care when driving. play may incorrectly indicate the fuel level. If the warning display appears, refuel as soon
The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel as possible.
tank filler door is located on the left side of
Fuel remaining display the vehicle. (Refer to Filling the fuel tank
5 N00556601193
on page 3-3.) NOTE
On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch Fuel remaining warning display rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
N00578300034
is in the ON position.
When the remaining fuel level runs low (one
segments displayed), the last segment of the Service reminder
fuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is N00556701240
turned to the ON position. Displays the approximate time until the next
When the remaining fuel level very runs low recommended periodic inspection. --- is
(no segments displayed), and the bar displayed when the inspection time has
graph flash. arrived.
If the warning display appears, refuel as soon
as possible. NOTE
The service reminder time can be modified
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
1- Full to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to
0- Empty Severe maintenance schedule in your vehi-
cles Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For
further information, please contact your
NOTE
It may take several seconds to stabilize the
display after refilling the tank.


3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly
To reset
press the multi information display
switch, the screen switches from --- to
The --- display can be reset while the igni- cLEAr. After that, the time until the
tion switch is in the OFF position. next periodic inspection is shown.
tion display switch a few times, the infor-
mation display switches to the service 5
reminder display.
1. Shows the time until the next periodic

inspection.
NOTE
Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
km) and the time in units of 1 month.
CAUTION
2. This informs you that a periodic inspec- The customer is responsible for making sure
tion is due. Contact an authorized Mit- that regular inspections and maintenance and
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility periodic inspections and maintenance are
2. Press and hold the multi information dis- performed.
of your choice to have the system play switch for about 2 seconds or more to Inspections and maintenance must be per-
checked. make the spanner mark start flashing. (If formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an there is no operation for about 10 seconds tions.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it with flashing, the display will revert to its
displays the time until the next periodic original indication.)
inspection. NOTE
The --- display cannot be reset while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.


1. When you lightly press the multi informa- When the ignition switch is turned to the
NOTE tion display switch a few times, the infor- ON position from the ACC or OFF
When --- is displayed, after a certain dis-
mation display switches to the driving position, the mode setting changes auto-
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
range display. matically from manual to auto.
play is reset and the time until the next
periodic inspection is displayed. Refer to Information display on page
If you accidentally reset the display, consult 5-141. Auto reset mode
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for 2. Each time you press the multi information
display switch for 2 seconds or more on When the average fuel consumption is
5 assistance.
driving range display, you can switch being displayed, if you hold down the
reset mode for average fuel consumption. multi information display switch, these
Changing the function settings (A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset calculations will be reset to zero.
N00556801209
mode) When the ignition switch has been set to
The Average fuel consumption reset mode, the ACC or OFF position for about 4
Fuel consumption unit and Temperature hours or more, the average fuel consump-
unit setting can be modified as desired, tion display will automatically reset.
when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
NOTE
The average fuel consumption display can be
CAUTION reset separately for the auto reset mode and
The driver should not operate the display for the manual reset mode.
while the vehicle is in motion. Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
When operating the system, stop the vehicle from memory the manual reset mode or auto
in a safe area. reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
sumption display.
The initial (default) setting is Auto reset
Manual reset mode mode.
Changing the reset mode for aver-
age fuel consumption When the average fuel consumption is
N00575501029
being displayed, if you hold down the
multi information display switch, these
You can change the mode condition for the
calculations will be reset to zero.
average fuel consumption display to Auto
reset or Manual reset.


2. Each time you press the multi information
Changing the fuel consumption NOTE display switch for 2 seconds or more on
display unit The display units for the driving range, the
outside temperature display, you can
N00557101179 average fuel consumption are changed, but
switch from F to C or from C to F unit
the units for the indicating needle (speedom-
The fuel consumption display unit can be of outside temperature display.
eter), the odometer, the trip odometer and the
changed. The distance and amount units are service reminder will remain unchanged.
also switched to match the selected fuel con-
sumption unit.
If the battery is disconnected, the memory of NOTE
the unit setting is erased and it returns auto-
matically to factory setting.
The temperature value on air conditioner 5
1. When you lightly press the multi informa- panel is switched in conjunction with outside
tion display switch a few times, the infor- temperature display unit of the multi infor-
The distance units is also changed in the fol- mation display.
mation display switches to the average lowing combinations to match the selected However, F or C are not shown to tem-
fuel consumption display. fuel consumption unit. perature display of an air conditioner.
Refer to Information display on page
5-141. Fuel Distance Communication System, the temperature
2. Press and hold the multi information dis- consumption (driving range) value of the air conditioner screen of Mit-
play switch for about 5 seconds or more subishi Multi-Communication System is
until buzzer sound is heard twice. km/L km
switched in conjunction with outside temper-
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- L/100 km km ature display unit of the multi information
play switch to switch in sequence from display.
mpg mile (s)
km/L L/100 km mpg However, F or C are not shown to the
km/L. air conditioner screen.
Changing the temperature unit
N00557201167
The temperature display unit can be switched.

tion display switch a few times, the infor-
mation display switches to the outside
temperature display.
Refer to Information display on page
5-141.

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list (multi information display - Type 1)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list (multi information display -
Type 1)
N00557701058
Indicator and warning light list

N00557801280
1- Position indicator P.5-166 6- Active stability control (ASC) indicator 10- Engine malfunction indicator (SER-
2- Front fog light indicator (if so P.5-91 VICE ENGINE SOON or Check
equipped) P.5-166 7- Active stability control (ASC) OFF engine light) P.5-167
3- Turn signal indicators/hazard warning indicator P.5-91 11- Seat belt reminder/warning light
lights P.5-166 8- Anti-lock braking system warning light P.4-22
4- High beam indicator P.5-166 P.5-87 12- The tire pressure monitoring system
5- Charging system warning light 9- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning light P.5-115
P.5-168 warning light P. 4-39 13- Brake warning light P.5-167
14- Information screen display list
P.5-149
Information screen display list

N00557901092
When there is information to be announced, such as light reminder, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer to
the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to Warning display list on page 5-150.
Refer to Navigation information display on page 5-160.
Refer to Other interrupt displays on page 5-161. 5
NOTE
In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.
An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of your vehicles electronics (including after-market parts).
If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
have the system checked.

Warning display list

N00558001234
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

You have forgotten to remove the key from the igni- Remove the key.
tion switch. Refer to Key reminder system on page 5-33.
5
You have forgotten to turn off the lights. Refer to Light auto-cutout function (headlights and
other lights) on page 5-173.
Immobilizer is registered. Refer to Customer key programming (Except for vehi-

cles sold in Canada) on page 5-6.
Refer to Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming (Except
for vehicles sold in Canada) on page 5-27.

There is a fault in the F. A. S. T. -key. Refer to Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key) on page 5-12.
There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer. (Anti- Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
theft starting system). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.

The F. A. S. T. -key is not detected. Insert the F. A. S. T. -key into the key slot. Refer to
If the F. A. S. T. -key is not operating properly on
page 5-25.
You have forgotten to remove the F. A. S. T. -key Remove the F. A. S. T. -key from the key slot.
5 from the key slot.
The steering wheel is locked. Press the engine switch while turning steering wheel.
Refer to Steering wheel lock on page 5-58.
The engine switch is pressed to stop the engine and Place the selector lever in the P (PARK) position
the selector lever is in a position other than the P to put the operation mode in OFF.
(PARK) position.
The drivers door is opened with the steering wheel Refer to Steering wheel lock on page 5-58.
unlocked.
There is a fault in the EPS. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible.
Refer to Electric power steering system (EPS) on
page 5-89.

The brake fluid level is low. Park the vehicle in a safe place and inspect it.
There is a fault in the brake system. If the light still illuminates after the inspection, con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Refer to Brake warning display on page 5-169.
There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking system. Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driving, park
the vehicle in a safe place, and take corrective mea- 5
sures. Refer to Anti-lock braking system warning
on page 5-87.
The tire pressure in one of the tires (except spare Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System on page
tire) is low. 5-115.
There is a fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System on page
tem. 5-115.
One of the doors or the liftgate is not completely Close the door or liftgate.
closed. Refer to Door ajar warning display screen on page
The open door is displayed. 5-128.
The engine hood is open. Close the engine hood.

Refer to Engine hood on page 9-3.

There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer (Anti- Put the operation mode in OFF, and then start the
theft starting system). engine again.
If the warning is not cancelled, please contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice.
The drivers door is open when the operation mode Put the operation mode in OFF.
5 is in any mode other than OFF. Refer to Changing the operation mode on page
5-17.
There is a fault in the steering wheel lock. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
There is a fault in the electrical system. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
checked.
The engine is overheated. Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective
measures.
Refer to Engine overheating on page 8-4.
The automatic transaxle or CVT fluid temperature is Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective
increased. measures.
Refer to Automatic transaxle on page 5-60.
Refer to Continuously variable transmission
(CVT) on page 5-68.

The seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch Wear your seat belt properly.
or operation mode is in ON. Refer to Seat belt warning on page 4-22.
There is a fault in the fuel system. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system 5
checked.
The vehicle is being driven with the parking brake Release the parking brake. Refer to Brake warning
still applied. display on page 5-169.
There is a fault in the engine oil circulation system. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
checked.
Refer to Oil pressure warning display on page
5-170.
There is a fault in the charging system. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to Charging system warning display on page
5-170.

There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the pre-tensioner Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
system. repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked, immediately.
Refer to SRS airbag/Pre-tensioner system warning
on page 4-39.
There is a fault in the Active stability control (ASC). Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
5 repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to Active stability control (ASC) on page
5-90.
There is a fault in the Hill start assist. Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Refer to Hill start assist on page 5-85.
There is a fault in the electronically controlled 4WD Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
system. repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to Electronically controlled 4WD system on
page 5-75.
There is a fault in the automatic transaxle or CVT. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to Automatic transaxle on page 5-60.
Refer to Continuously variable transmission
(CVT) on page 5-68.
The electronically controlled 4WD system is hot. Refer to Electronically controlled 4WD system on
page 5-75.

The fuel is running low. Refuel as soon as possible.
Refer to Fuel remaining display screen on page
5-129.
The outside temperature is 37 F (3 C) or less. Be careful driving on frozen ground.

The ground may be frozen even when this warning is 5
not displayed, so drive carefully.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) has Increase the following distance by depressing the
detected the approach of the vehicles in front. brake pedal or marking other decelerating control.
Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC):
Proximity alarm on page 5-101.
The Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) Take appropriate action such as depressing the brake
has detected the danger of collision. to avoid collision.
Refer to FCM braking function on page 5-108.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) Depress the brake pedal as soon as your vehicle
detected a stop of the vehicle in front and stopped comes to a stop.
your vehicle, but the brake will be released soon. Refer to How to use ACC on page 5-98.

The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) control Refer to How to use ACC on page 5-98.
is automatically canceled and the system is placed in
the standby state.
Conditions for the start of control are not met, the

5 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) can not start
the control.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) can not

start the control because the speed is out of speed
range.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) can not

start the control because not detected the approach of
the vehicles in front.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) is tem-

porarily unavailable due to conditions such as the
adhesion of contaminants to the sensor.
There is a fault in the Adaptive Cruise Control Sys- Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
tem (ACC). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
on page 5-96.

There is a fault in the Forward Collision Mitigation Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
System (FCM). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to Forward Collision Mitigation System
(FCM) on page 5-107.
FCM braking function of the Forward Collision Mit- Refer to FCM braking function on page 5-108.
igation System (FCM) has been activated. 5
The Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) is

temporarily unavailable due to conditions such as the
adhesion of contaminants to the sensor.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) has detected Refer to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page
that your vehicle is about to leave or has left the lane. 5-111.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) is temporarily

unavailable due to too high of a temperature of the
LDW camera.
There is a fault in the Lane Departure Warning Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
(LDW). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page
5-111.

Navigation information display (if

so equipped)
Direction of vehicle travel
N00579100026
(Example)
Communication System, the following infor-
mation on navigation will be displayed when
Destination
5 guidance location such as junction and desti-
nation is approached after you set the destina-
tion and started the route guidance.
Ferry terminal
Tollbooth
Intermediate destination
(Example)
1- Guidance display 2- Remaining distance display

Shows the direction of vehicle travel Shows the distance to the location
and the guidance location. where the guidance is displayed.
NOTE
Please read this section and also the separate
owners manual for Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
munication System.

Other interrupt displays

N00558201252
Screen System operation status Reference

When starting the engine, the selector Place the selector lever in the P
lever is in a position other than the P (PARK) position, depress and hold the
(PARK) or the N (NEUTRAL) posi- brake pedal with the right foot, and then
tion, or you pressed the engine switch press the engine switch to start the 5
without depressing the brake pedal. engine.
Refer to Starting and stopping the
engine on page 5-23.
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.

When 4WD ECO drive mode is Refer to Electronically controlled 4WD
selected with the drive mode selector. system on page 5-75.
When 4WD AUTO mode is selected

with the drive mode selector.
When 4WD LOCK mode is selected

with the drive mode selector.

When AWC ECO mode of S-AWC is Refer to S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
selected. trol) on page 5-78.
When NORMAL mode of S-AWC is

5 selected.
When SNOW mode of S-AWC is

selected.
When LOCK mode of S-AWC is

selected.
When the ECO mode is activated. Refer to ECO mode switch on page 5-178.

When the Forward Collision Mitigation Refer to FCM ON/OFF switch on page
System (FCM) is activated or the timing 5-109.
of an alarm is changed.
When the Forward Collision Mitigation

System (FCM) is deactivated. 5
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen Do this
Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details,
refer to Service reminder on page 5-130.

The rest time can be set.
Screen Do this
Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
5 The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you to take a
rest.
In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous
display screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer
encourage you to take a rest.
The buzzer sounds 3 times.
The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or LOCK position or the operation mode
is put in OFF.
The multi information display switch is held (for about 2 seconds or more).

Indicator and warning light package (multi information display - Type 2)
Indicator and warning light package (multi information display - Type 2)

N00519801859
1- Position indicator P. 5-166 10- ECO mode indicator P .5-178 18- Anti-lock braking system warning light
2- Front fog light indicator (if so 11- ECO Drive Assist P. 5-166 P. 5-87
equipped) P. 5-166 12- Oil pressure warning light P. 5-168 19- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
3- Turn signal indicators/hazard warning 13- Charging system warning light warning light P. 4-39
lights P. 5-166 P. 5-168 20- Engine malfunction indicator (SER-
4- Cruise control indicator P. 5-92 14- High coolant temperature warning light VICE ENGINE SOON or Check
5- Door-ajar warning light P. 5-169 (red) P. 5-169 engine light) P. 5-167
6- For details, refer to Warning activa- 15- Low coolant temperature indicator 21- Seat belt reminder/warning light
tion on page 5-18. (if so equipped) (blue) P. 5-166 P. 4-22
7- For details, refer to Warning activa- 16- Active stability control (ASC) indicator 22- The tire pressure monitoring system
tion on page 5-18. (if so equipped) P. 5-91 warning light P. 5-115
8- Electric power steering system warn- 17- Active stability control (ASC) OFF 23- Brake warning light P. 5-167
ing light P .5-89 indicator 24- Multi information display P. 5-140
9- High beam indicator P. 5-166 P. 5-91

Indicators
Indicators Front fog light indicator (if so ECO Drive Assist (Vehicle
N00519900127 equipped) equipped with the multi infor-
N00520200175 mation display - Type 2)
Turn signal indicators/Hazard N00579200027
This indicator comes on while the front fog
warning lights lights are on. This function displays how fuel-efficiently
N00520000216 you are driving under different driving condi-
5 The arrows will flash in time with the corre-
Position indicator
tions.
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn The ECO drive assist display will change as
N00551300026
signal lever is used. follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using
This indicator light illuminates while the the accelerator in a way well matched with
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn- position lights are on. the vehicle speed.
ing flasher switch is pressed.
Low coolant temperature indi-
NOTE cator - blue (Vehicle equipped ECO drive level
If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if
the indicator stays on without flashing, check with the multi information dis-
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or play - Type 2)
turn signal connection. N00575601020
Low High
This indicator comes on in blue while the
coolant temperature is low.
High beam indicator
NOTE
N00520100086
A blue light comes on when the headlights When the indicator goes out, this should be
are on high beam. used as a rough indication of when the heat-
ing starts working.

Warning lights
Warning lights CAUTION Engine malfunction indicator

N00520300147 If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock (SERVICE ENGINE SOON
braking system warning light are illuminated
at the same time, the braking force distribu- or Check engine light)
Brake warning light and buzzer tion function will not operate, so the vehicle N00520501814
N00520401536
may be destabilized during sudden braking This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-
This light comes on when the ignition switch under the following conditions. nostic (OBD) system which monitors the
is turned to the ON position (engine off) or When the brake warning light does not go
out even when the parking brake is
emissions, engine control system or auto- 5
the operation mode is put in ON. matic transaxle control system/continuously
When the engine is started, the light should released.
variable transmission (CVT) control system.
go off a few seconds later. A warning is also When the brake warning light stays on
If a problem is detected in one of these sys-
displayed in the multi information display. while driving.
tems, this indicator illuminates or flashes.
The warning light also illuminates after start- If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking
When the ignition switch is turned to the
and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in
ing the engine under the following condi- ON position or the operation mode is put in
a safe place, and contact an authorized Mit-
tions. subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of ON, this indicator normally comes on and
your choice as soon as possible. goes off after the engine has started.
When the parking brake is still applied.
The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
When the brake fluid level is low. This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
following manner when brake performance
When the brake system circuit is not is deteriorated. filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
working properly. Confirm that the vehicle slows down when indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
you press down on the brake pedal harder ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise
mph (8 km/h) and parking brake applied, a may go all the way to the floor. until you hear clicking sounds.)
buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the Should the brakes fail, use engine braking If this indicator does not go off after several
parking brake is not properly release. to reduce your speed and slowly apply the seconds or lights up while driving, have the
parking brake. system checked as soon as possible at an
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
is fully released and brake warning light is stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
off.

Warning lights

Driving for a long time with the engine mal- Do not disconnect the battery cable when the If the warning light stays on while the engine
function indicator on may cause more dam- engine malfunction indicator (SERVICE is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
age to the emission control system. This ENGINE SOON or Check engine light) is as soon as possible and contact an authorized
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil- on. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
ity. The engine electronic control module stores of your choice to have the system checked.
If this indicator does not come on when the critical OBD information (especially exhaust
5 ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have
emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
tery cable is disconnected while the engine
malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
Oil pressure warning light
the system checked at an authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob- (Vehicle equipped with the
choice. lems. multi information display -
If the engine malfunction indicator comes on
while the engine is running, avoid driving at
Type 2)
N00520701278
high speeds. Charging system warning light
During vehicle operation with the indicator
N00520601323
This light comes on when the engine oil pres-
on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you sure is below normal. If the light stays on
depress the accelerator pedal. This light comes on in the event of a malfunc- while driving, stop the engine as soon as pos-
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi- tion in the charging system or when the igni- sible. Do not run the engine until the cause of
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal tion switch is turned to the ON position the low oil pressure is corrected.
more firmly than usual since the engine (engine off) or the operation mode is put in
idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi- ON. On vehicle equipped with the multi
cle with an automatic transaxle or CVT has a information display - Type 1, a warning is CAUTION
stronger tendency to creep forward. also displayed in the multi information dis- If this light comes on when the engine oil
play. When the engine is started, the light level is not low, have your vehicle checked at
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
should go out. Check to make sure that the
light has gone out before driving.
This warning light does not show the amount
of oil in the crankcase. This can only be
determined by checking the oil level with the
dipstick with the engine turned off.

Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the multi information display - Type 1)
High coolant temperature Door-ajar warning light and Information screen display
warning light - red (Vehicle buzzer (Vehicle equipped with (Vehicle equipped with the
equipped with the multi infor- the multi information display - multi information display -
mation display - Type 2) Type 2) Type 1)
N00575701021 N00520901339
N00558301048
This light comes on in red if the coolant tem- This light comes on when any door or the lift-
perature becomes excessively high. gate is open or not completely closed. Brake warning display 5
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
N00558401153
CAUTION mph (8 km/h) and any door or the liftgate is
If the light comes on during vehicle opera-
open or ajar, a tone will sound 4 times to
tion, it indicates that the engine is possibly inform the driver that any door or the liftgate
overheating. Continued driving could make is not properly shut.
the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place and take appropriate action. CAUTION
(Refer to Engine overheating on page 8-4.)
Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar
This warning is displayed if the vehicle is
warning light is off. being driven with the parking brake still
applied. The warning light in the instrument
NOTE cluster only comes on when the parking brake
The high coolant temperature warning light NOTE is applied.
may illuminate when the vehicle has been
When the interior light auto-cutout function
driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This
illuminating does not necessarily indicate a
is been activated, the light goes out automat- CAUTION
ically after about 30 minutes. If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
problem. It should stop if you keep the
Refer to Interior light auto-cutout function parking brake, the brakes will overheat,
engine running for a while or continue driv-
(dome light and other lights) on page 5-214. resulting in ineffective braking and possible
ing the vehicle.
brake failure.
If this warning is displayed, release the park-
ing brake.

Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the multi information display - Type 1)
CAUTION Oil pressure warning display

Confirm that the vehicle slows down when N00558701101
you press down on the brake pedal harder

than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
may go all the way to the floor.
When the ignition switch is turned to the Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
ON position or the operation mode is put in to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
5 ON, if the brake fluid is low, this warning is
parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the If the engine oil pressure drops while the
displayed. stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you. engine is running, the warning display is dis-
The warning light in the instrument cluster
played on the information screen in the multi
also illuminates.
Charging system warning dis- information display.
CAUTION play
If this warning stays on and does not go out N00558601113
CAUTION
If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is
while driving, there is a danger of ineffective
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn-
braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact an authorized Mit- ing is displayed, the engine may overheat
and damage may result.
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice. If the warning is displayed while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
If the brake warning display, brake warning
If there is a fault in the charging system, the as soon as possible and check the engine oil
light, and the Anti-lock braking system
warning light are illuminated at the same warning display is displayed on the informa- level.
time, the braking force distribution function tion screen in the multi information display. If this warning display comes on when the
will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta- engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle
The warning light in the instrument cluster
bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
also illuminates.
braking and high-speed driving. Park the dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair CAUTION
facility of your choice. If warnings are displayed while the engine is NOTE
The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the running, park your vehicle in a safe place as The oil pressure warning display does not
following manner when brake performance soon as possible and contact an authorized show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
is deteriorated. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility checked using the dipstick.
of your choice to have the system checked.

Combination headlights and dimmer switch
Combination headlights and Type 1 Vehicles equipped with daytime running

lights
dimmer switch Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
N00522501746 [When the engine is started, and the parking
brake is released]
Headlights
The daytime running lights will be illumi-
nated:
NOTE
5
Do not leave the headlights and other lights The daytime running lights illumi-
OFF
on for a long period of time when the engine nated
is not running. The battery will run down. The daytime running lights illumi-
When it rains, or when the vehicle has been nated
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
becomes foggy. This is the same as when
marker lights, license plate, instru-
window glass mists up on a humid day, and The combinations of switch operations and
ment panel lights and downlight on
does not indicate a problem. When the light illuminated lights differ in accordance with
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. the following conditions. Headlights and other lights on
However, if water collects inside the light,
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
Except for vehicles equipped with day-
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
time running lights NOTE
choice.
Once the daytime running light come on,
OFF All lights off they do not go out until the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF or ACC position or
Parking, tail, front and rear side- the operation mode is changed to OFF or
marker lights, license plate, instru- ACC.
Headlights and other lights on [When the engine is not running, or when the
engine is running but the parking brake is not
released]
The engine starts when the lights are off.


OFF All lights off Headlights and other lights turn on NOTE
Parking, tail, front and rear side- AUTO and off automatically in accor- Once the daytime running light come on,
marker lights, license plate, instru- dance with outside light level. they do not go out until the ignition switch is
ment panel lights and downlight on Parking, tail, front and rear side- turned to the OFF or ACC position or
marker lights, license plate, instru- the operation mode is changed to OFF or
Headlights and other lights on ACC.
Headlights and other lights on
5 Type 2 [When the engine is not running, or when the
engine is running but the parking brake is not
Vehicles equipped with daytime running released]
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
lights
The engine starts when the lights are off.
[When the engine is started, and the parking
brake is released] OFF All lights off
The daytime running lights will be illumi- Headlights and other lights turn on
nated: AUTO and off automatically in accor-
dance with outside light level.
The daytime running lights illumi- Parking, tail, front and rear side-
OFF
nated marker lights, license plate, instru-
The daytime running lights illumi- ment panel lights and downlight on
nated Headlights and other lights on
AUTO Headlights and other lights turn on
The combinations of switch operations and and off automatically in accor-
illuminated lights differ in accordance with dance with outside light level.
the following conditions.
The daytime running lights illumi-
Except for vehicles equipped with day- nated
time running lights Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate, instru-
OFF All lights off ment panel lights and downlight on
Headlights and other lights on

NOTE Light auto-cutout function

The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con- (headlights and other lights)
trol can be adjusted. N00532601580
For further information, please contact your
If the following operation is performed
with the combination headlights and dim-
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi- mer switch in the or position,
the lights automatically turn off.
5
Refer to the separate owners manual for [Except for vehicles equipped with the
details. F.A.S.T.-key]
Do not place anything on the automatic light The ignition switch is turned to the OFF
sensor (A), and do not clean with a glass NOTE or ACC position or the key is removed
cleaner. If the lights do not turn on or off with the from the ignition switch and the drivers
switch in the AUTO position, manually door is opened.
operate the switch. Have the system checked
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
a repair facility of your choice. key]
The operation mode is changed to OFF or
ACC and the drivers door is opened.
NOTE
Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to
the windshield.


If the following operation is performed the light switch to the OFF position to stop
When you want to keep the lights
with the combination headlights and dim- the tone.
on:
mer switch in the or position,
the lights automatically turn off after Dimmer (high/low beam
about 3 minutes. If the combination headlights and dimmer
switch is turned to the or posi- change)
[Except for vehicles equipped with the tion again after the engine is turned off, the N00549901178
F.A.S.T.-key] about 3-minute auto-cutout function To change the headlights from high beam to
5 The ignition switch is turned to the OFF described above will not work. The lights (the low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
or ACC position or the key is removed parking lights, tail lights and license plate lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low
from the ignition switch and the drivers lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto- beam as a courtesy whenever there are
door is not opened. matically. oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic
moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- light in the instrument cluster indicates when
key] Headlight reminder buzzer the headlights are on high beam.
The operation mode is changed to OFF or N00549801236
ACC and the drivers door is not opened. [When using a key to start the engine]
If the drivers door is opened with the key in
the OFF or LOCK or ACC position or
NOTE
removed from the ignition switch while the
The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-
vated.
lights are on, the tone will sound to remind
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors you to turn off the lights.
dealer for details.
For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi [When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
Multi-Communication System, adjustments engine]
can be made using screen operations. For If the drivers door is opened with the opera-
further details, refer to the separate owners tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the
manual. operation mode is changed to OFF while the
lights are on, the tone will sound to remind
you to turn off the lights. Headlight flasher
N00550001209
In either case, the lights will turn off automat-
You can flash the high beams by pulling the
ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will

go back to normal when you let go. While the 1. Turn the combination headlights and dim-
high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
NOTE mer switch to the OFF or AUTO
While the welcome light function is operat-
the instrument panel. position (for vehicles equipped with the
ing, perform one of the following operations
automatic light control).
to cancel the function.
NOTE 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
Push the LOCK button on the remote con-
You can flash the high beams by pulling the trol transmitter. LOCK position or put the operation
lever toward you, even if the light switch is Turn the combination headlights and dim- mode in OFF. Also, if a key was used to
start the engine, remove the key from the
off. mer switch to the or position.
ignition switch.
5
If you turn the lights off with the head lights Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
set to high-beam illumination, the headlights tion or put the operation mode in ON.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition
are automatically returned to their low-beam It is possible to modify functions as follows:
switch to the OFF or LOCK position
setting when the light switch is next turned
The headlights can be set to come on in the
or putting the operation mode in OFF, pull
to the position. low beam setting. the turn signal lever toward you.
The welcome light function can be deacti-
vated.
Welcome light For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
N00563201117 dealer.
This function turns on the front side-marker
and parking lights for about 30 seconds after can be used to make the adjustment.
the UNLOCK button on the remote control Refer to the separate owners manual for
transmitter is pressed when the combination details.
headlights and dimmer switch is in the OFF
or AUTO position (for vehicles equipped
with the automatic light control). On vehicles Coming home light
equipped with the automatic light control N00547301110
(except for vehicles equipped with LDW), the
This function turns on the headlights in the
welcome light function will operate only
low beam setting for about 30 seconds after
when it is dark outside the vehicle.
the ignition switch is turned to the OFF or
LOCK position or the operation mode is
put in OFF.

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)

4. The headlights will come on in the low
beam setting for about 30 seconds. After
NOTE
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
the headlights go off, the headlights can
dealer.
be turned on again in the low beam setting
for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn Communication System, screen operations
signal lever toward you within 60 seconds can be used to make the adjustment.
of turning the ignition switch to the Refer to separate owners manual for details.
OFF or LOCK position or putting the
5 operation mode in OFF. To turn on the
headlights again after 60 seconds of turn- Headlight leveling switch (if
ing the ignition switch to the OFF or so equipped)
LOCK position or putting the operation
mode in OFF, repeat the process from step
N00537101115
WARNING
1. The direction of the headlight beam (the To avoid distraction while driving, always
direction in which the light shines) alters perform headlight adjustments before
according to the number of people and the vehicle operation.
NOTE load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle
While the coming home light function is if it is too high due to the number of people
operating, perform one of the following
and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head- NOTE
operations to cancel the function. Start adjusting when the knob is at the 0
lights glare does not distract the drivers of
Pull the turn signal lever toward you. position (when the beam is at its highest).
approaching vehicles. First set the light
Turn the combination headlights and dim- Keep the knob in the 0 position except
switch to the position, then turn the
mer switch to the or position when using the knob to lower the headlight
or put the operation mode in ON.
headlight leveling switch knob to lower the
beam angle.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
beam. The greater the number on the head-
Always return the knob to the 0 position
tion or put the operation mode in ON. light leveling switch knob, the lower the when the load is removed and the people
It is possible to modify functions as follows: beam will point. have left the vehicle.
The time that the headlights remain on can Set the switch to the appropriate position so
be changed. that the headlight beam is level with the road.
The coming home light function can be Turn signal lever
deactivated.
N00522601529
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual

turn, hold the lever in the lane change posi-
Hazard warning flasher switch

tion (1). It will return to the neutral position
when you let go. Use the full position (2)
NOTE NOTE
A light in the instrument panel flashes to It is possible to change the tone of a sound-
when making a normal turn. The lever will
show when the front and rear turn signal ing buzzer as the turn signal lights flash.
return to the neutral position when the turn is
lights are working properly. [Vehicle equipped with the multi information
complete. There may be times when the lever If this light flashes faster than usual, check display - type 1]
does not return to the neutral position. This for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal- Refer to Changing the turn-signal sound
usually happens when the steering wheel is functioning connection in the signal. on page 5-139.
turned only slightly. You can easily return the
lever by hand.
If the panel light does not come on when the
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
[Vehicle equipped with the multi information
display - type 2]
5
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly burned out bulb in the panel. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
then release it, the turn signal lights and the Have the system inspected by your autho- dealer for details.
indicator light in the instrument cluster will rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
flash three times. Hazard warning flasher
Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash switch
function for lane changes. N00522701328
Adjust the time required to operate the
lever for the 3-flash function.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System, adjustments
can be made using screen operations. For
further details, refer to the separate owners
manual.
If you press the flasher switch, the front and

rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and
so will the hazard warning lights. This is an
emergency warning system and should not be

ECO mode switch

used when the vehicle is in motion, except for While the ECO mode is working, an ECO turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
emergencies. mode indicator will be turned on. the OFF position.
If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers The knob will return to the neutral position
will keep working after the ignition switch is when it is released.
removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.
NOTE
5 If the flashers are used for several hours, the
battery will run down. This could make it
difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle.
ECO mode switch

N00579300028
ECO mode is an eco-driving support system NOTE

which automatically controls the engine, air Even if the ECO mode is operating, you can
conditioning system, 4WD system (if so select normal operation of the air condi- NOTE
equipped) and S-AWC (if so equipped) to tioner. If the headlights are switched to high beam,
For further information, please contact your the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
improve fuel efficiency.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. minate again when the headlights are
Refer to Electronically controlled 4WD sys-
switched back to low beam.
tem on page 5-75.
If the light switch is rotated to the OFF or
Refer to S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
trol) on page 5-78. Front fog light switch (if so position while the front fog lights are
illuminated, they will automatically turn off.
Refer to Automatic climate control air con- equipped) They can be turned back on again by rotating
ditioner on page 7-5. N00522801420 the combination headlights and dimmer
The ECO mode starts working by pressing The front fog lights illuminate only when the switch back to position, and turning
the ECO mode switch when the ignition the knob in the direction of the ON posi-
headlights are on low beam.
tion.
switch or operation mode is in ON. Turning the knob in the direction of the ON
Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
Push the switch again and the ECO mode will position turns on the front fog lights as well fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
cancel. as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.

Wiper and washer switch

and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
Wiper and washer switch motor may be damaged.
N00523001676
CAUTION
If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
the glass with the defroster before using the 5
washer.
1- Fast
Windshield wipers 2- Slow
MIST- Misting function

NOTE The wipers will operate once. NOTE
To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear OFF- Off The speed-sensitive-operation function of
window wiper will automatically perform INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive) the windshield wipers can be deactivated.
several continuous operations if the selector LO- Slow For further information, please contact your
lever is put in the R position while the HI- Fast authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
windshield wipers are operating. or a repair facility of your choice. On vehi-
Refer to Rear window wiper and washer cles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
on page 5-183. munication System, screen operations can be
To adjust intermittent intervals
used to make the adjustment.
With the lever in the INT (speed sensitive Refer to separate owners manual for details.
Except for vehicle with rain sensor intermittent operation) position, the intermit-
tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the Misting function
The windshield wiper and washer can be knob (A).
operated with the ignition switch or the oper- The misting function can be used when the
ation mode is in ON or ACC. ignition switch or the operation mode is in
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do ON or ACC.
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted The wipers will operate once if the wiper
lever is raised to the MIST position and


released. This operation is useful when it is Wiper operation under these conditions can
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to scratch the windshield and damage the wip-
operate while the lever is held in the MIST ers.
position.
MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate once.
OFF- Off
INT- Auto-wiper control
Rain sensor
The wipers will automatically oper- CAUTION
ate depending on the degree of wet- With the ignition switch or the operation
Vehicle with rain sensor ness on the windshield. mode in ON and the lever in the AUTO
LO- Slow position, the wipers may automatically oper-
The windshield wipers can be operated with HI- Fast ate in the situations described below.
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in When cleaning the outside surface of the
ON or ACC. windshield, if you touch the rain sensor.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or Rain sensor (if so equipped) When cleaning the outside surface of the
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
Can only be used when the ignition switch or sensor.
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
the operation mode is in ON. When using an automatic car wash.
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
A physical shock is applied to the wind-
If the lever is put in the AUTO position, the shield.
rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-
(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the sor.
wipers will operate automatically.
Keep the lever in the OFF position if the
windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.

If your hands get trapped, you could suffer
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be
NOTE
The wipers may automatically operate when
sure to turn the ignition switch to the OFF
things such as insects or foreign objects are
or LOCK position or put the operation
affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
mode in OFF, or move the lever to the OFF sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
position to deactivate the rain sensor. Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
NOTE them. To operate the wipers again, move the
5
lever to the LO or HI position.
To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this
Also, the wipers may operate automatically
operation of the wipers does not take place
due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
when the vehicle is stationary and the ambi- +- Higher sensitivity to rain
netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the
ent temperature is about 32 F (0 C) or
lever to the OFF position. -- Lower sensitivity to rain
lower.
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put
any water-repellent coating on the wind-
when replacing the windshield glass. NOTE
shield. The rain sensor would not be able to Automatic wiper operation (rain sensitive)
detect the extent of rain, and the wipers To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor can be changed to intermittent operation,
might stop working normally. either vehicle speed sensitive or not vehicle
With the lever in the AUTO (rain sensor) speed sensitive.
In the following cases, the rain sensor may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity For further information, please contact your
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or of the rain sensor by turning the knob (B). authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
a repair facility of your choice. or a repair facility of your choice.
When the wipers operate at a constant inter-
val despite changes in the extent of rain.
When the wipers do not operate even
Refer to the separate owners manual for
though it is raining.
details.
Misting function
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow

and release, to operate the wipers once.


Use this function when you are driving in
mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
raised to the MIST position and released
mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will con-
tinue to operate while the lever is held in the
MIST position.
5
NOTE
Windshield washer It is possible to modify functions as follows:
N00504601309 Intelligent washer can be deactivated.
The windshield washer can be operated with The wipers can be set to operate again after
the ignition switch or the operation mode in about 6 seconds.
ON or ACC. For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the dealer.
windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is When the wipers are not in operation or in
moved to the AUTO position and the knob intermittent operation, by pulling the lever Refer to the separate owners manual for
(C) is turned in the + direction when the toward you, the wipers will operate several details.
ignition switch or the operation mode is in times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
ON. Also, by releasing the lever soon after pulling
it toward you, the washer fluid will be
sprayed several times while the wipers are
operating several times. (Intelligent washer)
Intelligent washer will stop operating with
any operation of the lever.

Rear window wiper and washer NOTE NOTE

N00523201418 The rear window wiper will automatically The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
The rear window wiper and washer can be perform several continuous operations if the engine compartment.
operated when the ignition switch or the selector lever is put in the R position while Check the fluid level regularly and refill if
operation mode is in ON or ACC. the windshield wipers or the rear window necessary. (Refer to Washer fluid on page
wiper is operating.(automatic operation 9-12.)
Turn the knob to operate the rear window mode)
wiper. After the automatic operation, the rear win-
dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is Precautions to observe when 5
in the OFF position. If the knob is in the using wipers and washers
INT position, the rear window wiper will N00523501264
return to the intermittent operation.
It is possible to set the rear window wiper to CAUTION
perform the automatic operation only if the If the washer is used in cold weather, the
selector lever is put in the R position while washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might
the rear window wiper is operating with the freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass
knob in the INT position. with the defroster before using the washer.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
If the knob is in the OFF position, turn the
knob to the INT position twice quickly to
NOTE
OFF- Off operate the rear window wiper continuously. Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
INT- The wiper operates continuously for (continuous operation mode) dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
several seconds then operates inter- Turn the knob to the OFF position to stop wiper blades prematurely.
mittently at intervals of about 8 sec- the rear window wiper continuous operation. Before using the wipers in cold weather,
onds. The wiper intermittent operation time can be check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
adjusted. frozen to the windshield or rear window.
- Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the Using the wipers while the blades are frozen
rear window glass while the knob is See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details. could cause the wiper motor to burn out.
turned fully in either direction.
When the washer fluid is sprayed, the
Multi-Communication System, adjustments
wiper will automatically operate 2 or
3 times. further details, refer to the separate owners
manual.

Electric rear window defogger switch
NOTE CAUTION
If the wipers become blocked by ice or other Do not place stickers, tape, or other items
deposits on the glass, the motor may still that are attached with adhesive over the grid
burn out even if the wiper switch is OFF. If wires on the rear window.
deposits form on the windshield, park your When cleaning the inside rear window, use a
vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid
and clean the glass so that the wipers can wires.
5 operate smoothly.
Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer NOTE
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or The rear window defogger can be turned on
the pump may fail.
After about 15 to 20 minutes of operation, the automatically.
During cold weather, add a recommended For further information, please contact your
system will shut off automatically.
washer solution that will not freeze in the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
To switch the defogger OFF before 15 to 20
washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
may not work or may be damaged. minutes have passed, press the switch again.
Replace the wiper blades when they are The indicator light will go out and the defog-
worn. Use the proper size replacement ger will turn off. Refer to the separate owners manual for
blades. For further information, please con- If you need the defogger for more than 15 to details.
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors 20 minutes, press the switch again. This will As your vehicle is equipped with heated mir-
dealer. add 15 to 20 more minutes. rors, mist can also be removed from the out-
side rearview mirrors when the rear window
Electric rear window defog- CAUTION defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to Door
mirror heater on page 5-56.)
The rear window defogger is not designed to
ger switch melt snow. Remove any snow manually
N00523701413
before using the rear window defogger.
The rear window defogger can be used when Use the rear window defogger only after the Horn switch
the engine is running. engine has started and is running. Be sure to N00523801195
The indicator light (A) will come on when turn the defogger switch off immediately
after the window is clear to save on battery To honk the horn, press around the mark
you press the electric rear window defogger
power. on the steering wheel.
switch. Electric current will flow through the
heating wires on the rear window to help
clear away moisture or frost.

Link System (if so equipped)
Link System End User License The Bluetooth 2.0 interface can be used
Agreement mode is in ON or ACC.
N00563801025
You have acquired a device that includes soft- Before you can use the Bluetooth 2.0 inter-
ware licensed to Mitsubishi Motors Corpora- face, you must pair the Bluetooth device
tion from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the
and Bluetooth 2.0 interface. Refer to Con-
automotive experience business unit), and
their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a necting the Bluetooth 2.0 interface and 5
complete list of these 3rd party products and Bluetooth device on page 5-192.
their end user license agreements, please go
to the following website. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis- BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
Link System (if so equipped) closure.pdf
N00563701066
WARNING
The Link System takes control of the devices Bluetooth 2.0 interface (if so Although the Bluetooth 2.0 interface
connected via the USB input terminal or the allows you to make hands-free calls, if you
equipped)
Bluetooth 2.0 interface; the system allows choose to use the cellular phone while
the connected device to be operated by using
N00563901198
driving, you must not allow yourself to be
distracted from the safe operation of your
the switches in the vehicle or voice com- The Bluetooth 2.0 interface allows for mak- vehicle. Anything, including cellular
mands. ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle phone usage, that distracts you from the
See the following section for details on how
using a Bluetooth compatible cellular safe operation of your vehicle increases
to operate. your risk of an accident.
phone. It also allows the user to play music,
Refer to and comply with all state and
Refer to Bluetooth 2.0 interface on page saved in a Bluetooth music player, from the
local laws in your area regarding cellular
5-185. vehicles speakers. phone usage while driving.
Refer to USB input terminal on page 5-207. The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
tion function, which allows you to make
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of hands-free calls by simple switch operations
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. and voice command operations using a
defined voice tree.

Bluetooth 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE Steering control switch and

If the ignition switch or the operation mode For detail of the Bluetooth 2.0 interface, microphone
is left in ACC, the accessory power will refer to the following web site: N00564001109
automatically turn off after a certain period [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
of time and you will no longer be able to use You can access the MITSUBISHI MOTORS
the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. The accessory NORTH AMERICA web site.
power comes on again if the ignition switch [For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
5 or the engine switch is operated. Refer to
ACC power auto-cutout function on page
You can access the MITSUBISHI MOTORS
web site.
5-18 and 5-57. Please read and agree to the Warning about
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface cannot be used Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies,
the websites mentioned above may connect
if the Bluetooth device has a dead battery
you to websites other than the MITSUBISHI
or the device power is turned off.
MOTORS web site.
Hands-free calls will not be possible if your http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
phone does not have service available. ucts/index.html
If you place the Bluetooth device in the Software updates by cellular phone/digital
vehicles third seat or luggage compartment, audio device manufacturers may
you may not be able to use the Bluetooth change/alter device connectivity.
2.0 interface. 1- Volume up button
Steering control switch and microphone 2- Volume down button
Some Bluetooth devices are not compatible
P.5-186 3- SPEECH button
with the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
Voice recognition function P.5-188 4- PICK-UP button
You can confirm the Link System software
Useful voice commands P.5-189 5- HANG-UP button
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3
Speaker enrollment function P.5-190 6- Microphone
times (press and hold 2 times and then press
briefly) within 10 seconds. Connecting the Bluetooth 2.0 interface and
the Bluetooth device P.5-192
Volume up button
Operating a music player connected via Blue-
tooth P.5-196
Press this button to increase the volume.
How to make or receive hands-free calls
P.5-196
Phonebook function P.5-199


If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
Volume down button PICK-UP button
nition mode, the voice recognition mode
Press this button when an incoming call is will be deactivated.
Press this button to decrease the volume.
received to answer the telephone.
NOTE
SPEECH button NOTE When you press the SPEECH button (except
When not receiving incoming calls, pressing for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Press this button to change to voice recog-
nition mode.
the PICK-UP button on vehicles equipped
with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for 5
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Communica-
While the system is in voice recognition System, will activate the voice recognition of tion System) to enter voice recognition mode
mode, Listening will appear on the the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. with a cellular phone paired to the system,
audio display. current information on the cellular phone,
such as remaining battery life, signal
When another call is received during a
NOTE strength or roaming, will be displayed on
call, press this button to put the first caller the audio display.*
On vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
on hold and talk to the new caller. *: Some cellular phones will not send this
Multi-Communication System, pressing the
SPEECH button will activate the voice rec- In such circumstances, you can press the information to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
ognition mode (a beep will sound when suc- button briefly to switch between callers. Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
cessfully activated). To use the voice You will switch to the first caller and the
by the Bluetooth 2.0 interface, only if it is
recognition of the Bluetooth 2.0 interface, other caller will be put on hold. possible to use those services with your cel-
press the PICK-UP button. To establish a three-way call in such situ- lular phone.
ations, press the SPEECH button to enter
If you press the button briefly while in voice recognition mode and then say
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt Join calls. Microphone
prompting and allow voice command
input. HANG-UP button Your voice will be recognized by a micro-
Pressing the button longer will deactivate phone in the overhead console, allowing you
the voice recognition mode. Press this button when an incoming call is
to make hands-free calls with voice com-
Pressing this button briefly during a call received to refuse the call.
mands.
will enable voice recognition and allow Press this button during a call to end the
voice command input. current call.
When another call is on hold, you will
switch to that call.


5. The voice guide will say English (Span-
NOTE NOTE ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this
If a cellular phone is within close proximity For best performance and further reduction
correct? Say Yes.
of the microphone, it may distort the sound of ambient noise, the vehicle windows
If you say No, the system will return to
quality. In this case, place the cellular phone should be closed, lower the blower speed and
as far as possible from the microphone. refrain from conversation with your passen- Step 4.
gers while engaging the voice recognition
function. NOTE
5 Voice recognition function Some voice commands have alternative
commands.
The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
N00564101113
Depending on the selected language, some rent language, and the second message is in
the selected language.
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface is equipped functions may not be available.
with a voice recognition function. Language can be changed by using the audio If many entries are registered in the vehicle
Simply say voice commands and you can per- control panel besides the following proce- phonebook, changing the language will take
dure. a longer time.
form various operations and make or receive
For details, refer to System settings on Changing the language deletes the mobile
hands-free calls.
page 7-42. For DISPLAY AUDIO and Mit- phonebook imported to the Bluetooth 2.0
subishi Multi-Communication System, refer interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
With the Bluetooth 2.0 interface, voice rec-
to the separate owners manuals. to import it again.
ognition is possible for US English, North
American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap-
anese. The factory setting is English. Selecting the language 6. When the voice guide says English
(Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
NOTE the language change process will be com-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
If the voice command that you say differs
pleted and the system will return to the
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
from the predefined command or cannot be main menu.
recognised due to ambient noise or some nication System).
other reason, the Bluetooth 2.0 interface 2. Say Setup.
will ask you for the voice command again up 3. Say Language.
to 3 times.
4. The voice guide will say Select a lan-
guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa-
nese. Say the desired language.
(Example: English)


allows you to decrease the possibility that a
Useful voice commands setting is accidentally changed.
Setting the passcode
N00564200016
The confirmation function can be turned on Use the following procedure to turn on the
or off by following the steps below. security function by setting a passcode.
Help function
N00564301027 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface is equipped vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
with a help function.
If you say Help when the system is waiting vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- 5
for a voice command input, the system will nication System). nication System).
tell you a list of the commands that can be 2. Say Setup. 2. Say Setup.
used under the circumstances. 3. Say Confirmation prompts. 3. Say Passcode.
4. The voice guide will say Confirmation 4. The voice guide will say Passcode is dis-
prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to abled. Would you like to enable it?
Canceling turn confirmation prompts <off/on>. Answer Yes.
N00564400018
Answer Yes to change the setting or Answer No to cancel the setting of the
There are 2 cancel functions. answer No to keep the current setting. passcode and return to the main menu.
If you are at the main menu, say Cancel to 5. The voice guide will say Confirmation 5. The voice guide will say Please say a 4-
exit from the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. prompts are <off/on> and then the sys- digit passcode. Remember this passcode.
If you are anywhere else within the system, tem will return to the main menu. It will be required to use this system.
say Cancel to return to the main menu. Say a 4-digit number which you want to
Security function set as a passcode.
Confirmation function setting N00564601105 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
N00564501032 It is possible to use a passcode as a security guide will say Passcode <4-digit pass-
function by setting a passcode of your choice code>. Is this correct? Answer Yes.
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface is equipped Answer No to return to the passcode
with a confirmation function. for the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. input in Step 5.
With the confirmation function activated, you When the security function is turned on, it is 7. When the registration of the passcode is
are given more opportunities than normal to necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit completed, the voice guide will say Pass-
confirm a command when making various passcode in order to use all functions of the code is enabled and the system will
settings to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. This Bluetooth 2.0 interface, except for recep- return to the main menu.
tion.


5. When the disabling of the passcode is
NOTE NOTE completed, the voice guide will say Pass-
Passcode will be required to access the sys- You can reenter the passcode as many times
code is disabled and the system will
tem after the next ignition cycle. as you want.
return to the main menu.
It is required for a little time after engine If you have forgotten your passcode, say
stop that the entered passcode is actually Cancel to quit the voice input mode and
recorded in the system. then check with an authorized Mitsubishi Speaker enrollment function
If the ignition switch or the operation mode Motors dealer. N00564700011
5 is made to ACC or ON or the engine is

started immediately after engine stop, there The Bluetooth 2.0 interface can use the
Disabling the passcode
is a case when the entered passcode is not speaker enrollment function to create a voice
recorded in the system. At this time, please Use the following procedure to turn off the model for one person per language.
try to enter the passcode again. security function by disabling the passcode. This makes it easier for the Bluetooth 2.0
interface to recognise voice commands said
Entering the passcode
NOTE by you.
System must be unlocked to disable the pass- You can turn a voice model registered with
If a passcode has been set and the security
code. the speaker enrollment function on and off
function is enabled, the voice guide will say
whenever you want.
Hands-free system is locked. State the pass-
code to continue when the SPEECH button 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
(except for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Speaker enrollment
Communication System) or PICK-UP button nication System) or PICK-UP button (for N00564801110
(for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
nication System) is pressed to enter voice rec- nication System). speaker enrollment process.
ognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode 2. Say Setup. To ensure the best results, run through the
number to enter the passcode. 3. Say Passcode. process while in the drivers seat, in an envi-
4. The voice guide will say Passcode is ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
enabled. Would you like to disable it?
guide will say <4-digit passcode>, Incorrect cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
Answer Yes.
passcode. Please try again. Enter the correct phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
Answer No to cancel the disabling of
passcode. interruption of the process.
the passcode and return to the main menu.
Use the following procedure for speaker
enrollment.


1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the 4. The voice guide will say This operation 5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.
selector lever in the P (PARK) position must be performed in a quiet environment Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in
and pull the parking brake lever. while the vehicle is stopped. See the table Enrollment commands on page
owners manual for the list of required 5-206.
NOTE training phrases. Press and release the The system will register your voice and
Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the SPEECH button when you are ready to then move on to the registration of the
vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can- next command. Continue the process until
vehicle in a safe area before attempting cel at any time. all phrases have been registered.
speaker enrollment. Press the SPEECH button to start the
5
speaker enrollment process. NOTE
2. Press the SPEECH button (except for To repeat the most recent voice training com-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- NOTE mand, press and release the SPEECH button.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for If you do not start the speaker enrollment If you press the HANG-UP button anytime
process within 3 minutes after pressing the during the process, the system will beep and
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment stop the speaker enrollment process.
nication System).
function will time out.
3. Say Voice training.
The voice guide will say Speaker enroll- 6. When all enrollment commands have
ment has timed out. The system will then
been read out, the voice guide will say
beep and the voice recognition mode will be
deactivated.
Speaker enrollment is complete. The
system will then end the speaker enroll-
ment process and return to the main
menu.
NOTE
Completing the speaker enrollment process
will turn on the voice model automatically.
The commands Help and Cancel will not
work in this mode.

Enabling and disabling the voice Connecting the Bluetooth 2.0 To pair
model and retraining interface and Bluetooth device
N00564901078
N00565001180 To pair a Bluetooth device with the Blue-
You can turn a voice model registered with Before you can make or receive hands-free tooth 2.0 interface, follow the steps below.
the speaker enrollment function on and off
calls or play music using the Bluetooth 2.0
whenever you want. 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
interface function, you must pair the Blue-
You can also retrain the system. selector lever in the P (PARK) position
5 Use the following procedure to perform these tooth device and Bluetooth 2.0 interface. and pull the parking brake lever.
actions.
NOTE NOTE
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for Pairing is required only when the device is You cannot pair any Bluetooth device with
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- used for the first time. Once the device has
the Bluetooth 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for been paired with the Bluetooth 2.0 inter-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth
face, all you need is to bring the device into
nication System). the vehicle next time and the device will device with the Bluetooth 2.0 interface,
2. Say Voice training. confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
connect to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface auto-
3. If you have completed a speaker enroll- location.
matically (if supported by the device). The
ment process once already, the voice device must have Bluetooth turned ON to
guide will say either Enrollment is connect. 2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
enabled. Would you like to disable or vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
retrain? or Enrollment is disabled. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
Would you like to enable or retrain? Up to 7 Bluetooth devices can be paired vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
4. When enrollment is enabled, the voice with the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. nication System).
model is on; when enrollment is dis- If multiple paired Bluetooth devices are 3. Say Setup.
abled, the voice model is off. Say the available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or 4. Say Pairing Options.
command that fits your needs. music player most recently connected is auto-
Say Retrain to start the speaker enroll-
matically connected to the Bluetooth 2.0
ment process and recreate a new voice
interface.
model. (Refer to Speaker enrollment on
page 5-190.)
You can also change a Bluetooth device to
be connected.


5. The voice guide will say Select one of
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.
NOTE NOTE
The pairing code entered here is only used If you enter the wrong number, the voice
Say Pair.
for the Bluetooth connection certification. guide will say Pairing failed and the pair-
It is any 4-digit number the user would like ing process will be cancelled.
NOTE to select. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing
If 7 devices have already been paired, the it again.
Remember the pairing code as it needs to be
voice guide will say Maximum devices
paired and then the system will end the keyed into the Bluetooth device later in the
8. The voice guide will say Please say the
pairing process. To register a new device, pairing process.
name of the device after the beep. You
5
delete one device and then repeat the pairing Depending on the connection settings of the
can assign a desired name for the Blue-
process. Bluetooth device, this code may have to be
(Refer to Selecting a device: Deleting a entered each time you connect the Blue- tooth device and register it as a device
device on page 5-195.) tooth device to the Bluetooth 2.0 inter- tag. Say the name you want to register
face. For the default connection settings, after the beep.
refer to the instructions for the device.
6. The voice guide will say Please say a 4-
digit pairing code. Say a 4-digit number.
NOTE
7. The voice guide will say Start pairing When the confirmation function is on, after
When the confirmation function is on, the procedure on the device. See the device repeating the device tag you have said, the
system will confirm whether the number manual for instructions. Enter in the voice guide will ask Is this correct?
said is acceptable. Answer Yes.
Bluetooth device the 4-digit number you Answer Yes.
Answer No to return to pairing code To change the device tag, answer No and
have registered in Step 6.
selection. then say the device tag again.
NOTE NOTE
Depending on the Bluetooth device, it may 9. The voice guide will say Pairing com-
Some Bluetooth devices require a specific plete, after which a beep will be played
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue-
pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
tooth 2.0 interface. and the pairing process will end.
ual for pairing code requirements.
If the Bluetooth 2.0 interface cannot recog-
nize the Bluetooth device, the voice guide Selecting a device
will say Pairing has timed out and the pair- N00565101080
ing process will be cancelled.

If multiple paired Bluetooth devices are
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or
ports Bluetooth, and try pairing it again.
music player most recently connected is auto-


matically connected to the Bluetooth 2.0 4. After the voice guide says Please say, To select a music player
interface. the numbers of the cellular phones and N00582300035
You can connect to the other paired cellular device tags of corresponding cellular 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
phone or music player by following setting phones will be read out in order, starting vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
change procedures. with the cellular phone that has been most nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
recently connected. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Say the number of the cellular phone that nication System).
To select a cellular phone
you want to connect to.
5 N00582200034
When the confirmation function is on, the
2. Say Setup.
3. Say Select music player.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- system will ask you again whether the 4. After the voice guide says Please say,
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for phone that you want to connect to is cor- the numbers of the music players and
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- rect. Answer Yes to continue and con- device tags of corresponding music play-
nication System). nect to the cellular phone. ers will be read out in order, starting with
2. Say Setup. Answer No, and the voice guide will the music player that has been most
3. Say Select phone. say Please say. Say the number of the recently connected.
phone that you want to connect to. Say the number of the music player that
you want to connect to.
NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the
You can connect to a phone at any time by system will ask you again whether the
pressing the SPEECH button and saying the music player that you want to connect to
number, even before all of the paired num- is correct. Answer Yes to continue and
bers and device tags of corresponding cellu- connect to the music player.
lar phones are read out by the system.
Answer No, and the voice guide will
say Please say. Say the number of the
5. The selected phone will be connected to music player that you want to connect to.
the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. The voice
guide will say <device tag> selected NOTE
and then the system will return to the You can connect to a music player at any
main menu. time by pressing the SPEECH button and
saying the number, even before all of the
paired numbers and device tags of corre-
sponding music players are read out by the
system.


5. The selected music player will be con- 5. After the voice guide says Please say,
To check a paired Bluetooth
nected to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. the numbers of the devices and device
tags of corresponding devices will be read device
The voice guide will say <device tag> N00565201036
selected and then the system will return out in order, starting with the device that
to the main menu. has been most recently connected. After it You can check a paired Bluetooth device by
completes reading all pairs, the voice following the steps below.
guide will say or all.
Deleting a device 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
Say the number of the device that you
N00582400036
want to delete from the system. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- 5
Use the following procedure to delete a nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
If you want to delete all paired phones
paired Bluetooth device from the Blue- from the system, say All. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
tooth 2.0 interface. 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice nication System).
guide will say Deleting <device tag> 2. Say Setup.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for <number>. Is this correct? or Deleting 3. Say Pairing Options.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- all devices. Is this correct? 4. The voice guide will say Select one of
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for Answer Yes to delete the phone(s). the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Answer No, the system will return to Say List.
nication System). Step 4. 5. The voice guide will read out device tags
2. Say Setup. 7. The voice guide will say Deleted, and of corresponding devices in order, starting
3. Say Pairing Options. then the system will end the device dele- with the Bluetooth device that has been
4. The voice guide will say Select one of tion process. most recently connected.
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list. 6. After the device tags of all paired Blue-
Say Delete. NOTE tooth devices have been read, the system
If the device deletion process fails for some will say End of list, would you like to
reason, the voice guide will say Delete start from the beginning?
failed and then the system will cancel delet-
To hear the list again from the beginning,
ing the device.
answer Yes.
When you are done, answer No to


1. Press the SPEECH button (except for 6. The voice guide will say New name,
NOTE vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- please. Say the name you want to regis-
If you press and release the SPEECH button
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for ter as a new device tag.
and say Continue or Previous while the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- When the confirmation function is on, the
list is being read, the system will advance or
rewind the list. nication System). voice guide will say <New device tag>.
Say Continue to proceed to the device with 2. Say Setup. Is this correct? Answer Yes.
the next highest number or Previous to 3. Say Pairing Options. Answer No, you can say the new device
4. The voice guide will say Select one of tag you want to register again.
5 return to the phone with the previous num-
ber. the following: pair, edit, delete, or list. 7. The device tag is changed.
You can change the device tag by pressing Say Edit. When the change is complete, the voice
and releasing the SPEECH button and then 5. The voice guide will say Please say, and guide will say New name saved and
saying Edit while the list is being read. then the system will return to the main
read out the numbers of the Bluetooth
You can change the phone to be connected menu.
devices and device tags of corresponding
by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-
devices in order, starting with the Blue-
ton and then saying Select phone while the
list is being read. tooth that has been most recently con- Operating a music player con-
You can change the music player to be connected. nected via Bluetooth
nected by pressing and releasing the After all paired device tags have been N00565401041
SPEECH button and then saying Select read, the voice guide will say Which
music player while the list is being read. For the operation of a music player connected
device, please? Say the number of the
device tag you want to change. via Bluetooth, refer to separate owners
manual for audio.
Changing a device tag NOTE
N00565301037 You can press and release the SPEECH but- How to make or receive hands-
You can change the device tag of a paired cel- ton while the list is being read, and immedi-
ately say the number of the device tag you
free calls
lular phone or music player.
N00565501097
Follow the steps below to change a device want to change.
tag. You can make or receive hands-free calls
using a Bluetooth compatible cellular phone
connected to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue-
tooth 2.0 interface to make calls without
dialing telephone numbers.

To make a call P.5-197 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
Send function P.5-198 vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
NOTE
Except for international telephone number:
Receiving calls P.5-199 nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
telephone numbers (to 19 digits).
Mute function P.5-199 vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Switching between hands-free mode and pri- nication System).
Making a call using a phonebook
vate mode P.5-199 2. Say Dial.
3. After the voice guide says Number You can make calls using the vehicle phone-
NOTE please, say the telephone number.
4. The voice guide will say Dialing <num-
book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth 5
Hands-free calls may not operate correctly 2.0 interface.
when you place or receive the call directly ber recognized>.
from your cellular phone, instead of using The Bluetooth 2.0 interface will then For details on the phonebooks, refer to
the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. make the call. Phonebook function on page 5-199.
system will confirm the telephone number 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
To make a call again. To continue with that number, vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
N00565601098 answer Yes. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
To change the telephone number, answer vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
You can make a call in the following 3 ways nication System).
No. The system will say Number
using the Bluetooth 2.0 interface: please then say the telephone number 2. Say Call.
By saying a telephone number again.
NOTE
By using the Bluetooth 2.0 interfaces If you say Call when the vehicle phone-
phonebook NOTE book and the mobile phonebook are empty,
By redialing a telephone number In the case of English, the system will recog- the voice guide will say The vehicle phone-
nise both zero and oh (Letter o) for the book is empty. Would you like to add a new
number 0. entry now?
Making a call by using the telephone
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface supports num- Answer Yes, and the voice guide will say
number Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.
bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
The maximum supported telephone number You can now create data in the vehicle
You can make a call by saying the telephone
length is as follows: phonebook.
number. Answer No, the system will return to the
International telephone number: + and tele-
phone numbers (to 18 digits). main menu.


3. After the voice guide says Name please, 5. If only 1 telephone number is registered 6. The voice guide will say Calling <name>
say the name you want to call, from those under the name you just said, the voice <location> and then the system will dial
registered in the phonebook. guide will proceed to Step 6. the telephone number.
4. If there is only 1 match, the system will If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis-
proceed to Step 5. tered that match the name you just said, NOTE
If there are 2 or more matches, the voice the voice guide will say Would you like When the confirmation function is on, the
guide will say More than one match was to call <name> at [home], [work], system will check if the name and location of
found, would you like to call <returned [mobile], or [other]? Select the location the receiver are correct. If the name is cor-
5 name>. If that person is the one you want to call. rect, answer Yes.
to call, answer Yes. To change the name or location to call,
answer No. The system will return to Step
Answer No, the name of the next NOTE 3.
matching person will be uttered by the If the name you selected has matching data
voice guide. in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone
number is registered under the selected loca- Redialing
NOTE tion, the voice guide will say
If you say No to all names read by the sys- {home/work/mobile/other} not found for You can redial the last number called, based
<name>. Would you like to add location or on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel-
tem, the voice guide will say Name not
try again?
found, returning to main menu and the sys- lular phone.
tem will return to the main menu. Say Try again, and the system will return
to Step 3.
Use the following procedure to redial.
Say Add location and you can register an
additional telephone number under the 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
selected location.
If the name you selected has matching data
in the mobile phonebook but no telephone
number is registered under the selected loca-
tion, the voice guide will say nication System).
{home/work/mobile/other} not found for 2. Say Redial.
<name>. Would you like to try again?
Answer Yes, and the system will return to Send function
Step 3.
N00565700018
Answer No, and the call will be cancelled.
Start over again from Step 1. During a call, press the SPEECH button to
enter voice recognition mode, then say


<numbers> SEND to generate DTMF are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile
Mute function
tones. phonebook.
N00565900010
For example, if during a call you need to sim- These phonebooks are used to register tele-
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a At any time during a call, you can mute the phone numbers and make calls to desired
response to an automated system, press the vehicle microphone. numbers via voice recognition function.
SPEECH button and speak 1 2 3 4 pound Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying
send and the 1234# will be sent via your cel- Mute during a call will turn ON the mute
function and mute the microphone. NOTE
lular phone.
Saying Mute off in the same way will turn Disconnecting the battery cable will not 5
delete information registered in the phone-
off the mute function and cancel the mute on
Receiving calls the microphone.
book.
N00565801045
If an incoming phone call is received while

Switching between hands-free Vehicle phonebook
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON or ACC, the audio system will be auto- mode and private mode N00566101120
matically turned on and switched to the N00566600014

This phonebook is used when making calls
incoming call, even when the audio system The Bluetooth 2.0 interface can switch with the voice recognition function.
was originally off. between hands-free mode (hands-free calls) Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi-
The voice guide announcement for the and private mode (calls using cellular phone). cle phonebook per language.
incoming call will be output from the front If you press the SPEECH button and say Also, each entry has 4 locations associated
passengers seat speaker. Transfer call during a hands-free call, you with: home, work, mobile and other. You can
If the CD player or radio was playing when can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri- register one telephone number for each loca-
the incoming call was received, the audio sys- vate mode. tion.
tem will mute the sound from the CD player To return to hands-free mode, press the
or radio and output only the incoming call. SPEECH button again and say Transfer You can register a desired name as a name for
To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button call. any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle
on the steering wheel control switch. phonebook.
When the call is over, the audio system will Names and telephone numbers can be
return to its previous state.
Phonebook function changed later on.
N00566000018
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface has 2 types of
paired cellular phones.
unique phonebooks that are different from the
phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They

To register a telephone number in 4. The voice guide will say Name please. 6. The voice guide will say Number
Say your preferred name to register it. please. Say the telephone number to reg-
the vehicle phonebook
N00580500059
ister it.
You can register a telephone number in the
NOTE
vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways: If the maximum number of entries are NOTE
already registered, the voice guide will say In the case of English, the system will recog-
Reading out a telephone number, and select-
The phonebook is full. Would you like to nise both zero and oh (Letter o) for the
ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from delete a name? Say Yes if you want to number 0.
5 the phonebook of the cellular phone. delete a registered name.
If you say No, the system will return to the
To register by reading out a tele- main menu. 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
number you have just read, and then reg-
phone number
N00580600063 5. When the name has been registered, the ister the number.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for When the telephone number has been reg-
voice guide will say home, work,
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- istered, the voice guide will say Number
mobile, or other? Say the location for
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for saved. Would you like to add another
which you want to register a telephone
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- number for this entry?
number.
nication System). To add another telephone number for a
new location for the current entry, answer
2. Say Phonebook. NOTE
3. The voice guide will say Select one of Yes. The system will return to location
the following: new entry, edit number, voice guide will say <Location>. Is this cor-
selection in Step 5.
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or rect? Answer Yes. Answer No to end the registration pro-
import contact. Say New entry. If a telephone number has been registered for cess and return to the main menu.
the selected location, the voice guide will say
The current number is <telephone number>, NOTE
number please. When the confirmation function is on, after
If you do not want to change the telephone repeating the telephone number you have
number, say cancel or the original number read, the voice guide will ask Is this cor-
to keep it registered. rect? Answer Yes.
Answer No to return to telephone number
registration in step 6.

To select and transfer one phone- 2. Say Phonebook. 6. Operate the Bluetooth compatible cellu-
3. The voice guide will say Select one of lar phone to set it up so that the phone-
book entry from the phonebook of
the following: new entry, edit number, book entry you want to register in the
the cellular phone
N00580700048
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or vehicle phonebook can be transferred to
import contact. Say Import contact.
You can select 1 phonebook entry from the the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
4. The voice guide will say Would you like
phonebook of the cellular phone and register
to import a single entry or all contacts?
it in the vehicle phonebook. NOTE
Say Single entry.
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface will become
If the Bluetooth 2.0 interface cannot recog- 5
NOTE ready to receive transferred phonebook

nise the Bluetooth compatible cellular
Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is phone or the connection takes too much
data.
parked. Before transferring, make sure that time, the voice guide will say Import con-
the vehicle is parked in a safe location. tact has timed out and then the system will
NOTE cancel the registration. In such case, start
All or part of data may not be transferred,
If the maximum number of entries are over again from Step 1.
even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
already registered, the voice guide will say Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
tooth, depending on the compatibility of The phonebook is full. Would you like to and holding the SPEECH button will cancel
the device. delete a name? Say Yes if you want to the registration.
The maximum supported telephone number delete a registered name.
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of If you say No, the system will return to the
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first main menu. 7. When the reception is complete, the voice
19 digits. guide will say <Number of telephone
If telephone numbers contain characters numbers that had been registered in the
other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters 5. After the voice guide says Ready to import source> numbers have been
are deleted before the transfer. receive a contact from the phone. Only a imported. What name would you like to
For the connection settings on the cellular home, a work, and a mobile number can use for these numbers?
phone side, refer to the instructions for the be imported, the Bluetooth 2.0 inter- Say the name you want to register for this
cellular phone. phonebook entry.
face will receive the phonebook data from
the Bluetooth compatible cellular phone.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for NOTE
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- If the entered name is already used for other
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for phonebook entry or similar to a name used
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- for other phonebook entry, that name cannot
nication System). be registered.


8. The voice guide will say Adding Editing a telephone number 5. The voice guide will say Home, work,
<name>. N00579900053 mobile or other? Select and say the loca-
When the confirmation function is on, the 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for tion where the telephone number you
system will ask if the name is correct. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- want to change or add is registered.
Answer Yes. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for When the confirmation function is on, the
Answer No, the voice guide will say vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- system will check the target name and
Name please. Register a different name. nication System). location again. Answer Yes if you want
9. The voice guide will say Numbers 2. Say Phonebook. to continue with the editing.
5 saved. 3. The voice guide will say Select one of Answer No, the system will return to
10. The voice guide will say Would you like the following: new entry, edit number, Step 3.
to import another contact? edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or 6. The voice guide will say Number,
Answer Yes if you want to continue import contact. Say Edit number. please. Say the telephone number you
with the registration. You can continue to 4. The voice guide will say Please say the want to register.
register a new phonebook entry from Step name of the entry you would like to edit,
5. or say list names. Say the name of the NOTE
Answer No, the system will return to phonebook entry you want to edit. If the telephone number is already registered
the main menu. in the selected location, the voice guide will
NOTE say The current number is <current num-
Say List names, and the names registered ber>. New number, please. Say a new tele-
To change the content registered in phone number to change the current number.
in the phonebook will be read out in order.
the vehicle phonebook
N00579800049
Refer to Vehicle phonebook: Listening to
the list of registered names on page 5-203.
You can change or delete a name or telephone 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
number registered in the vehicle phonebook. number.
You can also listen to the list of names regis- When the confirmation function is on, the
tered in the vehicle phonebook. system will ask if the number is correct.
Answer Yes.
Answer No, the system will return to
NOTE the Step 3.
The system must have at least one entry.


8. Once the telephone number is registered, 4. The voice guide will say Please say the 2. Say Phonebook.
the voice guide will say Number saved name of the entry you would like to edit, 3. The voice guide will say Select one of
and then the system will return to the or say list names. Say the name you want the following: new entry, edit number,
main menu. to edit. edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact. Say List names.
NOTE NOTE 4. Bluetooth 2.0 interface will read out the
If the location where a telephone number Say List names, and the names registered entries in the phonebook in order.
was already registered has been overwritten in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
with a new number, the voice guide will say to Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list
5. When the voice guide is done reading the
list, it will say End of list, would you like
5
Number changed and then the system will of registered names on page 5-203.
to start from the beginning? When you
want to check the list again from the
5. The voice guide will say Changing beginning, answer Yes.
Editing a name <name>. When you are done, answer No to
N00580100055 When the confirmation function is on, the return to the previous or main menu.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for system will check if the name is correct.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Answer Yes if you want to continue NOTE
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for with the editing based on this information. You can call, edit or delete a name that is
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Answer No, the system will return to being read out.
nication System). Step 4. Press the SPEECH button and say Call to
2. Say Phonebook. 6. The voice guide will say Name please. call the name, Edit name to edit it, or
Say the new name you want to register. Delete to delete it.
3. The voice guide will say Select one of
The system will beep and then execute your
the following: new entry, edit number, 7. The registered name will be changed.
command.
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or When the change is complete, the system
If you press the SPEECH button and say
import contact. Say Edit name. will return to the main menu. Continue or Previous while the list is
being read, the system will advance or
Listening to the list of registered names rewind the list. Say Continue to proceed to
N00580200043 the next entry or Previous to return to the
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for previous entry.
nication System).


Deleting a telephone number 5. If only one telephone number is registered 7. When the telephone number deletion is
N00580300057 in the selected phonebook entry, the voice complete, the voice guide will say
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for guide will say Deleting <name> <loca- <name> <location> deleted and then
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tion>. the system will return to the main menu.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for If multiple telephone numbers are regis- If all locations are deleted, the system will
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tered in the selected phonebook entry, the say <name> and all locations deleted
nication System). voice guide will say Would you like to and the name will be removed from the
2. Say Phonebook. delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], phonebook. If numbers still remain under
5 3. The voice guide will say Select one of or all? the entry, the name will retain the other
the following: new entry, edit number, Select the location to delete, and the voice associated numbers.
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or guide will say Deleting <name> <loca-
import contact. Say Delete. tion>. Erasing the phonebook
4. The voice guide will say Please say the N00580400045
name of the entry you would like to NOTE You can delete all registered information
delete, or say list names. Say the name of To delete the telephone numbers from all from the vehicle phonebook.
the phonebook entry in which the tele- locations, say All.
phone number you want to delete is regis- 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
tered. 6. The system will ask if you really want to vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
delete the selected telephone number(s) to nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
NOTE go ahead with the deletion, answer Yes. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Say List names, and the names registered Answer No, the system will cancel nication System).
in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer deleting the telephone number(s) and then 2. Say Phonebook.
to Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list return to Step 4. 3. The voice guide will say Select one of
of registered names on page 5-203. the following: new entry, edit number,
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact. Say Erase all.


4. For confirmation purposes, the voice The Bluetooth 2.0 interface automatically
guide will ask Are you sure you want to
NOTE
converts from text to voice the names regis- All or part of data may not be transferred,
erase everything from your hands-free tered in the transferred phonebook entries, even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
system phonebook? Answer Yes. and creates names.
Answer No to cancel the deletion of all tooth, depending on the compatibility of
the device.
registered information in the phonebook
and return to the main menu.
NOTE Only a home, a work, and a mobile number
Only the mobile phonebook transferred from can be imported.
5. The voice guide will say You are about
to delete everything from your hands-free
the connected cellular phone can be used The maximum supported telephone number 5
with that cellular phone. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
system phonebook. Do you want to con- 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
You cannot change the names and telephone
tinue? Answer Yes to continue. numbers in the phonebook entries registered 19 digits.
Answer No to cancel the deletion of all in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select If telephone numbers contain characters
registered information in the phonebook and delete specific phonebook entries, either. other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
and return to the main menu. To change or delete any of the above, change are deleted before the transfer.
6. The voice guide will say Please wait, the applicable information in the source For the connection settings on the cellular
erasing the hands-free system phone- phonebook of the cellular phone and then phone side, refer to the instructions for the
book and then the system will delete all transfer the phonebook again. cellular phone.
data in the phonebook.
To import a devices phonebook 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
When the deletion is complete, the voice
guide will say Hands-free system phone-
Follow the steps below to transfer to the nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
book erased and then the system will
mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
the cellular phone. nication System).
2. Say Phonebook.
Mobile phonebook 3. The voice guide will say Select one of
NOTE
N00566201059 the following: new entry, edit number,
Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
lular phone can be transferred in a batch and that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. import contact. Say Import contact.
registered in the mobile phonebook. The already stored phonebook in the mobile 4. The voice guide will say Would you like
Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing phonebook is overwritten by the stored to import a single entry or all contacts?
up to 1,000 names, can be registered. phonebook in the cellular phone. Say All contacts.


5. The voice guide will say Importing the 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice The term IC: before the radio certification
contact list from the mobile phonebook. guide will say Import complete and number only signifies that Industry Canada
This may take several minutes to com- then the system will return to the main technical specifications were met.
plete. Would you like to continue? menu. The antenna used for this transmitter must not
Answer Yes, transferring to the mobile be co-located or operating in conjunction
phonebook the phonebook stored in the with any other antenna or transmitter. End-
General information
cellular phone will start. users and installers must be provided with
N00566300066
Answer No, the system will return to installation instructions and transmitter oper-
5 the main menu. MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
IC: 279B-MDGMY10 compliance.
NOTE Your Bluetooth 2.0 interface operates on a
The transfer may take some time to complete radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
depending on the number of contacts. cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
Enrollment commands
N00566401080
If the Bluetooth 2.0 interface could not be cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
connected to the Bluetooth compatible cel- Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
lular phone, the voice guide will say Unable device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
to transfer contact list from phone and then Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada
the system will return to the main menu. Rules. Operation is subject to the following
If you press the HANG-UP button or press two conditions:
and hold the SPEECH button during the data
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and This device may not cause harmful inter-
the system will return to the main menu. ference.
If an error occurs during the data transfer, all This device must accept any interference
transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide received, including interference that may
will say Unable to complete the phonebook cause undesired operation.
import and then the system will return to
the main menu.
If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the CAUTION
voice guide will say There are no contacts Changes or modifications not expressly
on the connected phone. approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ate the equipment.

USB input terminal (if so equipped)

2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in 4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to
USB input terminal (if so the floor console box. the USB input terminal (D).
equipped)
N00566701041
You can connect your USB memory device or

iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
memory device or iPod.
The following explains how to connect and 5
remove a USB memory device or iPod.
*: iPod is a registered trademark of Apple

Inc. in the United States and other countries.
3. Connect a commercially available USB

How to connect a USB memory connector cable (C) to the USB memory
CAUTION
Keep the lid of the floor console box closed
device device (B).
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
N00566801114
tents of the floor console box could other-
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn wise cause injuries.
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion or put the operation mode in OFF.
NOTE
Do not connect the USB memory device to
the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged.
When closing the floor console box, be care-
ful not to trap the USB connector cable.
5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn

tion or put the operation mode in OFF
first and perform the installation steps in
reverse.

5. To remove the Dock connector, turn the
How to connect an iPod NOTE ignition switch to the LOCK position or
N00566901102 Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple
put the operation mode in OFF first and
Inc.
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn perform the installation steps in reverse.
tion or put the operation mode in OFF. 4. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the
USB input terminal (D). Types of connectable devices
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
and supported file specifica-
5 the floor console box.
tions
N00567000015
Device types
N00567101127
Devices of the following types can be con-

nected.
Model name Condition

Storage capac-
CAUTION USB memory device ity of 256
3. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the Keep the lid of the floor console box closed Mbytes or more
iPod (B). while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
tents of the floor console box could other- fifth gener- F/W Ver.1.3 or
iPod*
wise cause injuries. ation later
80GB/180 F/W Ver.1.1.2
GB or later
NOTE F/W Ver.2.0.1
When closing the floor console box, be care- iPod classic* 120GB
or later
ful not to trap the connector cable.
160GB F/W Ver.2.0.4
(late 2009) or later


Model name Condition Model name Condition NOTE
first gener- F/W Ver.1.3.1 F/W Ver.3.1.3 You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
iPhone
ation or later or later the USB input terminal when the ignition
switch or the operation mode is in ON or
second F/W Ver.1.1.3 F/W Ver.4.2.1
iPhone 3G ACC.
generation or later or later
Do not keep your USB memory device or
third gen- F/W Ver.1.1.3 iPhone F/W Ver.4.3.1 iPod in your vehicle.
iPhone*
iPod nano*
eration or later 3GS or later It is recommended that you back up the files
in case of data damage.
5
fourth gen- F/W Ver.1.0.4 F/W Ver.4.3.1
iPhone 4 Do not connect to the USB input terminal
eration or later or later
any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
fifth gener- F/W Ver.1.0.2 F/W Ver.5.0.1 reader, etc.) other than the connectable
iPhone 4S
ation or later or later devices specified in the previous section.
The device and/or data may be damaged. If
sixth gen- F/W Ver.1.0 or Digital audio
Models other than USB any of these devices was connected by mis-
eration later player support- take, remove it after turning the ignition
memory devices and
first gener- F/W Ver.3.1.3 ing mass stor- switch to the LOCK position or putting the
iPods
ation or later age class operation mode in OFF.
second F/W Ver.4.2.1 *: iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod

generation or later touch, and iPhone are registered trade-
File specifications
iPod touch* N00567201030
third gen- F/W Ver.4.3.1 marks of Apple Inc. in the United States and
eration or later other countries. You can play music files of the following
specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
fourth gen- F/W Ver.4.3.1
ory device or other device supporting mass
eration or later NOTE storage class. When you connect your iPod,
Depending on the type of the USB memory
playable file specifications depend on the
device or other device connected, the con-
connected iPod.
nected device may not function properly or
the available functions may be limited.
It is recommended to use an iPod with firm- Item Condition
ware updated to the latest version. File format MP3, WMA, AAC

Sun visors
Item Condition Sun visors Vanity mirror
Maximum number of N00524601363
levels Level 8 Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun
(including the root) front glare while driving. To reduce side visor.
glare, turn the visor to the side (2). Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will
Number of folders 700
automatically turn on the mirror light (A).
Number of files 65,535
5
CAUTION
If the lid of vanity mirror with light is kept
open for prolonged periods of time, the vehi-
cles battery will be discharged.

12 V power outlets
Card holder 12 V power outlets Type 1

N00525001625
Cards can be slipped into the holder (B) on
Accessories can be operated when the igni-
the sun visor. CAUTION tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or
Be sure to use a plug-in type accessory ACC.
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the
same time, make sure the total power con- Floor console 5
sumption of the electrical accessories does
not exceed 120 W at 12 V.
Also be aware that using electronic equip-
ment with the engine off may run the battery
down.
When the power outlet is not in use, be sure
to close the power outlet cover or replace the
cap. This will prevent the power outlet from
becoming clogged and short circuiting.
To use a plug-in type accessory, open the

cover or remove the cap, and insert the plug Type 2
in the power outlet.
Accessories can be operated in all ignition
NOTE switch positions or all operation modes.
If your vehicle is equipped with two 12V
power outlets, they can be used simultane-
ously.

Interior lights
Floor console box Interior lights Dome light (front)/Reading

N00525301585 lights
N00525401469
NOTE
Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
Dome light (front)
with the engine off may run the battery
down.
5 Never leave the vehicle without checking
that the light is off.
1- (DOOR)
When any of the doors or the liftgate is
opened, the dome light illuminates; when
any of them are closed, the dome light
1- Cargo room light P.5-214 goes off after approximately 30 seconds.
2- Dome light (rear) P.5-213 However, the light goes off immediately
3- Dome light (front)/Reading lights if:
P.5-213 The doors and the liftgate are closed
4- Downlight P.5-171 while the ignition switch is in the
ON position or the operation mode
is in ON.
The drivers door is closed while the
its lock knob is in the lock position,
after all the other doors are closed.

Interior lights
The doors and the liftgate are closed Reading lights 1- (ON)
and the power door lock function is N00537601165 The dome light illuminates regardless of
used to lock the doors.
Regardless of the dome light switch position, any door or the liftgate being opened or
The keyless entry system remote con-
when you press the lens (A), the light on the closed.
trol transmitter is used to lock the
side that is pressed illuminates; when you 2- ()
doors.
press the lens (A) again, the light goes out. When any of the doors or the liftgate is
In vehicles equipped with the
opened, the dome light illuminates;
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the lift-
gate are locked using the F.A.S.T.-
when any of them are closed, the dome 5
light goes off after approximately 30 sec-
key.
onds. However, the light goes off imme-
diately if:
NOTE The door and the liftgate are closed
When the engine is started using the key while the ignition switch is in the
while the doors and liftgate are closed, if you ON position or the operation mode
remove the key, the dome light will illumi-
is in ON.
nate for approximately 30 seconds then go
The drivers door is closed while the
off.
its lock knob is in the lock position,
When the engine is started using the
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and liftgate are after all the other doors are closed.
closed, if the operation mode is put in OFF, The door and the liftgate are closed
the dome light will illuminate for approxi- and the power door lock function is
mately 30 seconds and then go off.
Dome light (rear) used to lock the doors.
N00525801245
The time until the light goes off can be The keyless entry system remote
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi control transmitter is used to lock the
Motors dealer for details. For vehicles doors.
equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- In vehicles equipped with the
nication System, adjustments can be made F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the lift-
using screen operations. For details, refer to
gate are locked using the F.A.S.T.-
the separate owners manual.
key.
2- (OFF)
The dome light stays off regardless of any
door or the liftgate being opened or closed.

Interior lights
NOTE Cargo room light Interior light auto-cutout func-

When the engine is started using the key N00526101186
tion (dome light and other
while the doors and liftgate are closed, if you
remove the key, the dome light will illumi- lights)
nate for approximately 30 seconds then go N00526301449
off. If interior lights are left on with the igni-

When the engine is started using the tion switch in the LOCK position or the
operation mode in OFF, the lights go off
5 F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and liftgate are
closed, if the operation mode is put in OFF, automatically after approximately 30 min-
the dome light will illuminate for approxi- utes.
mately 30 seconds and then go off. The lights come on again if the ignition
When the dome light switch is in the ON switch or the engine switch is operated, if
position, the light will not go off, even when any door or liftgate is opened or closed, or
all the doors and the liftgate are closed.
if the keyless entry or F.A.S.T.-key is
The time until the light goes off can be 1- (ON) operated.
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi The cargo room light illuminates regard-
Motors dealer for details. For vehicles less of the liftgate being opened or closed.
equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- 2- () NOTE
nication System, adjustments can be made The interior light auto-cutout function can be
When the liftgate is opened, the cargo
using screen operations. For details, refer to deactivated. The time until the lights auto-
room light illuminates; when it is closed,
the separate owners manual. matically go off can be adjusted. See your
it goes out.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
3- (OFF) 3- (OFF)
details.
The dome light stays off regardless of any The cargo room light stays out regardless
door or the liftgate being opened or closed. of the liftgate being opened or closed. Multi-Communication System, adjustments
details, refer to the separate owners manual.

Storage spaces
Storage spaces Glove compartment

N00526401538 N00551501298
CAUTION WARNING
Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans, An open glove compartment door can
or spectacles in the cabin when parking the cause a serious injury or death to the front
vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
become extremely hot, so lighters and other senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
5
flammable items may catch fire and
unopened drink cans (including beer cans) when driving.
may rupture. The heat may also deform or
crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-
1- Luggage floor box
2- Floor console box To open, pull the lever (A).
tacle parts that are made of plastic.
Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while 3- Glove compartment
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
storage space could otherwise cause injuries
during a sudden stop.
NOTE
Do not leave valuables in any storage space
when leaving the vehicle.
NOTE
When the lights are illuminated with the
light switch in the , or AUTO
position (vehicles with automatic light con-
trol), the glove compartment light illumi-
nates.

Storage spaces
Card holder Floor console box NOTE

N00551601244 The USB input terminal is located in the
There is a card holder on the inside of the To open the console box, lift the release lever floor console box (if so equipped). For
glove compartment. details, refer to USB input terminal on
(A) and raise the lid.
page 5-207.
The floor console box can also be used as an
arm rest.
5 Luggage floor box

N00552301046
There is a luggage floor box under the lug-

gage floor board.
To use the box, raise the luggage floor board.
5 persons
1- Luggage floor box (front)

2- Luggage floor box (center)
3- Luggage floor box (rear)
B- Tissue holder
C- Pen holder
D- Tray

Storage spaces
The luggage floor board can be folded at the 2. Insert your hand in the gap (B) and fold To access the luggage floor box
indicated positions (A). the board as illustrated.
(center)
1. Raise the luggage floor board (rear) by
pulling up on the strap (D).

4- Luggage floor board (front)
5- Luggage floor board (rear)
3. To access the center of the luggage floor
box (front), insert your hand in the gap 2. Insert your hand in the gap (E) and raise
To access the luggage floor box (C) and raise the board as illustrated. the board as illustrated.
(front)
1. Fold the second seatback forward.
Refer to Folding the second row seats
on page 4-12.

Cup holders
7 persons Cup holders For the second row seat

N00527301417 N00537001185
The cup holder is designed for holding cups This cup holder is located in the second row
or drink-cans securely in its holes. seat arm rest.
Pull the arm rest down to use the cup holder.
For the front seat
5
The cup holder is located in front of the floor
console.
For the third row seat

N00532401038
The cup holder is located at the right side of

the third row seat.

Bottle holders
Bottle holders NOTE

N00527301420 Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
CAUTION tles, etc.
Drink beverages while driving your vehicle
is distracting and can cause an accident.
Vibration and shaking while driving may
Cargo area cover (if so
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as equipped) 5
spilling hot beverages could cause burns. N00528301140
There are bottle holders located on both sides WARNING

of front and rear doors. For vehicles equipped with third row seat,
when the third row seat is in use, always
remove the cargo area cover to avoid seri-
ous injury or death at an accident.
NOTE
Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
holder.
Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
etc.

Cargo area cover (if so equipped)

2. After changing the position, gently shake
To use To change position the entire cargo area cover to make sure it
1. Pull out the spring-loaded cover and insert There are 2 installation holes (B) for the is securely retained.
it in the mounting grooves (A) on both cargo area cover.
sides. NOTE
If the second row seat touches the cargo area
cover, move the cargo area cover rearward.
5 The cargo area cover could be damaged if it
supports the seatback of the second row
seats.
1. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the

inside of the vehicle, and fit the protrud-
ing portion (D) into the installation hole
that is to be used. Move the opposite
2. Remove the cover from the mounting slider in the same fashion.
grooves, and the cover will be rolled back
into the retracted position.
NOTE
Do not place anything on the cargo area
cover.

Assist grips
To remove To store (if so equipped) Assist grips

N00559001084
1. Roll back the cargo area cover.
The cover can be fitted at the indicated posi- The assist grips (located above the doors on
2. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the
tion when not in use. the headliner) are not designed to support
inside of the vehicle and lift it to remove
Raise the luggage floor board and store the body weight. They are intended for use only
the cargo area cover.
cover. while seated in the vehicle.
5
To refit NOTE CAUTION

On vehicles with premium sound system, Do not use the assist grips when getting into
To refit the cargo area cover, follow the you can not use this storing position. or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could
removal steps in reverse. Gently shake the detach causing you to fall.
entire cargo area cover after fitting it to make
sure it is securely retained.

Coat hooks
Coat hooks Luggage hooks

N00553601163 N00528501269
There is a coat hook on the second row seat There are hooks on the sides of the luggage
assist grip. area for use in securing luggage.
WARNING CAUTION
Do not put a hanger or any heavy or Do not load the luggage higher than the top
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur- of the seatback.
tain airbag was activated, any such item Be sure that luggage is firmly secured.
could be propelled away with great force Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-
and could prevent the curtain airbag from ing the passenger compartment during sud-
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly den braking could result in a serious
on the coat hook (without using a hanger). accident.
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.

BK0200500US.book 1
Driving safety
Driving precaution ............................................................................6-2

Fuel economy....................................................................................6-2
Driving, alcohol and drugs ...............................................................6-2
Floor mat...........................................................................................6-3
Vehicle preparation before driving ...................................................6-4 6
Safe driving techniques.....................................................................6-4
Driving during cold weather.............................................................6-5
Braking .............................................................................................6-5
Parking..............................................................................................6-6
Loading information .........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads .....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing .................................................................................6-11
BK0200500US.book 2
Driving precaution
cle, always make certain that you and all your Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
Driving precaution passengers are properly wearing their seat lubricated according to the recommenda-
N00629300053
belts (with children in the rear seat, in appro- tions in this manual.
priate restraints). Always keep your vehicle well main-
WARNING tained. A poorly maintained engine
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
wastes fuel and costs money.
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Fuel economy Never overload your vehicle.
Avoid abrupt maneuvers and excessive N00628801188
speed. Always buckle up.
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors.
Driving, alcohol and drugs
6 Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
Your personal driving habits can have a sig-
nificant effect on your fuel consumption. N00628900049
and a narrower track, which enables them to Several recommendations for achieving the Drunk driving is one of the most frequent
perform in a wide variety of off-road situa- greatest fuel economy are listed below. causes of accidents.
tions. Because of the higher ground clear- Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
ance, these vehicles have a higher center of Whenever accelerating from a stop, even with blood alcohol levels far below the
gravity, which makes them handle differently always accelerate slowly and smoothly. legal minimum. If you have been drinking,
than ordinary vehicles when driving on pave- When parked for even a short period, do dont drive. Ride with a designated non-
ment. They are not designed to maneuver or not idle the engine. Shut it off. drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
corner at the same speed on pavement as con- Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
ventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars any stops. ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
more than low-slung sports cars are designed Keep your tires inflated to the recom- Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
to perform satisfactorily in off-road condi- mended pressures. drugs affect your alertness, perception and
tions. When driving on highways or dry reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
Always drive safely and steer the vehicle improved roads, set the drive mode-selec- pharmacist before driving while under the
carefully. Avoid operating the vehicle in a tor 4WD ECO, 4WD AUTO or influence of any of these medications.
manner that might require sharp turns or AWC ECO, NORMAL position (if so
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of equipped).
this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor- For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
WARNING
rectly can result in loss of control or vehicle NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
rollover. traffic, roadway and weather conditions
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig- safely permit. impaired.
nificantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Before starting the vehi-
6-2 Driving safety

BK0200500US.book 3
Floor mat
3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
Floor mat WARNING
N00628600033 Never install a second mat over or under
an existing floor mat.
The original equipment floor mat provided
Do not use a floor mat designed for
with your vehicle was specifically designed
another model vehicle even if it is a Mit-
for your vehicle. subishi genuine floor mat.
Always properly position the floor mat and Before driving, be sure to check the fol-
assure it does not interfere with operation of lowing:
the pedals. Always use the retaining clip on Periodically check that the floor mat is
the drivers floorboard to secure the floor
mat. When used, this clip will help prevent
properly secured with the retaining clips. 6
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
the floor mat from moving forward and possi- ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
bly interfering with the operation of the ped- other reason, always check the condition
als. To prevent the floor mat from moving of the floor mat after it has been rein-
NOTE stalled.
forward and possibly interfering with the The shape of the mat and the number of
operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi genuine While the vehicle is stopped with the
retaining clips may vary depending on the
floor mats are recommended. engine off, check that the floor mat is not
vehicle model.
interfering with the pedals by depressing
the pedals fully.
To install the floor mat
N00628700050
WARNING
1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
floorboard. properly installed, it can interfere with the
operation of the pedals. Interference with
2. Align the floor mat with the installation
the pedals can cause unintended accelera-
holes over the retaining clips. tion and/or increased stopping distances
resulting in a crash and injury. Always
make sure the floor mat does not interfere
with the accelerator or brake pedal.
Always use the retaining clip on the
drivers floorboard to secure the floor
mat.
Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down.
Driving safety 6-3

BK0200500US.book 4
Vehicle preparation before driving

signal indicators and high-beam indicators on
Vehicle preparation before Defrosters the instrument panel.
driving
Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
N00629001709
and set the blower switch on high. You should Fluid leaks
For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always
be able to feel the air blowing against the
check for the following:
windshield. Check the ground under the vehicle after
Refer to Defrosting or defogging (wind- parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or
Seat belts and seats shield, door windows) on page 7-13 other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need
6 Before starting the vehicle, make certain to find out why immediately and have it
that you and all passengers are seated and Tires fixed.
wearing their seat belts properly (with
children in the rear seat, in appropriate Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
restraints), and that all the doors and the uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, Safe driving techniques
liftgate are locked. glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look N00629201134
Move the drivers seat as far backward as for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check Even this vehicles safety equipment, and
possible, while keeping good visibility, the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
and good control of the steering wheel, (including spare tire) for proper pressure. can avoid an accident or injury. However, if
brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check Replace your tires before they are heavily you give extra attention to the following
the instrument panel indicators and multi- worn out. areas, you can better protect yourself and
information display for any possible prob- As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- your passengers:
lem. sure monitoring system, there is a risk of
Similarly, the front passenger seat should damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic,
also be moved as far back as possible. when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire road and weather conditions. Leave plenty
Make sure that infants and small children replacement should, only, be performed by an of stopping distance between your vehicle
are properly restrained in accordance with authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. and the vehicle ahead.
all laws and regulations. Before changing lanes, check your mir-
rors, blind spots, and use your turn-signal
Lights light.
While driving, watch the behavior of
Have someone watch while you turn all the other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn
6-4 Driving safety

BK0200500US.book 5
Driving during cold weather

Always obey applicable laws and regula- Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
When brakes are wet
leave room for unexpected events, such as time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then
sudden braking. drive your vehicle slowly. Check the brake system while driving at a
If you plan to drive in another country, Stay at low speeds at first so that the low speed immediately after starting, espe-
obey their vehicle registration laws and transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
make sure you will be able to get the right have time to spread to all lubrication they work normally.
fuel. points. A film of water can be formed on the brake
Check the engine antifreeze. discs and prevent normal braking after driv-
ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or
Driving during cold weather If there is not enough coolant because of a
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry
6
leak or from engine overheating, add Mit-
N00629400445
subishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly
Check the battery. At the same time, depressing the brake pedal.
Coolant Premium or equivalent.
check the terminals and wiring. During
Please read this section in conjunction
extremely cold weather, the battery will
with the Engine coolant on page 9-8. When driving in cold weather
not be as strong. Also, the battery power
level may drop because more power is

WARNING On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking

used for cold starting and driving.
Never open the radiator cap when the
Before driving the vehicle, check to see if system, making the brakes less effective.
radiator is hot. You could be seriously
the engine runs at the proper speed and if burned. While driving in such conditions, pay close
the headlights are as bright as normally. attention to surrounding vehicles and to the
Charge or replace the battery if necessary. condition of the road surface. From time to
During extreme cold weather, it is possi- time, lightly depress the brake pedal and
ble that a very low battery could freeze.
Braking check how effective the brakes are.
N00629501528

WARNING All the parts of the brake system are critical

When driving downhill
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
tery to explode, which could cause serious repair facility of your choice at regular inter- It is important to take advantage of the engine
injury or death. vals according to the WARRANTY AND braking by downshifting while driving on
Always wear protective clothes and a face MAINTENANCE MANUAL. steep downhill roads in order to prevent the
mask when working with your battery, or brakes from overheating.
let a skilled mechanic do it.
Driving safety 6-5

BK0200500US.book 6
Parking
Parking WARNING Do not keep the steering wheel

N00629601330 Leaving the engine running risks injury or fully turned for a long time
death from accidentally moving the selec-
tor lever or the accumulation of toxic
Parking on a hill exhaust fumes in the passenger compart- Move effort could be required to turn the
ment. steering wheel.
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, Refer to Electric power steering system
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a (EPS) on page 5-89.
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. Where you park
6 If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.
Loading information
Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set
Your front bumper can be damaged if you N00629900352
when parked and that the selector lever is in
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. It is very important to know how much
the P (PARK) position.
Be careful when traveling up or down steep weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is
When parking on a hill, it is important to set
slopes where your bumper can scrape the called the vehicle capacity weight and
the parking brake before moving the selector
road. includes the weight of all occupants, cargo
lever to the P (PARK) position. This pre-
vents loading the parking brake against the (including the roof load), non-factory-
transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to WARNING installed options, and the tongue weight of
move the selector lever out of the P Do not park your vehicle in areas where the trailer, if any, being towed. The tire and
(PARK) position. combustible materials such as dry grass or loading information placard located on the
leaves can come in contact with a hot drivers door sill of your vehicle will show
exhaust, since a fire could occur. how much weight it may properly carry.
Parking with the engine run-
ning WARNING
When leaving the vehicle Never overload your vehicle. Overloading
Never leave the engine running while you can damage your vehicle, adversely affect
take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the Always remove the key from the ignition vehicle performance, including handling
engine running in a closed or poorly venti- switch and lock all doors and the liftgate and braking, cause tire failure, and result
lated place. when leaving the vehicle unattended. in an accident.
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
area. It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms before loading your vehicle:
6-6 Driving safety

BK0200500US.book 7
Loading information
Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load Production options weight: the combined
on an individual tire that is determined by weight of those installed regular produc-
distributing to each axle its share of the tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
maximum loaded vehicle weight and in excess of those standard items which
dividing by two. they replace, not previously considered in
Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
individual tire that is determined by dis- ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
tributing to each axle its share of the curb rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
weight, accessory weight, and normal Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupant weight and dividing by two. *times the number of specified occupants 6
Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum (3 in the case of your vehicle)
of - Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu- This placard shows the maximum number of
(a) Curb weight; tion within the passenger compartment (In occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
(b) Accessory weight; your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, well as the combined weight of occupants
(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and 1 in second row seat) and cargo (A), which is called the vehicle
(d) Production options weight. capacity weight. The weight of any non-fac-
*:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-
Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi- tory installed options, as well as the tongue
son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian
cle with standard equipment including the weight of a trailer being towed and roof load
regulations.
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool- is included in the definition of cargo when
ant. determining the vehicle capacity weight. This
Accessory weight: the combined weight placard also tells you the size and recom-
(in excess of those standard items which Tire and loading information mended inflation pressure for the original
may be replaced) of automatic transmis- placard equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
sion, power steering, power brakes, power N00630101407 information, refer to Tires on page 9-14.
windows, power seats, radio, and heater,
to the extent that these items are available The tire and loading information placard is
as factory- installed equipment (whether located on the inside sill of the drivers door.
installed or not).
Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)
*times the vehicles designated seating
capacity.
Driving safety 6-7

BK0200500US.book 8
Loading information
Type 1 5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
Load Limit
N00630201222
on the vehicle. That weight may
1. Locate the statement The com- not safely exceed the available
bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
6 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
Type 2 cargo and luggage load capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the XXX amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650
lbs.)
6-8 Driving safety

BK0200500US.book 9
Loading information
NOTE
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information
on GAWRs, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the Specifications section of this manual.
Driving safety 6-9

BK0200500US.book 10
Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING WARNING

N00629700435 To reduce the risk of serious injury or Make sure that the weight of luggage and
death, the combined weights of the driver, the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
passengers and cargo and must never mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load is exceeded, this could
N00630301092
Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
To determine the cargo load capacity for your adversely affect vehicle performance, accident.
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may The total weight of all occupants and lug-
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident. gage, including your roof load, must not
6 For additional information, if needed, refer to Do not load cargo or luggage higher than exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to Tire and load-
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move when your ing information placard on page 11-3
on page 6-8.
vehicle is in motion. Roof load is determined by adding the
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Having either the rear view blocked, or weight of the roof carrier and the weight
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers your cargo being thrown inside the cabin of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
listed on the safety certification label located if you suddenly have to brake can cause a For additional information, refer to
on the inside sill of the drivers door as the serious accident or injury or death. Maximum roof load on page 11-5.
guide for passengers and/or cargo weight. Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
(Except for Vehicles for Mexico) your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly. CAUTION
Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
Loading cargo on the roof vehicle.
N00630401123 For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual provided with the roof carrier.
WARNING Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
will raise the vehicles center of gravity items on the bottom. Do not load items that
and adversely affect its handling charac- are wider than the roof carrier.
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
6-10 Driving safety

BK0200500US.book 11
Trailer towing
CAUTION Trailer towing

Before driving and after traveling a short dis- N00629801329
tance, always check the load to make sure it
Towing a trailer will adversely affect your
is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that
vehicles handling, performance, braking,
the load remains secure. If the load is not durability and driving economy (fuel con-
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and sumption, etc.).
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre- If you do tow a trailer with this vehicle, be
ate a road hazard. sure to use proper equipment and cautious
steering and braking for safe driving. 6
NOTE CAUTION
To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in To install the covers Do not lose control of your vehicle when
towing a trailer.
use.
Always use proper equipment.
Before using an automatic car wash, check Install the covers by performing the removal
Always drive carefully
with the attendant to determine if the roof step in reverse.
carrier should be removed. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper
equipment or driving is not covered by your
warranty.
Roof carrier mounting bracket

cover (if so equipped) Weight limits
N00630601112
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight,

When installing the roof carrier, use the pro- maximum trailer weight (A), maximum
vided brackets.
The brackets are located under each cover.
To remove the covers
Slide each cover toward the front of the vehi-

cle to remove it.
Driving safety 6-11

BK0200500US.book 12
Trailer towing
tongue weight (B) and Gross Axle Weight Models Maximum trailer weight Tire and loading information placard on
Rating (GAWR). page 6-7.
With brake 1,500 lbs. (680
Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight
kg)
2.4 liter models for your vehicle.
Without brake 1,250 lbs.
(567 kg)
Models Maximum tongue weight
With brake 3,500 lbs.
With brake 150 lbs. (68
(1,588 kg)
3.0 liter models kg)
Without brake 1,400 lbs. 2.4 liter models
Without brake 125 lbs. (57
6 (635 kg)
kg)
With brake 350 lbs. (159
Tongue weight kg)
3.0 liter models
Without brake 140 lbs. (64
The tongue weight of any trailer is important kg)
Vehicle capacity weight because it affects the vehicle capacity weight.
The vehicle capacity weight includes any
After youve loaded your trailer, weigh the
cargo you may carry, and the people who will
The vehicle capacity weight is printed on the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see
be riding in the vehicle. If you will tow a
tire and loading information placard as com- if the weights are proper.
trailer, you must include the tongue weight of
bined weight of occupants and cargo. Keep the trailer tongue load at 10% of the
the trailer in your calculation of the vehicle
The weight includes the weight of all occu- loaded trailer weight for dead weight hitches.
capacity weight. For more information
pants and the total weight it can carry. Tongue loads can be adjusted by proper dis-
regarding vehicle capacity weight, refer to
For more information, refer to Tire and load- tribution of the load in the trailer. This can be
ing information placard on page 6-7. checked by separately weighing the loaded
trailer and then the tongue.
Maximum trailer weight
Gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
Recommendations for towing up to this limit
are as follows. The GAWRs are printed on the certification
label which is riveted on the door sill on the
drivers side.
Refer to Vehicle labeling on page 11-2.
6-12 Driving safety

BK0200500US.book 13
Trailer towing
should cross under the trailer tongue to pre-
Trailer hitches vent the tongue from dropping to the ground
Trailer brakes
in case it becomes damaged or separated.
Choose a proper hitch and ball, and make For correct safety chain procedures, consult Mitsubishi Motors recommends that any
sure it is installed at a height that is compati- your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. trailer having a total weight of 1,250 lbs (567
ble with the trailer. kg) or more (2400 models), 1,400 lbs (635
Use a good equalizing hitch which uniformly kg) or more (3000 models) be equipped with
distributes the trailer tongue load throughout
CAUTION its own electric or surge-type brakes.
Never tow a trailer without using a safety
the frame.
chain securely attached to both the trailer If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are
and the vehicle. If the coupling unit or hitch
electrically actuated. Do not attempt to tap 6
WARNING ball experiences a problem, the trailer may
into your vehicles hydraulic system. No mat-
If you make any holes in the body of your separate from your vehicle.
ter how successful it may seem, any attempt
vehicle for installing a trailer hitch, be
to attach trailer brakes to your vehicles
sure to seal the holes later when you
hydraulic system will lower braking effec-
remove the hitch. If you dont seal them, Maintenance when trailer tow- tiveness and create a potential hazard.
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can enter your vehicle. Refer to ing
Exhaust system on page 9-24.
Trailer lights
Your vehicle will need service more often
when youre towing a trailer. Refer to WAR-
NOTE Trailer lights and equipment must comply
RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN-
with federal, state, and local regulations.
Mitsubishi Motors recommends that sway UAL. Especially important in trailer
control be used whenever you are towing, to Check with your local recreational vehicle
operation are manual transaxle oil, automatic
improve towing stability. dealer for the requirements in your area, and
transaxle fluid, engine oil, rear axle oil, belt,
For further information, please contact your use only equipment designed for your vehi-
cooling system and brake system. Each of
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. cle.
these is covered in this manual.
For details, please refer to the Vehicle care Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type
and maintenance section. and brand, you should have a qualified tech-
Safety chains Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts nician install a suitable connector between the
and bolts are tight. vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or
A safety chain must always be used between installation can cause damage to your vehi-
the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave suf-
ficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain
Driving safety 6-13
BK0200500US.book 14
Trailer towing
cles electrical system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
WARNING Tire
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window or another opening, Be sure your vehicles tires are inflated to the
Additional trailer equipment drive with your front, main heating or
cold inflation pressure listed in the manual.
cooling system on and with the blower on
Youll find these numbers on the tire and
any speed. This will bring fresh, outside
Many states and Canadian provinces require loading information placard at the sill of the
air into your vehicle. Do not use recircula-
special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. tion because it only recirculates the air drivers door.
Even if not required, you should install spe- inside your vehicle. Refer to Air selection Refer to Tire inflation pressures on page
cial mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind 9-18.
6 you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.
switch on page 7-9.
Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any Driver preparation

other items are recommended or required for Following distance
your towing situation. Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle
Operating hints Before setting out for the open road, youll ahead as you would when driving your vehi-
want to get to know your trailer. Acquaint cle without a trailer. This can help you avoid
yourself with the feel of handling and braking situations that require heavy braking and sud-
WARNING with the added weight of the trailer. Always den turns.
If you have a rear window open and you keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving
tow a trailer with your vehicle, carbon is now a good deal longer and not nearly as Passing
monoxide gas which you cannot see or responsive as your vehicle is without a trailer.
smell could come into your vehicle. It can
cause unconsciousness or death. Refer to Youll need more passing distance up ahead
Exhaust system on page 9-24. Vehicle preparation when youre towing a trailer. And, because
To maximize your safety when towing a youre a good deal longer, youll need to go
trailer: Before you start, check the trailer hitch, much farther beyond the passed vehicle
Have your exhaust system inspected for safety chains, tires and mirror adjustment. before you can return to your lane.
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Keep the rear windows closed.
6-14 Driving safety

BK0200500US.book 15
Trailer towing
heating. Following are some suggestions to If the
Backing up reduce overheating:
warning display or warning
display illuminates, refer to Warning dis-
play on page 5-62, 5-70.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with Cause of overheating Solution
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, Air conditioning on Turn off
just move that hand to the left. To move the Highway speeds Reduce speed Driving on hills
trailer to the right, move your hand to the Going up hills Select lower gear posi-
right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, tion Reduce speed and downshift before you start
have someone guide you. Stop-and-go city traf- With the vehicle down a long or steep downgrade. If you dont
fic stopped, shift to the
N (NEUTRAL)
downshift, over using the brakes can cause 6
Making turns reduced brake efficiency.
position and idle the
engine at high idle. You can tow in D (DRIVE) position. You
CAUTION may want to shift the selector lever to the 3rd
Making sharp turns while towing a trailer When towing at high altitudes, engine coolant or a lower position, under heavy loads or hilly
could cause the trailer to come in contact and automatic transaxle oil will overheat at a conditions.
with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be dam- lower temperature than at normal altitudes.
aged. Avoid making sharp turns while tow- If you turn your engine off immediately after Parking
ing a trailer. towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
your vehicle may show signs similar to over-
Always place chocks or blocks under both the
When youre turning with a trailer, make heating. To avoid this, let the engine run
vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Be
wider than normal turns to help prevent the while parked (preferably on level ground)
sure that the parking brake is firmly set and
trailer from striking shoulders, curbs, road with the automatic transaxle in the P
that the selector lever is in the P (PARK)
signs, trees or other objects. (PARK) position for a few minutes before
position. Avoid parking on a hill with a
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal turning the engine off.
trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only
well in advance. after performing the following:
If the engine coolant temperature indica-
tor flashes on the information screen in 1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Overheating
the multi-information display or the 2. Have someone place chocks or blocks
engine power drops suddenly, refer to under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
Towing a trailer puts additional burden on the Engine overheating on page 8-4.
engine and transaxle, which may cause over-
Driving safety 6-15

BK0200500US.book 16
Trailer towing
3. When the chocks or blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
chocks or blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Set the selector lever to the P (PARK)
position and turn off the engine.
When restarting out after parking on a hill:
1. Check that the selector lever is set to the

6 P (PARK) position.
2. Start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake
pedal depressed.
3. Set the selector lever to the D (DRIVE)
position or R (REVERSE) position.
4. Release the parking brake and brake pedal
and slowly pull or back away from the
chocks or blocks. Stop and apply your
brakes.
5. Have someone retrieve the chocks or
blocks.
6-16 Driving safety

BK0200500US.book 1
Comfort controls
Vents .................................................................................................7-2
Automatic climate control air conditioner........................................7-5
Important air conditioning operating tips .......................................7-14
Air purifier ......................................................................................7-14
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped).....................................7-15
Handling of Discs ..........................................................................7-18
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) ....................................................7-20
7
Important Points on Safety for the Customer ................................7-24
Operation Keys ..............................................................................7-25
Listen to Radio ...............................................................................7-28
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped) .......................................7-29
Listen to CDs .................................................................................7-31
Listen to MP3s ...............................................................................7-32
Listen to an iPod ............................................................................7-33
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device .........................................7-35
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped) ....................................7-38
Display Indicator ...........................................................................7-40
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment ...........................7-41
System Settings ..............................................................................7-42
Troubleshooting ..............................................................................7-45
Antenna...........................................................................................7-47
General information about your radio ............................................7-48
BK0200500US.book 2
Vents
Vents Air flow and direction adjust- Passengers vents

N00729901288 ments
N00730201340 Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
To close the vent, fully move the knob (A) to
Drivers vents the left side.
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.

To close the vent, fully move the knob (A) to
the outer side.
7
1- Drivers vents
2- Passengers vents
1- Close
2- Open
NOTE
1- Close
On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
2- Open air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
due to only moist air cooling suddenly and it
does not indicate a problem.
Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
ing from operating normally.
7-2 Comfort controls

BK0200500US.book 3
Vents
Changing the mode selection Foot/Face position Foot position

N00736401605
To change the position and amount of air Air flows to the upper part of the passenger Air flows mainly to the leg area.
flowing from the vents, press the MODE compartment, and flows to the leg area.
switch or defogger switch. Refer to MODE
switch on page 7-9, Defogger switch on
page 7-9.
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents 7
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
NOTE
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen- The foot/face air flow ratio can be adjusted
ger compartment.
with the mode selection in the posi-
tion.
For further information, we recommend you
to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
can be used to make the adjustment. Refer to
the separate owners manual for details.
Comfort controls 7-3

BK0200500US.book 4
Vents
Foot/Defroster position Defroster position
Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and Air flows mainly to the windshield and the
the door windows. door windows.
NOTE
The foot/defroster air flow ratio can be
adjusted with the mode selection in the
position.
For further information, we recommend you
to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
can be used to make the adjustment. Refer to

BK0200500US.book 5
Automatic climate control air conditioner

N00731501311
The air conditioner can only be used while the engine is running.
Control panel
N00711801552
Automatic climate control air conditioner - Type 1
1- Temperature control switch 9- OFF switch

2- Air conditioning switch 10- Temperature display P.7-7
3- MODE switch 11- Air conditioning indicator
4- Blower speed selection switch 12- Blower speed display
5- Air selection switch 13- Mode selection display
6- Defogger switch
7- AUTO switch
8- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-184

BK0200500US.book 6
Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioner - Type 2
1- Drivers side temperature control 14- Passengers side temperature display

P.7-7
NOTE
switch There is an interior air temperature sensor
2- Air conditioning switch 15- Air conditioning indicator
(A) in the illustrated position.
3- Blower speed selection switch 16- Blower speed display Never place anything over the sensor, since
4- MODE switch doing so will prevent it from functioning
5- Passengers side temperature control properly.
switch
6- Air selection switch
7- Defogger switch
8- AUTO switch
9- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-184
10- OFF switch
11- Drivers side temperature display
P.7-7
12- DUAL indicator
13- Mode selection display

BK0200500US.book 7
NOTE Blower speed selection switch Temperature control switch

Since the air conditioning operation is con- N00736901189 N00737001334
trolled while the ECO mode is operating, Press of the blower speed selection Press or of the temperature control
you may feel that effectiveness of the air
switch to increase the blower speed. switch to the desired temperature.
conditioner is insufficient.
ECO mode switch P.5-178 Press of the blower speed selection The selected temperature will be shown in the
Even during ECO mode operation, you can switch to decrease the blower speed. display (A).
select normal operation of the air condi- The selected blower speed will be shown in
tioner. the display (A).
Type 1
can be used to change the setting. Refer to 7
In extreme cold, the air conditioning control
panel screen may operate sluggishly. This
does not indicate a problem.
It will disappear when the vehicle interior
temperature rises to a normal temperature.
Type 2
A sound will be made every time you push
all the switches.
NOTE
The temperature value of air conditioner is
switched in conjunction with outside temper-
ature display unit of the multi information
display.
1- Increase On vehicles equipped with multi information
2- Decrease display - Type 1, refer to Changing the tem-
perature unit on page 5-137.
On vehicles equipped with multi information
display - Type 2, refer to Changing the tem-
perature unit on page 5-147.

BK0200500US.book 8

air conditioning switch to match your per- Synchronized mode
NOTE sonal preferences. If the drivers side temperature control
When the engine coolant temperature is low,
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a switch is pressed, the passengers side
the air temperature from the heater will be
repair facility of your choice for assistance. temperature will also be controlled to the
cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if
you have selected warm air with the switch. Refer to Personalizing the air conditioning same setting temperature as the drivers
To prevent the windshield and windows from switch (Changing the function setting) on side.
fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to page7-11. Dual mode
and the blower speed will be reduced Refer to Personalizing the air selection If the passengers side temperature con-
while the system is operating in the AUTO (Changing the function setting) on trol switch is pressed under synchronized
mode. page7-10. mode, the system will switch to dual
When you feel that it is hotter or colder than mode. In dual mode, the drivers side and
7 the set temperature, you may adjust it to your Synchronized mode and dual mode the passengers side temperature can be
preference. set separately by using each temperature
(if so equipped)
For further information, we recommend you control switch.
to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors Press the AUTO switch to return to syn-
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. The drivers side and the passengers side
chronized mode.
When the temperature is set to the highest or temperature can be controlled independently.
the lowest setting, the air selection and the At this time, the DUAL indicator will be
air conditioner will be automatically changed shown in the display (A).
as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioner will stop.
Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioner will operate.
The above indicates the factory settings. You

can personalize the air selection switch and

BK0200500US.book 9
Mode switch Defogger switch Air selection switch

N00737101218 N00703401025 N00737201378
To change the amount of air flowing from the When this switch is pressed, the mode Normally, use the outside air position to keep
vents, press the MODE switch. Each time the changes to the mode. The indicator the windshield and side windows clear and to
MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes light (A) will come on. The selected mode is quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
to the next one in the following sequence: shown in the display (B). Refer to Changing shield.
. the mode selection on page 7-3.
The selected mode is shown in the display To change the air selection, simply press the
(A). Refer to Changing the mode selection air selection switch.
on page 7-3.
Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
Outside air is introduced into the passen- 7
ger compartment.
Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
conditioning system automatically operates
and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
air) is selected. This automatic switching
control is carried out to prevent misting of
the windows even if Disable automatic air
conditioning control or Disable automatic
air control is set. Refer to Personalizing
the air conditioning switch (Changing the When the air conditioning turns on, the air
function setting) on page 7-11, Personaliz- selection is controlled automatically. When
ing the air selection (Changing the function the air conditioning turns off, the air selection
setting) on page 7-10.

BK0200500US.book 10

automatically goes back to the outside posi- Enable automatic air control:
tion. When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air
NOTE
When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
If high cooling performance is desired, or if selection switch will also be automatically
selection will automatically change to the
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in controlled.
outside air position, even if the system is set
some way, use the recirculation position. to Disable automatic air control, in order
Switch to the outside position every now and Disable automatic air control:
to prevent windows from fogging up.
then to keep the windows from fogging up. Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,
the air selection switch will not be auto-
matically controlled. Air conditioning switch
CAUTION N00737301353
Using recirculated air for a long time may Changing the settings Push the switch, and the air conditioning
cause the windows to fog up. Press the air selection switch for approxi-
7 mately 10 seconds or longer.
compressor will turn on. The indicator
will be shown in the display (A).
When the setting has changed, the system
NOTE will beep and the indicator light will flash.
If the mode selection is set position, When the setting has changed from
you cannot turn the air conditioner off or enabled to disabled, the system will beep
select the recirculation position. three times and the indicator light will
This prevents the windows from fogging up. flash three times.
When the engine coolant temperature rises to When the setting has changed from dis-
a certain level, the air selection is automati-
abled to enabled, the system will beep
cally switched to the recirculation position
and the indicator light (A) comes on. At this
two times and the indicator light will
time, the system will not switch to the out- flash three times.
side position even if the air selection switch On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi
is pushed. Multi-Communication System, screen
operations can also be used to change the
Push the switch again and the air condition-
setting. Refer to the separate owners
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
Personalizing the air selection manual for details.
goes off.
(Changing the function setting)
N00712300023
NOTE
You can change the following functions to The factory setting is Enable automatic air
match your preference. control.

BK0200500US.book 11

Enable automatic air conditioning control:
CAUTION When the AUTO switch is pressed, or
NOTE
Using the air conditioning slightly increases The factory setting is Enable automatic air
when the temperature control switch has
the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure conditioning control.
been set to the minimum temperature, the
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
shifting the transaxle into drive. air conditioning switch is automatically
conditioner will run automatically, even if
controlled. the system is set to Disable automatic air
conditioning control, in order to prevent
Disable automatic air conditioning con-
NOTE trol:
windows from fogging up.
If a problem is detected in the air condition- The air conditioning switch is not auto-
ing compressor, the indicator blinks. matically controlled, unless the air condi-
Press the air conditioning switch once to turn AUTO switch
it off, then once more to turn it back on. If
tioning switch is used.
N00703501026 7
the indicator does not blink, there is no Changing the settings When the AUTO switch is pressed, the indi-
problem. If it does blink, have it checked at Press the air conditioning switch for about cator light (A) comes on and the mode selec-
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a 10 seconds or longer. tion (except for ), blower speed
repair facility of your choice. When the setting has changed, the system adjustment, recirculated/outside air selection,
For example, sometimes after using a high- will beep and the indicator light will flash. temperature adjustment, and air conditioner
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, ON/OFF status are all controlled automati-
When the setting has changed from
and the indicator blinks temporarily. enabled to disabled, the system will beep cally.
Wait for a while, press the air conditioning three times and the indicator light will
switch once to turn the system off, then once
flash three times.
more to turn it back on. Once the water evap-
orates, the blinking will stop.
When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled, the system will beep
two times and the indicator light will
Personalizing the air conditioning flash three times.
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi
switch (Changing the function set-
Multi-Communication System, screen
ting)
N00712200022
operations can also be used to change the
setting. Refer to the separate owners
You can change the following functions to
manual for details.
match your preference.

BK0200500US.book 12
OFF switch Operating the air conditioning NOTE

N00703601027
system (automatic mode) Set the temperature at about 75 (when the
Push the switch to turn off the air condition- N00731701371
outside temperature unit of the multi-infor-
ing system. mation display shows F) or 24 (when the
outside temperature unit of the multi-infor-
mation display shows C) under normal con-
ditions.
When the engine coolant temperature is low,
the air temperature from the heater will be
cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if
you have selected warm air with the temper-
7 ature switch. To prevent the windshield and
windows from fogging up, the vent mode
will be changed to and the blower
speed will be reduced.
In normal conditions, use the system in the
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
Operating the air conditioning
1. Push the AUTO switch. system (manual mode)
2. Set the temperature control switch to the N00731801125
desired temperature. The temperature can
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
be set within a range of around 61 to 89
trolled manually by setting the blower speed
(when the outside temperature unit of the
selection switch and the MODE switch to the
multi-information display shows F) or 17
desired positions. To return to automatic
to 31 (when the outside temperature unit
operation, press the AUTO switch.
of the multi-information display shows
C).
The vents (except for ), recircula-

tion/outside air, blower speed, temperature
adjustment, and ON/OFF of air conditioner
will be controlled automatically.

BK0200500US.book 13
Defrosting or defogging (wind- Type 1 For quick defrosting

shield, door windows)
N00732401476 Type 1
CAUTION
For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.
Type 2
To remove frost or mist from the windshield
Type 2
and door windows, use the MODE switch or
defogger switch ( or ). 7
For ordinary defrosting
Use this setting to keep the windshield and 1. Set the air selection switch to the outside
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the position.
leg area heated (when driving in rain or 2. Set the MODE switch to the posi- 1. Push the defogger switch to change to the
snow). tion. position.
3. Select your desired blower speed by 2. Set the blower to the maximum speed.
pressing the blower speed selection 3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
switch. tion.
4. Select your desired temperature by press-
ing the temperature control switch. NOTE
5. Push the air conditioning switch.
While the mode selection is set to
position, the air conditioning compressor
will run automatically. The outside air posi-
tion will also be selected automatically.
If the mode selection is set to position,
you cannot turn the air conditioner off or
select the recirculation position. This pre-
vents the windows from fogging up.

BK0200500US.book 14
Important air conditioning operating tips
NOTE Air conditioning system refrig- During a long period of disuse

To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the erant and lubricant recommen-
side vents toward the door windows. The air conditioner should be operated for at
When defrosting, do not set the temperature
dations
least five minutes each week, even in cold
to the maximum cool position. This will
weather. This includes the quick defrosting
blow cool air on the window glass and fog it If the air conditioner seems less effective than
mode. Operating the air condition system
up. usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak.
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-
Have the system inspected by your authorized
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioner
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
Important air conditioning of your choice.
in the best operating condition.
operating tips
7 Air purifier
N00733701346
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever

CAUTION
N00733801190
The air conditioning system in your vehicle
possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the
must be charged with the refrigerant HFC- The air conditioning system is equipped with
vehicle interior extremely hot which then 134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56. an air filter to remove pollen and dust.
requires more time to cool. If it is neces- Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will The air filters ability to collect pollen and
sary to park in the sun, open the windows cause severe damage and may require replac- dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace
for the first few minutes of air conditioning your vehicles entire air conditioning
it periodically. For the maintenance interval,
ing to expel the hot air. system.
refer to the WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed The release of refrigerant into the atmo-
sphere is not recommended. NANCE MANUAL.
when the air conditioner is in use. The
entry of outside air through open windows The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi-
will reduce cooling efficiency. cle is designed not to harm the earths ozone NOTE
layer. However, it may contribute slightly to Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
3. When running the air conditioner, make
global warming. ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
sure the air intake, which is located in It is recommended that the old refrigerant be
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc- air conditioner can lead to reduction of ser-
saved and recycled for future use. vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
air flow is lower than normal or when the
the air-intake chamber may reduce air
windshield or windows start to fog up easily,
flow and plug the water drains. replace the air filter.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

BK0200500US.book 15
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)
AM/FM radio/CD player (if NOTE How to Clean

If foreign objects or water get into the audio N00715200023
so equipped)
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a
N00734302102
comes from it, immediately turn off the soft cloth.
audio system and have it checked at an If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in
The audio system can only be used when the
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a neutral detergent diluted in water, and
ignition switch or the operation mode is in repair facility of your choice. Never try to
ON or ACC. then wrung out. Do not use benzene, thin-
repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys-
ners, or other chemical wipes. This may
tem until it is inspected by a qualified per-
harm the surface.
NOTE son.
To listen to the audio system while the If the audio system is damaged by foreign
engine is not running, turn the ignition objects, water, or fire, have the system Trademarks 7
switch to the ACC position or put the oper- checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors N00715300024
ation mode in ACC. technician.
Product names and other proper names
If the ignition switch or the operation mode are the trademarks or registered trade-
is left in ACC, the accessory power will Important Points on Usage marks of their respective owners.
automatically turn off after a certain period
N00715000021
of time and you will no longer be able to use
the audio system. The accessory power
comes on again if the ignition switch or the iPod/iPhone Playback Function (if
engine switch is operated with it in the so equipped)
ACC position. Refer to ACC power auto-
cutout function on page 5-18 and 5-57. This product supports audio playback
If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif-
it may create noise in the audio equipment.
fering versions mean that playback cannot
This does not mean that anything is wrong
be guaranteed.
with your audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far away Please be aware that depending on the
as possible from the audio equipment. iPod/iPhone model or version, operation
may differ.

BK0200500US.book 16

Furthermore, even if there is no specific
denotation of trademarks or registered
trademarks, these are to be observed in
their entirety.
Made for iPod, Made for iPhone

mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been
7 certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Apple is not responsible for the operation
of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
NOTE
iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual
users to privately reproduce and play back
non- copyrighted material as well as material
that may be legally copied and reproduced.
Infringement of copyright is prohibited.
Please refer to your vehicles user manual
regarding the iPod/iPhone that can be used
with vehicles equipped with a Bluetooth
2.0 interface.

BK0200500US.book 17
5th generation 5th generation 160GB (2009) 160GB (2007) 80GB

(video) (video)
60GB 80GB 30GB
7
6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

8GB 16GB (video camera) 8GB 16GB
8GB 16GB
3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminum) 1GB 2GB 4GB
4GB 8GB 2GB 4GB 8GB

BK0200500US.book 18
Handling of Discs
4th generation 3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

8GB 32GB 64GB 32GB 64GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
7
16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB
N00715400025
handling of discs.
Handling of Discs This explains care that should be taken in the

BK0200500US.book 19
Handling of Discs
If discs are not going to be used for a long Maxi-
Important Points on Handling
period of time, remove these from the mum Com-
product. Type Size
Fingerprints or other marks on the read playback ments
surface of the disc may result in its con- time
tent being more difficult to read. When Disc Playback Environment CD-DA 5 inches 74 minutes
holding the disc, grip both edges, or one (12 cm)
edge and the center hole, in order that the In cold environments such as in mid-winter
read surface is not touched. when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn-
Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- ing the heater on and immediately trying to CD-TEXT 5 inches 74 minutes
wise damage the disc. use the product may cause condensation (12 cm)
Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is (water droplets) to form on the disc and inter-
already within the device. This can result nal optical components, and this may prevent 7
in damage to discs, or malfunction. the product from operating correctly. CD-R/RW 5 inches Disc
(12 cm) contain-
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait ing MP3
Cleaning a short time before use. files
Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright
disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a cir-
cular motion. Instead, wipe gently out- Actions such as unauthorized reproduction,
wards from the center of the disc to the broadcast, public performance, or rental of
outer edge. discs that comprise other than personal use Discs That May Not Be Played Back
New discs may have burring around the are prohibited by law.
outer edge or in the hole in the center. Playback of discs other than those
Ensure you check for these. If there are described in Types of Disc That Can Be
burrs, these may lead to faulty operation,
Types of Disc That Can Be Played Back is not guaranteed.
therefore ensure these are removed. Played Back 3 inches (8 cm) discs may not be used.
N00715500026 Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for
The following marks are printed on the disc example, heart-shaped), as these may
Important Points on Storage
label, package, or jacket. result in malfunction. Additionally, discs
When not using discs, ensure these are that have transparent portions may not be
kept in cases, and stored out of direct sun- played back.
light.

BK0200500US.book 20
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

Discs that have not been finalized cannot There may be noise during playback.
be played back. There may be jumping in the audio.
CAUTION
CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
Even if recorded using the correct format The disc may not be recognized.
play back MP3 format audio files.
on a recorder or computer, application The first track may not be played back.
Actions such as copying audio CDs or files
software settings and environments; disc It may take longer than usual until start
and either distributing these to others for free
peculiarities, damage, or marking; or dirt of playback of tracks. or for charge, or uploading files via the Inter-
or condensation on the lens inside the Playback may start from within the net or other means to servers is an infringe-
product may render the disc unplayable. track. ment of the law.
Depending on the disc, some functions Some parts may not be played back. Do not append the file extensions .mp3,
may not be used, or the disc may not play Tracks may freeze during playback. .wma, or .m4a, to other than
back. Tracks may be displayed erroneously. MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
7 Do not use discs with cracks or warps. discs with these types of files recorded upon
If the disc has stickers affixed, remains them may cause the files to be incorrectly
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe-
Audio Files identified for playback, which may lead to
sive, then do not use the disc. (MP3/WMA/AAC) loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or
accident.
Discs that have decorative labels or stick- N00715600027
ers may not be used. This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC
format audio files recorded on CD-ROM, NOTE
Nonstandard CDs CD-R/RW, and USB devices. Depending on the condition of the disc
recorder or recording software used, correct
This product will play back audio CDs, how- There are limitations on the files and media playback may not be possible. In these cases,
ever please be aware of the following points that can be used, therefore read the following refer to the user manual for your product or
regarding CD standards. prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format software.
audio files on discs or USB devices. Depending on your computers operating
Ensure that you use discs with on the Additionally, ensure you read the user manu- system, version, software, or settings, files
label surface. als for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing may not have a file extension appended. In
Playback of other than standard CDs is software, and ensure these are used correctly. these cases, append the file extensions
not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files .mp3, .wma, or .m4a when copying
includes title information or other data, then the files.
played back, the audio quality cannot be
this can be displayed. Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be
guaranteed.
played back.
When playing back other than standard
CDs, the following may occur.

BK0200500US.book 21
Data Formats That Can Be Speci-

ROOT Name fica- Explanation
Played Back Folder
tion
N00715700028
Audio file
Format ISO96 Level 1 Maximum 8
Data formats that can be played on discs
specifica- 60 character file
(CD-ROM, CD-R/RW) and USB devices dif-
tions name, and 3
fer.
character file
extension.
Data format DISC USB device
(single-byte
MP3 alphanumeric
WMA X
capital letters,
numerals, _
7
1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level
AAC X may be used)
ISO96 Joliet Files names up
60 to a maximum
Folder Structure exten- 64 characters
N00715800029 sion can be used.
Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized. Multises- Not supported (only first session
You can create a folder structure as in Genre - sion supported)
Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st
format audio files) for management of tracks. mum level)
number
of levels
Maxi- 700 folders (including root)
mum
folder
number

BK0200500US.book 22

Speci- What Is MP3? Item Details
Name fica- Explanation N00715900020 Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
tion
MP3 is an abbreviation of MPEG-1 Audio MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on Layer 3. MPEG is an abbreviation of
mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA, Sampling MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48
Motion Picture Experts Group, and this is a
num- and AAC files not included) frequency MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24
video compression standard used in video
[kHz]
ber*1 CDs, etc.
MP3 is one of the audio compression meth- Bit rate MPEG-1: 32 to 320
File Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni-
ods contained in the MPEG audio standard, [kbps] MPEG-2: 8 to 160
name and code, 32 characters), files/ fold-
folder ers with file/ folder names and reduces the quality of sounds that are
VBR (vari- Support
7 name longer than this will not be dis- beyond the auditory resolution of the human
able bit rate)
restric- played or played back. ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
creating high-quality data with a lower data Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual
tions
size. mode channel/ Monaural
USB sup- The recommended file system is Because this can compress CD audio to File exten- mp3
ported FAT32. approximately 1/10 its original data size with- sion
formats 1 partition only out perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs
Supported ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,
can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.
1:Do not include other than tag informa- Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4
*
MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if stor- tion (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni-
ing many tracks within the same folder, CAUTION code)), Titles, Artist name,
these may not be recognized even if less MP3 files different to the standards at right Album name
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
than the maximum number of tracks. In Maximum 64 characters
names may not be displayed correctly.
these cases, divide the tracks up into mul- number of
tiple folders. characters
that can be
Standards for MP3 Files That Can
indicated on
NOTE Be Played Back the display
The order in which folders and audio files
are displayed on this product may be differ- Specifications for MP3 files that can be
ent to how they are displayed on a computer. played are as below.

BK0200500US.book 23
What Is WMA? Item Details CAUTION

N00716000028 Specification Windows Media Audio AAC supports digital rights management
WMA is an abbreviation of Windows Media Version7.0/8.0/9.0 (DRM). This product cannot play back AAC
files protected using this system.
Audio, and this is an audio compression for- Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48
AAC files different to the standards at right
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression quency [kHz]
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
format that has a higher compression ratio
Bit rate [kbps] 48 to 320 names may not be displayed correctly.
than MP3.
VBR Support
(variable bit rate)
NOTE Standards for AAC Files That Can
Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Channel mode Stereo/Monaural
Be Played Back
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor- File extension wma 7
poration (USA) and in other countries.
Supported tag WMA tags Specifications for AAC files that can be
information Title name, Artist name, played are as below.
Album name
CAUTION
WMA supports digital rights management Maximum num- 64 characters Item Details
(DRM). This product cannot play back ber of characters Specification Advanced Audio
WMA files protected using this system. that can be indi- Coding
WMA files different to the standards at right cated on the dis- MPEG4/AAC-LC
may not play back correctly, or file/folder play MPEG2/AAC-LC
names may not be displayed correctly.
Pro, Lossless, and Voice are not sup- Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
ported. What Is AAC? fre- 24/32/44.1/48
N00716100029
quency MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
[kHz] 24/32/44.1/48
AAC is an abbreviation of Advanced Audio
Standards for WMA Files That Coding, and this is an audio compression Bit rate MPEG4 8 to 320
Can Be Played Back standard used in MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. [kbps] MPEG2 8 to 320
This features 1.4x the compression of MP3,
Specifications for WMA files that can be with comparable audio quality. VBR Support
played are as below. (variable bit rate)
Channel mode Stereo/Monaural

BK0200500US.book 24
Important Points on Safety for the Customer

Item Details WARNING WARNING
File extension m4a The driver should not perform compli- During thunderstorms, do not touch the
cated operations while driving. antenna or the front panel.
Supported tag AAC tags or ID3 tags
Performing complicated operations while This may lead to electrical shock from
information Title, Artist name,
driving may prevent the driver looking lightning.
Album name where they are going, and cause an acci-
Maximum number 64 characters dent.
of characters that Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca- CAUTION
can be indicated on tion before performing such operations. Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks
the display Do not use during malfunctions, such as on the product.
when no sound is audible. Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may
7 This may lead to accident, fire, or electric prevent heat from escaping from within the
Important Points on Safety shock. product, leading to fire or malfunction.
Ensure water or other foreign objects do
for the Customer not enter the product.
Do not turn the volume up to the extent that
you cannot hear sounds from outside the
N00716200020 This may lead to smoking, fire, electric vehicle while driving.
This product features a number of pictorial shock, or malfunction. Driving without being able to hear sounds
indications as well as points concerning han- Do not insert foreign objects into the disc from outside the vehicle may result in an
dling so that you can use the product cor- slot. accident.
rectly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent This may lead to fire, electric shock, or Do not insert your hand or fingers into the
malfunction. disc slot.
injury or damage to yourself, other users, or
In the event of abnormalities occurring This may result in injury.
property.
when foreign objects or water enter the
product, resulting in smoke or a strange
WARNING smell, immediately stop using the product,
The driver should not pay close attention and consult an authorized Mitsubishi
to the display while driving. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
This may prevent the driver looking choice.
where they are going, and cause an acci- Continuing to use the product may result
dent. in accident, fire, or electric shock.
Do not disassemble or modify the product.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or elec-
tric shock.

BK0200500US.book 25
Operation Keys
Operation Keys Adjust Volume Insert/Eject Discs

N00716300021 N00716500023 N00716600024
1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the vol- 1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
Turn the Power ON/ OFF ume. label surface up.
N00716400022
1. Press the PWR/VOL key.
Disc slot
7
Disc
*Label side
Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to Push the disc in a certain amount, and the
increase, and counterclockwise to product will pull the disc in, and playback
Turn the power on, and resume playback decrease the volume. will start.
from the previous status. 2. Press the key.
2. Press the PWR/VOL key. NOTE This will eject the disc from the product,
Turn the power OFF. The maximum value for volume is 45, and so remove the disc.
the minimum is 0.
NOTE The initial setting for volume is 17. CAUTION
Hold down the steering MODE key to also When replacing discs, first ensure that the
turn the audio function ON/OFF. vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
ping is permitted.
Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
injury, smoking, or fire.
3 inches (8 cm) CDs are not supported.

BK0200500US.book 26
Operation Keys
Explanation of Buttons
N00716700038
This explains names and functions of each part.
1- key 5- RADIO key 9- PTY key

Use to eject a disc. Switch the radio and the band. PTY searches and scans can be per-
6- PWR/VOL key formed while receiving radio RBDS
2- 3 key/4 key
Adjust the volume, and turn the power broadcasts.
For audio, rewind/fast forward.
ON/OFF. Search channels in the satellite radio*1.
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4.
7- MEDIA key 10- SCAN key
3- 2RDM key
Switch between CD and other sources. For audio, play scan playback; for
For audio, play random playback; for
8- DISP key radio, scan for stations.
radio, use as preset key 2.
Switch the content of the display. 11- Disc slot
4- 1RPT key
For audio, play repeat playback; for 12- PAGE key
radio, use as preset key 1. Display indicator page advance.

BK0200500US.book 27
Operation Keys
13- 5 key 3- MODE key
Steering wheel audio remote
Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*2, and use Hold down to turn the audio function
control switch ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is
as preset key 5 for radio. N00716800042
pressed, this switches the audio source.
14- 6 key
The order of switching is as shown
Return during audio track search, and
below.
stop Bluetooth Audio*2. If devices are not connected, then these
For radio, use as preset key 6. are to be skipped, and the next source
15- key/ key selected.
For audio, select audio track/file; for
radio, perform automatic station selec-
tion. CD or MP3 7
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. 1
iPod* or USB device
16- MENU key
Bluetooth Audio*2
Switch to Menu mode. 1- Vol + key, - key
Adjust audio functions and the mobile AM
17- /SEL key
Adjust audio quality and select items. phone function volume. FM1, 2
For radio, manually select stations. 2- CH key, key SIR1, 2, 3, 4*3
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. Select CD and other audio source tracks
* 1: Requires a satellite tuner connection. and radio stations.
Hold down to skip up and down through *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- required.
tooth-capable audio device in equip- tracks.
Hold down to switch the satellite radio *2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
ment by type (vehicles with a tooth-capable audio device (vehicles
band during satellite radio reception.
Bluetooth 2.0 interface). with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface).
3: Requires a satellite tuner connection.
*

BK0200500US.book 28
Listen to Radio
2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
Listen to Radio /SEL key Increases the frequency
(clockwise) being received. key to the 6 key.
N00716900027
This explains how to listen to AM and FM key Release the button to start A Beep sounds, and the preset key is
radio broadcasts. (hold down) seek station selection, and registered.
when a station is received,
key scanning stops.
To Listen to the Radio (hold down) NOTE
The preset memory can register a maximum
Press the RADIO key to switch the band. of 6 stations for each band.
Scan Station Selection If a preset key that already has a station reg-
Switch between AM and FM bands. istered is selected, then this is overwritten
7 The selected band is indicated on the display. Collective search for stations that can be with the new preset.
received. Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered frequency.
NOTE Press the SCAN key.
Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
SIR1*, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*. When a station is received, this is played for 5
PTY Search
If no signal is received, bands will not be seconds, then the product searches for the
switched to SIR2, SIR3, or SIR4. next station.
During RBDS broadcast reception, select
*: When a satellite tuner is connected PTY (program content), and automatically
NOTE scan for stations.
Press this button again while receiving the
Manual/Seek Station Selection station to return to normal reception. 1. During FM reception, press the PTY key.
This switches to the PTY selection mode.
2. Press the PTY key to select PTY.
Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis-
Preset Memory 3. Press the key or key.
ten to.
The PTY (program content) indicator will
Register the broadcast station in advance, and flash, and station selection will automati-
/SEL key Reduces the frequency cally start.
being received. select this at a later time.
(counter- When a station is received, the frequency
clockwise) 1. Tune in to the frequency to register. is displayed.

BK0200500US.book 29
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)

*:If no signal is received, bands will not be
NOTE Listen to Satellite Radio (if so switched.
This receives the station detected first.
equipped)
10 seconds after reception, PTY search mode
N00717000025
will be cancelled.
To receive a different station, press the This section explains how to listen to satellite Select a Station
key or key again. radio.
Press the key or key to select the sta-
NOTE tion.
PTY Scan A subscription is required to listen to satel-
lite radio. Satellite radio cannot be received Go down one step from the
During RBDS broadcast reception, select after the free trial period has expired. key channel being received. 7
PTY (program content) to perform a collec- If no subscription has been made when the
Go up one step from the
free trial period expires, the display will key
tive search for stations. channel being received.
alternate between CALL and 888-539-
1. During FM reception, press the PTY key. SIRI. While the key is held down,
key
This switches to the PTY selection mode. it will cycle down through
(Hold down) the channels being received.
2. Press the PTY key to select PTY.
3. Press the SCAN key. To listen to Satellite Radio While the key is held down,
key
When a broadcast station is received, this it will cycle up through the
(Hold down) channels being received.
is played for 5 seconds, then the product Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
searches for the next station.
Switches between SIR1, SIR2, SIR3, and
SIR4 bands. NOTE
NOTE The selected band is indicated on the display. When cycling up/down through channels, the
Press this key again while receiving the sta- channel number display in the upper level of
tion to return to normal reception. the display changes.
NOTE
When channel number 000 is selected, the
Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
SIRIUS ID (12 digits) is displayed.
SIR1, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*.
Switch satellite radio bands by holding down
the key or key on the steering remote
control switch.

BK0200500US.book 30
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)
Scan Station Selection NOTE Channel Search

Press the SCAN key or PTY key again while
Channels are received in order and take 10 receiving the channel to return to normal Other channels can be selected while listen-
reception.
seconds each. ing to a channel.
Turning the /SET key will cancel.
1. Press the PTY key.
Scan All Channels Switches to the category search mode,
Preset Memory and the category name is indicated on the
Press the SCAN key. display.
All of the channels are scanned. Register the channel in advance, and select 2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
7 this at a later time. gory.
3. Press the /SEL key.
NOTE 1. Tune in to the channel to register. Switches to channel search mode.
Press this key again while receiving the 2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
channel to return to normal reception. 4. Turn the /SEL key to select the chan-
Selecting a channel will cancel this.
key to the 6 key. nel.
A Beep sounds, and the preset key is 5. Press the /SEL key.
registered. A Beep sounds, and the selected chan-
Scan Category Channels nel is received. (Channel preliminary set-
NOTE ting mode)
1. Press the PTY key. The preset memory can register a maximum The channel name shown on the display
Switches to the category search mode, of 6 stations per band. flashes.
and the category name is indicated on the If a preset key that already has a channel reg- Press the /SEL key again to cancel the
display. istered is selected, then this is overwritten search mode and return to normal recep-
2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- with the new preset. tion.
gory. Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered channel.
6. To continue the search, turn the /SEL
3. Press the SCAN key. key to select the channel.
The channels in the selected category are The preset channels on the display are shown
as P1 though P6. The selected channel is received.
scanned.
Cancels the search mode and returns to
normal reception.

BK0200500US.book 31
Listen to CDs
NOTE Listen to CDs Switch Playback Mode

After making preliminary settings in the N00717100026
channel search mode, this will switch to the Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
This explains how to listen to audio CDs
channel being received.
(CD-DA/CD-TEXT). playback are possible.
Channel number 000 is for the SIRUS ID
display, so it cannot be searched.
If the PTY ALL category is selected, all Play CDs Repeat Playback (RPT)
channels can be searched in the channel
search mode. Press the 1RPT key.
Insert the disc.
In the category mode, press the PTY key to
cancel search mode. Repeat playback of the track currently being
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
In the channel search mode, press the 6 Insert/Eject Discs (P.7-25) played. 7
key to return to the category search mode. If a disc is already within the product, press
In the channel preliminary setting mode, the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the NOTE
press the 6 key to return to the category source. Pressing again will cancel.
search mode without returning to the previ- Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding,
ous channel search mode. or rewinding will cancel.
If there is no operation for 10 seconds, the Select the Track
search mode will be cancelled.
Press the key or key to select the Random Playback (RDM)
track.
Initialize the CODE (Passcode) Press the 2RDM key.
This enables selection of the next or previous
The CODE required for changing the LOCK track.
Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.
settings in the satellite settings is initialized.
(The factory setting is 1111.) Fast Forward or Rewind NOTE
When the power is off, press the PWR/VOL Pressing again will cancel.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key. Ejecting will cancel this.
key while holding down the /SEL key.
Turn the Power ON/OFF (P7-25) Fast forward/rewind is possible.

BK0200500US.book 32
Listen to MP3s
If a disc is already within the product, press
Scan Playback (SCAN) Repeat Playback (RPT)
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
source.
Press the SCAN key. Press the 1RPT key.
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks NOTE Repeat playback of the track currently being
on the whole disc in order. Depending on the file structure, it may take played.
some time to read the contents of the disc.
NOTE NOTE
Press this button again during playback if Pressing again will cancel.
you wish to hear that track, and that track Select the Track (File) Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or
7 will play normally. rewinding will cancel.
Press the key or key to select the
track.
Listen to MP3s Folder Repeat Playback
N00717200027
track. Hold down the 1RPT key.
This explains how to listen to audio files on a
disc.
Fast Forward or Rewind Repeat playback of the tracks within the
folder currently being played.
CAUTION
CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
play back MP3 format audio files.
NOTE
Fast forward/rewind is possible. Pressing again will cancel.
Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
playback will not be cancelled.
To Listen to MP3s Switch Playback Mode
Insert the disc. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Random Playback (RDM)
playback are possible.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
Insert/Eject Discs (P.7-25) Press the 2RDM key.

BK0200500US.book 33
Listen to an iPod
Play the tracks in the folder in a random
order.
Search Tracks Listen to an iPod
N00717300028
Search folders and files, and select a track. By connecting commercially-available

NOTE
iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can
Pressing again will cancel.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. play back tracks on these through the product.
Folder Random Playback Files within the selected folder are dis-
CAUTION
Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in
played.
the vehicle.
Hold down the 2RDM key. 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file. Never hold these devices in your hand to
Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran- 4. Press the /SEL key. operate while driving, as this is dangerous. 7
dom order. No indemnification for data loss resulting
This plays the selected file (track). when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
product will be possible.
NOTE Depending on how the devices are handled,
NOTE audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
While the folder is selected, press the 6 it is recommended that data be backed up.
key to cancel track search mode.
Scan Playback (SCAN) If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
selecting the folder, then track search mode NOTE
will be cancelled. Depending on the generation, model, or soft-
Press the SCAN key.
Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks key to start playback from the first track in on this product may not be possible.
in the folder currently being played in order. that folder. (P.7-15) Additionally, playback as
While the file is selected, press the 6 key explained in this document may not be possi-
to return to the previous operation. ble.
NOTE While the file is selected, hold down the
Press this button again during playback if
you wish to hear that track, and that track 6 key to cancel track search mode.
will play normally. If there is no operation for five seconds after
selecting the file, that file is played back.
Disc operations such as selecting a track will
cancel track search mode.

BK0200500US.book 34
Listen to an iPod
NOTE NOTE Fast Forward or Rewind

Regarding details such as types of Data containing copyright information may
iPod/iPhone that can be connected to equip- not play back.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
ment by type (vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0 It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone
interface), and types of files that can be equalizer settings be set to flat. Fast forward/rewind is possible.
played back, refer to Types of connectable Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
devices and supported file specifications on this product.
page 5-208. If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth Switch Playback Mode
Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone, as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
refer to How to connect an iPod on page not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
5-208. cable. Connection using both methods will
possible.
7 When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a result in erroneous operation.
commercially-available iPod connection If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
cable. then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod- Repeat Playback (RPT)
Set up the device in order that no unsafe uct, reset, then reconnect.
actions, such as plugging in the connection Press the 1RPT key.
cable are taken while driving.
When inserting and removing the
Play iPod
Repeat playback of the track currently being
iPod/iPhone, for safetys sake first stop the played.
vehicle. Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the
Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone, source.
it may take some time until the device is rec- NOTE
ognized, or playback starts. The selected source is indicated on the dis- Pressing again will cancel.
Buttons on the product will not operate while play.
iPod/iPhone is connected.
iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may
Select the Track (File) Shuffle Playback (RDM)
mean that connection is not possible, or
result in differences in operation or display.
Press the 2RDM key.
Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone, Press the key or key to select the
track information may not be displayed cor- track. Play tracks in the category currently being
rectly.
played in a random order.
Depending on the status of the vehicle and This enables selection of the next or previous
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back track.
after starting the engine.

BK0200500US.book 35
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device

4. Press the /SEL key. you can play back audio files on these
NOTE through the product.
Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks.
Select the track, and press the /SEL
key to play. CAUTION
Album Shuffle Playback Do not leave the USB device unattended in
the vehicle.
NOTE Never hold these devices in your hand to
Hold down the 2RDM key. While the category (1st level) is selected, operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
press the 6 key to cancel track search Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem-
Play back the album in a random order mode. ory readers, as damage may occur to these or
(tracks in any order on the album). If there is no operation for 10 seconds after to the data contained therein. If these are
selecting the category, then track search erroneously connected, then turn the ignition 7
NOTE mode will be cancelled. switch to the OFF or LOCK position or
Pressing again will cancel. Select the category, and hold down the put the operation mode in OFF, then remove.
/SEL key to start playback from the first Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom-
track in that category. mended that files be backed up.
No guarantee is made as regards damage to
Search Tracks While the track is selected, press the 6
the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam-
key to return to the previous operation.
age to data contained therein.
While the track is selected, hold down the
Search categories or track names, and select a Depending on how the devices are handled,
track. 6 key to cancel track search mode. audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
If there is no operation for five seconds after it is recommended that data be backed up.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- selecting the track, that file is played back.
gory. iPod operations such as selecting a track will
2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or

cancel track search mode. NOTE
tracks within the selected category are Regarding details such as types of USB
devices that can be connected, and USB
displayed.
Listen to Audio Files on a input ports, refer to Device types on page
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- 5-208.
gory or track. USB Device Regarding details of types of files that can be
N00717400045
played back in equipment by type (vehicles
By connecting commercially-available USB with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface), refer to
devices such as USB memory to this product, File specifications on page 5-209.

BK0200500US.book 36
NOTE NOTE Fast Forward or Rewind

Regarding how to connect USB devices, This product can play back MP3, WMA, and
refer to How to connect a USB memory AAC format audio files.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
device on page 5-207. Depending on the type of USB device, usage
When connecting a USB device, use a con- may not be possible, or functions that can be Fast forward/rewind is possible.
nection cable. Failure to use a connection used may be restricted.
cable when connecting may place undue load The recommended file system for USB
on, or damage the USB connector. memory is FAT32. Switch Playback Mode
Set up the device in order that no unsafe The maximum supported capacity for USB
actions, such as plugging in the connection memory is 32GB. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
cable are taken while driving. Operate the USB device containing recorded playback are possible.
7 When inserting and removing the USB audio files while connected to this product.
device, for safetys sake first stop the vehi-
cle. Repeat Playback (RPT)
Do not insert other than audio devices into Play Back of Audio Files on a
the USB port. Damage to the device or USB Device Press the 1RPT key.
equipment may result.
Depending on the status of the USB device, Repeat playback of the track currently being
Press the MEDIA key to set USB as the
it may take some time until the device is rec- played.
ognized, or playback starts.
source.
Depending on USB devices, buttons on the
The selected source is indicated on the dis- NOTE
product will not operate while the USB
play.
device is connected. Pressing again will cancel.
USB device specifications and settings may Selecting a file will cancel this.
mean that connection is not possible, or Select the Track (File) However, it will not be cancelled in vehicles
result in differences in operation or display. with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
Depending on audio data in the USB device,
track information may not be displayed cor- Press the key or key to select the
rectly. track.
Folder Repeat Playback
Depending on the status of the vehicle and
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back This enables selection of the next or previous
after starting the engine. track. Hold down the 1RPT key.
Data containing copyright information may
not play back.

BK0200500US.book 37

Repeat playback of the tracks within the Play the tracks in all folders in a random
folder currently being played. order.
NOTE
you wish to hear that track, and that track
NOTE NOTE will play normally.
Pressing again will cancel. Pressing again will cancel.
Selecting a folder will cancel this. Selecting a folder will cancel this.
Cycling up/down through files will cancel Cycling up/down through files will cancel Search Tracks
this. this.
Even if the file is selected, folder repeat Even if the file is selected, all folder random
playback will not be cancelled. playback will not be cancelled. Search folders and files, and select a track.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. 7

Folder Random Playback (RDM) Scan Playback (SCAN) 2. Press the /SEL key.
Files within the selected folder are dis-

Press the 2RDM key. Press the SCAN key. played.
Play tracks in the folder currently being Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.
played in a random order. on the whole USB device in order. 4. Press the /SEL key.
This plays the selected file (track).

NOTE NOTE
Pressing again will cancel. Press this button again during playback if
Selecting a folder will cancel this. you wish to hear that track, and that track NOTE
Cycling up/down through files will cancel will play normally. While the folder is selected, press the 6
this. key to cancel track search mode.
Even if the file is selected, folder random If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
playback will not be cancelled. Folder Scan Playback selecting the folder, then track search mode
will be cancelled.
Hold down the SCAN key. Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
All Folder Random Playback key to start playback from the first track in
Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in that folder.
Hold down the 2RDM key. each folder on the USB device in order.

BK0200500US.book 38
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)

2.0 interface and Bluetooth device on page
NOTE NOTE 5-192.
While the file is selected, press the 6 key Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable
Operation methods below describe situations
to return to the previous operation. audio devices, usage may not be possible, or
once connection has been completed.
While the file is selected, hold down the functions that can be used may be restricted.
Confirm together with the user manuals for
6 key to cancel track search mode.
the commercially-available Bluetooth-capa- NOTE
If there is no operation for five seconds after ble audio devices. If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth
selecting the file, that file is played back.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
Operations such as selecting a track will can- audio devices, volume levels may differ. not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
cel track search mode. There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior cable. Connection using both methods will
to use, it is recommended that you turn the result in erroneous operation.
7 Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if volume down.
Adjust Volume (P.7-25)
so equipped) Depending on the status of the Bluetooth
audio device, it may take some time until the
Play Bluetooth Audio
N00717500020
device is recognized, or playback starts.
This product can play back tracks on com- 1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth
Bluetooth audio device specifications and
mercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio Audio as the source.
settings may mean that connection is not
devices. possible, or result in differences in operation The selected source is indicated on the
or display.
display.
Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth
CAUTION audio device, track information may not be
Never hold these devices in your hand to 2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth Audio play-
displayed correctly.
operate while driving, as this is dangerous. back starts.
Depending on the status of the vehicle and
Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
unattended in the vehicle.
Depending on how the devices are handled,
after starting the engine. NOTE
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore Hold down the 5 key to pause.
it is recommended that data be backed up. Press the 6 key to stop.
Connect a Bluetooth-capable
Audio Device
Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth

device, refer to Connecting the Bluetooth
BK0200500US.book 39
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)
Select the Track (File) NOTE

Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this
switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track
Press the key or key to select the
repeat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF.
track.

track. Random Playback (RDM)
Press the 2RDM key.

Fast Forward or Rewind
Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key. in a random order.
7
Fast forward/rewind is possible. NOTE
Switch Playback Mode
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Scan Playback (SCAN)

playback are possible.
Press the SCAN key.
Repeat Playback (RPT) Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
on the whole Bluetooth Audio device in
Press the 1RPT key. order.
Repeat playback of the track currently being
played. NOTE
you wish to hear that track, and that track
will play normally.

BK0200500US.book 40
Display Indicator
Display Indicator
N00717700022
This explains content of the display indicator.
Change the Display Mode CAUTION During FM Reception

N00717800023 The operation of changing display contents
You can change the content of the display may impede safe driving, therefore check This switches in the order Frequency, Sta-
safety before operation. tion name, and Radio text.
indicator.
Press the DISP key to switch the display con-
tent.
NOTE NOTE
Radio text has a maximum display of 64
Each time the DISP key is pressed, the dis- Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one
characters.
play content changes. time. To display 12 or more characters, press
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters If there is no text information to display, then
will be displayed. NO MESSAGE is displayed.

BK0200500US.book 41
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment
During Satellite Radio Reception NOTE NOTE

(if so equipped) If there is no text information to display, then If there is no text information to display, then
NO TITLE is displayed. NO TITLE is displayed.
Displayed genre name in equipment by type
This switches in the order Channel name,
(vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface).
Category name, Artist name, Track
name, and Composer name.
Display the ID3tag The genre name display may not be possible.
Hold down the DISP key.

NOTE During Bluetooth 2.0 Audio Play-
The channel and category have a maximum This switches the ID3tag display.
display of 8 characters. The other items have
back (if so equipped)
a maximum display of 36 characters.
[DISP] Each time the key is pressed, this
switches in the order Album name, Track
N00718300025 7
name, Artist name, Genre name*, and Operating details are the same as in During
Operating status. iPod Playback (P.7-41).
During CD-DA playback
*:Displayed when playing back audio
This switches in the order Disc title, Track files on a USB device (vehicles with a Audio Quality and Volume
title, and Operating status. Bluetooth 2.0 interface). Balance Adjustment
N00718400026
NOTE Change audio quality settings.

If there is no text information to display, then NOTE
NO TITLE is displayed. During display of the ID3tag, hold down the
DISP key to switch to the folder title display.
Adjust Audio Quality and Vol-
The genre name display may not be possible. ume Balance
During MP3/WMA/AAC Play-
1. Press the /SEL key to select settings
back items.
During iPod Playback
N00718200024
This switches in the order Folder title, File Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
title, and Operating status. This switches in the order Albums, Track
switches in the order BASS, TREBLE,
name, Artist name, Genre name, and
FADER, BALANCE, SCV, and Cancel.
Operating status.
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust.
BK0200500US.book 42
System Settings
Adjust- 2. Press the /SEL key to select settings
Turn counter-
ment Turn clockwise items.
clockwise
items
BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6 Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
(low low-pass (high low-pass switches in the order Satellite radio set-
volume) volume) tings*1, Gracenote DB*2, PHONE set-
tings, Adjust time, and Cancel.
TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6
BLE (Low high-pass (High high-pass 3. Turn the /SEL key to set.
volume) volume) 4. Press the /SEL key to determine.
FADER CENTER to FRONT 11 to
7 REAR 11 CENTER
This completes settings, and displays the
next settings item.
(emphasize (emphasize
REAR) FRONT)
*1: Displayed when a satellite tuner is con-
BAL- LEFT 11 to CENTER to nected.
ANCE CENTER RIGHT 11 *2:Displayed when playing back audio files
(emphasize (emphasize (vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface).
LEFT) RIGHT)
SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH
(Low vehicle (High vehicle
compensated compensated
volume effect) volume effect)
System Settings
N00718500043
Change system settings such as product time.
1. Press the MENU key.

BK0200500US.book 43
System Settings
Satellite Radio Settings (if so equipped)
Change each satellite radio setting.
Settings
Settings name Settings item Settings content
value
SIRIUS ID This displays the SIRIUS ID.
SKIP SETTING SKIP SETTING ON SKIP can be set for each channel. Channels for which SKIP is set are excluded
SELECT CH*1 OFF from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
They can be received when selecting channels using the preset keys or searching
for a station.
7
SKIP SETTING When YES is selected, the SKIP settings for all channels are turned off.
ALL RESET
LOCK SETTING LOCK SETTING ON LOCK can be set for each channel. Channels for which LOCK is set are
SELECT CH*2 OFF excluded from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
If a channel for which LOCK is set is selected when selecting channels using the
preset keys or searching for a station, CH LCKED is displayed within about 2
seconds after the channel text is displayed. The sound is muted.
LOCK SETTING When YES is selected and the CODE for settings is input, the LOCK settings
ALL RESET for all channels are turned off.
LOCK SETTING The CODE required for the LOCK settings is changed. (The factory setting is
EDIT CODE 1111.)
If the input code is incorrect, LOCK SETTING WRG LC is displayed.
*1:Each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select, Change SKIP settings, and Complete settings.
To return to each channel SKIP setting, press the 6 key.

BK0200500US.book 44
System Settings
*2:Once the CODE (passcode) of your choice is entered, each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select,
Change LOCK settings, and Complete settings.
To return to each channel LOCK setting, press the 6 key. Input the CODE from the 1 RPT key to the 6 key.
Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings

Time Setting may not be possible.
NOTE
Some models may not be confirmed as con-
Set the time manually. nected, or may not connect.
NOTE
Cancel functions such as the mobile phone Supported profiles
1. Select YES at the Adjust time screen,
dial lock, and connect while on the Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
and press the /SEL key.
standby screen.
7 While connected, mobile phone (receiving
Phonebook
OPP(v1.1), PBAP(v1.0)
The hour can be adjusted. Press the transfer
calls, etc.) operations may not function cor-
/SEL key again to adjust the minutes. rectly.
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust the time. Depending on the distance between the prod-
Vehicles without a Bluetooth 2.0 Inter-
3. Press the /SEL key. uct and the mobile phone, the conditions
within the vehicle, and types of screening,
face
This completes the adjustment. connection may not be possible. In these
A hands-free kit (available separately) is
cases, situate the mobile phone as close as
possible to the product.
required.
NOTE Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
(Set value bold typeface indicates factory
In order to finish adjusting the time, hold phone, characteristics and specifications may default settings.)
down the /SEL key until the seconds are mean that correct operation may not be pos-
reset to 00. sible. Settings
Settings content
For safetys sake, do not operate the mobile value
phone while driving. When operating the PHONE Do not use mobile phone voice
mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe
PHONE Settings location.
OFF cut-in.
Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
Change the mobile phone voice cut- in set- phone, phone specifications and settings may MUTE in, mute the audio.
result in differences in display, or prevent
tings and the Bluetooth 2.0 interface lan- PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
correct operation.
guage. ATT in, output audio from all speak-
ers.

BK0200500US.book 45
Troubleshooting
Settings Gracenote DB (Vehicles with a
Settings content Vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0 Interface
value
Bluetooth 2.0 interface)
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- (Set value bold typeface indicates factory
IN-L in, output sound from the left default settings.)
The version number can be confirmed.
front speaker.
Settings Settings
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- Settings content 1. Select Gracenote DB and press the
name value
IN-R in, output sound from the right /SEL key.
front speaker. HFM ENG- Change the hands
2. Turn the /SEL key and select DB Ver-
voice lan- LISH free module voice
During mobile phone voice cut- sion.
PHONE guage set- FRENCH language.
in, output sound from the left 3. Press the /SEL key.
IN-LR
and right front speakers.
tings
SPANISH The DB Version is displayed.
7
JAPA-
NESE
Troubleshooting
N00718600044
Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.
If This Message Appears...
A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.

BK0200500US.book 46
Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response
CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and
insert the disc again. If the problem persists, con-
sult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
7 HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal tempera-
ture to return to normal.
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) (P.7-20)
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) (P.7-20)
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
DEVICE
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.
VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
speakers. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

BK0200500US.book 47
Antenna
If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...
Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.
Symptoms Cause Response

There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.
sound. Adjust Volume (P.7-25)
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.
Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance (P.7-41)
The disc cannot be A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc. 7
inserted. Insert/Eject Discs (P.7-25)
There is no disc in the product, but the prod- Press the eject button once.
uct says it is loading. Insert/Eject Discs (P.7-25)
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
same place.
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs, their charac-
the disc is inserted. data cannot be read. teristics may render them unable to be played.
Antenna To remove To install

N00734201494
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise. Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base
Roof antenna (B) until it is securely retained.

BK0200500US.book 48
General information about your radio
Signal transmission Reflection

FM signals do not follow the earth surface The reason why one can hear FM but not AM
nor are they reflected by the upper atmo- in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected
be received over long distances. AM signals by solid objects such as buildings, etc.
follow the earths surface and are reflected by Because FM signals are easily reflected by
the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
broadcasts can be received over longer disturbances.
tances. The direct signal from the broadcast station
reaches the antenna slightly before the
7 reflected signal. This time difference may
NOTE FM AM
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the
following cases:
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
When using an automatic car wash
When covering your vehicle with a car
cover
When driving into a structure that has a low
ceiling. 25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius
(40 to 64 km) (160 km)
General information about

your radio Weak reception (fading)
N00733901465
Your vehicles radio receives both AM and Because of the limited range of FM signals
FM stations. and the way FM waves transmit, you may
The quality of your reception is affected by experience weak or fading FM reception.
distance, obstacles, and signal interference. When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
turbed.

BK0200500US.book 49
General information about your radio

device. The disturbance is even greater if the
Cross modulation station is weak or poorly tuned.
If one listens to a weak station and is in the FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
vicinity of another strong station, both sta- disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tions might be received simultaneously. tive to electrical disturbances such as power
lines, lightning and other types of similar
electrical phenomena.
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.
Causes of disturbances
FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
those without an electronic noise suppression
BK0200500US.book 50
BK0200500US.book 1
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down................................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine...................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ...........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools....................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire .........................................................................8-6
Towing ............................................................................................8-14
Operation under adverse driving conditions...................................8-16
8
BK0200500US.book 2
If the vehicle breaks down

2. Position the vehicles close enough
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine together so that the jumper cables can
N00836301230 N00836401778
reach, but be sure the vehicles arent
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the touching each other.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper CAUTION
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
slowly with the hazard lights flashing, until volt battery. If the other system isnt 12-volt,
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the WARNING both systems can be damaged.
flashers flashing. To reduce the risk of igniting flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery, 3. Set the parking brake firmly on your vehi-
If the engine stops/fails carefully read this section before jump- cle and move the selector lever into the
starting the vehicle. P (PARK) position.
8 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing 4. Set the parking brake firmly on the other
If the engine stops, there will be no power or towing. This can cause an accident vehicle. Put the automatic transaxle in P
assist to the steering and brakes, making these resulting in serious injury or death and (PARK) or the manual transaxle in N
difficult to use. can damage the vehicle. (Neutral).
The brake booster will not work, so the 5. Turn the ignition switch (the engine
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal switch) on each vehicle to the LOCK or
NOTE OFF position.
will be harder to press than usual. Do not use jumper cables if they have dam-
Since there is no power steering assist, the age or corrosion.
steering wheel will be hard to turn. NOTE
Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
When the engine fails at the bands or bracelets that might create an both batteries.
intersection accidental electrical contact.
Get help from your passengers, bystanders,

etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe
area.
8-2 For emergencies

BK0200500US.book 3
Jump-starting the engine

6. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at 3.0 liter models 8. Connect one end of the other jumper cable
the proper level. (Refer to Battery on to the negative (-) terminal of the
page 9-13.) booster battery (B), and then connect the
other end to the designated ground
WARNING location of the vehicle with the discharged
If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or battery (A) at the point farthest from the
looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP battery.
STARTING!!
The battery might split open or explode if
the temperature is below the freezing WARNING
point or if it is not filled to the proper Be sure to follow the proper order when
level. connecting the batteries, of:

7. Connect one end of one jumper cable WARNING Make sure that the connection is made 8
to the positive (+) terminal of the dis- Make sure that the jumper cables and to the correct designated location (as
your clothing are clear of the cooling fans shown in the illustration) properly. If the
charged battery (A), and then connect the
and drive belts. Entanglement with the connection is directly made to the negative
other end to the positive (+) terminal (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable
fans or belts can cause serious personal
of the booster battery (B). injury. gases from inside the battery might catch
fire and explode, causing personal injury.
2.4 liter models
When connecting the jumper cable, do not
NOTE connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat-
Open the terminal cover before connecting
tery explode.
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of
the battery.
(Refer to Battery on page 9-13.) 9. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
Use the proper cables suitable for the battery the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
size. utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could with the discharged battery.
result. 10. After the engine is started, disconnect the
cables in the reverse order from the way
you connected them.
For emergencies 8-3

BK0200500US.book 4
Engine overheating
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on
Charging the battery by using As your vehicle has anti-lock the hazard warning flashers.
an external battery charger brakes 2. With the engine still running, carefully
raise the engine hood to vent the engine
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery compartment.
WARNING charge after the engine has been started by 3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If
Always remove the battery from your the fan is not turning, stop the engine
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.
vehicle when the battery is charged by an
This can cause the anti-lock braking system immediately and contact an authorized
external battery charger.
warning light to blink on and off. This is only Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a ity of your choice for assistance.
from the battery because the battery could
explode. problem with the brake system. If this hap-
Keep your work area well vented when pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the WARNING
charging system is operating properly. To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,
8 charging or using the battery in an
enclosed space. jewelry and clothes away from the cooling
Remove all the caps before charging the fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.
battery.
Engine overheating
N00836501375
Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro- 4. If you see steam or spray coming from
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte When the engine is overheating, the warning under the hood, turn off the engine.
comes in contact with your hands, eyes, will be displayed in the instrument cluster as
clothes, or the painted surface of your follows.
vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them The information screen in the multi infor-
immediately and thoroughly with water, mation display will be interrupted and the
and get prompt medical attention. engine coolant temperature warning dis-
Always wear protective clothing and gog-
gles when working near the battery. play will appear. Also will blink.
Keep the battery out of the reach of chil- (Color liquid crystal display type)
dren. The high coolant temperature warning
lamp will illuminate. (Mono-color liquid
If these warnings are displayed:
8-4 For emergencies

BK0200500US.book 5
Jack and tools

5. If you do not see steam or spray coming 8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs 11. Have the system inspected by your autho-
from under the hood, leave the engine on coolant, you will probably also need to rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
until the high coolant temperature warn- add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen facility of your choice.
ing goes off. After the high coolant tem- or remove the radiator cap until the engine
perature warning has gone off, you can has cooled down.
start driving again. If the high coolant
Jack and tools
temperature warning stays on, turn off the WARNING N00836601389
engine. Removing the radiator cap could scald

you with escaping hot water or steam. Storage
WARNING When checking the radiator level, cover
Before raising the engine hood, check to the cap with a cloth before trying to The jack and tools are stowed on the right
see if there is steam or spray coming from remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
side of the luggage compartment.
under the hood. Steam or spray coming wise, without pressing down, to the first
from an overheated engine could seriously notch. The pressure in the system will then 8
scald you. be let out. When the pressure is COM-
Do not open the hood until there is no PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
steam or spray. keep turning the cap counterclockwise
until it comes off.
6. When you do not see any more steam or

spray, open the hood. Look for obvious 9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant,
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use
careful as components will be hot. Any plain water if you have to (and replace it
leak source must be repaired. with the right coolant as soon as possible).
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check 10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it 1- Tools
the coolant level in the engine coolant fully. Check the engine coolant tempera- 2- Jack
reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too ture display on the multi information dis-
low, slowly add coolant. play (Color liquid crystal display type) or
the high coolant temperature warning
light (Mono-color liquid crystal display
type). You can start driving again when
the high coolant temperature warning
does not come on.
For emergencies 8-5

BK0200500US.book 6
How to change a tire

2. Retract the jack to remove it from the
Tools attaching hardware (A). How to change a tire
N00836901829
Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

To retract ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Move the selector lever to the P
(PARK) position and turn the ignition
switch (the engine switch) to the LOCK
or OFF position.
8 1- Bar 4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
2- Wheel nut wrench set up a warning sign, such as a warning
To store triangle or flashing signal lamp, at an ade-
quate distance from the vehicle, and have
1. Retract the jack, then return it to its origi- all your passengers leave the vehicle.
Removing and storing the jack nal position.
2. Extend the jack and firmly set it in its
storage area, then attach the lid.
To remove
1. Remove the lid.
To retract
To extend
8-6 For emergencies

BK0200500US.book 7

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when 6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench
it is raised on the jack, place chocks or ready.
CAUTION
Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally (Refer to Jack and tools on page 8-5.)
cause an accident. If you have no choice but
opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
ing.
Spare tire information your speed down and avoid sudden steering
N00849600315 or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
Tire inflation pressures on page 9-18.
Compact spare tire The compact spare tire should be used only
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is
The compact spare tire is stowed below the being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys-
luggage compartment floor. It is designed to tem will not function properly. Have the tire
save space in the luggage compartment. Its replaced or repaired at an authorized Mit-
lighter weight makes it easier to use if a flat subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of 8
tire occurs. your choice as soon as possible.
Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
ing with the compact spare tire.
WARNING
WARNING Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
Avoid sudden starting and braking when
driving with the compact spare tire.
Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the time with age even when they are not Do not drive through automatic car washes
correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If being used. It is recommended that tires and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
the vehicle moves while jacked up, the over 6 years generally be replaced even if age the underside of your vehicle. Because
jack could slip out of position, leading to damage is not obvious. the compact spare tire is smaller than the
an accident.
original tire, there is less clearance between
the ground and your vehicle.
CAUTION Because the compact spare tire is designed
NOTE While the compact spare tire is stowed, the only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
The chocks shown in the illustration do not inflation pressure should be checked at least other vehicle.
come with your vehicle. It is recommended once a month to assure that it remains at the Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep recommended inflation pressure. See the tire ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
them in the vehicle for use if needed. and loading information placard attached to snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
If chocks or blocks are not available, use the drivers door sill. Refer to Tire and load- compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
stones or any other objects that are large ing information placard on page 11-3. damage these parts or other parts on your
enough to hold the wheel in position. vehicle.
For emergencies 8-7

BK0200500US.book 8

2. With the wheel nut wrench, loosen the tire 3. Lift up the section of the tire hanger (B)
CAUTION hanger mounting bolt by turning it coun- that is marked with the arrow in the illus-
Do not use tire chains with your compact
terclockwise. tration and remove it from the hook (C).
spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage
Then lower it and remove the tire.
to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
To remove the spare tire

N00849701296
1. Open the liftgate and use the bar to

remove the cover (A) over the tire hanger
mounting bolt.
8
CAUTION
While checking the tire hanger, carefully CAUTION
loosen the tire hanger mounting bolt. Loos- When hooking or unhooking the tire hanger,
ening it too much could pull out the hook and be sure to hold the tire hanger firmly to pre-
cause the compact spare tire to drop. vent it from dropping on your foot.
8-8 For emergencies

BK0200500US.book 9

2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
To change a tire points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
NOTE
N00849801457 Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
the jacking point closest to the tire you
1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack
wish to change.
remove the covers (refer to Wheel cov- slips out of position.
ers on page 8-13). Then, loosen the
wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do
not remove the wheel nuts yet.
WARNING
Set the jack only at the positions shown 3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
it could dent your vehicle or the jack of the jack.
might fall over and cause personal injury.
Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
under the jack base.
For emergencies 8-9

BK0200500US.book 10

4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut
wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar
WARNING WARNING
No one should be in your vehicle when Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
into the shafts jack end, as shown in the
using the jack. (I) facing outward. If you cannot see the
illustration.
Do not start or run the engine while your valve stem (I), you have installed the
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until wheel backwards.
vehicle is on the jack.
the tire is raised slightly off the ground Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires
surface. that are still on the ground could turn and installed backwards can cause vehicle
make your vehicle fall off the jack. damage and result in an accident.
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut

wrench, then take the wheel off.
CAUTION
8 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-

face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
WARNING tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the mount the spare tire.
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
8-10 For emergencies

BK0200500US.book 11
NOTE
Type 1 If all 4 aluminum wheels are changed to steel
wheels, use tapered nuts.
Type 2 8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground, by rotating the wheel
nut wrench counterclockwise.
7. Turn the wheel nut clockwise by hand to

initially tighten them.
NOTE
[Type 1: On vehicles with steel wheels] Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the 8
compact spare wheel as shown in the illustra-
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
tion, but return to the original wheel and tire
hand until the tapered parts of the wheel as soon as possible.
nuts make light contact with the seats of
the wheel holes and the wheel is not
loose.
[Type 2: On vehicles with aluminium
wheels]
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
hand until the flange parts of the wheel
nuts make light contact with the wheel
and the wheel is not loose.
CAUTION
Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
For emergencies 8-11

BK0200500US.book 12

9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the 11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
illustration until each nut has been tight- ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
CAUTION
If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
ened to the torque listed here. is listed on the tire and loading informa-
after changing the tire, have the tire checked
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 Nm) tion placard attached to the drivers door
for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Tire inflation pressures on page 9-18. choice.
Do not mix one type of tire with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.
To store the spare tire

N00832300020
8 1. Place the tire on the center of the tire

hanger, with the wheel surface facing
upwards.
CAUTION
Never use your foot or a pipe extension to CAUTION
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench CAUTION Storing the tire with the wheel surface facing
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, Driving with an improperly inflated tire can down may damage the wheel or tire hanger.
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and cause an accident. If you have no choice but If you find any damage on a spare tire, do not
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep use the tire and contact an authorized Mit-
your speed down and avoid sudden steering subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the your choice.
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
Tire inflation pressures on page 9-18.
After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
come loose.

BK0200500US.book 13

2. Lift up the tire hanger (A) and hook it on 3. With the wheel nut wrench, firmly tighten
the hook (B). the tire hanger mounting bolt by turning it
To store the flat tire, jack, bar
clockwise. and wheel nut wrench
N00850001172
Store the flat tire in the luggage compartment.

Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
ing the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench.
Refer to Jack and tools on page 8-5.
Wheel cover (if so equipped)

N00849401235
To remove 8
CAUTION
Make sure you hook the tire hanger in the CAUTION Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it
proper position. If the tire hanger is not Confirm that the tire hanger is firmly secured into the notch provided in the wheel cover,
hooked properly, the hook could damage the after storing the spare tire. If the tire hanger and pry the cover away from the wheel.
vehicle body or the tire could fall off the is not secured, it could drop out while driv- Using the same procedure at the other wheel
vehicle while driving, causing an accident. ing, causing an accident. cover notches, work the wheel cover away
When hooking or unhooking the tire hanger, from the wheel to remove it completely.
be sure to hold the tire hanger firmly to pre-
vent it from dropping on your foot.
4. Install the cover over the tire hanger

mounting bolt.

BK0200500US.book 14
Towing
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel 4. Gently tap the top (H) of the wheel cover
NOTE cover notch (D). around its outer circumference to push it
The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
in.
ful when prying it off.
CAUTION
Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
your bare hands can seriously injure your
fingers.
To install
8
CAUTION NOTE
The back of the cover has a symbol (E) that
Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
shows the position of the notch. Towing
N00837001898
back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from 2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover
coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that into the wheel. If your vehicle needs to be
has broken tabs. 3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel towed
cover and hold them in place with both
knees.
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
vice.
When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cle using a tow truck.
Incorect towing equipment could damage
your vehicle.

BK0200500US.book 15
Towing
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi- This vehicle must not be towed with the driv-
cle with a rope. ing wheels on the ground (Type B) as illus-
trated.
This could result in the driving system dam-
NOTE age.
Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle. Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
rear wheels on the ground (Type C) as illus-
trated. This could result in the driving system
There may be local regulations concerning Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with
damage or vehicle may jump at the carriage.
towing in your area. If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use only
this style.
Obey the regulations of the area where you Type D or E equipment.
are driving your vehicle. [For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with
the active stability control (ASC)] 8
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
switch in the ON position or the operation
mode in ON and only the front wheels raised
off the ground (Type C), the ASC may oper-
ate, resulting in an accident. When towing
the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep
the ignition switch or the operation mode as
follows.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is in LOCK, OFF or
Towing the vehicle by a tow ACC position.
truck [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
CAUTION
This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
age the bumper and front end.

BK0200500US.book 16
Operation under adverse driving conditions
Towing a front-wheel drive vehi- WARNING On snowy or icy roads

cle with front wheels off the When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
stuck position, make sure that there are no When driving on a road covered with
ground (Type C)
people nearby. The rocking motion can snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains
make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward cannot be used on your vehicle. There
Release the parking brake. or backward, and injure any bystanders. may be state or local regulations about
Set the selector lever to the N (NEUTRAL) using snow tires. Always check the regu-
position. lations in your local area before using
On wet roads them. Refer to Snow tires on page 9-20
Operation under adverse and Tire chains on page 9-21.
Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts
driving conditions CAUTION or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
8
N00837201760
Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper brakes.
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt Allow extra distance between your vehi-
If your vehicle becomes stuck in by driving into flood water. cle and the vehicle in front of you, and
When driving in rain, on water-covered
sand, mud or snow roads, or through a car wash, water could get
avoid sudden braking.
If a skid occurs when the accelerator
into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly skid.
motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to
several times while driving to dry the brake Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock
free it.
pads or linings, then check them again. braking system (ABS). Hold the brake
Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.
When driving in rain, a layer of water may pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
form between the tires and the road surface Do not pump the brake pedal which will
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires grip result in reduced braking performance.
the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the on the road, making it difficult to steer or
transaxle before trying again. brake properly. When driving on a wet road:
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock- Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.
ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck Do not drive on worn tires.
service. Always keep the tires at the correct infla-
tion pressures.

BK0200500US.book 17
Operation under adverse driving conditions

After parking on snowy or icy roads, it
may be difficult to move your vehicle due
to the brake being frozen. Depress the
accelerator pedal little by little to move
the vehicle when safe to do so.
CAUTION
Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
The vehicle could start moving when it
breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
an accident.
On a bumpy or rutted road 8

Drive as slow as possible when driving on
bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes.
CAUTION
Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
holes can damage the tires and wheels.
Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
age.

BK0200500US.book 18
BK0200500US.book 1
Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions...........................................................................9-2
Catalytic converter............................................................................9-2
Engine hood ......................................................................................9-3
View of the engine compartment......................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter .....................................................................9-6
Engine coolant ..................................................................................9-8
Air cleaner filter................................................................................9-9
Automatic transaxle fluid (if so equipped) .....................................9-10
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped) .9-11
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) ............................................9-11 9
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) ..........................................9-12
Washer fluid....................................................................................9-12
Brake fluid ......................................................................................9-12
Battery.............................................................................................9-13
Tires ................................................................................................9-14
Brake pedal free play ......................................................................9-21
Parking brake .................................................................................9-21
Wiper blades ...................................................................................9-21
Emission-control system maintenance ...........................................9-22
General maintenance ......................................................................9-23
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-24
Fusible links....................................................................................9-25
Fuses ...............................................................................................9-25
Replacement of light bulbs .............................................................9-29
Vehicle care precautions .................................................................9-39
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ................................................9-40
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle ..............................................9-41
BK0200500US.book 2
Service precautions
Service precautions
WARNING
N00937301384
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre- When checking or servicing the inside of
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- the engine compartment, be sure the
sible. engine is stopped and has had a chance to
cool down.
You can do some of the maintenance work If you need to work in the engine compart-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- ment with the engine running, be espe-
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. does not get caught in the cooling fans,
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- drive belts, or other moving parts.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized Mit- The cooling fans can turn on automati- Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of cally even if the engine is not running. Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
your choice. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK supplements your new vehicle warranties.
9 This section describes the maintenance position to be safe while you work in the See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
engine compartment.
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so for details.
Do not smoke or allow open flames around
desire. Follow the instructions and precau-
fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-
tions for each procedure.
ble. Catalytic converter
Be extremely careful when working N00937401457
around the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
The catalytic converter requires you to use
Do not get under your vehicle while it is on
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
a jack. destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
Always use properly rated automotive the converter.
jack stands.
Handling your vehicles parts and materi- Normally, the catalytic converter does not
als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask require maintenance. However, it is important
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
or a repair facility of your choice if you verter to continue to work properly.
have questions.
A- Cooling fans
B- Caution label
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

BK0200500US.book 3
Engine hood
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as Engine hood
Damage to the catalytic converter can result
when performing diagnostic tests. N00937501559
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers, is idling roughly or otherwise obviously To open
have it serviced promptly. Running your malfunctioning.
vehicle when it is overheated may result in To prevent the catalytic converter from Use the engine hood release lever (located
damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not under the instrument panel near the drivers
race the engine when turning off the igni- door) to unlock the engine hood.
tion switch.
WARNING Stop driving the vehicle if you think the Pull the lever toward you to release the
Do not park or run your vehicle in areas performance is noticeably low, or the engine hood latch.
where combustible materials such as dry engine has a malfunction such as with the
grass or leaves can come in contact with a ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. driving immediately, slow down and drive
Do not put undercoat paint on the cata- for only a short time. Have your vehicle
9
lytic converter. checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con- choice as soon as possible.
verter damage: In unusual situations involving major
engine problems, a burning odor may
Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
the type of recommended in the Fuel converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
selection. in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
level. Running out of gas could damage immediately take your vehicle to a dealer
WARNING
the catalytic converter. Never use the release lever to unlatch the
or a repair facility of your choice for ser-
Do not try to start the engine by pushing engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
vice.
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is Do not drive your vehicle unless the
engine hood is locked.
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
properly start the engine.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

BK0200500US.book 4
Engine hood
Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
CAUTION CAUTION
Always insert the support prop into the hole Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
specially made for it. Propping the engine before driving.
hood at any other place could cause the prop If you drive without the engine hood com-
to slip out and lead to an accident. pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
The hood prop can fall out if the hood is ing.
lifted by a strong wind.
NOTE
To close If this does not close the engine hood prop-
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and position.
put it back in its retainer. Do not push down strongly on the engine
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
NOTE you push down, you could create a dent in
9 To prevent damage to the engine hood and the vehicle body.
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting If you drive with the engine hood left open, a
position when you open the engine hood. warning display is displayed on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
under the hood marked with an arrow.
Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches

(20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.
CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
when closing the engine hood.

BK0200500US.book 5
View of the engine compartment
View of the engine compartment

N00937601710
2.4 L models 3.0 L models
1- Engine oil level gauge

2- Engine oil cap
3- Air cleaner filter
4- Brake fluid reservoir
5- Washer fluid reservoir
6- Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick
7- Engine coolant reservoir
8- Battery

BK0200500US.book 6
Engine oil and oil filter

remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve
Engine oil and oil filter cover, and fill to within the Good range.
WARNING
N00937701942 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
2.4 L models contact may cause serious skin disorders,
To check and refill engine oil including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may oughly after working with it.
need to add oil between the recommended oil Keep used oil out of the reach of children.
change intervals. Before starting the engine,
check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.
NOTE
To check the oil level, remove the dipstick, Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way. by payload, engine speed, etc.
Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
check the oil level by checking the upper sur-
9 face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go
3.0 L models vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads,
above the line on the dipstick. in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
NOTE earlier replacement in accordance with the
If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe schedule in the WARRANTY AND MAIN-
off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a TENANCE MANUAL.
moment and then recheck the oil level by
checking the upper surface of the dipstick.
If the level does not reach the line which

shows the minimum amount of oil required, CAUTION
Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
oil pressure, which could damage the engine.

BK0200500US.book 7
Engine oil and oil filter
Engine oil identification mark API service symbol
Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only

engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-
bol on the front of the container.
ILSAC certification symbol
1- The upper part indicates the quality of

the oil. SAE 0W-20 engine oil is strongly recom-
2- The center part indicates the SAE grade mended for optimum fuel economy and cold
of the oil viscosity. starting.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, the ILSAC 9
certification oil of other viscosity grades can
be temporarily used.
If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi- Recommended engine oil vis-
fication symbol, use an API classification SN cosity
oil with the following label. To replace the oil filter
This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
Use engine oil with the proper thickness for
tainer and tells you two important things The oil filter should be replaced at the time or
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
about the oil. mileage specified in the WARRANTY AND
driving.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
Only use high quality replacement filters on
this vehicle. The manufacturers specifica-
tions for Mitsubishi Motors Genuine oil fil-
ters require that the filter can withstand a
pressure of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Mitsubishi
Motors Genuine oil filter is the best replace-
ment filter.

BK0200500US.book 8
Engine coolant
Follow the installation instructions printed on coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
the filter. coolant. excellent protection against corrosion and
rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
num, and prevents clogs in some parts of
Engine coolant engine.
N00937801594
If you need to add coolant often, or if the
level in the reserve tank does not drop when
To check the coolant level the engine cools, the cooling system should
be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets you cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
quickly see when you need to add coolant. or a repair facility of your choice for testing.
When the engine is cold, the level of the cool-
ant in the reserve tank should be between the
FULL and LOW marks. The radiator usually CAUTION
stays full so there is no reason to remove the Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
9 radiator cap (B) except when you check the any engine coolants that contain them. Using
the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
parts.
The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-
fers depending on the expected ambient tem-
perature.
Above -31 F (-35 C): 50 % concentration
of anti-freeze
Below -31 F (-35 C): 60 % concentration
of anti-freeze
To add coolant You can check the concentration level with a
gauge from an automotive supply store, or
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
Use Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
service station can check it for you.
Life Coolant Premium or equivalent*.
Do not use water to adjust the concentration
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based of coolant.
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and
non-borate coolant with long life hybrid
organic acid technology

BK0200500US.book 9
Air cleaner filter

Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap 1. For 2.4 L models, remove the two clips
CAUTION that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow (A), then remove the Air duct (B).
Do not top off the tank with plain water only.
from the reserve tank back to the radiator
Water by itself boils at a lower temperature
when the engine cools down. If you need
and does not stop rust or freezing. If the
water freezes, it will damage your cooling to change the cap, use the exact same
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause kind.
corrosion and rust. Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
ator with the proper gauge, and only when
it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
Radiator cap tents of the reserve tank must be protected
against freezing.
The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre- Keep the front of the radiator and con-
vent losing coolant, which may result in denser clean.
engine damage. Only use a Mitsubishi If the engine coolant temperature does not 2. For 2.4 L models, while holding down the
Motors Genuine Parts radiator cap, or an rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
approved equivalent. your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
tab (C), pull out the connector (D). 9
WARNING choice to have the thermostat checked,
Wait for the engine to cool down before and replaced if necessary.
opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
steam or boiling coolant could spray up
from the radiator and scald you.
Air cleaner filter
N00937901410
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty

Points to remember from use and not filter properly. Replace it
with a new filter using the schedule in the
Do not overfill the reserve tank. WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL.

BK0200500US.book 10
Automatic transaxle fluid (if so equipped)

3. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the 5. For 2.4 L models, put the duct back on in
cover and take out the air cleaner filter.
NOTE its original position.
After replacing the air cleaner filter, make
2.4 L models sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover
are firmly set. Automatic transaxle fluid (if
so equipped)
2.4 L models
N00938000570
The automatic transaxle should be maintained

and serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi
choice to obtain the best performance and
longest life. It is important that the transaxle
fluid is kept at the correct level.
3.0 L models
9 To check the fluid level
3.0 L models
The fluid level should be checked when the
bar graph for the engine coolant temperature
display on the multi-information display
shows the engine is warmed up and the fluid
in the transaxle is heated to its normal work-
ing temperature. Driving with the wrong fluid
level will rapidly wear out the transaxle and
4. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the destroy the fluid.
cover back on in its original position.
NOTE CAUTION
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are recom-
Take care not to scratch the engine air flow
mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
sensor when removing the air cleaner cover.
For 2.4 L models, make sure that the connec-
tor is properly reconnected.

BK0200500US.book 11
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped)
Procedure for checking the Fluid type Fluid type

fluid level
Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine ATF- Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
1. With the brake pedal fully depressed and J3 transaxle fluid to ensure optimum trans- CVTF-J4 transmission fluid to ensure opti-
the engine idling, select each gear axle performance. mum transmission performance.
momentarily, ending with the selector
lever in the P (PARK) position.
2. The fluid level should be at the HOT
CAUTION Special additives
Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-
mark, but never above the HOT mark
age the transaxle.
when the engine is warmed up. Add or Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-
drain fluid to get to the correct level. mission.
3. Make certain that the dipstick cap is
installed properly to keep dirt and water Special additives
out of the transaxle.
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not rec- models) 9
ommend the addition of any fluid additives to N00938401281
Good (Hot)
the transaxle. Whenever the transfer oil level is checked,
add oil as necessary to maintain the proper
Continuously variable level. Fill with the oil according to the table
below.
transmission (CVT) fluid (if
so equipped) Fluid type
N00938100076
The continuously variable transmission Mitsubishi Motors Genuine

(CVT) should be maintained and serviced by Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
WARNING an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a classification GL-5
Transaxle fluid is extremely flammable repair facility of your choice to obtain the
and poisonous. Do not spill fluid when Viscosity
best performance and longest life. It is impor- SAE 80
adding or draining. range
tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
correct level.

BK0200500US.book 12
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models)

Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-
Rear axle oil (All-wheel vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-
drive models) essary.
N00915201279 Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid
Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as level with the dipstick.
necessary to maintain the proper level.
Fill with the oil according to the table below.
Fluid type
EMPTY
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine FULL The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API brake pads, but this does not indicate any
classification GL-5 abnormality.
9 Viscosity
SAE 80
If the fluid level falls sealed tight in a short
length of time, it indicates leaks from the
range
When freezing weather is anticipated, flush brake system.
out the water in the reservoir by operating the If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
Washer fluid pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
N00938601313 freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate repair facility of your choice.
The windshield and rear window washer fluid the system for a few seconds to flush out the
reservoir is in the engine compartment. residual water. Fluid type
Brake fluid Use the recommended brake fluid conform-

N00938701271 ing to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap
must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water
out.
To check the fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level must be between the MAX
and MIN marks on the reservoir.

BK0200500US.book 13
Battery
facility of your choice before the start of cold
CAUTION NOTE weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, After replacing the battery, the electronic
will provide more reliable starting, and longer
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This control system data for the automatic trans-
battery life.
will damage the seals. axle, etc., will be erased.
Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can As a result, shifting may be rough.
damage painted surfaces. Shifting will become smoother after several Disconnection and connection
Use only the listed brake fluid. Different changes in speed.
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid. Checking battery electrolyte first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-
Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
the brake fluid from evaporating.
level nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)
terminal and then the negative (-) terminal,
The electrolyte level must be between the before starting the vehicle.
Battery limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of NOTE 9
N00939101940
the battery is divided into several compart- Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
The condition of the battery is very important ments. Take the cap off of each compartment necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
for quick starting and to keep the vehicles and fill to the mark. nal of the battery.
electrical system working properly. Check the Do not fill above the top line because a spill Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the
battery regularly. during driving could cause damage. battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.
If battery performance is suspect, have the

battery and charging system tested by an During cold weather
repair facility of your choice. The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.
This has to do with its chemical and physical
properties and is why a very cold battery,
especially one with a low charge, will have a
hard time starting your vehicle.
It is recommended that you have your battery
and charging system checked by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

BK0200500US.book 14
Tires
WARNING WARNING Tires

Never disconnect the battery while the If you are quick-charging your battery, N00939201589
engine is running, or you could damage first disconnect the battery cables.
the vehicles electrical parts. In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure WARNING
Never short-circuit the battery. This could to disconnect the negative (-) terminal Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
cause it to overheat and be damaged. first, and reconnect it last. or improperly inflated is dangerous.
Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away If the electrolyte level is very low, have the These type tire conditions will adversely
from the battery because the battery could battery checked at an authorized Mitsubi- affect vehicle performance.
explode. shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of These type tire conditions can also cause a
Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro- your choice. tread separation or blowout which may
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on Battery posts, terminals and related acces- result in an accident causing serious
nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- sories contain lead and lead compounds. injury or death.
color them. And if it gets on your skin or Wash hands after handling. Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind- time with age even when they are not
ness. Please observe the following han- being used.
9 dling instructions: NOTE It is recommended that tires over 6 years
If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or Check each battery terminal for corrosion. generally be replaced even if damage is
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft You can prevent further corrosion by wash- not obvious.
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of ing with a solution of baking soda and water.
water and neutral detergent then imme- Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or It is important to familiarize yourself with the
diately rinse the affected parts with tightening them. following terms:
plenty of water. Ensure the battery is securely installed and
If electrolyte gets on your hands or cannot be moved. Also check each terminal Cold tire pressure:
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If for tightness. The measured pressure after the vehicle
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them If you will not be driving your vehicle for a
with water immediately and get immedi-
has been parked for at least three hours,
long period of time, remove the battery and or
ate medical attention. store it in a place where the battery fluid will
Open doors and windows in any closed The measured pressure when the vehicle
not freeze. The battery only should be stored
space where you may be charging or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
with a full charge.
working with the battery. having been parked for three hours.
Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the
Always wear protective clothing and gog- filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out. Maximum pressure: the maximum per-
gles when working with the battery, or missible cold tire inflation pressure for
have a skilled automobile technician do it. this tire.

BK0200500US.book 15
Tires
Recommended inflation pressure: the Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor- tread and bead.
Tire Markings
mance. Section width: the linear distance between
Intended outboard sidewall: the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
The sidewall that contains a whitewall, inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
bears white lettering or bears manufac- labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
turer, brand, and/or model name molding Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
that is higher or deeper than the same steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
or Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel
The outward facing sidewall of an asym- cords.
metrical tire that has a particular side Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
that must always face outward when tire.
mounted on a vehicle. Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire
Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use and tube assembly upon which the tire
on passenger cars, multipurpose passen- beads are seated. Size Designation 9
ger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 bead seat. EXAMPLE: P215/65R15
pounds or less. Groove: the space between two adjacent
Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by tread ribs. Passenger car tire size based
P
its manufacturer as primarily intended for on U.S.A. design standards
use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose Section width in millimeters
passenger vehicles. 215
Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
(mm)
contact with the road. Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Tread rib: a tread section running circum- 65 Ratio of section height to sec-
ferentially around a tire. tion width of tire.
Tread separation: pulling away of the
tread from the tire carcass.
Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
bears the load.

BK0200500US.book 16
Tires
Construction code NOTE Speed symbol

R means radial construc- LT (Light Truck) -metric tire A symbol indicating the
R tion. sizing is based on U.S.A. design range of speeds at which a
D means diagonal or bias standards. The size designation tire can carry a load corre-
construction. for LT-metric tires is the same as sponding to its load index
15 Rim diameter in inches (in) for P-metric tires except for the under certain operating con-
letters LT that are molded into ditions.
H
the sidewall preceding the size The maximum speed corre-
NOTE
designation. Example: sponding to the speed symbol
European/Japanese metric tire
LT235/85R16. should only be achieved
sizing is based on European/Jap-
Temporary spare tires are high under specified operating
anese design standards. Tires
pressure compact spares conditions. (i.e. tire pressure,
designed to these standards have
9 designed for temporary emer- vehicle loading, road condi-
the tire size molded into the
gency use only. Tires designed tions and posted speed limits)
sidewall beginning with the sec-
tion width. The letter P is to this standard have the letter
T molded into the sidewall Maximum Load
absent from this tire size desig-
nation. Example: 215/65R15 preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M. Maximum load indicates the maxi-
96H.
mum load this tire is designed to
Service Description carry.
EXAMPLE: 95H
Load index
A numerical code associated
95
with the maximum load a tire
can carry.

BK0200500US.book 17
Tires
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD Treadwear, Traction and Temper-
WARNING 1504
Overloading of your tire is ature Grades
Department of Transporta-
dangerous. Overloading can
tion
cause tire failure, affect vehi- Treadwear
This symbol certifies that the
cle handling, and increase
tire is in compliance with the The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
your stopping distance. Use DOT based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
U.S. Department of Trans-
tires of the recommended load under controlled conditions on a specified
portation tire safety stan-
capacity for your vehicle. government test course. For example, a tire
dards, and is approved for graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Never overload them.
highway use. (11/2) times as well on the government course
Code representing the tire as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
Maximum Pressure MA manufacturing location. (2 of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
digits) their use, however, and may depart signifi- 9
Maximum Pressure indicates the cantly from the norm due to variations in
Code representing the tire driving habits, service practices and differ-
maximum permissible cold tire infla- L9
size. (2 digits) ences in road characteristics and climate.
tion pressure for this tire. ABC
Code used by tire manufac-
D
turer. (1 to 4 digits) Traction
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Number representing the The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
The TIN may be found on one or 15 week in which the tire was are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
manufactured. (2 digits) the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as
both sides of the tire but the date measured under controlled conditions on
code may only be on one side. Look Number representing the specified government test surfaces of asphalt
for the TIN on the outboard side of 04 year in which the tire was and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the manufactured. (2 digits) traction performance.
TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

BK0200500US.book 18
Tires
Economy Item Tire size Front Rear
Temperature
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven
wear patterns in the tire tread. These Compact 420 KPA, 60
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B T155/90D16
spare wheel PSI
and C, representing the tires resistance to the abnormal wear patterns will reduce the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate tread life, and the tire will have to be
Tire pressures should be checked, and
heat when tested under controlled conditions replaced sooner.
adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Too little pressure also makes it harder for
Pressures should be checked more often
Sustained high temperature can cause the the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.
whenever weather temperatures change
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce Ride comfort and vehicle stability
severely, because tire pressures change with
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead The superior riding experience built into
outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre- your vehicle partly depends on the correct
are always cold inflation pressure.
sponds to a level of performance which all tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an
Cold inflation pressure is measured after the
passenger car tires must meet under the Fed- uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little
vehicle has been parked for at least three
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to
hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
respond.
9 Grades B and A represent higher levels of
Unequal tire pressures can make steering
after having been parked for three hours.
performance on the laboratory test wheel than Cold inflation pressure must not go above the
the minimum required by law. your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.
maximum values molded into the tire side-
The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor- wall. After driving several miles, your tire
Tire inflation pressures mal driving conditions is listed on the placard inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14
N00939300815
attached to the drivers door sill. to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for (Refer to Tire and loading information plac- Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the
the safe and satisfactory operation of your ard on page 11-3.) specified cold pressure, or your tires will be
vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause The recommended inflation pressures under too low.
problems in three major areas: normal driving conditions should be used for Check your tires each time you refuel. If one
the tires listed below. tire looks lower than the others, check the
Safety pressure for all of them.
Too little pressure increases flexing in the Item Tire size Front Rear You should also take the following safety pre-
tire and can cause tire failure. Too much cautions:
240 240
pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability P215/70R16
Normal tire KPA, KPA,
to cushion shock. Objects on the road and P225/55R18
35 PSI 35 PSI
potholes could then cause tire damage that
may result in tire failure.
BK0200500US.book 19
Tires
Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
mended pressures. (See the tire and load-
CAUTION Tread wear indicator
Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels N00939800184
ing information placard attached to the
should be used, because your vehicle is
drivers door sill.)
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
Stay within the recommended load limits. tem.
Make sure that the weight of any load in Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
your vehicle is evenly distributed. and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
Drive at safe speeds. to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
After filling your tires to the correct pres-
sure, check them for damage and air
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the
Tire maintenance
N00939700141
valve stems.
The following maintenance steps are recom-
mended: 1- Location of the tread wear indicator
Replacing tires and wheels
N00939600241 Check tire pressures regularly.
2- Tread wear indicator
9
Have regular maintenance done on the
CAUTION wheel balance and front and rear suspen- Tread wear indicators are built into the origi-
Avoid using different size tires from the one sion alignment. nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help
listed and the combined use of different Rotate your tires regularly as described in you know when your tires should be replaced.
types of tires, as this can affect driving Many states have laws requiring that you
the Tire rotation section on page 9-20.
safety.
replace your tires at this point.
Refer to Tires and wheels on page 11-7.
These indicators are molded into the bottom
On all-wheel drive vehicles, always use tires
of the same size, same type, and same brand,
of the tread grooves and will appear when the
and which have no wear differences. Using tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6
tires that differ in size, type, brand or the mm).
degree of wear, will increase the differential When the bands appear next to one another in
oil temperature, resulting in possible damage two or more places, replace your tires.
to the driving system. Further, the drive train
will be subjected to excessive loading, possi-
bly leading to oil leakage, component sei-
NOTE
zure, or other serious problems. Tire wear indicators can have different marks
and locations depending on the tire manufac-
turer.

BK0200500US.book 20
Tires
Tire rotation Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation direction
Front
N00939901528
Front
To even out the wear on your tires and make
them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
the mileage listed in the WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL. Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction
However, the timing for tire rotation may
vary according to your vehicle condition,
Front
road surface conditions, and your own per-
sonal driving habits. Any time you notice
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos- CAUTION
sible. Avoid the combined use of different types of
tires. Using different types of tires can affect
9 When rotating tires, check for uneven wear, vehicle performance and safety.
damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal CAUTION
wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres- A compact spare tire can be installed tempo-
rarily in place of a tire that has been removed
sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,
during the tire rotation. However, it must not
Snow tires
wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe N00940000320
be included in the regular tire rotation
braking.
sequence. In some areas of the country, snow tires are
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the required for winter driving. If snow tires are
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to correct direction of rotation, swap the front required in your area, you must choose snow
find out the reason for uneven tread wear. and rear tires on the left-hand side of the tires of the same size and type as the original
vehicle and the front and rear tires on the tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires
The first tire rotation is the most important right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly. should also be installed on all four wheels.
Keep each tire on its original side of the
Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure
the arrows point in the direction in which the
can be reduced.
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the should not be operated at sustained speeds
wrong direction will not perform to its full over 75 mph (120 km/h).
potential.

BK0200500US.book 21
Brake pedal free play

pedal down with your fingers until you first slowly and count the number of clicks of the
CAUTION feel resistance. ratchet. Parking brake lever stroke:
Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels
6 to 7 notches (clicks)
should be used, because your vehicle is Brake pedal free play: (Psrking brake adjustment when pulled with
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- .1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
tem. the force of 200 N)
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible the ratchet after pulling.
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
Tire chains
N00940101139
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
The clearance between the chains and the
9
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear- If the free play is not within these limits, take
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
aged.
choice for adjustment. WARNING
Continued operation of the vehicle with
Brake pedal free play
N00940300293
Parking brake the parking brake lever out of adjustment
may result in the vehicle moving when
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn N00940401259
unattended.
off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-
eral times with your foot. Then press the Parking brake lever stroke
Check the parking brake lever travel occa- Wiper blades
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up N00940700138
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean

them regularly to remove deposits of salt and
road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild

BK0200500US.book 22
Emission-control system maintenance

detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the To be sure the emission-control system works
blades and glass areas. properly, have your vehicle inspected and
Spark plugs
N00940900231
Replace the blades if they continue to streak maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi
or smear. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your Spark plugs must fire properly to ensure
choice. This should be done at the time or proper engine performance and emission-
mileage specified in the WARRANTY AND control.
NOTE Do not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or
Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long
MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
These, and all the other general mainte- regapping. Spark plugs should be replaced at
time. This wears out the rubber and can
scratch the glass. nance services listed in this manual, need to the mileage specified in the WARRANTY
be performed to keep your vehicle running AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
properly and reliably.
During cold weather You should also have an inspection and ser- NOTE
vice any time you suspect a malfunction. Use the recommended or equivalent spark
plugs listed under Engine specifications on
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
9 rear window, do not operate the wipers until NOTE page 11-6. Use of other plugs could cause
engine damage, loss of performance or radio
the ice has melted and the blades are freed, To meet government regulations and pro-
noise.
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged. mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
The engine electronic control module that
Emission-control system controls OBD functions stores various data Fuel hoses
(especially about the exhaust emissions).
maintenance This data will be erased if the battery cable is
N00941000040
Check the hose surfaces for any heat and

N00940800328 disconnected, which could make a rapid
diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-
battery cable when the engine malfunction cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
control system that meets all the requirements
indicator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Check engine light) is ON. sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check
and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
all the hose connections, such as clamps and
trol system is made of:
couplings, to make sure they are secure and
a positive crankcase ventilation system that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or
an evaporative emission-control system damage, replace the hoses immediately.
an exhaust emission-control system

BK0200500US.book 23
General maintenance
Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control Disc brake pads

N00950100050
system (except evaporative N00941600059
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister) Good brakes are essential for safe driving.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400187
Check the brake pads for wear. For good
mileage specified in the WARRANTY AND braking performance, replace the brake pads
If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL. with the same type pads as the originals.
aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have
luting the air.
adjustments made by an authorized
Have the system checked at an authorized Brake hoses
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec- N00941700076
ified in the WARRANTY AND MAINTE- Brake hoses and tubing should be checked
Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL. for:
connection, and fuel tank filler
Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn
cap) General maintenance
N00941300173 N00941501299
spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is 9
showing through any cracks or worn spots
Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service in the rubber hose cover, the hose should
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo- be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance hose wears through.
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed at the times listed, Improper installation may cause twisting,
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani- there are other parts which do not usually or wheel, tire or chassis interference.
fold. need regular maintenance.
But, if any of these parts stops working prop-
Ball joint, steering linkage
WARNING erly, your vehicle performance could suffer.
If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel, Have these items checked if you notice a seals, drive shaft boots
do not run the engine. Any spark (includ- problem with them. N00941800093
ing from the ignition), flame or smoking Check the following parts for damage and
material could cause an explosion or fire. If you have any questions, see your autho- grease leaks:
Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice Ball joint boots of the suspension and
for assistance. steering linkage
Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft

BK0200500US.book 24
For cold and snowy weather

Also, put a light coat of the same grease on
Exhaust system Check for any of the following
the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
N00942201118 conditions:
WARNING Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks For cold and snowy weather
Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicles caused by corrosion or damage. N00942600102
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these Check the joints and connections for
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death. looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
Ventilation slots
Check the rubber hangers and brackets for
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas damage.
from entering inside your vehicle is to have The ventilation slots in front of the wind-
the engine exhaust system properly serviced. shield should be brushed clear after a heavy
Timing belt snowfall so that the operation of the heating
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and nearby body areas
N00942300079
and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- The timing belt should be replaced with a
9 sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- new one at the mileage listed in the WAR-
RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN-
Weatherstripping
ing:
UAL.
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
A change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should
tem Hood lock release mechanism be treated with silicone grease.
The smell of exhaust fumes inside the
vehicle
and safety catch
The underside or rear of the vehicle is N00942501124
Additional equipment (For
damaged The hood lock release mechanism and hood
regions where snow is encoun-
safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and
Also check the exhaust system each time the oiled when needed for easy movement and to tered)
vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes, prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose
or required service. Any open seams or loose Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-
connections could let dangerous exhaust parts of the hood latch and release lever. handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
fumes seep into the luggage and passenger Work the grease into the hood lock mecha- ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
compartments. nism until all the movable surfaces are cov- stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
ered. snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for

BK0200500US.book 25
Fusible links
the windshield, side and rear window are also fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
useful. partment and in the engine compartment.
Fusible links Passenger compartment

N00942700291
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
a large current attempts to flow through cer- ment are located behind the fuse lid in front
tain electrical systems. of the drivers seat at the position shown in
In case of a melted fusible link, see your the illustration.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Pull the fuse lid to remove it.
repair facility of your choice for inspection
and replacement.
For the fusible links, please refer to Fuse Fuse load capacities
load capacities on page 9-25. N00954801283
This fuse list shows the names of the electri- 9

WARNING cal systems and their fuse capacities.
Fusible links must not be replaced by any There are spare fuses in the fuse block cover
other device. Failing to fit the correct fus- in the engine compartment. Always replace a
ible link may result in fire in the vehicle, blown fuse with one of the same capacity as
property destruction and serious or fatal the original.
injuries at any time.
A- Main fuse block
B- Sub fuse block
Fuses
N00942801912
Engine compartment
Fuse block location
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
located as shown in the illustration. While
To prevent damage to the electrical system
pressing the tab (A), pull up the cover (B).
from short-circuiting or overloading, each
individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
BK0200500US.book 26
Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse loca- Sym- Capac Sym- Capac

No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
tion table bol ity bol ity
8 Rear window wiper 15 A 24 Charge 7.5 A
Main fuse block 9 Sunroof 20 A 25 Power seat 30 A*
10 Ignition switch 10 A 26 Heated seats 30 A
11 Option 10 A
Sub fuse : Fusible link
block Hazard warning
12 15 A
flasher Some fuses may not be installed on your
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
13 4-wheel drive system 10 A
or specifications.
Stop lights The table above shows the main equip-
14 15 A
(Brake lights) ment corresponding to each fuse.
9 15 Gauges 10 A
16 SRS airbag 7.5 A
Sym- Capac 17 Radio 15 A

No. Electrical system
bol ity 18 Control unit relay 7.5 A
Power window con- Interior lights
1 30 A* 19 15 A
trol (Room lights)
2 Defogger 30 A* 20 Back-up lights 7.5 A
3 Heater 30 A Heated outside
21 7.5 A
rearview mirrors
4 Windshield wipers 30 A
Outside rearview
5 Door locks 20 A 22 10 A
mirrors
6 Rear fog light 10 A Cigarette lighter/
23 15 A
7 12 V power outlet 15 A 12 V power outlet

BK0200500US.book 27
Fuses
Engine compartment fuse location Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci
No. No.
table bol tem ty bol tem ty
Air condition- Headlight
F7 20 A
SBF3 ing condenser 30 A* washer
fan motor
F8 Security horn 20 A
Radiator fan
SBF4 40 A* F9 Horn 10 A
motor
Anti-lock brak- F10 ETV 15 A
SBF5 40 A*
ing system F11 Alternator 7.5 A
SBF6 VLC 40 A* F12 Engine 7.5 A
Anti-lock brak-
SBF7 30 A* ENG/POWER 20 A
ing system F13
BF1 Power liftgate 30 A Fuel line heater 25 A 9
Behind the fuse block cover Audio system F14 Fuel pump 15 A
BF2 30 A
amplifier F15 Ignition coil 10 A
BF3 IOD IOD 30 A
F16 ENG/POWER 10 A
BF4 Diesel 30 A
Headlight (high
F17 10 A
Automatic beam) (left)
F1 20 A
transaxle
Headlight (high
F18 10 A
F2 Wiper de-icer 15A beam) (right)
Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci
No. F3 Head-
bol tem ty
light
Daytime run- Dis-
Air condition- F4 10 A F19 (low 20 A
ning lights charge
SBF1 ing condenser 30 A* beam)
fan motor F5 Front fog lights 15 A (left)
SBF2 Starter 30 A* F6 Air conditioner 10 A

BK0200500US.book 28
Fuses
Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,
No. 25 A or 30 A fuses. If one of these fuses
Fuse replacement
bol tem ty N00954901141
burns out, substitute with the following fuse.
Head- 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse
light the electrical item connected to the fuse
Dis- 25 A: 20 A spare fuse
F20 (low 20 A and turn the ignition switch to the
charge 30 A: 30 A audio system amplifier fuse
beam) LOCK or OFF position or put the
When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
(right) operation mode in OFF.
fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
Head- 2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine
ble.
light compartment fuse block.
Halo-
F21 (low 10 A
gen Identification of fuse
beam)
(left)
Capacity Color
Head-
9 light
Halo-
7.5 A Brown
F22 (low 10 A 10 A Red
gen
beam)
15 A Blue
(right)
20 A Yellow
Battery current
F23 7.5 A
sensor 25 A Natural (white)
#1 Spare fuse 10 A Green (fuse type) /
30 A
Pink (fusible link type)
#2 Spare fuse 15 A
40 A Green (fusible link type)
#3 Spare fuse 20 A
*: Fusible link
Some fuses may not be installed on your

vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
or specifications.
The table above shows the main equip-
ment corresponding to each fuse.

BK0200500US.book 29
Replacement of light bulbs

3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, C- Blown fuse
and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
CAUTION
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
block.
securely into the appropriate slot. inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
CAUTION Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than hand, dirty glove, etc.
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire, The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring to break the next time the headlights are
to heat up and could cause a fire. used.
If the replacement fuse blows again after a If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
short time, have the electrical system alcohol and let it dry completely before
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors installing the bulb.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
find and correct the cause.
4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the 9
matching tables, to check the fuse that is
related to the problem. If the fuse is not
blown, something else must be causing Replacement of light bulbs
the problem. Have the system inspected N00942901359
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy
the bulb when it gets hot.
CAUTION NOTE
If you are unsure of how to carry out the
Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
work as required, it is recommended that
being turned off.
these procedures be carried out by an autho-
When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
sufficiently before touching it. You could
facility of your choice.
otherwise be burned.
Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
B- Fuse is OK when removing a light and lens.

BK0200500US.book 30
NOTE Outside ANSI

When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
Trade
N00950301886
Watt-
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes Item No. or
Front age
becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same Bulb
phenomenon as when window glass mists up type
on a humid day, and does not indicate a func- PY21
tional problem. 1 - Front turn signal light 21 W
W
When the light is switched on, the heat will
remove the fog. However, if water gathers 9005
2 - Headlight, high beam 60 W
inside the light, please have it checked by an HB3
3 - Head-
light, low
Type A beam/Dayt
Bulb capacity ime Halogen
55 W H7
9 N00943000132 running bulb
The bulb should only be replaced with a new light
bulb with the same rating and type. The type (if so
and rating are listed on the base of the bulb. Type B equipped)
Head- Dis-
light, low charge 35 W
beam bulb
4 - Parking light 5W W5W
5 - Front side-marker
Type A: Except for high intensity discharge 5W W5W
light
headlight type
Type B: High intensity discharge headlight
type

BK0200500US.book 31

ANSI NOTE
Trade The side turn signal light use an LED instead
Watt-
Item No. or of the bulb. Check with an authorized Mit-
age
Bulb subishi Motors dealer or repair facility of
type your choice when either light needs to be
6- Front fog light repaired or replaced.
55 W H11
(Type 1)
Daytime running
13 W P13W
light (Type 2)
Front fog Front fog
35 W H8
light/Day- light
time run- Daytime
ning light running 13 W P13W
(Type 3) light 9
7 - Side turn signal light

(if so equipped)
WARNING
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi
choice when it is necessary to repair a high
intensity discharge headlight or to replace
the bulb.
The power circuit, bulb and electrodes
generate high voltages that may cause a
severe shock.

BK0200500US.book 32
Rear NOTE Inside

The rear side-marker light and the high- N00950401656
mounted stop light use an LED instead of the

bulb. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or repair facility of your
choice when either light needs to be repaired
or replaced.
ANSI
trade No.
Item Wattage
or Bulb Item Wattage
9 type
1 - Cargo room light 8W
1 - High-mounted
stop light 2 - Dome light (rear) 8W
2 - Back-up light 21 W W21W Dome light (front)/Read-
3- 8W
ing light
3 - License plate 5W W5W
light 4 - Downlight
4 - Rear turn sig- 21 W PY21W 5 - Vanity mirror lights 2W
nal light 6 - Glove compartment light 1.4 W
5 - Tail and stop 21/5 W P21/5 W
light
NOTE
6 - Rear side- The downlight uses an LED instead of the
marker light bulb. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi
choice when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.

BK0200500US.book 33

2. Turn the cap (B) counterclockwise to
Headlights (low beam, except remove it.
Headlights (low beam, for vehi-
for vehicles equipped with high cles equipped with high inten-
intensity discharge head- sity discharge headlights)
lights)/Daytime running lights N00900301139
(if so equipped) Do not attempt to disassemble or repair head-

N00901801131
lights, and do not attempt to replace their
bulbs.
1. When replacing the bulb on the left side
of the vehicle, remove the bolt (A) hold-
ing down the relay box and move the WARNING
relay box toward the rear of the vehicle. A high voltage is present in the power cir-
(if so equipped) cuit and in the bulbs and bulb terminals.
*- Front of the vehicle To avoid the risk of an electric shock, con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
3. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to
dealer whenever repair or replacement is 9
necessary.
remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
the socket.
*- Front of the vehicle
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

BK0200500US.book 34

3. To install the bulb, perform the removal 2. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to
Headlights (high beam) steps in reverse. remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
N00901901099
the socket.
1. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to
remove it. Headlight aim adjustment
N00943201359
The alignment of the headlights should be

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Front side-marker lights

N00915501171
1. When replacing the bulb on the left side

of the vehicle, move the relay box toward
9 *- Front of the vehicle
the rear of the vehicle. (if so equipped)
(Refer to Headlight (low beam, except
for vehicles equipped with high intensity
2. Turn the bulb (B) counterclockwise to discharge headlights)/Daytime running
remove it and then while holding down light): Step 1 on page 9-33.
the tab (C), pull out the connector (D).

steps in reverse.

BK0200500US.book 35

2. Pull out the socket (B), and then pull the
Parking lights Vehicles equipped with high inten-
bulb out of the socket.
N00917301577 sity discharge headlights
When replacing the bulb on the left side of
the vehicle, move the relay box toward the 1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to
rear of the vehicle. (if so equipped) remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
(Refer to Headlight (low beam, except for the socket.
vehicles equipped with high intensity dis-
charge headlights)/Daytime running light):
Step 1 on page 9-33.)
Except for vehicles equipped with

high intensity discharge headlights
1. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to
remove it. steps in reverse.
9

steps in reverse.

BK0200500US.book 36

2. Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove the
Front turn signal lights Side turn signal lights (if so light unit.
N00943401380
equipped)
1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to N00943501147
remove it, then remove the bulb from the
socket by turning it counterclockwise
while pressing in.
NOTE
The side turn signal lights uses an LED
instead of the bulb.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Front fog lights (if so NOTE

9 equipped)/Daytime running When unfastening the screws or the fog
light, be careful not to move the beam posi-
lights (if so equipped) tion adjustment screw (C).
N00943601773
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-

driver with a cloth over its tip at the edge
*: Front of the vehicle of the cover (A) and pry gently to remove
the cover.

steps in reverse.

BK0200500US.book 37

3. Turn the socket counterclockwise to 4. While holding down the tab (F), pull out 3. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
remove it. the bulb (G). remove it, and then remove the bulb from
the socket by turning it counterclockwise
Type 1 Front fog light Daytime running light
while pressing in.
Type 2

steps in reverse. D- Tail and stop light 9
Type 3 E- Rear turn signal light
Rear combination lights
N00943701501
1. Open the liftgate. NOTE

2. Remove the screws (A), and then move The rear side-marker light uses an LED
the light unit toward the rear of the vehi- instead of the bulb.
cle to unfix the notch (B) and pins (C). Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
D- Front fog light when the light needs to be repaired or
E- Daytime running light replaced.

steps in reverse.

BK0200500US.book 38
NOTE NOTE
When mounting the light unit, align the Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
notch (F) and pin (G) on the light unit with driver to keep from scratching the lens.
the clip (H) and hole (I) in the body.
2. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to

remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
the socket.
License plate lights

N00944000360
9 1. When removing the light unit (A), push it
toward the left side of the vehicle body.
Back-up lights
N00929101064 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
1. Push the light unit toward the center of the steps in reverse.
vehicle body to remove it.
NOTE
When installing the light unit, first insert the
notch (B) into the hole on the body, and then
push on the light unit to fit it into place.

BK0200500US.book 39
Vehicle care precautions

2. Use a screw driver to gently pry up the tab 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
(B) and remove the lens. steps in reverse. Vehicle care precautions
N00945100166
NOTE In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,

When mounting the light unit, insert tab (C) perform regular maintenance using the proper
first then align tab (D) with its hole. materials and procedures. Be sure to use only
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula-
tions. Choose the materials you will use care-
fully, to be sure that they do not contain
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help
in choosing these materials.
NOTE CAUTION
Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw- 9
Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some
driver to keep from scratching the lens.
are poisonous and others are highly flamma-
ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. fumes in a closed space. When you use any-
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be
High-mounted stop light sure to follow the instructions. Always open
N00943900102 your vehicle doors or windows when youre
cleaning the inside. Never use the following
NOTE chemicals to clean your vehicle:
The high-mounted stop light uses an LED Gasoline
instead of the bulb. Check with an authorized Carbon Tetrachloride
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility Benzine
of your choice when the light needs to be Kerosene
repaired or replaced. Naphtha
Acetone
Turpentine
Paint Thinner
Lacquer Thinner

BK0200500US.book 40
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle
CAUTION Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and Upholstery

Nail Polish Remover flocked parts N00945500128
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-

These can all be dangerous, and they all can N00945300155
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
damage your vehicle. 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap keep the interior clean.
and water. Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
Cleaning the inside of your 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
leather should be cleaned with an appro-
vehicle wring it out well, and wipe off all the
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
N00945200095
soap.
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a
After washing the inside of your vehicle with 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti- NOTE water.
lated area. Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro- 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum
tectants containing silicones or wax. cleaner and remove any stains with carpet
9 CAUTION Such products, when applied to the instru-
ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by
Do not use organic substances (solvents, lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth
tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or Also, if such products get on the switches of and spot remover.
alkaline or acidic solutions. the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
These chemicals can cause discoloring,
staining or cracking of the surface.
ure of these accessories. NOTE
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat
sure their ingredients do not include the sub- upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush
stances mentioned above. over the surface in one direction.
NOTE Genuine leather (if so

Always read the instructions on the cleaner equipped)
label. N00945600187
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a

soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen-
tle soap and water.

BK0200500US.book 41
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,
wring it out well, and wipe off all the Cleaning the outside of your wash the vehicle from top to bottom.
soap. vehicle Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro- N00945700058 Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham-
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur- To protect your vehicles finish, wash it often ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,
face. and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your carefully clean the joints and flanges of the
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax. doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to
remain.
NOTE
If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it Foreign material
with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew N00945800033
CAUTION
may grow. When washing the underside of your vehicle
The genuine leather surface can be damaged Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-
if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other tect your hands.
brush. foreign matters can damage the finish on your If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place
vehicle.
Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents Generally, the longer any foreign material
the wiper switch lever in the OFF position
to deactivate the rain sensor before washing
9
can discolor the genuine leather surface and stays on the finish, the worse the damage. the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will oper-
should not be used. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when- ate in the presence of water spray on the
Genuine leather can mildew if not kept ever the finish gets soiled. windshield and may get damaged as a result.
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately. Never spray or splash water on the electrical
The genuine leather surface may harden and parts in the engine compartment. This may
shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight Washing damage them. Be careful also when washing
for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, N00945901637 the underbody to ensure that water does not
place it in the shade as much as possible. enter the engine compartment.
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
When the temperature of the vehicle interior Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-
picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-
rises in summer, vinyl products left on the ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the
faces can damage the paint and body of your
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and paint surface and make it dull.
vehicle if left on. Scratches are more noticeable on darker col-
stick to the seat.
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way ored vehicles.
to protect your vehicle from this damage.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with
water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of

BK0200500US.book 42

mental effect on the vehicle underbody. You
CAUTION should flush the underbody with a high pres-
CAUTION
Some hot water washing equipment uses Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
sure hose every time you wash the outside of
high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. should not be used. These waxes remove rust
your vehicle.
Because hot water can damage plastics parts and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you Take special care to remove mud or other are harmful to the finish of the paint, because
do the following when using such equip- debris which could trap and hold salt and they also remove paint/clearcoat.
ment: moisture. They are also harmful to other glossy sur-
Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches After washing your vehicle, wipe off all faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.
(70 cm) away from the vehicle body. waterdrops from the rubber parts around the Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or
When washing around the door glass, hold doors to prevent the doors from freezing. paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt
the nozzle at a distance of more than 28 from the vehicle surface.
inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the Do not put wax on the areas having black
glass surface.
NOTE matte coating because it can cause uneven
When the door is frozen, opening it by force discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
Make sure to do the following when using an
may tear off or crack the rubber gasket wax on them, wipe the wax off right away
automatic car wash, with help from either
9 this manual or the car wash operator, to
installed around the door. Pour warm water
to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe
with a soft cloth and warm water.
avoid damaging your vehicle: On vehicles with sunroof, be careful not to
off the water after opening the door. To pre-
Fold the outside rearview mirrors. apply any wax on the weatherstrip (black
vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
Remove the antenna. rubber) when waxing the area around the
doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-
Tape or remove the rear wiper arm assem- sunroof opening.
cant.
bly. If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot
maintain a weatherproof seal with the sun-
If your vehicle is equipped with a roof rails,
check with the car wash operator before roof.
using the car wash. Waxing
N00946000205
If your vehicle is equipped with the rain
sensor wipers, place the wiper switch lever Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or Polishing
in the OFF position to deactivate the rain when water does not bead up on the paint. N00946100046
sensor. Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax If painted surfaces have been severely dam-
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has aged and lost their original luster and color
During cold weather dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. polishing compound. Avoid limiting your
Salt and other chemicals used on winter roads You should wax when the painted surfaces polishing to the damaged surface only; polish
in some geographical areas can have a detri- are cool. a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing

BK0200500US.book 43

cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush 3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois
the compound from the surface and apply a
CAUTION leather or a soft cloth.
Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.
ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
tic surface. CAUTION
Damaged paint Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso- Do not use a brush or other hard implement
N00946201099 line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, on the wheels.
paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec- Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat
trolyte), as such substances will cause stains, sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing
should be touched up as soon as possible with cracks, or discoloration. so could cause the coating on the wheels to
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe peel or become discolored or stained.
Check body areas facing the road or the tires them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
carefully for damage to the paint caused by mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse cleaner or by any other means.
flying stones, etc. The paint code number for them immediately with water. Contact with seawater or road salt used for
your vehicle can be found on the vehicle de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such
information code plate located on the front
Chrome parts substances as soon as possible.
9
passenger door sill.
N00946400052
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome

Cleaning plastic parts parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and Window glass
N00946600054
N00946301221 apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a The window glass can usually be cleaned
If the vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black commercially available chrome polish. using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
rough surface of the bumper, molding or can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead
lights, the surface may appear white in color. insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
Aluminum wheels (if so dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
and a soft cloth or chamois. equipped)
N00946500183
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. Wiper blades

CAUTION 2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can- N00946700068
Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough not be removed easily with water. Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
scrubber as these may damage the plastic grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
Rinse off the detergent after washing the
surface.
wheel. blades.

BK0200500US.book 44

Replace the wiper blades when they no longer of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
clean the windshield and rear window prop- the affected parts with plenty of water.
erly.
Cleaning the sunroof (if so

equipped)
N00946800069
Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft

cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away
with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral deter-
gent solution. Wipe away the solution with a
sponge dipped in fresh water.
9 NOTE
The surface treatment on the inside of the
glass may be removed if a hard cloth or
organic solvent is used.
Engine compartment
N00947000071
Never spray or splash water on the electrical

accessories in the engine compartment. This
puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
crack, stain or discolor them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
chamois or the like and an aqueous solution

BK0200500US.book 1
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.).....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects................................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident...............................10-4
10
BK0200500US.book 2
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047100171 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart- Grades B and A represent higher levels of
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects. the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201498
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tires resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

BK0200500US.book 3
Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or Mit- ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
subishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition bean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety from Transport Canada SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
http://www.safercar.gov. 330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
BK0200500US.book 4
Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to: Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Important facts to know in Many times, to save money, your insur-
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. case of an accident ance company will recommend imitation
P.O. Box 6066 N01047300098 parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
TAMUNING or workmanship.
GUAM 96931 accident, but there is always that potential
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
drive safely. Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
tection
For vehicles sold in Saipan In the event of an accident
The strength and integrity built into your
To contact Triple J Motors Remain calm.
Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific
call (670)234-7133 or write to: Check for injuries. Report all injuries to
design referred to as Energy Management.
the police, and, if necessary, call for an
Individual body parts are designed to act as
Triple J Motors ambulance.
one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
Record all the details of the accident. This
10 P.O. Box 500487 will provide you with accurate records of
waves are absorbed by protective panels or
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 are channeled around the passenger compart-
the accident for discussions with your
ment. This important feature is possible
insurance company and other persons
because high tensile steel is used in
who may be acting on your behalf.
Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, some-
For vehicles sold in American thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manu-
Samoa Key information to discuss with facturers of imitation parts. All Genuine
your insurance company Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets
are designed and constructed as important
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. protection features in the event of an acci-
Understand your repair estimate before
call 684(699)9140 or write to: approving repairs. dent. By replacing body parts with imitations,
Choosing the repair shop and the brands your vehicle may no longer meet original
Pacific Marketing, Inc. of parts that they use on your vehicle is equipment specifications.
P.O. Box 698 your decision.
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
BK0200500US.book 5
Important facts to know in case of an accident

Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Consumer rights (For vehicles Motors parts.
sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of 10
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
replacements parts are your guarantee that
your vehicle will have all the technological
advantages and maintain the style and protec-
tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

BK0200500US.book 6
BK0200500US.book 1
Specifications
Vehicle labeling ..............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions .........................................................................11-4
Vehicle weights...............................................................................11-5
Engine specifications ......................................................................11-6
Battery.............................................................................................11-6
Tires and wheels .............................................................................11-7
Capacity ..........................................................................................11-7
11
BK0200500US.book 2
Vehicle labeling
The air conditioning label is affixed on the
Vehicle labeling inside panel of the engine hood.
Chassis number
N01147401749
The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-
Keep a record of the chassis number and
head as shown in the illustration.
vehicle identification number. Such informa-
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen.
4 - Vehicle information code plate

The vehicle information code plate is located
on the front passenger door sill.
11
1 - Vehicle emission control information
label
The vehicle emission control information
label is affixed on the underside of the engine
hood.
2 - Vehicle identification number plate

The vehicle identification number is stamped
on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the dashboard. It is visible from outside of the
vehicle through the windshield.
3 - Air conditioning label
11-2 Specifications
BK0200500US.book 3
Vehicle labeling
Type 2
Engine serial number Tire and loading information
placard
The engine serial number is stamped on the
N01148101613
cylinder block as shown in the illustrations.
The tire and loading information placard is
located on the drivers door sill.
2.4 liter models
Certification label
N01148201249
The certification label is located on the

3.0 liter models drivers door sill.
Type 1
11
Specifications 11-3
BK0200500US.book 4
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
N01147501548
Overall length 183.3 in (4,655 mm)

Overall width 70.9 in (1,800 mm)
Without roof rails
Overall height 66.1 in (1,680 mm)
With roof rails
Wheel base 105.1 in (2,670 mm)
11
11-4 Specifications
BK0200500US.book 5
Vehicle weights
Vehicle weights
N01147601914
2.4 liter models 3.0 liter models

Item
Seating capacity 5 persons 7 persons 7 persons
Gross vehicle weight rating 4,795 lb (2,175 kg) 5,005 lb (2,270 kg)
Front 2,535 lb (1,150 kg)
Gross axle weight rating
Rear 2,756 lb (1,250 kg)
With brake 1,500 lb (680 kg) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg)
Total trailer weight
Without brake 1,250 lb (567 kg) 1,400 lb (635 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg) 1,157 lb (525 kg)
Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)
NOTE
Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to Loading cargo on the roof on page 6-10. 11
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants
Specifications 11-5
BK0200500US.book 6
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
N01147701511
Item 2.4 liter models 3.0 liter models

Engine model 4J12 6B31
Engine displacement 144.0 CID (2,360 cm) 182.9 CID (2,998 cm)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-4 60 V-6
Bore 3.46 in (88.0 mm) 3.45 in (87.6 mm)
Stroke 3.82 in (97.0 mm) 3.26 in (82.9 mm)
Compression ratio 10.5
Thermostat valve opening temperature 188.6 F (87.0 C) 179.6 F (82.0 C)
Spark plugs NGK DILKR6D11G DILKR7C11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm) .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-2-3-4-5-6
11
Battery
N01147801293
2.4 litter models 75D23L

3.0 litter models 80D26L
Battery is a 12 volt type.
11-6 Specifications
BK0200500US.book 7
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels

N01147901744
Tire P215/70R16 99H P225/55R18 97H

Size 16 x 6 1/2JJ 16 x 6 1/2J 18 x 7J
Wheel PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)
Offset 1.5 in (38 mm)
PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation holes)
NOTE
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details on the combination used on your vehicle.
These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions described in this owners manual.
Capacity
N01148002068 11
Item Capacity Lubricants
Fuel Front-wheel drive vehicles 16.6 gal (63 L)
Refer to Fuel selection on page 3-2
(approximate) All-wheel drive vehicles 15.8 gal (60 L)
2.4 liter Oil pan 4.5 qt (4.3 L)
Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (star-
models Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L) burst symbol) on the container.
Engine oil
3.0 liter Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L) If these oils are not available, and API classification SN can be
models used.
Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
Automatic transaxle 8.7 qt (8.2 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine ATF - J3
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.5 qt (7.1 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine CVTF - J4
Specifications 11-7
BK0200500US.book 8
Capacity
Item Capacity Lubricants
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classi-
Transfer oil .50 qt (0.47 L)
fication GL-5 SAE 80
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classi-
Differential Rear axle .42 qt (0.4 L)
fication GL-5 SAE 80
Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Engine coolant 2.4 liter models 9.3 qt (8.0 L)
{Includes .69 qt Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant
(0.65 L) in 3.0 liter models 10.6 qt (10.0 L) Premium or equivalent*
reserve tank}
Washer fluid 4.8 qt (4.5 L)
Refer to the Air con-
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ditioning label on HFC-134a
page 11-2.
11
*:similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
11-8 Specifications
BK0200500US.book 1
Alphabetical index
CD player ...................................... 7-15 Hose .............................................. 9-23
Numerics Troubleshooting ............................. 7-45 Pad wear alarm ............................... 5-85
12 V power outlets............................ 5-211 Automatic climate control air conditioner 7-5 Parking brake ................................. 5-52
Pedal ............................................. 5-84
4-wheel drive operation ....................... 5-81 Automatic transaxle............................ 5-60
Pedal free play................................ 9-21
Fluid ..................................... 9-10, 11-7
Power brakes.................................. 5-85
Selector lever operation .................. 5-61
A Selector lever positions ................... 5-64
Service brake.................................. 5-84
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-6 Warning lights and buzzer ............. 5-167
Sports mode................................... 5-65
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-90 Break-in recommendations .................... 5-3
Bulb capacity...................................... 9-30
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) 5-96 B
Air bag .............................................. 4-33 Back-up light
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-9 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 C
Air conditioner Replacement .................................. 9-38 California Perchlorate Materials
Automatic climate control air conditioner. Ball joint, steering linkage seals, drive shaft Requirements ..................................... 3-7
7-5 boots ............................................... 9-23 Capacities .......................................... 11-7
Important air conditioning operating tips.. Battery .............................................. 9-13 Card holder ............................ 5-211, 5-216
7-14 Charging system warning light ....... 5-168 Cargo area cover............................... 5-219
Air purifier ......................................... 7-14 Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-13
All-wheel drive operation .................... 5-81 Disconnection and connection ......... 9-13
Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10 12
During cold weather ....................... 9-13 Cargo room light............................... 5-214
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-43 Specification.................................. 11-6 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
AM/FM radio ..................................... 7-15 Bluetooth 2.0 interface .................... 5-185 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-2
Antenna Bottle holders.................................... 5-219 Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive
Roof antenna .................................. 7-47 vehicles............................................ 5-83
Brake
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-87 Fluid ..................................... 9-12, 11-7 CD player........................................... 7-15
Arm rest............................................... 4-9 Brake assist........................................ 5-86 Certification label ............................... 11-3
Assist grip ........................................ 5-221 Braking Charging system warning light ........... 5-168
Audio Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-87 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-25
AM/FM radio ................................. 7-15 Braking ........................................... 6-5 Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-35
12-1
BK0200500US.book 2
Alphabetical index
Cleaning Bulb capacity.................................. 9-32 Engine hood ......................................... 9-3
Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-40 Dome light (rear)............................... 5-213 Engine switch..................................... 5-16
Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-41 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-32 Exhaust system................................... 9-24
Coat hook ........................................ 5-222 Doors
Consumer information ........................ 10-2 Lock .............................................. 5-32
Power door locks ............................ 5-34
F
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)....
Floor console box ............................. 5-216
5-68 Driving during cold weather.................. 6-5
Fluid .................................... 9-11, 11-7 Floor mat ............................................. 6-3
Driving precaution ............................... 6-2
Selector lever operation................... 5-68 Fluid
Driving, alcohol and drugs .................... 6-2
Selector lever positions ................... 5-71 Automatic transaxle fluid ....... 9-10, 11-7
Sports mode ................................... 5-72 Brake fluid............................ 9-12, 11-7
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-8, 11-7 E Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
ECO mode switch ............................. 5-178 fluid ................................... 9-11, 11-7
Cruise control..................................... 5-92
Engine coolant ........................ 9-8, 11-7
Cup holder ....................................... 5-218 Electric power steering system (EPS) .... 5-89
Engine oil ............................... 9-6, 11-7
Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-184 Rear axle oil.......................... 9-12, 11-7
D Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Transfer oil ........................... 9-11, 11-7
system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-26 Washer fluid ......................... 9-12, 11-7
Daytime running lights
Electronically controlled 4WD system .. 5-75 Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-7
12 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Replacement ......................... 9-33, 9-36 Emission-control system maintenance ... 9-22 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-184 Engine 5-107
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door Compartment................................... 9-5 Free-hand advanced security transmitter
windows) .................................. 7-9, 7-13 Coolant ................................... 9-8, 11-7 (F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-12
Hood............................................... 9-3 Front fog lights
Digital clock
Malfunction indicator light............. 5-167 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Time setting ................................... 7-44
MIVEC ................................. 5-24, 5-60 Indicators..................................... 5-166
Dimensions ........................................ 11-4 Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-6, 11-7 Replacement .................................. 9-36
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-174 Overheating..................................... 8-4 Switch ......................................... 5-178
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-23 Serial number ................................. 11-2
Front side-marker lights
Specification................................... 11-6
Dome light (front)/Reading lights....... 5-212 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
12-2
BK0200500US.book 3
Alphabetical index
Replacement .................................. 9-34 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Front turn signal light Dimmer........................................ 5-174 J
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Headlight flasher ........................... 5-174 Jack ..................................................... 8-5
Replacement .................................. 9-36 Replacement .......................... 9-33, 9-34 Storage ............................................ 8-5
Switch.......................................... 5-171
Fuel Jump-starting the engine........................ 8-2
Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3 High beam indicator .......................... 5-166
Fuel economy................................... 6-2 High-mounted stop light
Fuel hoses ...................................... 9-22 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
K
Fuel selection ................................... 3-2 Keyless entry system.................... 5-7, 5-28
Hill start assist ................................... 5-85
Tank capacity ................................. 11-7 Keys .................................................... 5-3
Hood lock release mechanism and safety
Fuses ................................................. 9-25 catch ............................................... 9-24
Fusible links....................................... 9-25 Horn switch ...................................... 5-184 L
Labeling............................................. 11-2
G I Lane Departure Warning System (LDW) .....
General maintenance........................... 9-23 5-111
If the vehicle breaks down..................... 8-2
General vehicle data............................ 11-4 License plate light
Ignition switch ................................... 5-56
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6 Important facts to know in case of an accident Replacement................................... 9-38
Glove compartment........................... 5-215 10-4
Liftgate .............................................. 5-35
12
Glove compartment light Indicators .................... 5-148, 5-165, 5-166
Link System ..................................... 5-185
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Information screen display ................. 5-149
Loading information.............................. 6-6
Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-54
H Lubricants .......................................... 11-7
Inspection and maintenance following rough
Luggage floor box............................. 5-216
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-177 road operation .................................. 5-83
Luggage hooks ................................. 5-222
Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-166 Instrument cluster.............................. 5-120
Head restraints.................................... 4-10 Interior lights .................................... 5-212
Headlight leveling switch .................. 5-176
M
MIVEC engine .......................... 5-24, 5-60
Headlights
Modification of your vehicle .................. 3-5
12-3
BK0200500US.book 4
Alphabetical index
Multi information display - Type 1 ..... 5-121 Seat belt............................................. 4-17
Multi information display - Type 2 ..... 5-140 R Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor. 4-23
Radiator cap ........................................ 9-9 Child restraint systems .................... 4-25
Front passenger seat belt warning light .....
O Radio ................................................. 7-15
4-22
General information about your radio 7-48
Octane rating........................................ 3-2 Maintenance and inspection............. 4-33
Reading lights Seat belt extender ........................... 4-24
Oil
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-32 Seat belt force limitter..................... 4-25
Engine oil ...................................... 11-7
Rear axle oil................................... 11-7 Rear axle oil .............................. 9-12, 11-7 Seat belt pre-tensioners ................... 4-24
Transfer oil .................................... 11-7 Rear combination lights Seat belt use during pregnancy......... 4-24
Operation under adverse driving conditions... Bulb capacity.................................. 9-30 Seats.................................................... 4-2
8-16 Replacement................................... 9-37 Arm rest .......................................... 4-9
Rear side-marker lights Front seats ....................................... 4-4
Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-55 Head restraints ............................... 4-10
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-30
Overheating ......................................... 8-4 Heated seat ...................................... 4-7
Rear turn signal light Making a cargo area........................ 4-12
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-30 Making a flat seat ........................... 4-16
P Replacement................................... 9-37 Seat arrangement .............................. 4-3
Parking ................................................ 6-6 Rear-view camera ............................. 5-118 Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-4
Parking brake ................................. 5-52 Second row seats .............................. 4-8
12 Parking lights
Rearview mirror
Third row seats............................... 4-10
Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-54
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-55 Service brake...................................... 5-84
Replacement .................................. 9-35
Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-29 Service precautions ............................... 9-2
Polishing............................................ 9-42
Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-19 Side turn-signal light
Power brakes...................................... 5-85 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2
Power liftgate..................................... 5-37 Snow tires .......................................... 9-20
Roof antenna ...................................... 7-47
Power outlet ..................................... 5-211 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-22
Power windows .................................. 5-48 S Starting the engine ..................... 5-23, 5-58
Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6 Steering
Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) ...... 5-78
12-4
BK0200500US.book 5
Alphabetical index
5-53 Replacing tires and wheels .............. 9-19 Vehicle dimensions ............................. 11-4
Wheel lock............................ 5-22, 5-58 Rotation ........................................ 9-20 Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2
Stop lights Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-7
Vehicle preparation before driving.......... 6-4
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Snow tires ..................................... 9-20
Tire and loading information placard 11-3 Vehicle weights .................................. 11-5
Replacement .................................. 9-37
Tire chains..................................... 9-21 Vents ................................................... 7-2
Storage spaces .................................. 5-215
To change a tire................................ 8-6
Sun visors ........................................ 5-210 Tread wear indicator....................... 9-19
Sunroof.............................................. 5-50
W
Tire pressure monitoring system ......... 5-114
Warning lights .................................. 5-167
Super-all wheel control (S-AWC) Tools................................................... 8-6
S-AWC control mode display .......... 5-79 Storage............................................ 8-5 Washer
S-AWC control mode switch ........... 5-79 Fluid..................................... 9-12, 11-7
Towing.............................................. 8-14 Rear window washer ..................... 5-183
S-AWC operation display ................ 5-80
Trailer towing .................................... 6-11 Switch ......................................... 5-182
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-33
How the Supplemental Restraint System Transfer oil ................................ 9-11, 11-7 Washing............................................. 9-41
works .......................................... 4-36 Turn signal light Waxing .............................................. 9-42
Maintenance service........................ 4-48 Indicators ..................................... 5-166 Weights ............................................. 11-5
Lever ........................................... 5-176
Wheel
T Covers ........................................... 8-13
U Specification .................................. 11-7
12
Tail light
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 USB input terminal............................ 5-207 Wiper
Replacement .................................. 9-37 How to connect a USB memory device .... Rear window wiper ....................... 5-183
Tank capacity ..................................... 11-7 5-207 Switch ......................................... 5-179
How to connect an iPod ................. 5-208 Wiper blades .................................. 9-21
Theft-alarm system ............................. 5-44
Time Setting....................................... 7-44
V
Timing belt ........................................ 9-24
Vanity mirror .................................... 5-210
Tire ................................................... 9-14
Inflation pressure ............................ 9-18 Vanity mirror lights
Maintenance................................... 9-19 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Quality grading............................... 10-2 Vehicle care precautions ..................... 9-39
12-5
BK0200500US.book 6
BK0200500US.book 9
MMNA_LastPage.fm 1
How to calculate your gasoline mileage
You can calculate your miles-per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre 3. Refill the fuel tank. Record the odometer mileage again,
by using the following process: as well as the gallons/litres of fuel used.
4. Subtract the first mileage number from the second number
1. Fill your vehicles fuel tank and record the odometer mile- to know how many miles/kilometers were driven. Divide
age. the number of miles/kilometers driven by the number of
2. Drive your vehicle as you normally do. gallons/litres of fuel used. This is your approximate miles-
per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre.
Gas mileage record Gas mileage record

Cost Per Miles Per Gallon/Kilo- Cost Per Miles Per Gallon/Kilo-
Gallons Gallons
Cost meters Per Litre Cost meters Per Litre
Date Odometer /Litres Gallon This Fill (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome- Date Odometer /Litres Gallon This Fill (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome-
This Fill /Litre This Fill /Litre
ters/Litres) ters/Litres)
BK0200500US.book 1
N09348201045
NOTE
Name of Owner Date of Purchase
Address of Owner Model of Vehicle
Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number
Maintenance record
Kilometers
Service Performed Date Inspection and Maintenance Item
Miles

2014 Mitsubishi Outlander 36838 PDF

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

2014 Mitsubishi Outlander 36838 PDF

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

BK0200500US.

Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

2013 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Japan

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

Combination headlights and dimmer

Forward collision mitigation

Instruments and controls

Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-184

Glove compartment P.5-215

Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors switch P.5-55

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-23 Power window switch

Dome light (rear) P.5-213

Inside rear-view mirror

Third row seat (7 persons) Front seat P.4-4

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag

Second row seat P.4-8

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain

Sunroof switch (if so equipped)

Assist grips P.5-221

Cargo area cover (if so equipped)

Head restraints P.4-10

Arm rest P.4-9

Luggage hooks P.5-222

Luggage floor box P.5-216

Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-50

Fuel tank filler P.3-3

Windshield wipers P.5-179

Outside rear-view mirrors P.5-55

Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-178, 9-30, 9-36

Antenna P.7-47 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-7, 5-28

License plate lights

Rear side-marker lights P.5-171, 9-30

Rear turn signal lights P.5-176, 9-30, 9-37

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

2-2 Quick index

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

SRS warning light

Quick index 2-3

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Will not turn from ACC to OFF or LOCK.

The engine does not start when

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Quick index 2-5

If this problem occurs...

The windows are fogged up.

Push the defogger switch to change to the position. P. 7-9

The engine does not start.

2-6 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

The engine is overheated.

Steam comes out of the engine

Quick index 2-7

If this problem occurs...